Hp Wireless Switch Manager Software Command Reference Guide Cmdref

2015-01-05

: Hp Hp-Wireless-Switch-Manager-Software-Command-Reference-Guide-156195 hp-wireless-switch-manager-software-command-reference-guide-156195 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 616 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

http://www.3com.com/
Part No. DUA1009-5CAA01
Published June 2005
Wireless LAN Mobility System
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Command Reference
3CRWXR10095A, 3CRWX120695A, 3CRWX440095A
3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive
Marlborough, MA USA
01752-3064
Copyright © 2004, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced
in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or
adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time
to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either
implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms or conditions of
merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license
agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hard copy documentation, or on the
removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy,
please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are
provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense.
Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or
as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are
provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights
only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable.
You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or
documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may
not be registered in other countries.
3Com is a registered trademark of 3Com Corporation. The 3Com logo is a trademark of 3Com Corporation.
Mobility Domain, Mobility Point, Mobility Profile, Mobility System, Mobility System Software, MP, MSS, and
SentrySweep are trademarks of Trapeze Networks, Inc.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows XP,
and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are
associated.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we
are committed to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental
standards. Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labelled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.
End of Life Statement
3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.
Regulated Materials Statement
3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.
Environmental Statement about the Documentation
The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable, managed forests; it is
fully biodegradable and recyclable, and is completely chlorine-free. The varnish is environmentally-friendly, and
the inks are vegetable-based with a low heavy-metal content.
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions 19
Documentation 20
Documentation Comments 21
1USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
Overview 23
CLI Conventions 24
Command Prompts 24
Syntax Notation 24
Text Entry Conventions and Allowed Characters 25
MAC Address Notation 25
IP Address and Mask Notation 26
User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs 26
Port Lists 28
Virtual LAN Identification 29
Command-Line Editing 29
Keyboard Shortcuts 29
History Buffer 30
Tabs 30
Single-Asterisk (*) Wildcard Character 30
Double-Asterisk (**) Wildcard Characters 30
Using CLI Help 31
Understanding Command Descriptions 32
2ACCESS COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 33
disable 33
enable 34
quit 34
set enablepass 35
3SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 37
clear banner motd 38
clear history 38
clear prompt 39
clear system 39
display banner motd 40
display base-information 41
display license 42
display system 42
help 45
history 46
set auto-config 46
set banner motd 49
set confirm 50
set length 51
set license 52
set prompt 53
set system contact 54
set system countrycode 54
set system ip-address 57
set system location 58
set system name 58
4PORT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 61
clear dap 62
clear port counters 63
clear port-group 63
clear port name 64
clear port preference 64
clear port type 65
display port counters 66
display port-group 67
display port poe 68
display port preference 69
display port status 70
monitor port counters 72
reset port 77
set dap 77
set port 80
set port-group 81
set port name 82
set port negotiation 83
set port poe 84
set port preference 85
set port speed 85
set port trap 86
set port type ap 87
set port type wired-auth 91
5VLAN COMMANDS
Commands by usage 95
clear fdb 96
clear vlan 97
display fdb 98
display fdb agingtime 101
display fdb count 101
display roaming station 102
display roaming vlan 104
display tunnel 105
display vlan config 106
set fdb 107
set fdb agingtime 108
set vlan name 109
set vlan port 110
set vlan tunnel-affinity 111
6IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 113
clear interface 115
clear ip alias 116
clear ip dns domain 117
clear ip dns server 117
clear ip route 118
clear ip telnet 119
clear ntp server 119
clear ntp update-interval 120
clear snmp community 121
clear snmp notify target 121
clear snmp profile 122
clear snmp trap receiver 122
clear snmp usm 122
clear summertime 123
clear system ip-address 124
clear timezone 124
display arp 125
display interface 126
display ip alias 127
display ip dns 128
display ip https 129
display ip route 131
display ip telnet 133
display ntp 134
display snmp configuration 136
display summertime 138
display timedate 138
display timezone 139
ping 140
set arp 141
set arp agingtime 142
set interface 143
set interface dhcp-client 144
set interface dhcp-server 145
set interface status 146
set ip alias 147
set ip dns 147
set ip dns domain 148
set ip dns server 149
set ip https server 150
set ip route 150
set ip snmp server 152
set ip ssh 153
set ip ssh absolute-timeout 154
set ip ssh idle-timeout 155
set ip ssh server 155
set ip telnet 156
set ip telnet server 157
set ntp 158
set ntp server 158
set ntp update-interval 159
set snmp community 160
set snmp notify target 162
set snmp profile 167
set snmp protocol 172
set snmp security 173
set snmp trap 174
set snmp trap receiver 174
set snmp usm 174
set summertime 177
set system ip-address 179
set timedate 180
set timezone 181
display dhcp-client 182
display dhcp-server 183
display snmp community 186
display snmp counters 187
display snmp notify profile 188
display snmp notify target 189
display snmp status 191
display snmp usm 193
telnet 195
traceroute 196
7AAA COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 199
clear accounting 201
clear authentication admin 202
clear authentication console 203
clear authentication dot1x 204
clear authentication last-resort 205
clear authentication mac 205
clear authentication proxy 206
clear authentication web 207
clear location policy 208
clear mac-user 209
clear mac-user attr 209
clear mac-user group 210
clear mac-usergroup 211
clear mac-usergroup attr 212
clear mobility-profile 213
clear user 213
clear user attr 214
clear user group 215
clear usergroup 215
clear usergroup attr 216
display aaa 217
display accounting statistics 220
display location policy 222
display mobility-profile 222
set accounting {admin | console} 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} 224
set authentication admin 226
set authentication console 228
set authentication dot1x 230
set authentication last-resort 234
set authentication mac 236
set authentication proxy 238
set authentication web 239
set location policy 241
set mac-user 245
set mac-user attr 246
set mac-usergroup attr 252
set mobility-profile 253
set mobility-profile mode 255
set user 256
set user attr 257
set user group 258
set usergroup 259
set web-aaa 260
8MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 261
clear mobility-domain 262
clear mobility-domain member 262
display mobility-domain config 263
display mobility-domain status 263
set mobility-domain member 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 266
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name 267
9MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
MAP Access Point Commands by Usage 269
clear {ap | dap} radio 272
clear radio-profile 274
clear service-profile 275
clear service-profile 276
display {ap | dap} config 277
display {ap | dap} counters 280
display {ap | dap} qos-stats 282
display {ap | dap} etherstats 284
display {ap | dap} group 285
display {ap | dap} status 287
display auto-tune attributes 290
display auto-tune neighbors 292
display dap connection 294
display dap global 295
display dap unconfigured 297
display radio-profile 298
display service-profile 302
reset {ap | dap} 305
set dap auto 306
set dap auto mode 308
set dap auto radiotype 309
set {ap | dap} bias 310
set {ap | dap} blink 311
set dap fingerprint 312
set {ap | dap} group 313
set {ap | dap} name 315
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype 315
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-retransmissions 318
set {ap | dap} radio channel 320
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile 324
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power 325
set dap security 326
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware 328
set radio-profile 11g-only 329
set radio-profile active-scan 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval 335
set radio-profile beacon-interval 336
set radio-profile countermeasures 337
set radio-profile dtim-interval 338
set radio-profile frag-threshold 339
set radio-profile long-retry 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime 341
set radio-profile mode 342
set radio-profile preamble-length 345
set radio-profile rts-threshold 346
set radio-profile service-profile 346
set radio-profile short-retry 350
set radio-profile wmm 350
set service-profile auth-dot1x 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru 352
set service-profile auth-psk 354
set service-profile beacon 355
set service-profile cipher-ccmp 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 359
set service-profile psk-phrase 360
set service-profile psk-raw 361
set service-profile rsn-ie 362
set service-profile shared-key-auth 363
set service-profile ssid-name 363
set service-profile ssid-type 364
set service-profile tkip-mc-time 365
set service-profile web-aaa-form 366
set service-profile wep active-multicast-index 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast-index 368
set service-profile wep key-index 369
set service-profile wpa-ie 370
10 STP COMMANDS
STP Commands by Usage 371
clear spantree portcost 372
clear spantree portpri 373
clear spantree portvlancost 373
clear spantree portvlanpri 374
clear spantree statistics 375
display spantree 376
display spantree backbonefast 378
display spantree blockedports 379
display spantree portfast 380
display spantree portvlancost 381
display spantree statistics 381
display spantree uplinkfast 387
set spantree 388
set spantree backbonefast 389
set spantree fwddelay 390
set spantree hello 390
set spantree maxage 391
set spantree portcost 392
set spantree portfast 393
set spantree portpri 394
set spantree portvlancost 395
set spantree portvlanpri 396
set spantree priority 397
set spantree uplinkfast 397
11 IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Commands by usage 399
clear igmp statistics 400
display igmp 400
display igmp mrouter 404
display igmp querier 405
display igmp receiver-table 407
display igmp statistics 409
set igmp 411
set igmp lmqi 412
set igmp mrouter 413
set igmp mrsol 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi 414
set igmp oqi 415
set igmp proxy-report 416
set igmp qi 417
set igmp qri 418
set igmp querier 419
set igmp receiver 419
set igmp rv 420
12 SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Security ACL Commands by Usage 423
clear security acl 424
clear security acl map 425
commit security acl 427
display security acl dscp 428
display security acl 429
display security acl hits 430
display security acl info 431
display security acl map 432
display security acl resource-usage 433
hit-sample-rate 437
rollback security acl 438
set security acl 439
set security acl map 444
13 CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 447
crypto ca-certificate 448
crypto certificate 449
crypto generate key 451
crypto generate request 452
crypto generate self-signed 454
crypto otp 456
crypto pkcs12 457
display crypto ca-certificate 459
display crypto certificate 460
display crypto key ssh 461
14 RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 463
clear radius 464
clear radius client system-ip 465
clear radius proxy client 466
clear radius proxy port 466
clear radius server 467
clear server group 467
set radius 468
set radius client system-ip 469
set radius proxy client 470
set radius proxy port 471
set radius server 472
set server group 474
set server group load-balance 475
15 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 477
clear dot1x bonded-period 478
clear dot1x max-req 479
clear dot1x port-control 479
clear dot1x quiet-period 480
clear dot1x reauth-max 481
clear dot1x reauth-period 481
clear dot1x timeout auth-server 482
clear dot1x timeout supplicant 482
clear dot1x tx-period 483
display dot1x 483
set dot1x authcontrol 486
set dot1x bonded-period 487
set dot1x key-tx 488
set dot1x max-req 489
set dot1x port-control 490
set dot1x quiet-period 491
set dot1x reauth 491
set dot1x reauth-max 492
set dot1x reauth-period 493
set dot1x timeout auth-server 493
set dot1x timeout supplicant 494
set dot1x tx-period 494
set dot1x wep-rekey 495
set dot1x wep-rekey-period 496
16 SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 497
clear sessions 497
clear sessions network 498
display sessions 500
display sessions network 503
17 RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 511
clear rfdetect 512
clear rfdetect attack-list 512
clear rfdetect black-list 513
clear rfdetect countermeasures mac 513
clear rfdetect ignore 513
clear rfdetect ssid-list 514
clear rfdetect vendor-list 515
display rfdetect counters 515
display rfdetect countermeasures 517
display rfdetect data 518
display rfdetect ignore 520
display rfdetect mobility-domain 521
display rfdetect ssid-list 525
display rfdetect vendor-list 525
display rfdetect visible 526
set rfdetect active-scan 528
set rfdetect attack-list 528
set rfdetect black-list 529
set rf detect countermeasures 530
set rfdetect countermeasures mac 530
set rfdetect ignore 530
set rfdetect log 531
set rfdetect signature 532
set rfdetect ssid-list 532
set rfdetect vendor-list 533
display rfdetect attack-list 534
display rfdetect black-list 535
display rfdetect clients 535
18 FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 539
backup 540
clear boot config 541
copy 542
delete 544
dir 545
display boot 547
display config 548
display version 549
load config 551
mkdir 553
reset system 554
restore 555
rmdir 556
save config 557
set boot configuration-file 558
set boot partition 559
19 TRACE COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 561
clear log trace 562
clear trace 562
display trace 563
save trace 564
set trace authentication 564
set trace authorization 565
set trace dot1x 566
set trace sm 567
SNOOP COMMANDS
clear snoop 570
clear snoop map 570
set snoop 571
set snoop map 574
set snoop mode 575
display snoop 576
display snoop info 577
display snoop map 577
display snoop stats 578
21 SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
Commands by Usage 581
clear log 581
display log buffer 582
display log config 584
display log trace 585
set log 586
set log trace mbytes 589
22 BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Boot Prompt Commands by Usage 591
autoboot 592
boot 593
change 595
create 596
delete 597
diag 598
dir 598
display 599
fver 601
help 602
ls 602
next 603
reset 604
test 605
version 606
AOBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT
Register Your Product 607
Purchase Value-Added Services 607
Troubleshoot Online 608
Access Software Downloads 608
Telephone Technical Support and Repair 608
Contact Us 609
INDEX
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This command reference explains Mobility System Software (MSS™)
command line interface (CLI) that you enter on a 3Com WXR100 Remote
Office Wireless LAN Switch, WX1200 Wireless Switch, or WX4400
Wireless LAN Controller to configure and manage the Mobility System™
wireless LAN (WLAN).
Read this reference if you are a network administrator responsible for
managing WXR100, WX1200, or WX4400 wireless switches and their
Managed Access Points (MAPs) in a network.
If release notes are shipped with your product and the information there
differs from the information in this guide, follow the instructions in the
release notes.
Most user guides and release notes are available in Adobe Acrobat
Reader Portable Document Format (PDF) or HTML on the 3Com
World Wide Web site:
http://www.3com.com/
Conventions Table 1 and Table 2 list conventions that are used throughout this guide.
Table 1 Notice Icons
Icon Notice Type Description
Information note Information that describes important features or
instructions
Caution Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or
potential damage to an application, system, or device
20 ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This manual uses the following text and syntax conventions:
Documentation The MSS documentation set includes the following documents.
Wireless LAN Switch Manager (3WXM) Release Notes
These notes provide information about the system software release,
including new features and bug fixes.
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Release Notes
These notes provide information about the system software release,
including new features and bug fixes.
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Quick Start Guide
This guide provides instructions for performing basic setup of secure
(802.1X) and guest (WebAAA™) access, for configuring a Mobility
Domain for roaming, and for accessing a sample network plan in
3WXM for advanced configuration and management.
Table 2 Text Conventions
Convention Description
Monospace text Sets off command syntax or sample commands and system
responses.
Bold text Highlights commands that you enter or items you select.
Italic text Designates command variables that you replace with
appropriate values, or highlights publication titles or words
requiring special emphasis.
[ ] (square brackets) Enclose optional parameters in command syntax.
{ } (curly brackets) Enclose mandatory parameters in command syntax.
| (vertical bar) Separates mutually exclusive options in command syntax.
Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key
names are linked with a plus sign (+). Example:
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del
Words in italics Italics are used to:
Emphasize a point.
Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in the
text.
Highlight an example string, such as a username or SSID.
Documentation Comments 21
Wireless LAN Switch Manager Reference Manual
This manual shows you how to plan, configure, deploy, and manage a
Mobility System wireless LAN (WLAN) using the 3Com Wireless LAN
Switch Manager (3WXM).
Wireless LAN Switch Manager User’s Guide
This guide shows you how to plan, configure, deploy, and manage a
Mobility System wireless LAN (WLAN) using the 3Com Wireless LAN
Switch Manager (3WXM). It contains information about
recommended system requirements you should meet for optimum
3WXM performance, installing 3WXM client and 3WXM Services
software, and an introduction to using the 3WXM interface.
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Installation and Basic
Configuration Guide
This guide provides instructions and specifications for installing a WX
wireless switch in a Mobility System WLAN, and basic instructions for
deploying a secure IEEE 802.11 wireless service.
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide
This guide provides instructions for configuring and managing the
system through the Mobility System Software (MSS) CLI.
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Command Reference
This reference provides syntax information for all MSS commands
supported on WX switches.
Documentation
Comments
Your suggestions are very important to us. They will help make our
documentation more useful to you. Please e-mail comments about this
document to 3Com at:
pddtechpubs_comments@3com.com
Please include the following information when contacting us:
Document title
Document part number and revision (on the title page)
Page number (if appropriate)
22 ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Example:
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide
Part number 730-9502-0071, Revision B
Page 25
Please note that we can only respond to comments and questions about
3Com product documentation at this e-mail address. Questions related to
Technical Support or sales should be directed in the first instance to your
network supplier.
1USING THE COMMAND-LINE
INTERFACE
This chapter discusses the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager (3WXM)
command-line interface (CLI). Described are the CLI conventions (see “CLI
Conventions” on page 24), editing on the command line (see
“Command-Line Editing” on page 29), using the CLI help feature (see
“Using CLI Help” on page 31), and information about the command
descriptions in this reference (see “Understanding Command
Descriptions” on page 32).
Overview Mobility System Software (MSS) operates a 3Com Mobility System
wireless LAN (WLAN) consisting of 3Com Wireless Switch Manager
(3WXM) software and 3Com Wireless LAN Switch or 3Com Wireless LAN
Controller (WX switch) and 3Com Wireless LAN Managed Access Point
(MAP) hardware. There is a command-line interface (CLI) on the WX
switch that you can use to configure and manage the WX and its
attached access points.
You configure the wireless LAN switches and access points primarily with
set, clear, and display commands. Use set commands to change
parameters. Use clear commands to reset parameters to their defaults. In
many cases, you can overwrite a parameter with another set command.
Use display commands to show the current configuration and monitor
the status of network operations.
The wireless LAN switches support two connection modes:
Administrative access mode, which enables the network administrator
to connect to the WX switch and configure the network
Network access mode, which enables network users to connect
through the WX switch to access the network
24 CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
CLI Conventions Be aware of the following MSS CLI conventions for command entry:
“Command Prompts” on page 24
“Syntax Notation” on page 24
“Text Entry Conventions and Allowed Characters” on page 25
“User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26
“Port Lists” on page 28
“Virtual LAN Identification” on page 29
Command Prompts By default, the MSS CLI provides the following prompt for restricted
users. The mmmm portion shows the wireless LAN switch model number
(for example, 1200) and the aabbcc portion shows the last three octets of
the MAC address of the switch.
WXmmmm-aabbcc>
After you become enabled as an administrative user by typing enable
and supplying a suitable password, MSS displays the following prompt:
WXmmmm-aabbcc#
For information about changing the CLI prompt on a wireless LAN switch,
see “set prompt” on page 53.
Syntax Notation The MSS CLI uses standard syntax notation:
Bold monospace font identifies the command and keywords you must
type. For example:
set enablepass
Italics indicate a placeholder for a value. For example, you replace
vlan-id in the following command with a virtual LAN (VLAN) ID:
clear interface vlan-id ip
Curly brackets ({}) indicate a mandatory parameter, and square
brackets ([]) indicate an optional parameter. For example, you must
enter dynamic or port and a port list in the following command, but
a VLAN ID is optional:
clear fdb {dynamic | port port-list} [vlan vlan-id]
CLI Conventions 25
A vertical bar (|) separates mutually exclusive options within a list of
possibilities. For example, you enter either enable or disable, not
both, in the following command:
set port {enable | disable} port-list
Text Entry
Conventions and
Allowed Characters
Unless otherwise indicated, the MSS CLI accepts standard ASCII
alphanumeric characters, except for tabs and spaces, and is
case-insensitive.
The CLI has specific notation requirements for MAC addresses, IP
addresses, and masks, and allows you to group usernames, MAC
addresses, virtual LAN (VLAN) names, and ports in a single command.
3Com recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for VLANs or access control lists (ACLs). For example, do
not configure two separate VLANs with the names red and RED.
The CLI does not support the use of special characters including the
following in any named elements such as SSIDs and VLANs: ampersand
(&), angle brackets (< >), number sign (#), question mark (?), or quotation
marks (“”).
In addition, the CLI does not support the use of international characters
such as the accented É in DÉCOR.
MAC Address
Notation
MSS displays MAC addresses in hexadecimal numbers with a colon (:)
delimiter between bytes — for example, 00:01:02:1a:00:01. You can
enter MAC addresses with either hyphen (-) or colon (:) delimiters, but
colons are preferred.
For shortcuts:
You can exclude leading zeros when typing a MAC address. MSS
displays of MAC addresses include all leading zeros.
In some specified commands, you can use the single-asterisk (*)
wildcard character to represent from 1 byte to 5 bytes of a MAC
address. (For more information, see “MAC Address Globs” on
page 27.)
26 CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
IP Address and Mask
Notation
MSS displays IP addresses in dotted decimal notation — for example,
192.168.1.111. MSS makes use of both subnet masks and wildcard
masks.
Subnet Masks
Unless otherwise noted, use classless interdomain routing (CIDR) format
to express subnet masks — for example, 192.168.1.112/24. You indicate
the subnet mask with a forward slash (/) and specify the number of bits in
the mask.
Wildcard Masks
Security access control lists (ACLs) use source and destination IP addresses
and wildcard masks to determine whether the wireless LAN switch filters
or forwards IP packets. Matching packets are either permitted or denied
network access. The ACL checks the bits in IP addresses that correspond
to any 0s (zeros) in the mask, but does not check the bits that correspond
to 1s (ones) in the mask. You specify the wildcard mask in dotted decimal
notation.
For example, the address 10.0.0.0 and mask 0.255.255.255 match all IP
addresses that begin with 10 in the first octet.
User Globs, MAC
Address Globs, and
VLAN Globs
Name “globbing” is a way of using a wildcard pattern to expand a single
element into a list of elements that match the pattern. MSS accepts user
globs, MAC address globs, and VLAN globs. The order in which globs
appear in the configuration is important, because once a glob is matched,
processing stops on the list of globs.
User Globs
A user glob is shorthand method for matching an authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) command to either a single user or
a set of users.
A user glob can be up to 80 characters long and cannot contain spaces or
tabs. The double-asterisk (**) wildcard characters with no delimiter
characters match all usernames. The single-asterisk (*) wildcard character
matches any number of characters up to, but not including, a delimiter
character in the glob. Valid user glob delimiter characters are the at (@)
sign and the period (.).
CLI Conventions 27
Table 3 gives examples of user globs.
MAC Address Globs
A media access control (MAC) address glob is a similar method for
matching some authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) and
forwarding database (FDB) commands to one or more 6-byte MAC
addresses. In a MAC address glob, you can use a single asterisk (*) as a
wildcard to match all MAC addresses, or as follows to match from 1 byte
to 5 bytes of the MAC address:
00:*
00:01:*
00:01:02:*
00:01:02:03:*
00:01:02:03:04:*
For example, the MAC address glob 02:06:8c* represents all MAC
addresses starting with 02:06:8c. Specifying only the first 3 bytes of a
MAC address allows you to apply commands to MAC addresses based on
an organizationally unique identity (OUI).
Table 3 User Globs
User Glob User(s) Designated
jose@example.com User jose at example.com
*@example.com All users at example.com whose usernames do not
contain periods — for example, jose@example.com
and tamara@example.com, but not
nin.wong@example.com, because nin.wong
contains a period
*@marketing.example.com All marketing users at example.com whose
usernames do not contain periods
*.*@marketing.example.com All marketing users at example.com whose
usernames contain periods
*All users with usernames that have no delimiters
EXAMPLE\* All users in the Windows Domain EXAMPLE with
usernames that have no delimiters
EXAMPLE\*.* All users in the Windows Domain EXAMPLE whose
usernames contain periods
** All users
28 CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
VLAN Globs
A VLAN glob is a method for matching one of a set of local rules on an
wireless LAN switch, known as the location policy, to one or more users.
MSS compares the VLAN glob, which can optionally contain wildcard
characters, against the VLAN-Name attribute returned by AAA, to
determine whether to apply the rule.
To match all VLANs, use the double-asterisk (**) wildcard characters with
no delimiters. To match any number of characters up to, but not
including, a delimiter character in the glob, use the single-asterisk (*)
wildcard. Valid VLAN glob delimiter characters are the at (@) sign and the
period (.).
For example, the VLAN glob bldg4.* matches bldg4.security and bldg4.hr
and all other VLAN names with bldg4. at the beginning.
Matching Order for Globs
In general, the order in which you enter AAA commands determines the
order in which MSS matches the user, MAC address, or VLAN to a glob.
To verify the order, view the output of the display aaa or display config
command. MSS checks globs that appear higher in the list before items
lower in the list and uses the first successful match.
Port Lists The physical Ethernet ports on a WX switch can be set for connection to
MAP access points, authenticated wired users, or the network backbone.
You can include a single port or multiple ports in one MSS CLI command
by using the appropriate list format.
The ports on a WX switch are numbered 1 and 2 (for the 3Com Remote
Office Wireless LAN Switch WXR100), 1 through 4 (for the 3Com
Wireless LAN Controller WX4400), and 1 through 8 (for the 3Com
Wireless Lan Switch WX1200). No port 0 exists on the WX switch. You
can include a single port or multiple ports in a command that includes
port port-list. Use one of the following formats for port-list:
A single port number. For example:
WX1200# set port enable 6
A comma-separated list of port numbers, with no spaces. For
example:
WX1200# display port poe 1,2,4
Command-Line Editing 29
A hyphen-separated range of port numbers, with no spaces. For
example:
WX1200# reset port 1-3
Any combination of single numbers, lists, and ranges. Hyphens take
precedence over commas. For example:
WX1200# display port status 1-3,6
Virtual LAN
Identification
The names of virtual LANs (VLANs), which are used in Mobility Domain™
communications, are set by you and can be changed. In contrast, VLAN
ID numbers, which the wireless LAN uses locally, are determined when
the VLAN is first configured and cannot be changed. Unless otherwise
indicated, you can refer to a VLAN by either its VLAN name or its VLAN
number. CLI set and display commands use a VLAN’s name or number
to uniquely identify the VLAN within the WX.
Command-Line
Editing
MSS editing functions are similar to those of many other network
operating systems.
Keyboard Shortcuts The following table lists the keyboard shortcuts for entering and editing
CLI commands.
Table 4 Keyboard Shortcuts
Keyboard Shortcut(s) Function
Ctrl+A Jumps to the first character of the command line.
Ctrl+B or Left Arrow key Moves the cursor back one character.
Ctrl+C Escapes and terminates prompts and tasks.
Ctrl+D Deletes the character at the cursor.
Ctrl+E Jumps to the end of the current command line.
Ctrl+F or Right Arrow key Moves the cursor forward one character.
Ctrl+K Deletes from the cursor to the end of the command
line.
Ctrl+L or Ctrl+R Repeats the current command line on a new line.
Ctrl+N or Down Arrow key Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl+P or Up Arrow key Enters the previous command line in the history
buffer.
30 CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
History Buffer The history buffer stores the last 63 commands you entered during a
terminal session. You can use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to
select a command that you want to repeat from the history buffer.
Tabs The MSS CLI uses the Tab key for command completion. You can type
the first few characters of a command and press the Tab key to show the
command(s) that begin with those characters. For example:
WX1200# display i <Tab>
ifm display interfaces maintained by the interface
manager
igmp display igmp information
interface display interfaces
ip display ip information
Single-Asterisk (*)
Wildcard Character
You can use the single-asterisk (*) wildcard character in globbing. (For
details, see “User Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on
page 26.)
Double-Asterisk (**)
Wildcard Characters
The double-asterisk (**) wildcard character matches all usernames. For
details, see “User Globs” on page 26.
Ctrl+U or Ctrl+X Deletes characters from the cursor to the beginning
of the command line.
Ctrl+W Deletes the last word typed.
Esc B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc D Deletes characters from the cursor forward to the
end of the word.
Delete key or Backspace key Erases mistake made during command entry. Reenter
the command after using this key.
Table 4 Keyboard Shortcuts (continued)
Keyboard Shortcut(s) Function
Using CLI Help 31
Using CLI Help The CLI provides online help. To see the full range of commands available
at your access level, type the help command. For example:
WX1200# help
Commands:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
clear Clear, use 'clear help' for more information
commit Commit the content of the ACL table
copy Copy from filename (or url) to filename (or url)
crypto Crypto, use 'crypto help' for more information
delete Delete url
dir Show list of files on flash device
disable Disable privileged mode
display Display, use 'display help' for more information
exit Exit from the Admin session
help Show this help screen
history Show contents of history substitution buffer
hit-sample-rate Set NP hit-counter sample rate
load Load, use 'load help' for more information
logout Exit from the Admin session
monitor Monitor, use 'monitor help' for more information
ping Send echo packets to hosts
quit Exit from the Admin session
reset Reset, use 'reset help' for more information
rollback Remove changes to the edited ACL table
save Save the running configuration to persistent storage
set Set, use 'set help' for more information
telnet telnet IP address [server port]
traceroute Print the route packets take to network host
For more information on help, see “help” on page 45.
To see a subset of the online help, type the command for which you want
more information. For example, to show all the commands that begin
with the letter i, type the following command:
WX1200# display i?
ifm Show interfaces maintained by the interface manager
igmp Show igmp information
interface Show interfaces
ip Show ip information
32 CHAPTER 1: USING THE COMMAND-LINE INTERFACE
To see all the variations, type one of the commands followed by a
question mark (?). For example:
WX1200# display ip ?
alias display ip aliases
dns display DNS status
https display ip https
route display ip route table
telnet display ip telnet
To determine the port on which Telnet is running, type the following
command:
WX1200# display ip telnet
Server Status Port
----------------------------------
Enabled 23
Understanding
Command
Descriptions
Each command description in the 3Com Mobility System Software
Command Reference contains the following elements:
A command name, which shows the keywords but not the variables.
For example, the following command name appears at the top of a
command description and in the index:
set {ap | dap} name
The set {ap | dap} name command has the following complete syntax:
set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} name name
A brief description of the command’s functions.
The full command syntax.
Any command defaults.
The command access, which is either enabled or all. All indicates that
anyone can access this command. Enabled indicates that you must
enter the enable password before entering the command.
The command history, which identifies the MSS version in which the command
was introduced and the version numbers of any subsequent updates.
Special tips for command usage. These are omitted if the command
requires no special usage.
One or more examples of the command in context, with the
appropriate system prompt and response.
One or more related commands.
2ACCESS COMMANDS
This chapter describes access commands used to control access to the
Mobility Software System (MSS) command-line interface (CLI).
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents access services commands alphabetically. Use
Table 5 to located commands in this chapter based on their use.
disable Changes the CLI session from enabled mode to restricted access.
Syntax — disable
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command restricts access to the CLI for the
current session:
WX1200# disable
WX1200>
See Also
enable on page 34
Table 5 Access Commands by Usage
Type Command
Access Privileges “enable” on page 34
“set enablepass” on page 35
“disable” on page 33
“quit” on page 34
34 CHAPTER 2: ACCESS COMMANDS
enable Places the CLI session in enabled mode, which provides access to all
commands required for configuring and monitoring the system.
Syntax — enable
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS displays a password prompt to challenge you with the
enable password. To enable a session, your or another administrator must
have configured the enable password to this WX switch with the set
enablepass command.
Examples — The following command plus the enable password provides
enabled access to the CLI for the current sessions:
WX1200> enable
Enter password: password
WX1200#
See Also
set enablepass on page 35
set confirm on page 50
quit Exit from the CLI session.
Syntax — quit
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To end the administrator’s session, type the following
command:
WX1200> quit
set enablepass 35
set enablepass Sets the password that provides enabled access (for configuration and
monitoring) to the WX switch.
Syntax — set enablepass
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After typing the set enablepass command, press Enter. If you
are entering the first enable password on this WX switch, press Enter at
the Enter old password prompt. Otherwise, type the old password.
Then type a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces, and reenter it at the Retype new password prompt.
CAUTION: Be sure to use a password that you will remember. If you lose
the enable password, the only way to restore it causes the system to
return to its default settings and wipes out the configuration.
Examples — The following example illustrates the prompts that the
system displays when the enable password is changed. The passwords
you enter are not displayed.
WX1200# set enablepass
Enter old password: old-password
Enter new password: new-password
Retype new password: new-password
Password changed
See Also
disable on page 33
enable on page 34
36 CHAPTER 2: ACCESS COMMANDS
3SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
Use system services commands to configure and monitor system
information for a WX switch.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents system services commands alphabetically. Use
Table 6 to located commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 6 System Services Commands by Usage
Type Command
Auto-Config set auto-config on page 46
Display clear banner motd on page 38
set banner motd on page 49
display banner motd on page 40
set confirm on page 50
set length on page 51
System Identification set prompt on page 53
set system name on page 58
set system location on page 58
set system contact on page 54
set system countrycode on page 54
set system ip-address on page 57
display system on page 42
clear system on page 39
clear prompt on page 39
Help help on page 45
History history on page 46
38 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
clear banner motd Deletes the message-of-the-day (MOTD) banner that is displayed before
the login prompt for each CLI session on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — clear banner motd
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear a banner, type the following command:
WX4400# clear banner motd
success: change accepted
As an alternative to clearing the banner, you can overwrite the existing
banner with an empty banner by typing the following command:
set banner motd ^^
See Also
display banner motd on page 40
set banner motd on page 49
clear history Deletes the command history buffer for the current CLI session.
Syntax — clear history
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
clear history on page 38
License display license on page 42
set license on page 52
Technical Support display base-information on page 41
Table 6 System Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear prompt 39
Examples — To clear the history buffer, type the following command:
WX4400# clear history
success: command buffer was flushed.
See Also
history on page 46
clear prompt Resets the system prompt to its previously configured value. If the prompt
was not configured previously, this command resets the prompt to its
default.
Syntax — clear prompt
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the prompt, type the following command:
wildebeest# clear prompt
success: change accepted.
WX4400-01c840#
See Also
set prompt on page 53. (For information about default prompts, see
“Command Prompts” on page 24.)
clear system Clears the system configuration of the specified information.
CAUTION: If you change the IP address, any currently configured
Mobility Domain operations cease. You must reset the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear system [contact | countrycode | ip-address |
location | name]
contact — Resets the name of contact person for the WX switch to
null.
countrycode — Resets the country code for the WX switch to null.
ip-address — Resets the IP address of the WX switch to null.
40 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
location — Resets the location of the WX switch to null.
name — Resets the name of the WX switch to the default system
name, which is the model number.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear the location of the WX switch, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear system location
success: change accepted.
See Also
display config on page 548
display system on page 42
set system contact on page 54
set system countrycode on page 54
set system ip-address on page 57
set system location on page 58
display banner
motd
Shows the banner that was configured with the set banner motd
command.
Syntax — display banner motd
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To show the banner with the message of the day, type the
following command:
WX4400# display banner motd
hello world
display base-information 41
See Also
clear banner motd on page 38
set banner motd on page 49
display
base-information
Provides an in-depth snapshot of the status of the wireless LAN switch,
which includes details about the boot image, the version, ports, and
other configuration values. This command also displays the last 100 log
messages.
Syntax — display base-information
[file [subdirname/]filename]
[subdirname/]filename — Optional subdirectory name, and a string
up to 32 alphanumeric characters. The command’s output is saved
into a file with the specified name in nonvolatile storage.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Enter this command before calling for Technical Support. See
“Obtaining Support for your Product” on page 607 for more
information.
See Also
display boot on page 547
display config on page 548
display license on page 42
display system on page 42
display version on page 549
42 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
display license Displays information about the license currently installed on the WX
switch.
Syntax — display license
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
Examples — To view the WX switch license, type the following
command:
WX4400# display license
Serial Number : M8XE4IBB8DB10
License Number : 245
License Key : WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
Activation key : WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
Feature : 24 additional ports
Expires : Never
The additional ports refers to the number of additional MAPs the switch
can boot and actively manage.
See Also
set license on page 52
display system Shows system information.
Syntax — display system
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Examples — To show system information, type the following command:
WX4400# display system
===============================================================================
Product Name: WX4400
System Name: WX-bldg3
System Countrycode: US
System Location: first-floor-bldg3
System Contact: tamara@example.com
display system 43
System IP: 192.168.12.7
System MAC: 00:0B:0E:00:04:30
===============================================================================
Boot Time: 2003-11-07 15:45:49
Uptime: 13 days 04:29:10
===============================================================================
Fan status: fan1 OK fan2 OK fan3 OK
Temperature: temp1 ok temp2 ok temp3 ok
PSU Status: Lower Power Supply DC ok AC ok Upper Power Supply missing
Memory: 97.04/744.03 (13%)
Total Power Over Ethernet : 29.000
===============================================================================
Table 7 describes the fields of display system output.
Table 7 display system output
Field Description
Product Name Switch model number.
System Name System name (factory default, or optionally configured
with set system name).
System Countrycode Country-specific 802.11 code required for MAP operation
(configured with set system countrycode).
System Location Record of the WX switch’s physical location (optionally
configured with set system location).
System Contact Contact information about the system administrator or
another person to contact about the system (optionally
configured with set system contact).
System IP Common interface, source, and default IP address for the
device, in dotted decimal notation (configured with set
system ip-address).
System MAC WX switch’s media access control (MAC) machine address
set at the factory, in 6-byte hexadecimal format.
License License level installed on the WX switch (if applicable).
Boot Time Date and time of the last system reboot.
Uptime Number of days, hours, minutes, and seconds that the WX
has been operating since its last restart.
44 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
See Also
clear system on page 39
set system contact on page 54
set system countrycode on page 54
set system ip-address on page 57
set system location on page 58
set system name on page 58
Fan status Operating status of the WX switch’s three cooling fans:
OK — Fan is operating.
Failed — Fan is not operating. MSS sends an alert to
the system log every 5 minutes until this condition is
corrected.
Fan 1 is located nearest the front of the chassis, and fan 3
is located nearest the back.
Temperature Status of temperature sensors at three locations in the WX:
ok — Temperature is within the acceptable range of
0° C to 50° C (32° F to 122° F).
Alarm — Temperature is above or below the
acceptable range. MSS sends an alert to the system log
every 5 minutes until this condition is corrected.
PSU Status Status of the lower and upper power supply units:
missing — Power supply is not installed or is
inoperable.
DC ok — Power supply is producing DC power.
DC output failure — Power supply is not producing
DC power. MSS sends an alert to the system log every
5 minutes until this condition is corrected.
AC ok — Power supply is receiving AC power.
AC not present — Power supply is not receiving AC
power.
Memory Current size (in megabytes) of nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
and synchronous dynamic RAM (SDRAM), plus the percentage
of total memory space in use, in the following format:
NVRAM size /SDRAM size (percent of total)
Total Power Over
Ethernet Total power that the device is currently supplying to its
directly connected MAP access points, in watts.
Table 7 display system output (continued)
Field Description
help 45
help Displays a list of commands that can be used to configure and monitor
the WX switch.
Syntax — help
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Use this command to see a list of available commands. If
you have restricted access, you see fewer commands than if you have
enabled access. To show a list of CLI commands available at the enabled
access level, type the following command at the enabled access level:
WX4400# help
Commands:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
clear Clear, use 'clear help' for more information
commit Commit the content of the ACL table
copy Copy from filename (or url) to filename (or url)
crypto Crypto, use 'crypto help' for more information
delete Delete url
dir Show list of files on flash device
disable Disable privileged mode
display Display, use 'display help' for more information
exit Exit from the Admin session
help Show this help screen
history Show contents of history substitution buffer
hit-sample-rate Set NP hit-counter sample rate
load Load, use 'load help' for more information
logout Exit from the Admin session
monitor Monitor, use 'monitor help' for more information
ping Send echo packets to hosts
quit Exit from the Admin session
reset Reset, use 'reset help' for more information
rollback Remove changes to the edited ACL table
save Save the running configuration to persistent storage
set Set, use 'set help' for more information
telnet telnet IP address [server port]
traceroute Print the route packets take to network host
See Also
“Using CLI Help” on page 31
46 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
history Displays the command history buffer for the current CLI session.
Syntax — history
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To show the history of your session, type the following
command:
WX4400> history
Show History (most recent first)
--------------------------------
[00] display config
[01] display version
[02] enable
See Also
clear history on page 38
set auto-config Enables a WX switch to contact a 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server
for its configuration.
Syntax — set auto-config {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the switch to contact a 3Com Wireless Switch
Manager server to request a configuration.
disable — Disables the auto-config option.
Defaults — The auto-config option is automatically enabled on an
unconfigured WXR100 when the Fn switch is pressed during power on.
However, auto-config is disabled by default on other models.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
set auto-config 47
Usage — A network administrator at the corporate office can
preconfigure the switch in a 3Com Wireless Switch Manager network
plan. The switch configuration must have a name for the switch, the
model must be WXR100, and the serial number must match the switch’s
serial number. The configuration should also include all other settings
required for the deployment, including MAP configuration, SSIDs, AAA
settings, and so on.
When the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server in the corporate
network receives the configuration request, the server looks in the
currently open network plan for a switch configuration with the same
model and serial number as the one in the configuration request.
If the network plan contains a configuration with a matching model
and serial number, the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager sends the
configuration to the switch and restarts the switch. The switch boots
using the configuration it received from the 3Com Wireless Switch
Manager.
If the network plan does not have a configuration with a matching
model and serial number, a verification warning appears in the 3Com
Wireless Switch Manager. The warning lists the switch’s serial number
and IP address. The network administrator can upload the switch into
the network plan, configure switch parameters, and deploy the
configuration to the switch.
To use the auto-config option with a new (unconfigured) WXR100, insert
a paperclip or similar object into the WXR100’s Fn hole to press the
switch. The Fn switch must be held for about 3 seconds while the Fn LED
(the right LED above port 1) is lit. Normally, this LED remains solidly lit for
3 seconds after power on. However, when the Fn switch is pressed, the
LED flashes for 3 seconds instead.
If you want another WX switch model to be able to access a 3Com
Wireless Switch Manager server for a configuration, you also must
preconfigure the WX with the following information:
IP address
Gateway address
Domain name and DNS server address
48 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
You can enable the switch to use the MSS DHCP client to obtain this
information from a DHCP server in the local network where the switch
will be deployed. Alternatively, you can statically configure the
information.
The IP address and DNS information are configured independently. You
can configure the combination of settings that work with the network
resources available at the deployment site. The following examples show
some of the combinations you can configure.
Examples — The following commands stage a WX-1200 switch to use
the auto-config option. The network where the switch is installed has a
DHCP server, so the switch is configured to use the MSS DHCP client to
obtain an IP address, default gateway address, DNS domain name, and
DNS server IP addresses.
Configure a VLAN:
WX-1200# set vlan 1 port 7
success: change accepted.
Enable the DHCP client on VLAN 1:
WX-1200# set interface 1 ip dhcp-client enable
success: change accepted.
Enable the auto-config option:
WX-1200# set auto-config enable
success: change accepted.
Create a self-signed administrative certificate, to enable the WX-1200 to
communicate with the 3Com Wireless Switch Manager server.
WX-1200# crypto generate key admin 1024
key pair generated
WX-1200# crypto generate self-signed admin
Country Name:
State Name:
Locality Name:
Organizational Name:
Organizational Unit:
Common Name: remoteswitch1@example.com
Email Address:
Unstructured Name:
set banner motd 49
Self-signed cert for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIICUzCCAbygAwIBAgICA+cwDQYJKoZIhvcNAQEEBQAwNjELMAkGA1UEBhMC
VVMx
CzAJBgNVBAgTAkNBMRowGAYDVQQDFBF0ZWNocHVic0B0cnB6LmNvbTAeFw0w
MzA0
...
Lm8wmVYLxP56MpCUAm9O8C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Save the configuration changes:
WX-1200# save config
success: configuration saved.
See Also
crypto generate key on page 451
crypto generate self-signed on page 454
save config on page 557
set interface dhcp-client on page 144
set vlan port on page 110
set banner motd Configures the banner string that is displayed before the beginning of
each login prompt for each CLI session on the WX switch.
Syntax — set banner motd ^text^
^ — Delimiting character that begins and ends the message.
text — Up to 2000 alphanumeric characters, including tabs and
carriage returns, but not the delimiting character (^). The maximum
number of characters is approximately 24 lines by 80 characters.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Type a caret (^), then the message, then another caret.
50 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
Do not use the following characters with commands in which you set text
to be displayed on the WX switch, such as message-of-the-day (MOTD)
banners:
Ampersand (&)
Angle brackets (< >)
Double quotation marks (“”)
Number sign (#)
Question mark (?)
Single quotation mark (')
Examples — To create a banner that says Update meeting at 3 p.m.,
type the following command:
WX4400# set banner motd ^Update meeting at 3 p.m.^
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear banner motd on page 38
display banner motd on page 40
set confirm Enables or disables the display of confirmation messages for commands
that might have a large impact on the network.
Syntax — set confirm {on | off}
on — Enables confirmation messages.
off — Disables confirmation messages.
Defaults — Configuration messages are enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command remains in effect for the duration of the session,
until you enter a quit command, or until you enter another set confirm
command.
set length 51
MSS displays a message requiring confirmation when you enter certain
commands that can have a potentially large impact on the network. For
example:
WX4400# clear vlan red
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]
Examples — To turn off these confirmation messages, type the
following command:
WX4400# set confirm off
success: Confirm state is off
set length Defines the number of lines of CLI output to display between paging
prompts. MSS displays the set number of lines and waits for you to press
any key to display another set, or type q to quit the display.
Syntax — set length number-of-lines
number-of-lines — Number of lines of text to display between
paging prompts. You can specify from 0 to 512. The 0 value disables
the paging prompt action entirely.
Defaults — MSS displays 24 lines by default.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command if the output of a CLI command is greater
than the number of lines allowed by default for a terminal type.
Examples — To set the number of lines displayed to 100, type the
following command:
WX4400# set length 100
success: screen length for this session set to 100
52 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
set license Installs an upgrade license, for managing more MAPs.
Syntax — set license license-key activation-key
license-key — License key, starting with WXL. You can enter the
key with or without the hyphens.
activation-key — Activation key, starting with WXA. You can enter
the key with or without the hyphens.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The license key is shipped with the switch. To obtain the
activation key, access the 3Com web site. Each license and activation key
pair allows the switch to actively manage an additional 24 MAPs. You can
install up to three upgrade license and activation key pairs, to actively
manage up to 96 MAPs.
Examples — To install an upgrade license and activation key, type the
following command:
WX4400# set license WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
Serial Number : M8XE4IBB8DB10
License Number : 245
License Key : WXL-076E-93E9-62DA-54D8
Activation key : WXA-3E04-4CC2-430D-B508
Feature : 24 additional ports
Expires : Never
48 ports are enabled
success: license was installed
The additional ports refers to the number of additional MAPs the switch
can boot and actively manage.
See Also
display license on page 42
set prompt 53
set prompt Changes the CLI prompt for the WX switch to a string you specify.
Syntax — set prompt string
string — Alphanumeric string up to 32 characters long. To include
spaces in the prompt, you must enclose the string in double quotation
marks (“”).
Defaults — The factory default for the WX switch name is the model
number (WX1200 for the 3Com Wireless LAN Switch WX1200, WX4400
for the 3Com Wireless LAN Controller WX4400, WXR100 for the 3Com
Remote Office Wireless LAN Switch) followed by the last three octets of
the switch’s MAC address.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you first log in for the initial configuration of the WX
switch, the CLI provides a WXR100>, WX1200> or WX4400> prompt,
depending on your model. After you become enabled by typing enable
and giving a suitable password, the WXR100#, WX1200# or WX4400#
prompt is displayed.
If you use the set system name command to change the default system
name, MSS uses that name in the prompt, unless you also change the
prompt with set prompt.
Examples — The following example sets the prompt from WX4400 to
happy_days:
WX4400# set prompt happy_days
success: change accepted.
happy_days#
See Also
clear prompt on page 39
display config on page 548
set system name on page 58
54 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
set system contact Stores a contact name for the WX switch.
Syntax — set system contact string
string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
To view the system contact string, type the display system command.
Examples — The following command sets the system contact
information to tamara@example.com:
WX1200# set system contact tamara@example.com
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear system on page 39
display system on page 42
set system location on page 58
set system name on page 58
set system
countrycode
Defines the country-specific IEEE 802.11 regulations to enforce on the
WX switch.
Syntax — set system countrycode code
code — Two-letter code for the country of operation for the WX
switch. You can specify one of the codes listed in Table 8.
Table 8 Country Codes
Country Code
Argentina AR
Australia AU
set system countrycode 55
Austria AT
Belgium BE
Brazil BR
Bulgaria BG
Canada CA
Chile CL
China CN
Columbia CO
Croatia HR
Cyprus CY
Czech Republic CZ
Denmark DK
Estonia EE
Finland FI
France FR
Germany DE
Greece GR
Hong Kong HK
Hungary HU
Iceland IS
India IN
Ireland IE
Israel IL
Italy IT
Japan JP
Latvia LV
Liechtenstein LI
Lithuania LT
Luxembourg LU
Malaysia MY
Malta MT
Mexico MX
Table 8 Country Codes (continued)
Country Code
56 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
Defaults — The factory default country code is None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must set the system county code to a valid value before
using any set ap commands to configure a MAP.
Morocco MA
Netherlands NL
New Zealand NZ
Norway NO
Peru PE
Philippines PH
Poland PL
Portugal PT
Romania RO
Russia RU
Saudi Arabia SA
Singapore SG
Slovakia SK
Slovenia SI
South Africa ZA
South Korea KR
Spain ES
Sweden SE
Switzerland CH
Taiwan TW
Thailand TH
Turkey TR
United Arab Emirates AE
United Kingdom GB
United States US
Table 8 Country Codes (continued)
Country Code
set system ip-address 57
Examples — To set the country code to Canada, type the following
command:
WX1200# set system country code CA
success: change accepted.
See Also
display config on page 548
set system
ip-address
Sets the system IP address so that it can be used by various services in the
WX switch.
CAUTION: Any currently configured Mobility Domain operations cease if
you change the IP address. If you change the address, you must reset the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — set system ip-address ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the IP address of the WX
switch to 192.168.253.1:
WX4400# set system ip-address 192.168.253.1
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear system on page 39
set interface on page 143
display system on page 42
58 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
set system location Stores location information for the WX switch.
Syntax — set system location string
string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot include spaces in the system location string.
To view the system location string, type the display system command.
Examples — To store the location of the WX switch in the WX’s
configuration, type the following command:
WX4400# set system location first-floor-bldg3
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear system on page 39
display system on page 42
set system contact on page 54
set system name on page 58
set system name Changes the name of the WX switch from the default system name and
also provides content for the CLI prompt, if you do not specify a prompt.
Syntax — set system name string
string — Alphanumeric string up to 256 characters long, with no
blank spaces. Use a unique name for each WX switch.
set system name 59
Defaults — By default, the system name and command prompt have the
same value. The factory default for both is the model number (WXR100
for the 3Com Remote Office Wireless LAN Switch WXR100, WX1200 for
the 3Com Wireless LAN Switch WX1200, WX4400 for the 3Com Wireless
LAN Controller WX4400) followed by the last three octets of the switch’s
MAC address.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Entering set system name with no string resets the system
name to the factory default.
To view the system name string, type the display system command.
Examples — The following example sets the system name to a name
that identifies the WX switch:
WX4400# set system name WX-bldg3
success: change accepted.
WX-bldg3#
See Also
clear system on page 39
display system on page 42
set prompt on page 53
set system contact on page 54
set system location on page 58
60 CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM SERVICE COMMANDS
4PORT COMMANDS
Use port commands to configure and manage individual ports and
load-sharing port groups.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents port commands alphabetically. Use Table 9 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 9 Port Commands by Usage
Type Command
Port Type set port type ap on page 87
set dap on page 77
set port type wired-auth on page 91
clear port type on page 65
clear dap on page 62
Name set port name on page 82
clear port name on page 64
State set port on page 80
reset port on page 77
display port status on page 70
Gigabit Interface Type display port preference on page 69
set port preference on page 85
clear port preference on page 64
Speed set port speed on page 85
Autonegotiation set port negotiation on page 83
PoE set port poe on page 84
display port poe on page 68
SNMP set port trap on page 86
62 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
clear dap Removes a Distributed MAP.
CAUTION: When you clear a Distributed MAP, MSS ends user sessions
that are using the MAP.
Syntax — clear dap dap-num
dap-num — Number of the Distributed MAP(s) you want to remove.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# clear dap 1
This will clear specified DAP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
See Also
set dap on page 77
set port type ap on page 87
Port Groups set port-group on page 81
display port-group on page 67
clear port-group on page 63
Statistics display port counters on page 66
monitor port counters on page 72
clear port counters on page 63
Table 9 Port Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear port counters 63
clear port counters Clears port statistics counters and resets them to 0.
Syntax — clear port counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears all port statistics counters
and resets them to 0:
WX4400# clear port counters
success: cleared port counters
See Also
display port counters on page 66
monitor port counters on page 72
clear port-group Removes a port group.
Syntax — clear port-group name name
name name — Name of the port group.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears port group server1:
WX4400# clear port-group name server1
success: change accepted.
See Also
set port-group on page 81
display port-group on page 67
64 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
clear port name Removes the name assigned to a port.
Syntax — clear port port-list name
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS removes the names from all
the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears the names of ports 1
through 3:
WX4400# clear port 1-3 name
See Also
display port status on page 70
set port name on page 82
clear port
preference
Resets a gigabit Ethernet port on a WX4400 to use the GBIC (fiber)
interface for the active link.
Syntax — clear port preference port-list
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS clears the preference on all
the specified ports.
Defaults — When both the copper and fiber interfaces of a gigabit
Ethernet port are connected, the GBIC (fiber) interface is the active link.
The RJ-45 (copper) link is unused.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400. This command
does not affect a link that is already active on the port.
clear port type 65
Examples — The following command clears the preference set on port 2
on a WX4400 switch:
WX4400# clear port preference 2
See Also
display port preference on page 69
set port preference on page 85
clear port type Removes all configuration settings from a port and resets the port as a
network port.
CAUTION: When you clear a port, MSS ends user sessions that are using
the port.
Syntax — clear port type port-list
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS resets and removes the
configuration from all the specified ports.
Defaults — The cleared port becomes a network port but is not placed
in any VLANs.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command to change a port back to a network port. All
configuration settings specific to the port type are removed. For example,
if you clear an MAP access point port, all MAP-specific settings are
removed. Table 10 lists the default network port settings that MSS
applies when you clear a port’s type.
Table 10 Network port defaults
Port Parameter Setting
VLAN membership None.
Note: Although the command changes a port to a
network port, the command does not place the port
in any VLAN. To use the port in a VLAN, you must
add the port to the VLAN.
66 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command clears port 5:
WX1200# clear port type 5
This may disrupt currently authenticated users.
Are you sure? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.
See Also
set port type ap on page 87
set port type wired-auth on page 91
display port
counters
Displays port statistics.
Syntax — display port counters
[octets | packets | receive-errors | transmit-errors |
collisions | receive-etherstats |
transmit-etherstats] [port port-list]
octets — Shows octet statistics.
packets — Shows packet statistics.
receive-errors— Shows errors in received packets.
transmit-errors — Shows errors in transmitted packets.
collisions — Shows collision statistics.
receive-etherstats — Shows Ethernet statistics for received
packets.
transmit-etherstats — Shows Ethernet statistics for transmitted
packets.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Based on the VLAN(s) you add the port to.
802.1X No authorization.
Port groups None.
Internet Group Management
Protocol (IGMP) snooping Enabled as port is added to VLANs.
Access point and radio
parameters Not applicable
Maximum user sessions Not applicable
Table 10 Network port defaults (continued)
Port Parameter Setting
display port-group 67
port port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port
list, MSS shows statistics for all ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can specify one statistic type with the command.
Examples — The following command shows octet statistics for port 3:
WX1200> display port counters octets port 3
Port Status Rx Octets Tx Octets
=============================================================================
3 Up 27965420 34886544
This command’s output has the same fields as the monitor port counters
command. For descriptions of the fields, see Table 16 on page 74.
See Also
clear port counters on page 63
monitor port counters on page 72
display port-group Shows port group information.
Syntax — display port-group [all | name group-name]
all — Shows information for all port groups.
name group-name — Shows information for the specified port group.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the configuration of port
group server2:
WX1200# display port-group name server2
Port group: server2 is up
Ports: 5, 7
68 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
Table 11 describes the fields in the display port-group output.
See Also
clear port-group on page 63
set port-group on page 81
display port poe Displays status information for ports on which Power over Ethernet (PoE)
is enabled.
Syntax — display port poe [port-list]
port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port list,
PoE information is displayed for all ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays PoE information for all
ports on a WX1200 switch:
WX1200# display port poe
Link Port PoE PoE
Port Name Status Type config Draw
============================================================
1 1 up - disabled off
2 2 down - disabled off
3 3 down - disabled off
4 4 down MAP enabled 1.44
5 5 down - disabled off
6 6 down - disabled off
Table 12 describes the fields in this display.
Table 11 Output for display port-group
Field Description
Port group Name and state (enabled or disabled) of the port
group.
Ports Ports contained in the port group.
display port preference 69
See Also
set port poe on page 84
display port
preference
Displays the interface preferences set on WX4400 gigabit Ethernet ports.
Syntax — display port preference [port-list]
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS displays the preference for all
the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400.
Table 12 Output for display port poe
Field Description
Port Port number.
Name Port name. If the port does not have a name, the
port number is listed.
Link status Link status of the port:
up—The port is connected.
down—The port is not connected.
Port type Port type:
MAP —The port is an MAP access port.
- (The port is not an MAP access port.)
PoE config PoE state:
enabled
disabled
PoE Draw Power draw on the port, in watts.
For 10/100 Ethernet ports on which PoE is disabled,
this field displays off. For gigabit Ethernet ports, this
field displays invalid, because PoE is not supported
on gigabit Ethernet ports.
The value overcurrent indicates a PoE problem such
as a short in the cable.
70 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command displays the preference settings on
all four ports of a WX4400 switch:
WX4400# display port preference
Port Preference
===========================================================
1 GBIC
2 RJ45
3 GBIC
4 GBIC
Table 13 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear port preference on page 64
set port preference on page 85
display port status Displays configuration and status information for ports.
Syntax — display port status [port-list]
port-list — List of physical ports. If you do not specify a port list,
information is displayed for all ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 13 Output for display port preference
Field Description
Port Port number.
Preference Preference setting:
GBIC — The GBIC (fiber) interface is selected as
the active interface.
RJ45 — The RJ-45 (copper) interface is selected
as the active interface.
display port status 71
Examples — The following command displays information for all ports
on a WX1200 switch:
WX1200# display port status
Port Name Admin Oper Config Actual Type Media
===============================================================================
1 1 up up auto 100/full network 10/100BaseTx
2 2 up up auto 100/full ap 10/100BaseTx
3 3 up up auto 100/full network 10/100BaseTx
4 4 up down auto network 10/100BaseTx
5 5 up down auto network 10/100BaseTx
6 6 up down auto network 10/100BaseTx
7 7 up down auto network 10/100BaseTx
8 8 up down auto network 10/100BaseTx
Table 14 describes the fields in this display.
Table 14 Output for display port status
Field Description
Port Port number.
Name Port name. If the port does not have a name, the
port number is listed.
Admin Administrative status of the port:
up — The port is enabled.
down — The port is disabled.
Oper Operational status of the port:
up — The port is operational.
down — The port is not operational.
Config Port speed configured on the port:
10 — 10 Mbps.
100 — 100 Mbps.
1000 — 1000 Mbps.
auto — The port sets its own speed.
Actual Speed and operating mode in effect on the port.
Type Port type:
ap — MAP access point port
network — Network port
wa — Wired authentication port
72 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
See Also
clear port type on page 65
set port on page 80
set port name on page 82
set port negotiation on page 83
set port speed on page 85
set port type ap on page 87
set port type wired-auth on page 91
monitor port
counters
Displays and continually updates port statistics.
Syntax — monitor port counters
[octets | packets | receive-errors | transmit-errors |
collisions | receive-etherstats | transmit-etherstats]
octets — Displays octet statistics first.
packets — Displays packet statistics first.
receive-errors — Displays errors in received packets first.
transmit-errors — Displays errors in transmitted packets first.
collisions — Displays collision statistics first.
receive-etherstats — Displays Ethernet statistics for received
packets first.
transmit-etherstats — Displays Ethernet statistics for transmitted
packets first.
Media Link type:
10/100BaseTX — 10/100BASE-T.
GBIC — 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX GBIC.
1000BaseT — 1000BASE-T.
No connector — GBIC slot is empty.
Table 14 Output for display port status (continued)
Field Description
monitor port counters 73
Defaults — All types of statistics are displayed for all ports. MSS
refreshes the statistics every 5 seconds. This interval cannot be
configured. Statistics types are displayed in the following order by
default:
Octets
Packets
Receive errors
Transmit errors
Collisions
Receive Ethernet statistics
Transmit Ethernet statistics
Access — All.
History—Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Each type of statistic is displayed separately. Press the Spacebar
to cycle through the displays for each type.
If you use an option to specify a statistic type, the display begins with that
statistic type. You can use one statistic option with the command.
Use the keys listed in Table 15 to control the monitor display.
For error reporting, the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors include
misalignment errors. Jumbo packets with valid CRCs are not counted. A
short packet can be reported as a short packet, a CRC error, or an
overrun. In some circumstances, the transmitted octets counter might
increment a small amount for a port with nothing attached.
Table 15 Key Controls for Monitor Port Counters Display
Field Description
Spacebar Advances to the next statistic type.
Esc Exits the monitor. MSS stops displaying the statistics and displays a new
command prompt.
cClears the statistics counters for the currently displayed statistics type.
The counters begin incrementing again.
74 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command starts the port statistics monitor
beginning with octet statistics (the default):
WX4400# monitor port counters
As soon as you press Enter, MSS clears the window and displays statistics
at the top of the window.
Port Status Rx Octets Tx Octets
===============================================================================
1 Up 27965420 34886544
...
To cycle the display to the next set of statistics, press the Spacebar. In this
example, packet statistics are displayed next:
Port Status Rx Unicast Rx NonUnicast Tx Unicast Tx NonUnicast
===============================================================================
1 Up 54620 62144 68318 62556
...
Table 16 describes the port statistics displayed by each statistics option.
The Port and Status fields are displayed for each option.
Table 16 Output for monitor port counters
Statistics Option Field Description
Displayed for All
Options
octets
Port Port the statistics are displayed for.
Status Port status. The status can be Up or Down.
Rx Octets Total number of octets received by the port.
This number includes octets received in frames
that contained errors.
Tx Octets Total number of octets received.
This number includes octets received in frames
that contained errors.
monitor port counters 75
packets Rx Unicast Number of unicast packets received.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.
Rx
NonUnicast Number of broadcast and multicast packets
received.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.
Tx Unicast Number of unicast packets transmitted.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.
Tx
NonUnicast Number of broadcast and multicast packets
transmitted.
This number does not include packets that
contain errors.
receive-errors Rx Crc Number of frames received by the port that had
the correct length but contained an invalid
frame check sequence (FCS) value. This statistic
includes frames with misalignment errors.
Rx Error Total number of frames received in which the
Physical layer (PHY) detected an error.
Rx Short Number of frames received by the port that
were fewer than 64 bytes long.
Rx Overrun Number of frames received by the port that
were valid but were longer than 1518 bytes.
This statistic does not include jumbo packets
with valid CRCs.
transmit-errors Tx Crc Number of frames transmitted by the port that
had the correct length but contained an invalid
FCS value.
Tx Short Number of frames transmitted by the port that
were fewer than 64 bytes long.
Tx Fragment Total number of frames transmitted that were
less than 64 octets long and had invalid CRCs.
Tx Abort Total number of frames that had a link pointer
parity error.
Table 16 Output for monitor port counters (continued)
Statistics Option Field Description
76 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
See Also
display port counters on page 66
collisions Single Coll Total number of frames transmitted that
experienced one collision before 64 bytes of the
frame were transmitted on the network.
Multiple Coll Total number of frames transmitted that
experienced more than one collision before 64
bytes of the frame were transmitted on the
network.
Excessive Coll Total number of frames that experienced more
than 16 collisions during transmit attempts.
These frames are dropped and not transmitted.
Total Coll Best estimate of the total number of collisions
on this Ethernet segment.
receive-etherstats Rx 64 Number of packets received that were 64 bytes
long.
Rx 127 Number of packets received that were from 65
through 127 bytes long.
Rx 255 Number of packets received that were from 128
through 255 bytes long.
Rx 511 Number of packets received that were from 256
through 511 bytes long.
Rx 1023 Number of packets received that were from 512
through 1023 bytes long.
Rx 1518 Number of packets received that were from
1024 through 1518 bytes long.
transmit-etherstats Tx 64 Number of packets transmitted that were 64
bytes long.
Tx 127 Number of packets transmitted that were from
65 through 127 bytes long.
Tx 255 Number of packets transmitted that were from
128 through 255 bytes long.
Tx 511 Number of packets transmitted that were from
256 through 511 bytes long.
Tx 1023 Number of packets transmitted that were from
512 through 1023 bytes long.
Tx 1518 Number of packets transmitted that were from
1024 through 1518 bytes long.
Table 16 Output for monitor port counters (continued)
Statistics Option Field Description
reset port 77
reset port Resets a port by toggling its link state and Power over Ethernet (PoE)
state.
Syntax — reset port port-list
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS resets all the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The reset command disables the port’s link and PoE (if
applicable) for at least 1 second, then reenables them. This behavior is
useful for forcing an MAP access point that is connected to two WX
switches to reboot over the link to the other switch.
Examples — The following command resets port 5:
WX1200# reset port 5
See Also
set port on page 80
set dap Configures a Distributed MAP for an MAP access point that is indirectly
connected to the WX switch through an intermediate Layer 2 or Layer 3
network.
Before configuring a Distributed MAP, you must use the set
system countrycode command to set the IEEE 802.11 country-specific
regulations on the WX switch. See “set system countrycode” on page 54.
For an MAP that is directly connected to the WX switch, use the set port
type ap command to configure an MAP access port.
Syntax — set dap dap-num serial-id serial-ID model
{ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 | mp-101
| mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 | mp-352}
[radiotype {11a |11b | 11g}]
78 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
dap-num — Number for the Distributed MAP. The range of valid
connection numbers depends on the WX switch model:
For a WX4400, you can specify a number from 1 to 256.
For a WX1200, you can specify a number from 1 to 30.
For a WXR100, you can specify a number from 1 to 8.
serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID. The serial ID is
listed on the MAP case. To show the serial ID using the CLI, use the
display version details command.
The serial ID of the AP2750, AP3750, AP7250, AP8250, or AP8750 might
be preceded by 4 digits and a slash (example: 0100/). Do not enter these
digits or the slash.
model {ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 |
mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 |
mp-352 | mp-372} — MAP access point model:
ap2750 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g. An external dual-mode
antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap3750 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio
with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
ap7250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. An external antenna
may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap8250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. It also has the ability to
have an additional 802.11a radio installed in it. An external
dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap8750 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.
An external dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the
supplied antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-52 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
with adjustable external antennas.
mp-101 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b.
mp-122 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.
mp-241 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g.
mp-252 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio.
set dap 79
mp-262 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-341 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g, and a connector for an
external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-352 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-372 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio
with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
radiotype 11a|11b|11g — Radio type:
11a — 802.11a
11b — 802.11b
11g — 802.11g
This option applies only to single-radio models. The value 11g does not
apply to model MP-101.
Defaults — The default radio type for model MP-101 is 802.11b. The
default radio type for model AP2750, AP7250, AP8250, MP-241, and
MP-341, and for the 802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8250,
AP8750, MP-52, MP-252, and MP-262, and MP-352, is 802.11g in
regulatory domains that support 802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory
domains that do not support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
MAP model MP-262 requires an external antenna for the 802.11b/g
radio. You must specify the antenna model. The AP3750 and MAP-3xx
models have an internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an
external antenna, so use of an external antenna is optional on these
models. The AP3750 and MAP-372 also have a connector for an optional
external 802.11a antenna. MAP models MP-341 and MP-352 have an
internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an external antenna,
so use of an external antenna is optional on these models. The AP2750,
AP7250, AP8250, and AP8750 models are supplied with detachable
antennas which may be replaced by an external dual-mode antenna. To
80 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
specify the external antenna fitted, use the set {ap |dap} radio
antennatype command.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command configures Distributed MAP 1 for
MAP model AP3750 with serial-ID M9DE48B012F00:
WX4400# set dap 1 serial-id M9DE48B012F00 model ap3750
success: change accepted.
The following command removes Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# clear dap 1
This will clear specified DAP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
See Also
clear dap on page 62
clear port type on page 65
set port type ap on page 87
set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329
set system countrycode on page 54
set port Administratively disables or reenables a port.
Syntax — set port {enable | disable} port-list
enable — Enables the specified ports.
disable — Disables the specified ports.
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables all the
specified ports.
Defaults — All ports are enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set port-group 81
Usage — A port that is administratively disabled cannot send or receive
packets. This command does not affect the link state of the port.
Examples — The following command disables port 6:
WX1200# set port disable 6
success: set "disable" on port 6
The fol1owing command reenables the port:
WX1200# set port enable 6
success: set "enable" on port 6
See Also
reset port on page 77
set port-group Configures a load-sharing port group. All ports in the group function as a
single logical link.
Syntax — set port-group name group-name port-list
mode {on | off}
name group-name — Alphanumeric string of up to 255 characters,
with no spaces.
port-list — List of physical ports. All the ports you specify are
configured together as a single logical link.
mode {on | off} — State of the group. Use on to enable the group
or off to disable the group. The group is enabled by default.
Defaults — Once configured, a group is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure up to 8 ports in a port group, in any
combination of ports. The port numbers do not need to be contiguous
and you can use 10/100 Ethernet ports and gigabit Ethernet ports in the
same port group.
After you add a port to a port group, you cannot configure port
parameters on the individual port. Instead, change port parameters on
the entire group. Specify the group name instead of an individual port
name or number in port configuration commands.
82 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
To add or remove ports in a group that is already configured, change the
mode to off, add or remove the ports, then change the mode to on.
Examples — The following command configures a port group named
server1 containing ports 1 through 5, and enables the link:
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-5 mode on
success: change accepted.
The following commands disable the link for port group server1, change
the list of ports in the group, and reenable the link:
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-5 mode off
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set port-group name server1 1-4,7 mode on
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear port-group on page 63
display port-group on page 67
set port name Assigns a name to a port. After naming a port, you can use the port
name or number in other CLI commands.
Syntax — set port port name name
port — Number of a physical port. You can specify only one port.
name name — Alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters, with no
spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To simplify configuration and avoid confusion between a port’s
number and its name, 3Com recommends that you do not use numbers
as port names.
set port negotiation 83
Examples — The following command sets the name of port 7 to
adminpool:
WX1200# set port 7 name adminpool
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear port name on page 64
display port status on page 70
set port negotiation Disables or reenables autonegotiation on gigabit Ethernet or 10/100
Ethernet ports.
Syntax — set port negotiation port-list {enable | disable}
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables
autonegotiation on all the specified ports.
enable — Enables autonegotiation on the specified ports.
disable — Disables autonegotiation on the specified ports.
Defaults — Autonegotiation is enabled on all Ethernet ports by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — WX1200 10/100 Ethernet ports support half-duplex and
full-duplex operation.
Examples — The following command disables autonegotiation on ports
3 and 5:
WX1200# set port negotiation 3,5 disable
The following command enables autonegotiation on port 2:
WX1200# set port negotiation 2 enable
84 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
set port poe Enables or disables Power over Ethernet (PoE) on ports connected to MAP
access points.
CAUTION: When you set the port type for MAP use, you can enable PoE
on the port. Use the WX switch’s PoE to power 3Com MAP access points
only. If you enable PoE on ports connected to other devices, damage can
result.
Syntax — set port poe port-list enable | disable
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS disables or reenables PoE on
all the specified ports.
enable — Enables PoE on the specified ports.
disable — Disables PoE on the specified ports.
Defaults — PoE is disabled on network and wired authentication ports.
The state on MAP access point ports depends on whether you enabled or
disabled PoE when setting the port type. See set port type ap on
page 87.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not apply to any gigabit Ethernet ports or
to ports 7 and 8 on the WX1200 switch.
Examples — The following command disables PoE on ports 4 and 5,
which are connected to an MAP access point:
WX1200# set port poe 4,5 disable
If you are enabling power on these ports, they must be connected only to approved
PoE devices with the correct wiring. Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
The following command enables PoE on ports 4 and 5:
WX1200# set port poe 4,5 enable
If you are enabling power on these ports, they must be connected only to approved
PoE devices with the correct wiring. Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
See Also
set port type ap on page 87
set port type wired-auth on page 91
set port preference 85
set port preference Configures a gigabit Ethernet port on a WX4400 to use the RJ-45
(copper) interface, when available, as the active link instead of the fiber
interface.
Syntax — set port preference port-list rj45
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS sets the preference on all the
specified ports.
rj45 — Prefers the copper interface.
Defaults — When both the copper and fiber interfaces of a gigabit
Ethernet port are connected, the GBIC (fiber) interface is the active link.
The RJ-45 (copper) link is unused.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the WX4400.
If you set the preference to RJ-45 (copper) on a port that already has an
active fiber link, MSS immediately changes the link to the copper
interface.
Examples — The following command sets the preference of port 2 on a
WX4400 to RJ-45 (copper):
WX4400# set port preference 2 rj45
See Also
clear port preference on page 64
display port preference on page 69
set port speed Changes the speed of a port.
Syntax — set port speed port-list {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto}
port-list — List of physical ports. MSS sets the port speed on all the
specified ports.
10 — Sets the port speed of a 10/100 Ethernet port to 10 Mbps and
sets the operating mode to full-duplex.
86 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
100 — Sets the port speed of a 10/100 Ethernet port to 100 Mbps
and sets the operating mode to full-duplex.
1000 — Sets the port speed of a gigabit Ethernet port to 1000 Mbps
and sets the operating mode to full-duplex.
auto — Enables a port to detect the speed and operating mode of the
traffic on the link and set itself accordingly.
Defaults — All ports are set to auto.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the port speed on ports 1 and
3 through 4 to 10 Mbps and sets the operating mode to full-duplex:
WX1200# set port speed 1,3-4 10
set port trap Enables or disables Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) linkup
and linkdown traps on an individual port.
Syntax — set port trap port-list {enable | disable}
port-list — List of physical ports.
enable — Enables the Telnet server.
disable — Disables the Telnet server.
Defaults — SNMP linkup and linkdown traps are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The set port trap command overrides the global setting of the
set snmp profile command.
The set port type command does not affect the global trap information
displayed by the display snmp configuration command. For example, if
you globally enable linkup and linkdown traps but then disable the traps
on a single port, the display snmp configuration command still
indicates that the traps are globally enabled.
set port type ap 87
Examples — The following command enables SNMP linkup and
linkdown traps on ports 3 and 4:
WX1200# set port trap 3-4 enable
See Also
display snmp configuration on page 136
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp notify target on page 162
set port type ap Configures an WX switch port for an MAP access point.
CAUTION: When you set the port type for MAP use, you must specify
the PoE state (enable or disable) of the port. Use the WX switch’s PoE to
power 3Com MAP access points only. If you enable PoE on a port
connected to another device, physical damage to the device can result.
Before configuring a port as an MAP access point port, you must use the
set system countrycode command to set the IEEE 802.11
country-specific regulations on the WX switch. See “set system
countrycode” on page 54.
For an MAP that is indirectly connected to the WX switch through an
intermediate Layer 2 or Layer 3 network, use the set dap command to
configure a Distributed MAP.
Before changing the port type from ap to wired-auth or from
wired-auth to ap, you must reset the port with the clear port type
command.
Syntax — set port type ap port-list model {ap2750 | ap3750 |
ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 | mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 |
mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 | mp-352| mp-372}
poe {enable | disable} [radiotype {11a | 11b | 11g}]
port-list — List of physical ports.
model {ap2750 | ap3750 | ap7250 | ap8250 | ap8750 | mp-52 |
mp-101 | mp-122 | mp-241 | mp-252 | mp-262 | mp-341 |
mp-352| mp-372} — MAP access point model:
88 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
ap2750 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g. An external dual-mode
antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap3750 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio
with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
ap7250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. An external antenna
may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap8250 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio. It also has the ability to
have an additional 802.11a radio installed in it. An external
dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the supplied antenna.
ap8750 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.
An external dual-mode antenna may be used in place of the
supplied antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-52 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio, with
adjustable external antennas.
mp-101 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b.
mp-122 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b/g radio.
mp-241 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g.
mp-252 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio.
mp-262 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-341 — Contains one radio that can be configured through
software for 802.11a or 802.11b/g, and a connector for an
external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-352 — Contains one 802.11a radio and one 802.11b radio,
and a connector for an external antenna for the 802.11b/g radio.
mp-372 — Contains one 802.11b/g radio and one 802.11a radio
with connectors for optional external antennas for each radio.
poe enable | disable — Power over Ethernet (PoE) state.
radiotype 11a |11b | 11g — Radio type:
11a — 802.11a
11b — 802.11b
11g — 802.11g
set port type ap 89
This option does not apply to single-radio models. The value 11g does
not apply to model MP-101.
Defaults — All WX ports are network ports by default.
The default radio type for model MP-101 is 802.11b. The default radio
type for model AP2750, AP7250, MP-241, and MP-341, and for the
802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8250, AP8750, MP-52, MP-252,
MP-262, and MP-352 is 802.11g in regulatory domains that support
802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory domains that do not support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
MAP model MP-262 requires an external antenna for the 802.11b/g
radio. You must specify the antenna model. The AP3750 and MAP-3xx
models have an internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an
external antenna, so use of an external antenna is optional on these
models. The AP3750 and MAP-372 also have a connector for an optional
external 802.11a antenna. MAP models MP-341 and MP-352 have an
internal 802.1b/g antenna as well as a connector for an external antenna,
so use of an external antenna is optional on these models. The AP2750,
AP7250, AP8250, and AP8750 models are supplied with detachable
antennas which may be replaced by an external dual-mode antenna. To
specify the external antenna fitted, use the set {ap |dap} radio
antennatype command.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot set a port’s type if the port is a member of a port
VLAN. To remove a port from a VLAN, use the clear vlan command. To
reset a port as a network port, use the clear port type command.
When you change port type, MSS applies default settings appropriate for
the port type. Table 17 lists the default settings that MSS applies when
you set a port’s type to ap.
90 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
This command does not apply to any gigabit Ethernet ports or to ports 7
and 8 on the WX1200 switch. To manage a MAP access point on a
WX4400 switch, use the set dap command to configure a Distributed
MAP connection on the switch.
Examples — The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5
for MAP access point model AP3750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap3750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP3750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap3750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP8250 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap8250 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
The following command sets ports 1 through 3 and port 5 for MAP
access point model AP8750 and enables PoE on the ports:
WX1200# set port type ap 1-3,5 model ap8750 poe enable
This may affect the power applied on the configured ports.
Would you like to continue? (y/n) [n]y
Table 17 MAP Access Port Defaults
Port Parameter Setting
VLAN membership Removed from all VLANs. You cannot assign an MAP
access port to a VLAN. MSS automatically assigns MAP
access ports to VLANs based on user traffic.
Spanning Tree Protocol
(STP) Not applicable
802.1X Uses authentication parameters configured for users.
Port groups Not applicable
IGMP snooping Enabled as users are authenticated and join VLANs.
Maximum user
sessions Not applicable
set port type wired-auth 91
The following command resets port 5 by clearing it:
WX1200# clear port type 5
This may disrupt currently authenticated users.
Are you sure? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear dap on page 62
clear port type on page 65
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315
set dap on page 77
set port type wired-auth on page 91
set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329
set system countrycode on page 54
set port type
wired-auth
Configures a WX switch port for a wired authentication user.
Before changing the port type from ap to wired-auth or from
wired-auth to ap, you must reset the port with the clear port type
command.
Syntax — set port type wired-auth port-list [tag tag-list]
[max-sessions num] [auth-fall-thru {last-resort | none | web
portal}]
port-list — List of physical ports.
tag-list — One or more numbers between 1 and 4094 that
subdivide a wired authentication port into virtual ports.
num — Maximum number of simultaneous user sessions supported.
last resort — Automatically authenticates the user, without
requiring a username and password.
none— Denies authentication and prohibits the user from accessing
the network over this port.
web portal — Serves the user a web page from the WX switch’s
nonvolatile storage for secure login to the network.
92 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
Defaults — The default tag-list is null (no tag values). The default
number of sessions is 1. The default fallthru authentication type is none.
Access — Enabled.
History—Version 3.0: Options added to change the fallthru
authentication type. This is the authentication type that MSS uses is the
user does not support 802.1X and is not authenticated by MAC
authentication. Version 4.0: Option for WebAAA fallthru authentication
type changed from web-auth to web-portal.
Usage — You cannot set a port’s type if the port is a member of a port
VLAN. To remove a port from a VLAN, use the clear vlan command. To
reset a port as a network port, use the clear port type command.
When you change port type, MSS applies default settings appropriate for
the port type. Table 18 lists the default settings that MSS applies when
you set a port’s type to ap.
Examples — The following command sets port 2 for a wired
authentication user:
WX1200# set port type wired-auth 2
success: change accepted
Table 18 Wired Authentication Port Details
Port Parameter Setting
VLAN membership Removed from all VLANs. You cannot assign an MAP access
port to a VLAN. MSS automatically assigns MAP access ports
to VLANs based on user traffic.
Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP) Not applicable
802.1X Uses authentication parameters configured for users.
Port groups Not applicable
IGMP snooping Enabled as users are authenticated and join VLANs.
Maximum user
sessions 1 (one).
Fallthru
authentication type None.
set port type wired-auth 93
The following command sets port 7 for a wired authentication user and
subdivides the port into three virtual ports to support three simultaneous
user sessions:
WX1200# set port type wired-auth 7 1,2,3
success: change accepted
See Also
clear port type on page 65
set port type ap on page 87
94 CHAPTER 4: PORT COMMANDS
5VLAN COMMANDS
Use virtual LAN (VLAN) commands to configure and manage parameters
for individual port VLANs on network ports, and to display information
about clients roaming within a mobility domain.
Commands by
usage
This chapter presents V
LAN comm
ands alphabetically. Use Table 19 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 19 VLAN Commands by Usage
Type Command
Creation set vlan name on page 109
Ports set vlan port on page 110
clear vlan on page 97
display vlan config on page 106
Roaming and Tunnels display roaming station on
page 102
display roaming vlan on page 104
display tunnel on page 105
Tunnel Affinity set vlan tunnel-affinity on
page 111
FDB Entries set fdb on page 107
display fdb on page 98
display fdb count on page 101
clear fdb on page 96
FDB Aging Timeout set fdb agingtime on page 108
display fdb agingtime on page 101
96 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
clear fdb Deletes an entry from the forwarding database (FDB).
Syntax — clear fdb {perm | static | dynamic |
port port-list} [vlan vlan-id] [tag tag-value]
perm — Clears permanent entries. A permanent entry does not age
out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle. You must specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
static — Clears static entries. A static entry does not age out, but is
removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle. You
must specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
dynamic — Clears dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle. You
are not required to specify a VLAN name or number with this option.
port port-list — Clears dynamic entries that match destination
ports in the port list. You are not required to specify a VLAN name or
number with this option.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number—required for removing
permanent and static entries. For dynamic entries, specifying a VLAN
removes entries that match only that VLAN. Otherwise, dynamic
entries that match all VLANs are removed.
tag tag-value — VLAN tag value that identifies a virtual port. If you
do not specify a tag value, MSS deletes only entries that match
untagged interfaces. Specifying a tag value deletes entries that match
only the specified tagged interfaces
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can delete forwarding database entries based on entry
type, port, or VLAN. A VLAN name or number is required for deleting
permanent or static entries.
Examples — The following command clears all static forwarding
database entries that match VLAN blue:
WX4400# clear fdb static vlan blue
success: change accepted.
clear vlan 97
The following command clears all dynamic forwarding database entries
that match all VLANs:
WX4400# clear fdb dynamic
success: change accepted.
The following command clears all dynamic forwarding database entries
that match ports 3 and 5:
WX4400# clear fdb port 3,5
success: change accepted.
See Also
display fdb on page 98
set fdb on page 107
clear vlan Removes physical or virtual ports from a VLAN or removes a VLAN
entirely.
CAUTION: When you remove a VLAN, MSS completely removes the
VLAN from the configuration and also removes all configuration
information that uses the VLAN. If you want to remove only a specific
port from the VLAN, make sure you specify the port number in the
command.
Syntax — clear vlan vlan-id [port port-list [tag tag-value]]
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
port port-list — List of physical ports. MSS removes the specified
ports from the VLAN. If you do not specify a list of ports, MSS removes
the VLAN entirely.
tag tag-value — Tag number that identifies a virtual port. MSS
removes only the specified virtual port from the specified physical
ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
98 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
Usage — If you do not specify a port-list, the entire VLAN is removed
from the configuration.
You cannot delete the default VLAN but you can remove ports from it. To
remove ports from the default VLAN, use the port port-list option.
Examples — The following command removes port 1 from VLAN green:
WX4400# clear vlan green port 1
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.
The following command removes port 4, which uses tag value 69, from
VLAN red:
WX1200# clear vlan red port 4 tag 69
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.
The following command completely removes VLAN marigold:
WX4400# clear vlan marigold
This may disrupt user connectivity.
Do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: change accepted.
See Also
set vlan port on page 110
display vlan config on page 106
display fdb Displays entries in the forwarding database.
Syntax — display fdb [mac-addr-glob [vlan vlan-id ]]
display fdb {perm | static | dynamic | system | all} [port
port-list | vlan vlan-id]
mac-addr-glob — A single MAC address or set of MAC addresses.
Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a
set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on
page 27.)
vlan vlan-id — Name or number of a VLAN for which to display
entries.
display fdb 99
perm — Displays permanent entries. A permanent entry does not age
out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle.
static — Displays static entries. A static entry does not age out, but
is removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
dynamic — Displays dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
system — Displays system entries. A system entry is added by MSS.
For example, the authentication protocols can add entries for wired
and wireless authentication users.
all — Displays all entries in the database, or all the entries that match
a particular port or ports or a particular VLAN.
port port-list — Destination port(s) for which to display entries.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the entire forwarding database, enter the display
fdb command without options. To display only a portion of the database,
use optional parameters to specify the types of entries you want to
display.
Examples — The following command displays all entries in the
forwarding database:
WX4400# display fdb all
* = Static Entry. + = Permanent Entry. # = System Entry.
VLAN TAG Dest MAC/Route Des [CoS] Destination Ports [Protocol Type]
---- ---- ------------------ ----- -----------------------------------------
1 00:01:97:13:0b:1f 1 [ALL]
1 aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff * 3 [ALL]
1 00:0b:0e:02:76:f5 1 [ALL]
Total Matching FDB Entries Displayed = 3
The top line of the display identifies the characters to distinguish among
the entry types.
100 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
The following command displays all entries that begin with the MAC
address glob 00:
WX4400# display fdb 00:*
* = Static Entry. + = Permanent Entry. # = System Entry.
VLAN TAG Dest MAC/Route Des [CoS] Destination Ports [Protocol Type]
---- ---- ------------------ ----- -----------------------------------------
1 00:01:97:13:0b:1f 1 [ALL]
1 00:0b:0e:02:76:f5 1 [ALL]
Total Matching FDB Entries Displayed = 2
Table 20 describes the fields in the display fdb output.
See Also
clear fdb on page 96
set fdb on page 107
Table 20 Output for display fdb
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number.
TAG VLAN tag value. If the interface is untagged, the TAG field
is blank.
Dest MAC/Route Des MAC address of this forwarding entry’s destination.
CoS Type of entry. The entry types are explained in the first
row of the command output.
Note: This Class of Service (CoS) value is not associated
with MSS quality of service (QoS) features.
Destination Ports Wireless LAN switch port associated with the entry. A WX
switch sends traffic to the destination MAC address
through this port.
Protocol Type Layer 3 protocol address types that can be mapped to this
entry.
Total Matching FDB
Entries Displayed Number of entries displayed by the command.
display fdb agingtime 101
display fdb
agingtime
Displays the aging timeout period for forwarding database entries.
Syntax — display fdb agingtime [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the aging timeout period for each VLAN is displayed.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the aging timeout period
for all VLANs:
WX1200# display fdb agingtime
VLAN 2 aging time = 600 sec
VLAN 1 aging time = 300 sec
Because the forwarding database aging timeout period can be
configured only on an individual VLAN basis, the command lists the aging
timeout period for each VLAN separately.
See Also
set fdb agingtime on page 108
display fdb count Lists the number of entries in the forwarding database.
Syntax — display fdb count {perm | static | dynamic}
[vlan vlan-id]
perm — Lists the number of permanent entries. A permanent entry
does not age out and remains in the database even after a reboot,
reset, or power cycle.
static — Lists the number of static entries. A static entry does not
age out, but is removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.
dynamic — Lists the number of dynamic entries. A dynamic entry is
automatically removed through aging or after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.
102 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. Entries are listed for only the
specified VLAN.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The following command lists the number of dynamic entries that the
forwarding database contains:
WX1200# display fdb count dynamic
Total Matching Entries = 2
See Also
display fdb on page 98
display roaming
station
Shows a list of the stations roaming to the wireless LAN switch through a
VLAN tunnel.
Syntax — display roaming station
[vlan vlan-id] [peer ip-addr]
vlan vlan-id — Output is restricted to stations using this VLAN.
peer ip-addr — Output is restricted to stations tunnelling through
this peer WX switch in the Mobility Domain.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The output displays roaming stations within the previous 1
second.
Examples — To display all stations roaming to the WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400# display roaming station
User Name Station IP Addr Old AP MAC VLAN State
----------------------- --------------- ----------------- -------------- ------
redsqa 0.0.0.0 00:00:00:00:00:00 violet Up
display roaming station 103
Table 21 describes the fields in the display.
See Also
display roaming vlan on page 104
Table 21 Output for display roaming station
Field Description
User Name Name of the user. This is the name used for authentication. The
name resides in a RADIUS server database or the local user
database on a wireless LAN switch.
Station IP Addr IP address of the user WX switch.
Old AP MAC MAC address of the access point from which the station is
roaming or attempting to roam.
Note: This field is applicable only for clients that reassociate with
this WX switch from another WX switch.
VLAN Name of the VLAN to which the RADIUS server or WX switch
local user database assigned the user.
State State of the session:
Setup — Station is attempting to roam to this WX switch.
This switch has asked the WX from which the station is
roaming for the station’s session information and is waiting
for a reply.
Up — MSS has established a tunnel between the WX switches
and the station has successfully roamed to this WX over the
tunnel.
Chck — This WX switch is in the process of accepting a
reassociation request from the roaming peer WX switch for a
station currently roaming to the peer switch.
TChck — This WX switch is in the process of accepting a
reassociation request from the roaming peer WX switch for a
station currently roaming to this switch.
WInd — This WX switch is waiting for network congestion to
clear before sending the roaming indication to the roaming
peer WX switch.
WResp — This WX switch is waiting for network congestion
to clear before sending the roaming response to the roaming
peer WX switch.
104 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
display roaming
vlan
Shows all VLANs in the mobility domain, the WX switches servicing the
VLANs, and their tunnel affinity values configured on each switch for the
VLANs.
Syntax — display roaming vlan
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the current roaming
VLANs:
WX4400# display roaming vlan
VLAN WX Affinity
---------------- --------------- --------
vlan-cs 192.168.14.2 5
vlan-eng 192.168.14.4 5
vlan-fin 192.168.14.2 5
vlan-it 192.168.14.4 5
vlan-it 192.168.14.2 5
vlan-pm 192.168.14.2 5
vlan-sm 192.168.14.2 5
vlan-tp 192.168.14.4 5
vlan-tp 192.168.14.2 5
Table 22 describes the fields in the display.
See Also
display roaming station on page 102
display vlan config on page 106
Table 22 Output for display roaming vlan
Field Description
VLAN VLAN name.
WX System IP address of the wireless LAN switch on which the
VLAN is configured.
Affinity Preference of this WX switch for forwarding user traffic for
the VLAN. A higher number indicates a greater preference.
display tunnel 105
display tunnel Shows the tunnels from the wireless LAN switch where you type the
command.
Syntax — display tunnel
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display all tunnels from a WX switch to other WX
switches in the Mobility Domain, type the following command.
WX4400# display tunnel
VLAN Local Address Remote Address State Port LVID RVID
--------------- --------------- --------------- ------- ----- ----- -----
vlan-eng 192.168.14.2 192.168.14.4 DORMANT 1024 4096 130
Table 23 describes the fields in the display.
See Also
display vlan config on page 106
Table 23 Output for display tunnel
Field Description
VLAN VLAN name.
Local Address IP address of the local end of the tunnel. This is the system
IP address of the wireless access switch where you enter
the command.
Remote Address IP address of the remote end of the tunnel. This is the
system IP address of another WX switch in the mobility
domain.
State Tunnel state:
Up
Dormant
Port Tunnel port ID.
LVID Local VLAN ID.
RVID Remote VLAN ID.
106 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
display vlan config Shows VLAN information.
Syntax — display vlan config [vlan-id]
vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
information for all VLANs is displayed.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays information for VLAN
burgundy:
WX1200# display vlan config burgundy
Admin VLAN Tunl Port
VLAN Name Status State Affin Port Tag State
---- ---------------- ------ ----- ----- ---------------- ----- -----
2 burgundy Up Up 5
2 none Up
3 none Up
4 none Up
6 none Up
t:10.10.40.4 none Up
Table 24 describes the fields in this display.
Table 24 Output for display vlan config
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number.
Name VLAN name.
Admin Status Administrative status of the VLAN:
Down — The VLAN is disabled.
Up — The VLAN is enabled.
VLAN State Link status of the VLAN:
Down — The VLAN is not connected.
Up — The VLAN is connected.
set fdb 107
See Also
clear vlan on page 97
set vlan name on page 109
set vlan port on page 110
set vlan tunnel-affinity on page 111
set fdb Adds a permanent or static entry to the forwarding database.
Syntax — set fdb {perm | static}
mac-addr port port-list vlan vlan-id [tag tag-value]
perm — Adds a permanent entry. A permanent entry does not age out
and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
static — Adds a static entry. A static entry does not age out, but is
removed from the database after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
mac-addr — Destination MAC address of the entry. Use colons to
separate the octets (for example, 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-list — List of physical destination ports for which to add
the entry. A separate entry is added for each port you specify.
Tunl Affin Tunnel affinity value assigned to the VLAN.
Port Member port of the VLAN. The port can be a physical port or a
virtual port.
Physical ports are 10/100 Ethernet or gigabit Ethernet ports on
the WX switch, and are listed by port number.
Virtual ports are tunnels to other WX switches in a mobility
domain, and are listed as follows: t:ip-addr, where ip-addr is the
system IP address of the WX switch at the other end of the
tunnel.
Note: This field can include MAP access ports and wired
authentication ports, because MSS dynamically adds these ports to a
VLAN when handling user traffic for the VLAN.
Tag Tag value assigned to the port.
Port State Link state of the port:
Down — The port is not connected.
Up — The port is connected.
Table 24 Output for display vlan config (continued)
Field Description
108 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
vlan vlan-id — Name or number of a VLAN of which the port is a
member. The entry is added only for the specified VLAN.
tag tag-value — VLAN tag value that identifies a virtual port. You
can specify a number from 1 through 4095. If you do not specify a tag
value, an entry is created for an untagged interface only. If you specify
a tag value, an entry is created only for the specified tagged interface.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add a multicast or broadcast address as a
permanent or static FDB entry.
Examples — The following command adds a permanent entry for MAC
address 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc on ports 3 and 5 in VLAN blue:
WX1200# set fdb perm 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc port 3,5 vlan blue
success: change accepted.
The following command adds a static entry for MAC address
00:2b:3c:4d:5e:6f on port 1 in the default VLAN:
WX4400# set fdb static 00:2b:3c:4d:5e:6f port 1 vlan default
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear fdb on page 96
display fdb on page 98
set fdb agingtime Changes the aging timeout period for dynamic entries in the forwarding
database.
Syntax — set fdb agingtime vlan-id age seconds
vlan-id — VLAN name or number. The timeout period change
applies only to entries that match the specified VLAN.
age seconds — Value for the timeout period, in seconds. You can
specify a value from 0 through 1,000,000. If you change the timeout
period to 0, aging is disabled.
set vlan name 109
Defaults — The aging timeout period is 300 seconds (5 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the aging timeout period
to 600 seconds for entries that match VLAN orange:
WX4400# set fdb agingtime orange age 600
success: change accepted.
See Also
display fdb agingtime on page 101
set vlan name Creates a VLAN and assigns a number and name to it.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-num name name
vlan-num — VLAN number. You can specify a number from 2 through
4095.
name — String up to 16 alphabetic characters long.
Defaults — VLAN 1 is named default by default. No other VLANs have
default names.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must assign a name to a VLAN (other than the default
VLAN) before you can add ports to the VLAN.
3Com recommends that you do not use the name default. This name is
already used for VLAN 1. 3Com also recommends that you do not
rename the default VLAN.
You cannot use a number as the first character in a VLAN name. 3Com
recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for VLANs. For example, do not configure two separate
VLANs with the names red and RED.
110 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
VLAN names are case-sensitive for RADIUS authorization when a client
roams to a wireless LAN switch. If the WX switch is not configured with
the VLAN the client is on, but is configured with a VLAN that has the
same spelling but different capitalization, authorization for the client fails.
For example, if the client is on VLAN red but the WX switch to which the
client roams has VLAN RED instead, RADIUS authorization fails.
Examples — The following command assigns the name marigold to
VLAN 3:
WX4400# set vlan 3 name marigold
success: change accepted.
See Also
set vlan port on page 110
set vlan port Assigns one or more network ports to a VLAN. You also can add a virtual
port to each network port by adding a tag value to the network port.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-id port port-list [tag tag-value]
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
port port-list — List of physical ports.
tag tag-value — Tag value that identifies a virtual port. You can
specify a value from 1 through 4095.
By default, no ports are members of any VLANs. A wireless LAN switch
cannot forward traffic on the network until you configure VLANs and add
network ports to the VLANs.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can combine this command with the set port name
command to assign the name and add the ports at the same time.
If you do not specify a tag value, the WX switch sends untagged frames
for the VLAN. If you do specify a tag value, the WX sends tagged frames
only for the VLAN.
set vlan tunnel-affinity 111
If you do specify a tag value, 3Com recommends that you use the same
value as the VLAN number. MSS does not require the VLAN number and
tag value to be the same but some other switches do.
Examples — The following command assigns the name beige to VLAN
11 and adds ports 1 through 3 to the VLAN:
WX1200# set vlan 11 name beige port 1-3
success: change accepted.
The following command adds port 6 to VLAN beige and assigns tag value
86 to the port:
WX1200# set vlan beige port 6 tag 86
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear vlan on page 97
display vlan config on page 106
set vlan name on page 109
set vlan
tunnel-affinity
Changes a wireless LAN switch’s preferability within a mobility domain for
tunneling user traffic for a VLAN. When a user roams to a WX switch that
is not a member of the user’s VLAN, the WX can forward the user traffic
by tunneling to another WX switch that is a member of the VLAN.
Syntax — set vlan vlan-id tunnel-affinity num
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
num — Preference of this switch for forwarding user traffic for the
VLAN. You can specify a value from 1 through 10. A higher number
indicates a greater preference.
Defaults — Each VLAN on a WX switch’s network ports has an affinity
value of 5 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Increasing a WX switch’s affinity value increases the WX’s
preferability for forwarding user traffic for the VLAN.
112 CHAPTER 5: VLAN COMMANDS
If more than one WX switch has the highest affinity value, MSS randomly
selects one of the WX switches for the tunnel.
Examples — The following command changes the VLAN affinity for
VLAN beige to 10:
WX4400# set vlan beige tunnel-affinity 10
success: change accepted.
See Also
display roaming vlan on page 104
display vlan config on page 106
6IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Use IP services commands to configure and manage IP interfaces,
management services, the Domain Name Service (DNS), Network Time
Protocol (NTP), and aliases, and to ping a host or trace a route.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents IP services commands alphabetically. Use Table 25
to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage
Type Command
IP Interface set interface on page 143
set interface dhcp-client on page 144
set interface status on page 146
display interface on page 126
display dhcp-client on page 182
clear interface on page 115
System IP Address set system ip-address on page 179
clear system ip-address on page 124
IP Route set ip route on page 150
display ip route on page 131
clear ip route on page 118
SSH Management set ip ssh server on page 155
set ip ssh on page 153
set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155
set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154
Telnet Management set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157
114 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display ip telnet on page 133
clear ip telnet on page 119
HTTPS Management set ip https server on page 150
display ip https on page 129
DNS set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
display ip dns on page 128
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117
IP Alias set ip alias on page 147
display ip alias on page 127
clear ip alias on page 116
Time and Date set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
set summertime on page 177
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
display summertime on page 138
clear timezone on page 124
clear snmp usm on page 122
NTP set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
display ntp on page 134
clear ntp server on page 119
clear ntp update-interval on page 120
ARP set arp on page 141
set arp agingtime on page 142
telnet on page 195
SNMP set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear interface 115
clear interface Removes an IP interface.
Syntax — clear interface vlan-id ip
vlan-id — VLAN name or number
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp usm on page 174
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp notify target on page 162
set ip snmp server on page 152
display snmp status on page 191
display snmp community on page 186
display snmp usm on page 193
display snmp notify profile on page 188
display snmp notify target on page 189
display snmp counters on page 187
clear snmp community on page 121
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear snmp profile on page 122
clear snmp notify target on page 121
Ping ping on page 140
Telnet Client telnet on page 195
Traceroute traceroute on page 196
DHCP server set interface dhcp-server on page 145
display dhcp-server on page 183
Table 25 IP Services Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
116 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Usage — If the interface you want to remove is configured as the system
IP address, removing the address can interfere with system tasks that use
the system IP address, including the following:
Mobility domain operations
Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points
Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps
Examples — The following command removes the IP interface
configured on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# clear interface mauve ip
success: cleared ip on vlan mauve
See Also
set interface on page 143
set interface status on page 146
display interface on page 126
clear ip alias Removes an alias, which is a string that represents an IP address.
Syntax — clear ip alias name
name — Alias name
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the alias server1:
WX1200# clear ip alias server1
success: change accepted.
See Also
display ip alias on page 127
clear ip dns domain 117
clear ip dns domain Removes the default DNS domain name.
Syntax — clear ip dns domain
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the default DNS domain
name from a WX switch:
WX1200# clear ip dns domain
Default DNS domain name cleared.
See Also
clear ip dns server on page 117
display ip dns on page 128
set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
clear ip dns server Removes a DNS server from a WX switch configuration.
Syntax — clear ip dns server ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address of a DNS server.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes DNS server 10.10.10.69
from a WX switch’s configuration:
WX4400# clear ip dns server 10.10.10.69
success: change accepted.
118 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
clear ip dns domain on page 117
display ip dns on page 128
set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
clear ip route Removes a route from the IP route table.
Syntax — clear ip route {default | ip-addr mask |
ip-addr/mask-length} gateway
default — Default route.
default is an alias for IP address 0.0.0.0/0.
ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask for the route
destination, in dotted decimal notation (for example, 10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0).
ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR
format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
gateway — IP address, DNS hostname, or alias of the next-hop router.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the route to destination
10.10.10.68/24 through gateway router 10.10.10.1:
WX1200# clear ip route 10.10.10.68/24 10.10.10.1
success: change accepted.
See Also
display ip route on page 131
set ip route on page 150
clear ip telnet 119
clear ip telnet Resets the Telnet server’s TCP port number to its default value. A WX
switch listens for Telnet management traffic on the Telnet server port.
Syntax — clear ip telnet
Defaults — The default Telnet port number is 23.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command resets the TCP port number for
Telnet management traffic to its default:
WX4400# clear ip telnet
success: change accepted.
See Also
display ip https on page 129
display ip telnet on page 133
set ip https server on page 150
set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157
clear ntp server Removes an NTP server from a WX switch configuration.
Syntax — clear ntp server {ip-addr | all}
ip-addr — IP address of the server to remove, in dotted decimal
notation.
all — Removes all NTP servers from the configuration.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
120 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Examples — The following command removes NTP server
192.168.40.240 from a WX switch configuration:
WX4400# clear ntp server 192.168.40.240
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ntp update-interval on page 120
display ntp on page 134
set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
clear ntp
update-interval
Resets the NTP update interval to the default value.
Syntax — clear ntp update-interval
Defaults — The default NTP update interval is 64 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the NTP interval to the default value, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear ntp update-interval
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ntp server on page 119
display ntp on page 134
set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
clear snmp community 121
clear snmp
community
Clears an SNMP community string.
Syntax — clear snmp community name comm-string
comm-string — Name of the SNMP community you want to clear.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears community string
setswitch2:
WX-1200# clear snmp community name setswitch2
success: change accepted.
See Also
set snmp community on page 160
display snmp community on page 186
clear snmp notify
target
Clears an SNMP notification target.
Syntax — clear snmp notify target target-num
target-num — ID of the target.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears notification target 3:
WX-1200# clear snmp notify target 3
success: change accepted.
122 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
set snmp notify target on page 162
display snmp notify target on page 189
clear snmp profile Clears an SNMP notification profile.
Syntax — clear snmp profile profile-name
profile-name — Name of the notification profile you are clearing.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears notification profile
snmpprof_rfdetect:
WX-1200# clear snmp profile snmpprof_rfdetect
success: change accepted.
See Also
set snmp profile on page 167
display snmp notify profile on page 188
clear snmp trap
receiver
This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To clear an SNMP
notification target (also called trap receiver), see clear snmp notify
target on page 121.
clear snmp usm Clears an SNMPv3 user.
Syntax — clear snmp usm usm-username
usm-username — Name of the SNMPv3 user you want to clear.
Defaults — None.
clear summertime 123
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears SNMPv3 user snmpmgr1:
WX-1200# clear snmp usm snmpmgr1
success: change accepted.
See Also
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp usm on page 193
clear summertime Clears the summertime setting from a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — clear summertime
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear the summertime setting from a WX switch, type
the following command:
WX1200# clear summertime
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set summertime on page 177
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
124 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
clear system
ip-address
Clears the system IP address.
CAUTION: Clearing the system IP address disrupts the system tasks that
use the address.
Syntax — clear system ip-address
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Clearing the system IP address can interfere with system tasks
that use the system IP address, including the following:
Mobility Domain operations
Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points
Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps
Examples — To clear the system IP address, type the following
command:
WX1200# clear system ip-address
success: change accepted.
See Also
display system on page 42
set system ip-address on page 179
clear timezone Clears the time offset for the wireless LAN switch’s real-time clock from
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). UTC is also know as Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT).
Syntax — clear timezone
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
display arp 125
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To return the WX switch’s real-time clock to UTC, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear timezone
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
set summertime on page 177
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
display arp Shows the ARP table.
Syntax — display arp [ip-addr]
ip-addr — IP address.
Defaults — If you do not specify an IP address, the whole ARP table is
displayed.
Usage — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays ARP entries:
WX4400# display arp
ARP aging time: 1200 seconds
Host HW Address VLAN Type State
------------------------------ ----------------- ----- ------- --------
10.5.4.51 00:0b:0e:02:76:f5 1 DYNAMIC RESOLVED
10.5.4.53 00:0b:0e:02:76:f7 1 LOCAL RESOLVED
Table 26 describes the fields in this display.
126 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
set arp on page 141
set arp agingtime on page 142
display interface Shows the IP interfaces configured on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display interface [vlan-id]
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
Defaults — If you do not specify a VLAN ID, interfaces for all VLANs are
displayed.
Usage — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 26 Output for display arp
Field Description
ARP aging time Number of seconds a dynamic entry can remain unused
before MSS removes the entry from the ARP table.
Host IP address, hostname, or alias.
HW Address MAC address mapped to the IP address, hostname, or alias.
VLAN VLAN the entry is for.
Type Entry type:
DYNAMIC — Entry was learned from network traffic and
ages out if unused for longer than the ARP aging
timeout.
LOCAL — Entry for the WX switch’s MAC address. Each
VLAN has one local entry for the WX switch’s MAC
address.
PERMANENT — Entry does not age out and remains in
the configuration even following a reboot.
STATIC — Entry does not age out but is removed after a
reboot.
State Entry state:
RESOLVING — MSS sent an ARP request for the entry
and is waiting for the reply.
RESOLVED — Entry is resolved.
display ip alias 127
Examples — The following command displays all the IP interfaces
configured on a WX switch:
WX4400# display interface
VLAN Name Address Mask Enabled State
---- --------------- --------------- --------------- ------- -----
1 default 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0 YES Up
2 mauve 10.10.20.10 255.255.255.0 NO Down
Table 27 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
set interface on page 143
set interface status on page 146
display ip alias Shows the IP aliases configured on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display ip alias [name]
name — Alias string.
Defaults — If you do not specify an alias name, all aliases are displayed.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 27 Output for display interface
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number
Name VLAN name
Address IP address
Mask Subnet mask
Enabled Administrative state:
YES (enabled)
NO (disabled)
State Link state:
Up (operational)
Down (unavailable)
128 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Examples — The following command displays all the aliases configured
on a WX switch:
WX4400# display ip alias
Name IP Address
-------------------- --------------------
HR1 192.168.1.2
payroll 192.168.1.3
radius1 192.168.7.2
Table 28 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear ip alias on page 116
set ip alias on page 147
display ip dns Shows the DNS servers the wireless LAN switch is configured to use.
Syntax — display ip dns
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the DNS information:
WX4400# display ip dns
Domain Name: example.com
DNS Status: enabled
IP Address Type
-----------------------------------
10.1.1.1 PRIMARY
10.1.1.2 SECONDARY
10.1.2.1 SECONDARY
Table 28 Output for display ip alias
Field Description
Name Alias string.
IP Address IP address associated with the alias.
display ip https 129
Table 29 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117
set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
display ip https Shows information about the HTTPS management port.
Syntax — display ip https
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 29 Output for display ip dns
Field Description
Domain Name Default domain name configured on the WX switch
DNS Status Status of the WX switch’s DNS client:
Enabled
Disabled
IP Address IP address of the DNS server
Type Server type:
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
130 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Examples — The following command shows the status and port number
for the HTTPS management interface to the WX switch:
WX4400# display ip https
HTTPS is enabled
HTTPS is set to use port 443
Last 10 Connections:
IP Address Last Connected Time Ago (s)
------------ ----------------------- ------------
10.10.10.56 2003/05/09 15:51:26 pst 349
Table 30 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear ip telnet on page 119
display ip telnet on page 133
set ip https server on page 150
set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157
Table 30 Output for display ip https
Field Description
HTTPS is
enabled/disabled State of the HTTPS server:
Enabled
Disabled
HTTPS is set to use port TCP port number on which the WX switch listens for
HTTPS connections.
Last 10 connections List of the last 10 devices to establish connections to
the WX switch’s HTTPS server.
IP Address IP address of the device that established the
connection.
If a browser connects to a WX switch from behind a
proxy, then only the proxy IP address is shown. If
multiple browsers connect using the same proxy, the
proxy address appears only once in the output.
Last Connected Time when the WX switch established the HTTPS
connection to the WX switch.
Time Ago (s) Number of seconds since the device established the
HTTPS connection to the WX switch.
display ip route 131
display ip route Shows the IP route table.
Syntax — display ip route [destination]
destination — Route destination IP address, in dotted decimal
notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you add an IP interface to a VLAN that is up, MSS adds
direct and local routes for the interface to the route table. If the VLAN is
down, MSS does not add the routes. If you add an interface to a VLAN
but the routes for that interface do not appear in the route table, use the
display vlan config command to check the VLAN state.
If you add a static route and the route’s state is shown as Down, use the
display interface command to verify that the route has an IP interface in
the gateway router’s subnet. MSS cannot resolve a static route unless one
of the WX switch’s VLANs has an interface in the gateway router’s
subnet. If the WX switch has such an interface but the static route is still
down, use the display vlan config command to check the state of the
VLAN’s ports.
Examples — The following command shows all routes in a WX switch’s
IP route table:
WX4400# display ip route
Router table for IPv4
Destination/Mask Proto Metric NH-Type Gateway VLAN:Interface
__________________ _______ ______ _______ _______________ _______________
0.0.0.0/ 0 Static 1 Router 10.0.1.17 Down
0.0.0.0/ 0 Static 2 Router 10.0.2.17 vlan:2:ip
10.0.2.1/24 IP 0 Direct vlan:2:ip
10.0.2.1/32 IP 0 Direct vlan:2:ip:10.0.1.1/24
10.0.2.255/32 IP 0 Direct vlan:2:ip:10.0.1.1/24
224.0.0.0/ 4 IP 0 Local MULTICAST
Table 31 describes the fields in this display.
132 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
clear ip route on page 118
display interface on page 126
display vlan config on page 106
set interface on page 143
set ip route on page 150
Table 31 Output of display ip route
Field Description
Destination/Mask IP address and subnet mask of the route destination.
The 244.0.0.0 route is automatically added by MSS and
supports the IGMP snooping feature.
Proto Protocol that added the route to the IP route table. The protocol
can be one of the following:
IP — MSS added the route.
Static — An administrator added the route.
Metric Cost for using the route.
NH-Type Next-hop type:
Local — Route is for a local interface. MSS adds the route
when you configure an IP address on the WX switch.
Direct — Route is for a locally attached subnet. MSS adds
the route when you add an interface in the same subnet to
the WX switch.
Router — Route is for a remote destination. A WX switch
forwards traffic for the destination to the gateway router.
Gateway Next-hop router for reaching the route destination.
This field applies only to static routes.
VLAN:Interface Destination VLAN, protocol type, and IP address of the route.
Because direct routes are for local interfaces, a destination IP
address is not listed.
The destination for the IP multicast route is MULTICAST.
For static routes, the value Down means the WX switch does not
have an interface to the destination’s next-hop router. To
provide an interface, configure an IP interface that is in the same
IP subnet as the next-hop router. The IP interface must be on a
VLAN containing the port that is attached to the gateway
router.
display ip telnet 133
display ip telnet Shows information about the Telnet management port.
Syntax — display ip telnet
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the status and port number
for the Telnet management interface to the WX switch:
WX4400> display ip telnet
Server Status Port
----------------------------------
Enabled 23
Table 32 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear ip telnet on page 119
display ip https on page 129
set ip https server on page 150
set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157
Table 32 Output for display ip telnet
Field Description
Server Status State of the HTTPS server:
Enabled
Disabled
Port TCP port number on which the WX switch listens for Telnet
management traffic.
134 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display ntp Shows NTP client information.
Syntax — display ntp
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display NTP information for a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400> display ntp
NTP client: enabled
Current update-interval: 20(secs)
Current time: Fri Feb 06 2004, 12:02:57
Timezone is set to 'PST', offset from UTC is -8:0 hours.
Summertime is enabled.
Last NTP update: Fri Feb 06 2004, 12:02:46
NTP Server Peer state Local State
---------------------------------------------------
192.168.1.5 SYSPEER SYNCED
Table 33 describes the fields in this display.
Table 33 Output for display ntp
Field Description
NTP client State of the NTP client. The state can be one of the
following:
Enabled
Disabled
Current update-interval Number of seconds between queries sent by the WX
switch to the NTP servers for updates.
Current time System time that was current on the WX switch when you
pressed Enter after typing the display ntp command.
Timezone Time zone configured on the WX switch. MSS offsets the
time reported by the NTP server based on the time zone.
This field is displayed only if you change the time zone.
display ntp 135
See Also
clear ntp server on page 119
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display timezone on page 139
set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set summertime on page 177
set timezone on page 181
Summertime Summertime period configured on the WX switch. MSS
offsets the system time +1 hour and returns it to standard
time for daylight savings time or a similar summertime
period that you set.
This field is displayed only if you enable summertime.
Last NTP update Time when the WX switch received the most recent
update from an NTP server.
NTP Server IP address of the NTP server.
Peer state State of the NTP session from the point of view of the NTP
server:
CORRECT
REJECT
SELCAND
SYNCCAND
SYSPEER
Local state State of the NTP session from the point of view of the WX
switch’s NTP client:
INITED
START
SYNCED
Table 33 Output for display ntp (continued)
Field Description
136 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display snmp
configuration
Shows SNMP settings on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — display snmp configuration
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display SNMP settings on a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX1200# display snmp configuration
Snmp agent is enabled
System Name: WX1200
System location:
System contact:
Trap Name Enabled
---------------------------------- -------
LinkDownTraps YES
LinkUpTraps YES
AuthenTraps YES
DeviceFailTraps YES
DeviceOkayTraps YES
PoEFailTraps YES
MAPTimeoutTraps YES
MAPBootTraps YES
MobilityDomainJoinTraps YES
MobilityDomainTimeoutTraps YES
MichaelMICFailureTraps YES
RFDetectRogueAPTraps YES
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps YES
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps YES
ClientAuthenticationFailureTraps YES
ClientAuthorizationFailureTraps YES
ClientAssociationFailureTraps YES
ClientAuthorizationSuccessTraps YES
ClientClearedTraps YES
ClientDeAssociationTraps YES
ClientRoamingTraps YES
AutoTuneRadioPowerChangeTraps YES
AutoTuneRadioChannelChangeTraps YES
CounterMeasureStartTraps YES
display snmp configuration 137
CounterMeasureStopTraps YES
ClientDot1xFailureTraps YES
Community Access Community Name
---------------- --------------
read-only public
read-write private
Table 34 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
set ip snmp server on page 152
set port trap on page 86
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp notify target on page 162
set system contact on page 54
set system location on page 58
set system name on page 58
Table 34 Output of display snmp configuration
Field Description
Snmp agent is State of the SNMP agent on the WX switch:
Enabled
Disabled
System Name String configured by the set system name command.
System location String configured by the set system location command.
System contact String configured by the set system contact command.
System description WX switch model.
Trap Receiver IP address of each trap receiver.
Trap Name SNMP traps supported by MSS.
Enabled State of each trap:
Yes
No
Community Access Type of access for an SNMP community.
138 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display
summertime
Shows a wireless LAN switch’s offset from its real-time clock.
Syntax — display summertime
Defaults — There is no summertime offset by default.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the summertime setting on a WX switch, type
the following command:
WX1200# display summertime
Summertime is enabled, and set to 'PDT'.
Start : Sun Apr 04 2004, 02:00:00
End : Sun Oct 31 2004, 02:00:00
Offset : 60 minutes
Recurring : yes, starting at 2:00 am of first Sunday of April
and ending at 2:00 am on last Sunday of October.
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set summertime on page 177
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
display timedate Shows the date and time of day currently set on a wireless LAN switch’s
real-time clock.
Syntax — display timedate
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
display timezone 139
Examples — To display the time and date set on a WX switch’s real-time
clock, type the following command:
WX1200# display timedate
Sun Feb 29 2004, 23:59:02 PST
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set summertime on page 177
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
display timezone Shows the time offset for the real-time clock from UTC on a wireless LAN
switch.
Syntax — display timezone
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the offset from UTC, type the following
command:
WX4400# display timezone
Timezone set to 'pst', offset from UTC is -8 hours
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
set summertime on page 177
140 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
ping Tests IP connectivity between a wireless LAN switch and another device.
MSS sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo packet to
the specified WX switch and listens for a reply packet.
Syntax — ping host [count num-packets ] [dnf] [flood]
[interval time] [size size] [source-ip ip-addr | vlan-name]
host — IP address, MAC address, hostname, alias, or user to ping.
count num-packets — Number of ping packets to send. You can
specify from 0 through 2,147,483,647. If you enter 0, MSS pings
continuously until you interrupt the command.
dnf — Enables the Do Not Fragment bit in the ping packet to prevent
the packet from being fragmented.
flood — Sends new ping packets as quickly as replies are received, or
100 times per second, whichever is greater.
Use the flood option sparingly. This option creates a lot of traffic and can
affect other traffic on the network.
interval time — Time interval between ping packets, in
milliseconds. You can specify from 100 through 10,000.
size size — Packet size, in bytes. You can specify from 56 through
65,507.
Because the WX switch adds header information, the ICMP packet size is
8 bytes larger than the size you specify.
source-ip ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation, to use
as the source IP address in the ping packets.
source-ip vlan-name — VLAN name to use as the ping source. MSS
uses the IP address configured on the VLAN as the source IP address in
the ping packets.
Defaults
count — 5.
dnf — Disabled.
interval — 100 (one tenth of a second)
set arp 141
size — 56.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To stop a ping command that is in progress, press Ctrl+C.
Examples — The following command pings a WX switch that has IP
address 10.1.1.1:
WX1200# ping 10.1.1.1
PING 10.1.1.1 (10.1.1.1) from 10.9.4.34 : 56(84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.769 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=0.628 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=0.676 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=0.619 ms
64 bytes from 10.1.1.1: icmp_seq=5 ttl=255 time=0.608 ms
--- 10.1.1.1 ping statistics ---
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0 errors, 0% packet loss
See Also
traceroute on page 196
set arp Adds an ARP entry to the ARP table.
Syntax — set arp {permanent | static | dynamic }
ip-addr mac-addr
permanent — Adds a permanent entry. A permanent entry does not
age out and remains in the database even after a reboot, reset, or
power cycle.
static — Adds a static entry. A static entry does not age out, but the
entry does not remain in the database after a reboot, reset, or power
cycle.
dynamic — Adds a dynamic entry. A dynamic entry is automatically
removed if the entry ages out, or after a reboot, reset, or power cycle.
ip-addr — IP address of the entry, in dotted decimal notation.
mac-addr — MAC address to map to the IP address. Use colons to
separate the octets (for example, 00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
Defaults — The default aging timeout is 1200 seconds.
142 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command adds a static ARP entry that maps
IP address 10.10.10.1 to MAC address 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff:
WX1200# set arp static 10.10.10.1 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
success: added arp 10.10.10.1 at 00:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff on VLAN 1
See Also
set arp agingtime on page 142
telnet on page 195
set arp agingtime Changes the aging timeout for dynamic ARP entries.
Syntax — set arp agingtime seconds
seconds — Number of seconds an entry can remain unused before
MSS removes the entry. You can specify from 0 through 1,000,000.
To disable aging, specify 0.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Aging applies only to dynamic entries.
To reset the ARP aging timeout to its default value, use the set arp
agingtime 1200 command.
Examples — The following command changes the ARP aging timeout to
1800 seconds:
WX1200# set arp agingtime 1800
success: set arp aging time to 1800 seconds
The following command disables ARP aging:
WX1200# set arp agingtime 0
success: set arp aging time to 0 seconds
set interface 143
See Also
set arp on page 141
telnet on page 195
set interface Configures an IP interface on a VLAN.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip
{ip-addr mask | ip-addr/mask-length}
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask in dotted decimal
notation (for example, 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0).
ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR
format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can assign one IP interface to each VLAN.
If an interface is already configured on the VLAN you specify, this
command replaces the interface. If you replace an interface that is in use
as the system IP address, replacing the interface can interfere with system
tasks that use the system IP address, including the following:
Mobility domain operations
Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points
Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps
Examples — The following command configures IP interface
10.10.10.10/24 on VLAN default:
WX1200# set interface default ip 10.10.10.10/24
success: set ip address 10.10.10.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan default
144 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
The following command configures IP interface 10.10.20.10
255.255.255.0 on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set interface mauve ip 10.10.20.10 255.255.255.0
success: set ip address 10.10.20.10 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan mauve
See Also
clear interface on page 115
display interface on page 126
set interface status on page 146
set interface
dhcp-client
Configures the DHCP client on a VLAN, to allow the VLAN to obtain its
IP interface from a DHCP server.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip dhcp-client {enable | disable}
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
enable — Enables the DHCP client on the VLAN.
disable — Disables the DHCP client on the VLAN.
Defaults — The DHCP client is enabled by default on an unconfigured
WXR100 when the Fn switch is pressed and held during power on.
The DHCP client is disabled by default on all other switch models, and is
disabled on an WXR100 if the switch is already configured or the Fn
switch is not pressed and held during power on.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can enable the DHCP client on one VLAN only. You can
configure the DHCP client on more than one VLAN, but the client can be
active on only one VLAN.
MSS also has a configurable DHCP server. (See set interface
dhcp-server on page 145.) You can configure a DHCP client and DHCP
server on the same VLAN, but only the client or the server can be
enabled. The DHCP client and DHCP server cannot both be enabled on
the same VLAN at the same time.
set interface dhcp-server 145
Examples — The following command enables the DHCP client on VLAN
corpvlan:
WX-1200# set interface corpvlan ip dhcp-client enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear interface on page 115
display dhcp-client on page 182
display interface on page 126
set interface
dhcp-server
Configures the MSS DHCP server.
Use of the MSS DHCP server to allocate client addresses is intended for
temporary, demonstration deployments and not for production
networks. 3Com recommends that you do not use the MSS DHCP server
to allocate client addresses in a production network.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id ip dhcp-server [enable | disable]
[start ip-addr1 stop ip-addr2]
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
enable — Enables the DHCP server.
disable — Disables the DHCP server.
start ip-addr1 — Specifies the beginning address of the address range
(also called the address pool).
stop ip-addr2 — Specifies the ending address of the address range.
Defaults — The DHCP server is enabled by default on a new
(unconfigured) WXR100 or WX1200, in order to provide an IP address to
the host connected to the switch for access to the Web Quick Start. On
all switch models, the DHCP server is enabled and cannot be disabled for
directly connected MAPs.
The DHCP server is disabled by default for any other use.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
146 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Usage — By default, all addresses except the host address of the VLAN,
the network broadcast address, and the subnet broadcast address are
included in the range. If you specify the range, the start address must be
lower than the stop address, and all addresses must be in the same
subnet. The IP interface of the VLAN must be within the same subnet but
is not required to be within the range.
Examples — The following command enables the DHCP server on VLAN
red-vlan to serve addresses from the 192.168.1.5 to 192.168.1.25 range:
WX-1200# set interface red-vlan ip dhcp-server enable start
192.168.1.5 stop 192.168.1.25
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dhcp-server on page 183
set interface status Administratively disables or reenables an IP interface.
Syntax — set interface vlan-id status {up | down}
vlan-id — VLAN name or number.
up — Enables the interface.
down — Disables the interface.
Defaults — IP interfaces are enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables the IP interface on VLAN
mauve:
WX4400# set interface mauve status down
success: set interface mauve to down
See Also
clear interface on page 115
display interface on page 126
set interface on page 143
set ip alias 147
set ip alias Configures an alias, which maps a name to an IP address. You can use
aliases as shortcuts in CLI commands.
Syntax — set ip alias name ip-addr
name — String of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
ip-addr — IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command configures the alias HR1 for IP
address 192.168.1.2:
WX4400# set ip alias HR1 192.168.1.2
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ip alias on page 116
display ip alias on page 127
set ip dns Enables or disables DNS on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ip dns {enable | disable}
enable — Enables DNS.
disable — Disables DNS.
Defaults — DNS is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History— Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables DNS on a WX switch:
WX1200# set ip dns enable
Start DNS Client
148 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117
display ip dns on page 128
set ip dns domain on page 148
set ip dns server on page 149
set ip dns domain Configures a default domain name for DNS queries. The wireless LAN
switch appends the default domain name to domain names or
hostnames you enter in commands.
Syntax — set ip dns domain name
name — Domain name of between 1 and 64 alphanumeric characters
with no spaces (for example, example.org).
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — To override the default domain name when entering a
hostname in a CLI command, enter a period at the end of the hostname.
For example, if the default domain name is example.com, enter chris. if
the fully qualified hostname is chris and not chris.example.com.
Aliases take precedence over DNS. When you enter a hostname, MSS checks
for an alias with that name first, before using DNS to resolve the name.
Examples — The following command configures the default domain
name example.com:
WX1200# set ip dns domain example.com
Domain name changed
See Also
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117
display ip dns on page 128
set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns server on page 149
set ip dns server 149
set ip dns server Specifies a DNS server to use for resolving hostnames you enter in CLI
commands.
Syntax — set ip dns server ip-addr {primary | secondary}
ip-addr — IP address of a DNS server, in dotted decimal or CIDR
notation.
primary — Makes the server the primary server, which MSS always
consults first for resolving DNS queries.
secondary — Makes the server a secondary server. MSS consults a
secondary server only if the primary server does not reply.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — You can configure a WX switch to use one primary DNS server
and up to five secondary DNS servers.
Examples — The following commands configure a WX switch to use a
primary DNS server and two secondary DNS servers:
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.10.50/24 primary
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.20.69/24 secondary
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set ip dns server 10.10.30.69/24 secondary
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ip dns domain on page 117
clear ip dns server on page 117
display ip dns on page 128
set ip dns on page 147
set ip dns domain on page 148
150 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set ip https server Enables the HTTPS server on a WX switch. The HTTPS server is required
for Web Manager access to the switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the HTTPS server, Web Manager access to the
WX switch is disabled.
Syntax — set ip https server {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the HTTPS server.
disable — Disables the HTTPS server.
Defaults — The HTTPS server is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — The default is changed to disabled in 3.1. In addition, the
HTTPS server is no longer required for WebAAA.
Examples — The following command enables the HTTPS server on a WX
switch:
WX1200# set ip https server enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ip telnet on page 119
display ip https on page 129
display ip telnet on page 133
set ip telnet on page 156
set ip telnet server on page 157
set ip route Adds a static route to the IP route table.
Syntax — set ip route {default | ip-addr mask |
ip-addr/mask-length} gateway metric
default — Default route. A WX switch uses the default route if an
explicit route is not available for the destination.
Default is an alias for IP address 0.0.0.0/0.
set ip route 151
ip-addr mask — IP address and subnet mask for the route
destination, in dotted decimal notation (for example, 10.10.10.10
255.255.255.0).
ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask length in CIDR
format (for example, 10.10.10.10/24).
gateway — IP address, DNS hostname, or alias of the next-hop router.
metric — Cost for using the route. You can specify a value from
0 through 2,147,483,647. Lower-cost routes are preferred over
higher-cost routes.
Defaults — The HTTPS server is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — MSS can use a static route only if a direct route in the route
table resolves the static route. MSS adds routes with next-hop types Local
and Direct when you add an IP interface to a VLAN, if the VLAN is up. If
one of these added routes can resolve the static route, MSS can use the
static route.
Before you add a static route, use the display interface command to
verify that the WX switch has an IP interface in the same subnet as the
route’s next-hop router. If not, the VLAN:Interface field of the display ip
route command output shows that the route is down.
You can configure a maximum of 4 routes per destination. This includes
default routes, which have destination 0.0.0.0/0. Each route to a given
destination must have a unique gateway address. When the route table
contains multiple default or explicit routes to the same destination, MSS
uses the route with the lowest cost. If two or more routes to the same
destination have the lowest cost, MSS selects the first route in the route
table.
When you add multiple routes to the same destination, MSS groups the
routes and orders them from lowest cost at the top of the group to
highest cost at the bottom of the group. If you add a new route that has
the same destination and cost as a route already in the table, MSS places
the new route at the top of the group of routes with the same cost.
152 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Examples — The following command adds a default route that uses
gateway 10.5.4.1 and gives the route a cost of 1:
WX4400# set ip route default 10.5.4.1 1
success: change accepted.
The following commands add two default routes, and configure MSS to
always use the route through 10.2.4.69 when the interface to that
gateway router is up:
WX4400# set ip route default 10.2.4.69 1
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set ip route default 10.2.4.17 2
success: change accepted.
The following command adds an explicit route from a WX switch to any
host on the 192.168.4.x subnet through the local router 10.5.4.2, and
gives the route a cost of 1:
WX4400# set ip route 192.168.4.0 255.255.255.0 10.5.4.2 1
success: change accepted.
The following command adds another explicit route, using CIDR notation
to specify the subnet mask:
WX4400# set ip route 192.168.5.0/24 10.5.5.2 1
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ip route on page 118
display interface on page 126
display ip route on page 131
set ip snmp server Enables or disables the SNMP service on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ip snmp server {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the SNMP service.
disable — Disables the SNMP service.
Defaults — The SNMP service is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
set ip ssh 153
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables the SNMP server on a WX
switch:
WX4400# set ip snmp server enable
success: change accepted.
See Also —
clear snmp notify target on page 121
display snmp configuration on page 136
set port trap on page 86
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp notify target on page 162
set ip ssh Changes the TCP port number on which a wireless LAN switch listens for
Secure Shell (SSH) management traffic.
CAUTION: If you change the SSH port number from an SSH session, MSS
immediately ends the session. To open a new management session, you
must configure the SSH client to use the new TCP port number.
Syntax — set ip ssh port port-num
port-num — TCP port number.
Defaults — The default SSH port number is 22.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the SSH port number on
a WX switch to 6000:
WX4400# set ip ssh port 6000
success: change accepted.
154 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154
set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155
set ip ssh server on page 155
set ip ssh
absolute-timeout
Changes the number of minutes an SSH session can remain open. The
absolute-timeout value applies regardless of whether the session is active
or idle.
Syntax — set ip ssh absolute-timeout minutes
minutes — Number of minutes an SSH session can remain open. You
can set the absolute timeout to a value from 0 (disabled) to
2,147,483,647 minutes
Defaults — The absolute timeout is disabled by default. 3Com
recommends using the idle timeout instead to close unused sessions.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the idle timeout is disabled, MSS changes the default
absolute timeout from 0 (disabled) to 60 minutes to prevent an
abandoned session from remaining open indefinitely.
Examples — The following command changes the absolute timeout
value to 30 minutes:
WX4400# set ip ssh absolute-timeout 30
success: absolute timeout set to 30 minutes
See Also
set ip ssh on page 153
set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155
set ip ssh server on page 155
set ip ssh idle-timeout 155
set ip ssh
idle-timeout
Changes the number of minutes an SSH session can remain idle.
Syntax — set ip ssh idle-timeout minutes
minutes — Number of minutes an SSH session can remain idle. You
can set the idle timeout to a value from 0 (disabled) to 2,147,483,647
minutes.
Defaults — The default idle timeout is 30 minutes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the idle timeout is disabled, MSS changes the default
absolute timeout from 0 (disabled) to 60 minutes to prevent an
abandoned session from remaining open indefinitely. 3Com recommends
using the idle timeout instead to close unused sessions.
Examples — The following command changes the idle timeout value to
20 minutes:
WX4400# set ip ssh idle-timeout 20
success: idle timeout set to 20 minutes
See Also
set ip ssh on page 153
set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154
set ip ssh server on page 155
set ip ssh server Disables or reenables the SSH server on a wireless LAN switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the SSH server, SSH access to the WX switch is
also disabled.
Syntax — set ip ssh server {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the SSH server.
disable — Disables the SSH server.
Defaults — The SSH server is enabled by default.
156 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must generate an SSH authentication key to use SSH.
The maximum number of SSH sessions supported on a WX switch is
eight. If Telnet is also enabled, the WX switch can have up to eight Telnet
or SSH sessions, in any combination, and one Console session.
See Also
crypto generate key on page 451
set ip ssh on page 153
set ip ssh absolute-timeout on page 154
set ip ssh idle-timeout on page 155
set ip telnet Changes the TCP port number on which a wireless LAN switch listens for
Telnet management traffic.
CAUTION: f you change the Telnet port number from a Telnet session,
MSS immediately ends the session. To open a new management session,
you must Telnet to the WX switch with the new Telnet port number.
Syntax — set ip telnet port-num
port-num — TCP port number.
Defaults — The default Telnet port number is 23.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the Telnet port number
on a WX switch to 5000:
WX4400# set ip telnet 5000
success: change accepted.
set ip telnet server 157
See Also
clear ip telnet on page 119
display ip https on page 129
display ip telnet on page 133
set ip https server on page 150
set ip telnet server on page 157
set ip telnet server Enables the Telnet server on a wireless LAN switch.
CAUTION: If you disable the Telnet server, Telnet access to the WX
switch is also disabled.
Syntax — set ip telnet server {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the Telnet server.
disable — Disables the Telnet server.
Defaults — The Telnet server is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
Usage — The maximum number of Telnet sessions supported on a WX
switch is eight. If SSH is also enabled, the WX switch can have up to eight
Telnet or SSH sessions, in any combination, and one console session.
Examples — The following command enables the Telnet server on a WX
switch:
WX4400# set ip telnet server enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear ip telnet on page 119
display ip https on page 129
display ip telnet on page 133
set ip https server on page 150
set ip telnet on page 156
158 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set ntp Enables or disables the NTP client on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set ntp {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the NTP client.
disable — Disables the NTP client.
Defaults — The NTP client is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If NTP is configured on a system whose current time differs
from the NTP server time by more than 10 minutes, convergence of the
WX time can take many NTP update intervals. 3Com recommends that
you set the time manually to the NTP server time before enabling NTP to
avoid a significant delay in convergence.
Examples — The following command enables the NTP client:
WX4400# set ntp enable
success: NTP Client enabled
See Also
clear ntp server on page 119
clear ntp update-interval on page 120
display ntp on page 134
set ntp server on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
set ntp server Configures a wireless LAN switch to use an NTP server.
Syntax — set ntp server ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address of the NTP server, in dotted decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
set ntp update-interval 159
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure up to three NTP servers. MSS queries all the
servers and selects the best response based on the method described in
RFC 1305, Network Time Protocol (Version 3) Specification,
Implementation and Analysis.
To use NTP, you also must enable the NTP client with the set ntp
command.
Examples — The following command configures a WX switch to use
NTP server 192.168.1.5:
WX4400# set ntp server 192.168.1.5
See Also
clear ntp server on page 119
clear ntp update-interval on page 120
display ntp on page 134
set ntp on page 158
set ntp update-interval on page 159
set ntp
update-interval
Changes how often MSS sends queries to the NTP servers for updates.
Syntax — set ntp update-interval seconds
seconds — Number of seconds between queries. You can specify
from 16 through 1,024 seconds.
Defaults — The default NTP update interval is 64 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the NTP update interval
to 128 seconds:
WX4400# set ntp update-interval 128
success: change accepted.
160 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
clear ntp server on page 119
clear ntp update-interval on page 120
display ntp on page 134
set ntp on page 158
set ntp server on page 158
set snmp
community
Configures a community string for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
For SNMPv3, use the set snmp usm command to configure an SNMPv3
user. SNMPv3 does not use community strings.
Syntax — set snmp community name comm-string
access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write |
notify-read-write}
comm-string — Name of the SNMP community. Specify between 1
and 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
read-only — Allows an SNMP management application using the
string to get (read) object values on the switch but not to set (write)
them.
read-notify — Allows an SNMP management application using the
string to get object values on the switch but not to set them. The
switch can use the string to send notifications.
notify-only — Allows the switch to use the string to send
notifications.
read-write — Allows an SNMP management application using the
string to get and set object values on the switch.
notify-read-write — Allows an SNMP management application
using the string to get and set object values on the switch. The switch
also can use the string to send notifications.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
set snmp community 161
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In Version 4.0, new access
types were added for SNMPv3:read-notify, notify-only,
notify-read-write
SNMP community strings are passed as clear text in SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2c. 3Com recommends that you use strings that cannot easily be
guessed by unauthorized users. For example, do not use the well-known
strings public and private.
If you are using SNMPv3, you can configure SNMPv3 users to use
authentication and to encrypt SNMP data.
Examples — The following command configures the read-write
community good_community:
WX-1200# set snmp community read-write good_community
success: change accepted.
The following command configures community string switchmgr1 with
access level notify-read-write:
WX-1200# set snmp community name switchmgr1 notify-read-write
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear snmp community on page 121
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp community on page 186
162 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set snmp notify
target
Configures a notification target for informs from SNMP.
A notification target is a remote device to which MSS sends SNMP
notifications. You can configure the MSS SNMP engine to send
confirmed notifications (informs) or unconfirmed notifications (traps).
Some of the command options differ depending on the SNMP version
and the type of notification you specify. You can configure up to 10
notification targets.
SNMPv3 with Informs
To configure a notification target for informs from SNMPv3, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
usm inform user username
snmp-engine-id {ip | hex hex-string}
[profile profile-name]
[security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted}]
[retries num]
[timeout num]
target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and
does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also
can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
username — USM username. This option is applicable only when the
SNMP version is usm.
If the user will send informs rather than traps, you also must specify
the snmp-engine-id of the target.
snmp-engine-id {ip | hex hex-string} — SNMP engine ID of the
target. Specify ip if the target’s SNMP engine ID is based on its
IP address. If the target’s SNMP engine ID is a hexadecimal value, use
hex hex-string to specify the value.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
set snmp notify target 163
security — Specifies the security level, and is applicable only when
the SNMP version is usm:
unsecured — Message exchanges are not authenticated, nor are
they encrypted. This is the default.
authenticated — Message exchanges are authenticated, but are
not encrypted.
encrypted — Message exchanges are authenticated and
encrypted.
retries num — Specifies the number of times the MSS SNMP engine
will resend a notification that has not been acknowledged by the
target. You can specify from 0 to 3 retries.
timeout num — Specifies the number of seconds MSS waits for
acknowledgement of a notification. You can specify from 1 to 5
seconds.
SNMPv3 with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv3, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
usm trap user username
[profile profile-name]
[security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted}]
target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and
does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also
can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
username — USM username. This option is applicable only when the
SNMP version is usm.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
security {unsecured | authenticated | encrypted} — Specifies
the security level, and is applicable only when the SNMP version is
usm:
164 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
unsecured — Message exchanges are not authenticated, nor are
they encrypted. This is the default.
authenticated — Message exchanges are authenticated, but are
not encrypted.
encrypted — Message exchanges are authenticated and
encrypted.
SNMPv2c with Informs
To configure a notification target for informs from SNMPv2c, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v2c community-string inform
[profile profile-name]
[retries num]
[timeout num]
target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and
does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also
can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
community-string — Community string.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
retries num — Specifies the number of times the MSS SNMP engine
will resend a notification that has not been acknowledged by the
target. You can specify from 0 to 3 retries.
timeout num — Specifies the number of seconds MSS waits for
acknowledgement of a notification. You can specify from 1 to
5 seconds.
set snmp notify target 165
SNMPv2c with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv2c, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v2c community-string trap
[profile profile-name]
target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and
does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also
can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
community-string — Community string.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
SNMPv1 with Traps
To configure a notification target for traps from SNMPv1, use the
following command:
Syntax — set snmp notify target target-num
ip-addr[:udp-port-number]
v1 community-string
[profile profile-name]
target-num — ID for the target. This ID is local to the WX switch and
does not need to correspond to a value on the target itself. You can
specify a number from 1 to 10.
ip-addr[:udp-port-number] — IP address of the server. You also
can specify the UDP port number to send notifications to.
community-string — Community string.
profile profile-name — Notification profile this SNMP user will use
to specify the notification types to send or drop.
166 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
Defaults — The default UDP port number on the target is 162. The
default minimum required security level is unsecured. The default
number of retries is 0 and the default timeout is 2 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The inform or trap option specifies whether the MSS SNMP
engine expects the target to acknowledge notifications sent to the target
by the WX switch. Use inform if you want acknowledgements. Use trap
if you do not want acknowledgements. The inform option is applicable
to SNMP version v2c or usm only.
Examples — The following command configures a notification target for
acknowledged notifications:
WX-1200# set snmp notify target 1 10.10.40.9 usm inform user
securesnmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id ip
success: change accepted.
This command configures target 1 at IP address 10.10.40.9. The target’s
SNMP engine ID is based on its address. The MSS SNMP engine will send
notifications based on the default profile, and will require the target to
acknowledge receiving them.
The following command configures a notification target for
unacknowledged notifications:
WX-1200# set snmp notify target 2 10.10.40.10 v1 trap
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear snmp notify target on page 121
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp notify target on page 189
set snmp profile 167
set snmp profile Configures an SNMP notification profile. A notification profile is a named
list of all the notification types that can be generated by a switch, and for
each notification type, the action to take (drop or send) when an event
occurs.
You can configure up to 10 notification profiles.
Syntax — set snmp profile {default | profile-name} {drop | send}
{notification-type | all}
default | profile-name — Name of the notification profile you are
creating or modifying. The profile-name can be up to 32
alphanumeric characters long, with no spaces.
To modify the default notification profile, specify default.
drop | send —Specifies the action that the SNMP engine takes with
regard to the notifications you specify with notification-type or all.
notification-type — Any of the items in Table 35.
Table 35 SNMP notification types
AuthenTraps Generated when the WX switch’s SNMP
engine receives a bad community string.
AutoTuneRadioChannelChangeTraps Generated when the RF Auto-Tuning
feature changes the channel on a radio.
AutoTuneRadioPowerChangeTraps Generated when the RF Auto-Tuning
feature changes the power setting on a
radio.
ClientAssociationFailureTraps Generated when a client’s attempt to
associate with a radio fails.
ClientAuthorizationSuccessTraps Generated when a client is successfully
authorized.
ClientAuthenticationFailureTraps Generated when authentication fails for a
client.
ClientAuthorizationFailureTraps Generated when authorization fails for a
client.
ClientClearedTraps Generated when a client’s session is
cleared.
ClientDeAssociationTraps Generated when a client is dissociated from
a radio.
168 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
ClientDot1xFailureTraps Generated when a client experiences an
802.1X failure.
ClientRoamingTraps Generated when a client roams.
CounterMeasureStartTraps Generated when MSS begins
countermeasures against a rogue access
point.
CounterMeasureStopTraps Generated when MSS stops
countermeasures against a rogue access
point.
DAPConnectWarningTraps Generated when a Distributed MAP whose
fingerprint has not been configured in MSS
establishes a management session with the
switch.
DeviceFailTraps Generated when an event with an Alert
severity occurs.
DeviceOkayTraps Generated when a device returns to its
normal state.
LinkDownTraps Generated when the link is lost on a port.
LinkUpTraps Generated when the link is detected on a
port.
MichaelMICFailureTraps Generated when two Michael message
integrity code (MIC) failures occur within 60
seconds, triggering Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) countermeasures.
MobilityDomainJoinTraps Generated when the WX switch is initially
able to contact a mobility domain seed
member, or can contact the seed member
after a timeout.
MobilityDomainTimeoutTraps Generated when a timeout occurs after an
WX switch has unsuccessfully tried to
communicate with a seed member.
MPBootTraps Generated when an MAP access point
boots.
MPTimeoutTraps Generated when an MAP access point fails
to respond to the WX switch.
PoEFailTraps Generated when a serious PoE problem,
such as a short circuit, occurs.
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps Generated when MSS detects an ad-hoc
user.
RFDetectRogueAPTraps Generated when MSS detects a rogue
access point.
Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
set snmp profile 169
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps Generated when a rogue access point is no
longer being detected.
RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps Generated when MSS detects, on the wired
part of the network, the MAC address of a
wireless client associated with a third-party
AP.
RFDetectDoSPortTraps Generated when MSS detects an associate
request flood, reassociate request flood, or
disassociate request flood.
RFDetectDoSTraps Generated when MSS detects a DoS attack
other than an associate request flood,
reassociate request flood, or disassociate
request flood.
RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps Generated when an interfering device is
detected.
RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTr
aps Generated when an interfering device is no
longer detected.
RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps Generated when MSS detects, on the wired
part of the network, the MAC address of a
wireless client associated with a third-party
AP.
RFDetectDoSPortTraps Generated when MSS detects an associate
request flood, reassociate request flood, or
disassociate request flood.
RFDetectDoSTraps Generated when MSS detects a DoS attack
other than an associate request flood,
reassociate request flood, or disassociate
request flood.
RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps Generated when an interfering device is
detected.
RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTr
aps Generated when an interfering device is no
longer detected.
RFDetectSpoofedMacAPTraps Generated when MSS detects a wireless
packet with the source MAC address of a
3Com MAP, but without the spoofed
MAP’s signature (fingerprint).
RFDetectSpoofedSsidAPTraps Generated when MSS detects beacon
frames for a valid SSID, but sent by a rogue
AP.
RFDetectUnAuthorizedAPTraps Generated when MSS detects the MAC
address of an AP that is on the attack list.
Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
170 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
all — Sends or drops all notifications.
Defaults — A default notification profile (named default) is already
configured in MSS. All notifications in the default profile are dropped by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command changes the action in the default
notification profile from drop to send for all notification types:
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile default send all
success: change accepted.
The following commands create notification profile snmpprof_rfdetect,
and change the action to send for all RF detection notification types:
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectClientViaRogueWiredAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectDoSTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectAdhocUserTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectInterferingRogueAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectInterferingRogueDisappearTraps
success: change accepted.
RFDetectUnAuthorizedOuiTraps Generated when a wireless device that is
not on the list of permitted vendors is
detected.
RFDetectUnAuthorizedSsidTraps Generated when an SSID that is not on the
permitted SSID list is detected.
Table 35 SNMP notification types (continued)
set snmp profile 171
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectRogueAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectRogueDisappearTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectSpoofedMacAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectSpoofedSsidAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectUnAuthorizedAPTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectUnAuthorizedOuiTraps
success: change accepted.
WX-1200# set snmp notify profile snmpprof_rfdetect send
RFDetectUnAuthorizedSsidTraps
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear snmp profile on page 122
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp notify profile on page 188
172 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set snmp protocol Enables an SNMP protocol. MSS supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and
SNMPv3.
Syntax — set snmp protocol {v1 | v2c | usm | all} {enable |
disable}
v1 — SNMPv1
v2c — SNMPv2c
usm — SNMPv3 (with the user security model)
all — Enables all supported versions of SNMP.
enable — Enables the specified SNMP version(s).
disable — Disables the specified SNMP version(s).
Defaults — All SNMP versions are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — SNMP requires the switch’s system IP address to be set. SNMP
will not work without the system IP address.
You also must enable the SNMP service using the set ip snmp server
command.
Examples — The following command enables all SNMP versions:
WX-1200# set snmp protocol all enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp security on page 173
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp status on page 191
set snmp security 173
set snmp security Sets the minimum level of security MSS requires for SNMP message
exchanges.
Syntax — set snmp security
{unsecured | authenticated | encrypted |
auth-req-unsec-notify}
unsecured — SNMP message exchanges are not secure. This is the
only value supported for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.
authenticated — SNMP message exchanges are authenticated but
are not encrypted.
encrypted — SNMP message exchanges are authenticated and
encrypted.
auth-req-unsec-notify — SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted, and notifications are neither
authenticated nor encrypted.
Defaults — By default, MSS allows nonsecure (unsecured) SNMP
message exchanges.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c do not support authentication or
encryption. If you plan to use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, leave the minimum
level of SNMP security set to unsecured.
Examples — The following command sets the minimum level of SNMP
security allowed to authentication and encryption:
WX-1200# set snmp security encrypted
success: change accepted.
See Also
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp profile on page 167
174 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp status on page 191
set snmp trap This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To enable or disable
SNMP notifications, configure a notification profile. See set snmp
profile on page 167.
set snmp trap
receiver
This command is deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. To configure an SNMP
notification target (also called trap receiver), see set snmp notify target
on page 162.
set snmp usm Creates a USM user for SNMPv3.
This command does not apply to SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. For these SNMP
versions, use the set snmp community command to configure
community strings.
Syntax — set snmp usm usm-username
snmp-engine-id {ip ip-addr | local | hex hex-string}
access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write |
notify-read-write}
auth-type {none | md5 | sha}
{auth-pass-phrase string | auth-key hex-string}
encrypt-type {none | des | 3des | aes}
{encrypt-pass-phrase string | encrypt-key hex-string}
usm-username — Name of the SNMPv3 user. Specify between 1 and
32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
snmp-engine-id {ip ip-addr | local | hex hex-string} —
Specifies a unique identifier for the SNMP engine.
To send informs, you must specify the engine ID of the inform
receiver. To send traps and to allow get and set operations and so on,
specify local as the engine ID.
hex hex-string — ID is a hexadecimal string.
set snmp usm 175
ip ip-addr — ID is based on the IP address of the station running
the management application. Enter the IP address of the station.
MSS calculates the engine ID based on the address.
local — Uses the value computed from the switch’s system IP
address.
access {read-only | read-notify | notify-only | read-write
| notify-read-write}
Specifies the access level of the user:
read-only — An SNMP management application using the string
can get (read) object values on the switch but cannot set (write)
them.
read-notify — An SNMP management application using the
string can get object values on the switch but cannot set them. The
switch can use the string to send notifications.
notify-only — The switch can use the string to send
notifications.
read-write — An SNMP management application using the string
can get and set object values on the switch.
notify-read-write — An SNMP management application using
the string can get and set object values on the switch. The switch
can use the string to send notifications.
auth-type {none | md5 | sha} {auth-pass-phrase string |
auth-key hex-string}
Specifies the authentication type used to authenticate
communications with the remote SNMP engine. You can specify one
of the following:
none—No authentication is used.
md5—Message-digest algorithm 5 is used.
sha—Secure Hashing Algorithm (SHA) is used.
If the authentication type is md5 or sha, you can specify a passphrase
or a hexadecimal key.
176 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
To specify a passphrase, use the auth-pass-phrase string option.
The string can be from 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters long, with
no spaces.
To specify a key, use the auth-key hex-string option.
encrypt-type {none | des | 3des | aes}
{encrypt-pass-phrase string | encrypt-key hex-string} —
Specifies the encryption type used for SNMP traffic. You can specify
one of the following:
none—No encryption is used. This is the default.
des—Data Encryption Standard (DES) encryption is used.
3des—Triple DES encryption is used.
aes—Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) encryption is used.
If the encryption type is des, 3des, or aes, you can specify a
passphrase or a hexadecimal key.
To specify a passphrase, use the encrypt-pass-phrase string
option. The string can be from 8 to 32 alphanumeric characters
long, with no spaces.
To specify a key, use the encrypt-key hex-string option.
Defaults — No SNMPv3 users are configured by default. When you
configure an SNMPv3 user, the default access is read-only, and the
default authentication and encryption types are both none.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command creates USM user snmpmgr1,
associated with the local SNMP engine ID. This user can send traps to
notification receivers.
WX-1200# set snmp usm snmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id local
success: change accepted.
The following command creates USM user securesnmpmgr1, which uses
SHA authentication and 3DES encryption with passphrases. This user can
send informs to the notification receiver that has engine ID 192.168.40.2.
set summertime 177
WX-1200# set snmp usm securesnmpmgr1 snmp-engine-id
ip 192.168.40.2 auth-type sha auth-pass-phrase myauthpword
encrypt-type 3des encrypt-pass-phrase mycryptpword
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
set ip snmp server on page 152
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
display snmp usm on page 193
set summertime Offsets the real-time clock of a wireless LAN switch by +1 hour and
returns it to standard time for daylight savings time or a similar
summertime period that you set.
Syntax — set summertime summer-name [start week weekday
month hour min end week weekday month hour min]
summer-name — Name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters that
describes the summertime offset. You can use a standard name or any
name you like.
start — Start of the time change period.
week — Week of the month to start or end the time change. Valid
values are first, second, third, fourth, or last.
weekday — Day of the week to start or end the time change. Valid
values are sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, and sat.
month — Month of the year to start or end the time change. Valid
values are jan, feb, mar, apr, may, jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, and
dec.
hour — Hour to start or end the time change — a value between 0
and 23 on the 24-hour clock.
178 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
min — Minute to start or end the time change — a value between 0
and 59.
end — End of the time change period.
Defaults — If you do not specify a start and end time, the system
implements the time change starting at 2:00 a.m. on the first Sunday in
April and ending at 2:00 a.m. on the last Sunday in October, according to
the North American standard.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must first set the time zone with the set timezone
command for the offset to work properly without the start and end
values.
Configure summertime before you set the time and date. Otherwise,
summertime’s adjustment of the time will make the time incorrect, if the
date is within the summertime period.
Examples — To enable summertime and set the summertime time zone
to PDT (Pacific Daylight Time), type the following command:
WX1200# set summertime PDT
success: change accepted
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set timedate on page 180
set timezone on page 181
set system ip-address 179
set system
ip-address
Configures the system IP address. The system IP address determines the
interface or source IP address MSS uses for system tasks, including the
following:
Mobility domain operations
Topology reporting for dual-homed MAP access points
Default source IP address used in unsolicited communications such as
AAA accounting reports and SNMP traps
Syntax — set system ip-address ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address, in dotted decimal notation. The address must
be configured on one of the WX switch’s VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must use an address that is configured on one of the WX
switch’s VLANs.
To display the system IP address, use the display system command.
Examples — The following commands configure an IP interface on
VLAN taupe and configure the interface to be the system IP address:
WX4400# set interface taupe ip 10.10.20.20/24
success: set ip address 10.10.20.20 netmask 255.255.255.0 on vlan taupe
WX4400# set system ip-address 10.10.20.20
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear system ip-address on page 124
display system on page 42
set interface on page 143
180 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
set timedate Sets the time of day and date on the wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set timedate {date mmm dd yyyy [time hh:mm:ss]}
date mmm dd yyyy — System date:
mmm — month
dd — day
yyyy — year
time hh:mm:ss — System time, in hours, minutes, and seconds.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The day of week is automatically calculated from the day you set.
The time displayed by the CLI after you type the command might be slightly
later than the time you enter due to the interval between when you press
Enter and when the CLI reads and displays the new time and date.
Configure summertime before you set the time and date. Otherwise,
summertime’s adjustment of the time will make the time incorrect, if the
date is within the summertime period.
Examples — The following command sets the date to March 13, 2003
and time to 11:11:12:
WX4400# set timedate date feb 29 2004 time 23:58:00
Time now is: Sun Feb 29 2004, 23:58:02 PST
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set summertime on page 177
set timezone on page 181
set timezone 181
set timezone Sets the number of hours, and optionally the number of minutes, that the
wireless LAN switch’s real-time clock is offset from Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC). These values are also used by Network Time Protocol (NTP), if
it is enabled.
Syntax — set timezone zone-name {-hours [minutes]}
zone-name — Time zone name of up to 32 alphabetic characters. You
can use a standard name or any name you like.
- (minus sign) — Minus time to indicate hours (and minutes) to be
subtracted from UTC. Otherwise, hours and minutes are added by
default.
hours — Number of hours to add or subtract from UTC.
minutes — Number of minutes to add or subtract from UTC.
Defaults — If this command is not used, then the default time zone is
UTC.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To set the time zone for Pacific Standard Time (PST), type
the following command:
WX1200# set timezone PST -8
Timezone is set to 'PST', offset from UTC is -8:0 hours.
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
clear timezone on page 124
display summertime on page 138
display timedate on page 138
display timezone on page 139
set summertime on page 177
set timedate on page 180
182 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display dhcp-client Displays DHCP client information for all VLANs.
Syntax — display dhcp-client
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command displays DHCP client information:
WX-1200# display dhcp-client
Interface: corpvlan(4)
Configuration Status: Enabled
DHCP State: IF_UP
Lease Allocation: 65535 seconds
Lease Remaining: 65532 seconds
IP Address: 10.3.1.110
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 10.3.1.1
DHCP Server: 10.3.1.4
DNS Servers: 10.3.1.29
DNS Domain Name: mycorp.com
Table 36 describes the fields in this display.
Table 36 Output for display dhcp-client
Field Description
Interface VLAN name and number.
Configuration Status Status of the DHCP client on this VLAN:
Enabled
Disabled
DHCP State State of the IP interface:
IF_UP
IF_DOWN
Lease Allocation Duration of the address lease.
Lease Remaining Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.
IP Address IP address received from the DHCP server.
display dhcp-server 183
See Also
set interface dhcp-client on page 144
display dhcp-server Displays MSS DHCP server information.
Syntax — display dhcp-server [interface vlan-id] [verbose]
interface vlan-id — Displays the IP addresses leased by the
specified VLAN.
verbose — Displays configuration and status information for the MSS
DHCP server.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command displays the addresses leased by
the MSS DHCP server:
WX-1200# display dhcp-server
VLAN Name Address MAC Lease Remaining (sec)
---- -------------- --------------- ----------------- --------------------
1 default 10.10.20.2 00:01:02:03:04:05 12345
1 default 10.10.20.3 00:01:03:04:06:07 2103
2 red-vlan 192.168.1.5 00:01:03:04:06:08 102
2 red-vlan 192.168.1.7 00:01:03:04:06:09 16789
Subnet Mask Network mask of the IP address received from the
DHCP server.
Default Gateway Default gateway IP address received from the DHCP
server. If the address is 0.0.0.0, the server did not
provide an address.
DHCP Server IP address of the DHCP server.
DNS Servers DNS server IP address(es) received from the DHCP
server.
DNS Domain Name Default DNS domain name received from the DHCP
server.
Table 36 Output for display dhcp-client (continued)
Field Description
184 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
The following command displays configuration and status information for
each VLAN on which the DHCP server is configured:
WX-1200# display dhcp-server
Interface: 0 (Direct AP)
Status: UP
Address Range: 10.0.0.1-10.0.0.253
Interface: default(1)
Status: UP
Address Range: 10.10.20.2-10.10.20.254
DHCP Clients:
Hardware Address: 00:01:02:03:04:05
State: BOUND
Lease Allocation: 43200 seconds
Lease Remaining: 12345 seconds
IP Address: 10.10.20.2
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 10.10.20.1
DNS Servers: 10.10.20.4 10.10.20.5
DNS Domain Name: mycorp.com
Table 37 and Table 38 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 37 Output for display dhcp-server
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number.
Name VLAN name.
Address IP address leased by the server.
MAC Address MAC address of the device that holds the lease for the
address.
Lease Remaining Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.
display dhcp-server 185
See Also
set interface dhcp-server on page 145
Table 38 Output for display dhcp-client verbose
Field Description
Interface VLAN name and number.
Status Status of the interface:
UP
DOWN
Address Range Range from which the server can lease addresses.
Hardware Address MAC address of the DHCP client.
State State of the address lease:
SUSPEND—MSS is checking for the presence of
another DHCP server on the subnet. This is the initial
state of the MSS DHCP server. The MSS DHCP server
remains in this state if another DHCP server is
detected.
CHECKING—MSS is using ARP to verify whether the
address is available.
OFFERING—MSS offered the address to the client
and is waiting for the client to send a
DHCPREQUEST for the address.
BOUND—The client accepted the address.
HOLDING—The address is already in use and is
therefore unavailable.
Lease Allocation Duration of the address lease, in seconds.
Lease Remaining Number of seconds remaining before the address lease
expires.
IP Address IP address leased to the client.
Subnet Mask Network mask of the IP address leased to the client.
Default Gateway Default gateway IP address included in the DHCP Offer
to the client.
DNS Servers DNS server IP address(es) included in the DHCP Offer to
the client.
DNS Domain Name Default DNS domain name included in the DHCP Offer
to the client.
186 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display snmp
community
Displays the configured SNMP community strings.
Syntax — display snmp community
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display the configured SNMP community strings, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp community
Communities:
"wireless_switch", access=read-write-notify, notify target
use cnt=0
Table 39 describes the fields in this display.
Table 39 Outpot for display snmp community
Field Description
Community string Community string.
access Access settings for the string:
notify-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can receive notifications from the
switch, but cannot get or set object values.
notify-read-write—An SNMP management
application using the string can get and set object
values on the switch. The application can also
receive notifications from the switch.
read-notify—An SNMP management application
using the string can get object values on the switch
but cannot set them. The application can also
receive notifications from the switch.
read-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can get (read) object values on the
switch but cannot set (write) them.
read-write—An SNMP management application
using the string can get and set object values on the
switch.
notify target use cnt Number of times this community is specified in a
notification target entry.
display snmp counters 187
See Also
clear snmp community on page 121
set snmp community on page 160
display snmp
counters
Displays SNMP statistics counters.
Syntax — display snmp counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display SNMP statistics counters, use the following
command:
WX-1200# display snmp counters
Base SNMP Stats:
input packets: 0
output packets: 0
output notifys(traps & informs): 0
input packets with bad version: 0
input packets with ASN.1 parse errs: 0
input packets silently dropped: 0
Community Stats:
input packets with bad community names: 0
input packets with bad community uses: 0
SNMPv3 Stats:
input packets with unknown security models: 0
input packets that are invalid: 0
input packets without PDU handlers: 0
input packets specifying an unavailable context: 0
input packets specifying an unknown context: 0
SNMPv3/USM Stats:
input packets with unsupported security level: 0
input packets not in time window: 0
input packets with an unknown user name: 0
input packets with an unknown engineID: 0
input packets with an authentication failure: 0
input packets with a decryption failure: 0
188 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
display snmp notify
profile
Displays SNMP notification profiles.
Syntax — display snmp notify profile
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display notification profiles, use the following
command:
WX-1200# display snmp notify profile
Notify profiles:
default
notify profile use cnt=0
notify status for profile:
LINKDOWN, drop
LINKUP, drop
AUTHENTICATION, drop
DEVFAIL, drop
DEVOKAY, drop
POEFAIL, drop
MPTIMEOUT, drop
MPBOOT, drop
MOBDOMJOIN, drop
MOBDOMTIMEOUT, drop
MIKEMICFAIL, drop
ROGUEDETECT, drop
RFDETECTADHOCUSER, drop
RFDETECTROGUEDISAPPEAR, drop
CLIENTAUTHENFAIL, drop
CLIENTAUTHORFAIL, drop
CLIENTASSOCFAIL, drop
CLIENTDEASSOC, drop
CLIENTROAMING, drop
AUTOTUNERADIOPOWERCHANGE, drop
AUTOTUNERADIOCHANNELCHANGE, drop
COUNTERMEASURESTART, drop
COUNTERMEASURESTOP, drop
CLIENTDOT1XFAIL, drop
CLIENTCLEARED, drop
CLIENTAUTHORSUC, drop
RFDSPOOFMACAP, drop
display snmp notify target 189
RFDSPOOFSSIDAP, drop
RFDDETECTDOS, drop
RFDCLNTROGUEWAP, drop
RFDINTROGUEAP, drop
RFDINTROGUEDISAP, drop
RFDUNAUTHORSSID, drop
RFDUNAUTHOROUI, drop
RFDUNAUTHORAP, drop
DAPCONNWARN, drop
RFDDETECTDOSPORT, drop
The command lists settings separately for each notification profile. The
use count indicates how many notification targets use the profile. For
each notification type, the command lists whether MSS sends
notifications of that type to the targets that use the notification profile.
See Also
clear snmp profile on page 122
set snmp profile on page 167
display snmp notify
target
Displays SNMP notification targets.
Syntax — display snmp notify target
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
‘History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display a list of the SNMP notification targets, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp notification target
Notify targets:
1: 10.10.40.99:162
user="remote-nmsuser", exists=no
engineID=ip
notify profile=default, exists=yes
security model=USM
security type=notify
notify type=INFORM
190 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
retry count=snmp-engine-id
timeout=1
Table 40 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
clear snmp notify target on page 121
set snmp notify target on page 162
Table 40 Output for display snmp notification target
Field Description
user Name of the SNMP user.
engineID SNMP engine ID associated with the user. For traps, the
engine ID is local. For informs, the engine ID is that of
the notification receiver.
notify profile Name of the notification profile used by the target.
security model SNMP security model:
v1
v2c
usm
security type Security requirements for exchanging messages with
the target:
unsecured—SNMP message exchanges are not
secure.
authenticated—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted.
encrypted—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated and encrypted.
notify type Type of notification sent to the target:
inform
trap
retry count Number of times MSS will resend an unacknowledged
inform.
timeout Number of seconds MSS waits for acknowledgement of
an inform before resending the inform (if retries are
available).
display snmp status 191
display snmp status Displays SNMP version and status information.
Syntax — display snmp status
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display SNMP version and status information, use the
following command:
WX-1200# display snmp status
Server:
SNMP agent (server) is enabled
SNMPv1 is enabled
SNMPv2c is disabled
SNMPv3/USM is disabled
SNMP minimum security is unsecured
System name: pubs
System location: -- not set --
System contact: -- not set --
SNMP engine ID: 00000063000000a1c0a80142 (IP
192.168.1.66:161)
SNMP engine boots: 1
SNMP engine time: 19410
SNMP max message size: 2048
Table 41 describes the fields in this display.
Table 41 Output for display SNMP status
Field Description
SNMP agent (server) is State of the SNMP service on the switch:
Enabled
Disabled
SNMPv1 is ...
SNMPv2c is ...
SNMPv3 is ...
State of each supported protocol version of SNMP:
Enabled
Disabled
192 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
set snmp community on page 160
set snmp notify target on page 162
set snmp profile on page 167
set snmp protocol on page 172
set snmp security on page 173
set snmp usm on page 174
display snmp community on page 186
display snmp counters on page 187
display snmp notify profile on page 188
SNMP minimum security Lowest (least secure) security level set on the switch:
authenticated—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated but are not encrypted.
auth-req-unsec-notify—SNMP message exchanges
are authenticated but are not encrypted, and
notifications are neither authenticated nor
encrypted.
encrypted—SNMP message exchanges are
authenticated and encrypted.
unsecured—SNMP message exchanges are not
secure.
System Name String configured by the set system name command.
System location String configured by the set system location
command.
System contact String configured by the set system contact
command.
SNMP engine ID Unique ID of this SNMP engine.
SNMP engine boots Number of times the SNMP engine has booted. This
number is at least as great as the number of times the
switch has booted.
SNMP engine time Number of seconds since the SNMP engine was
rebooted.
SNMP max message size Maximum length, in bytes, of SNMP messages sent by
this SNMP engine.
Table 41 Output for display SNMP status (continued)
Field Description
display snmp usm 193
display snmp notify target on page 189
display snmp usm on page 193
display snmp usm Displays information about SNMPv3 users.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — To display USM settings, use the following command:
WX-1200# display snmp usm
USM users:
"nmsuser", engineID=localSnmpID
access=read-notify
auth=NONE
encrypt=NONE
notify target use cnt=0
Table 42 describes the fields in this display.
Table 42 Output for display snmp usm
Field Description
USM name Name of the SNMPv3 user.
engineID Engine ID for the USM name, which is either the local
switch or the notification target where informs are to
be sent.
194 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
See Also
clear snmp usm on page 122
display snmp usm on page 193
access Access settings for the string:
read-only—An SNMP management application
using the string can get (read) object values on the
switch but cannot set (write) them.
read-notify—An SNMP management application
using the string can get object values on the switch
but cannot set them. The switch can use the string
to send notifications.
notify-only—The switch can use the string to send
notifications.
read-write—An SNMP management application
using the string can get and set object values on the
switch.
notify-read-write—An SNMP management
application using the string can get and set object
values on the switch. The switch can use the string
to send notifications.
auth Authentication type:
md5
sha
none
encrypt Encryption (privacy) setting:
des
3des
aes
none
notify target use cnt Number of times this community is specified in a
notification target entry.
Table 42 Output for display snmp usm (continued)
Field Description
telnet 195
telnet Opens a Telnet client session with a remote device.
Syntax — telnet {ip-addr | hostname} [port port-num]
ip-addr — IP address of the remote device.
hostname — Hostname of the remote device.
port port-num — TCP port number on which the TCP server on the
remote device listens for Telnet connections.
Defaults — MSS attempts to establish Telnet connections with TCP port
23 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To end a Telnet session from the remote device, press Ctrl+t or
type quit or logout in the management session on the remote device. To
end a client session from the local WX switch, use the clear sessions
telnet client command.
If the configuration of the WX switch from which you enter the telnet
command has an ACL that denies Telnet client traffic, the ACL also
denies access by the telnet command.
Examples — In the following example, an administrator establishes a
Telnet session with another device and enters a command on the remote
device:
WX4400# telnet 10.10.10.90
Session 0 pty tty2.d Trying 10.10.10.90...
Connected to 10.10.10.90
Disconnect character is '^t'
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Username: username
Password: password
WX1200-remote> display vlan
Admin VLAN Tunl Port
VLAN Name Status State Affin Port Tag State
---- ---------------- ------ ----- ----- ---------------- ----- -----
1 default Up Up 5
3 none Up
196 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
3 red Up Up 5
10 backbone Up Up 5
1 none Up
2 none Up
When the administrator presses Ctrl+t to end the Telnet connection, the
management session returns to the local prompt:
WX1200-remote> Session 0 pty tty2.d terminated tt name tty2.d
WX1200#
See Also
clear sessions on page 497
display sessions on page 500
traceroute Traces the route to an IP host.
Syntax — traceroute host [dnf] [no-dns] [port port-num]
[queries num] [size size] [ttl hops] [wait ms]
host — IP address, hostname, or alias of the destination host. Specify
the IP address in dotted decimal notation.
dnf — Sets the Do Not Fragment bit in the ping packet to prevent the
packet from being fragmented.
no-dns — Prevents MSS from performing a DNS lookup for each hop
to the destination host.
port port-num — TCP port number listening for the traceroute
probes.
queries num — Number of probes per hop.
size size — Probe packet size in bytes. You can specify from 40
through 1,460.
ttl hops — Maximum number of hops, which can be from 1 through
255.
wait ms — Probe wait in milliseconds. You can specify from 1 through
100,000.
Defaults
dnf — Disabled
traceroute 197
no-dns — Disabled
port — 33434
queries — 3
size — 38
ttl — 30
wait — 5000
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To stop a traceroute command that is in progress, press
Ctrl+C.
Examples — The following example traces the route to host server1:
WX4400# traceroute server1
traceroute to server1.example.com (192.168.22.7), 30 hops max, 38 byte packets
1 engineering-1.example.com (192.168.192.206) 2 ms 1 ms 1 ms
2 engineering-2.example.com (192.168.196.204) 2 ms 3 ms 2 ms
3 gateway_a.example.com (192.168.1.201) 6 ms 3 ms 3 ms
4 server1.example.com (192.168.22.7) 3 ms * 2 ms
The first row of the display indicates the target host, the maximum
number of hops, and the packet size. Each numbered row displays
information about one hop. The rows are displayed in the order in which
the hops occur, beginning with the hop closest to the WX switch.
The row for a hop lists the total time in milliseconds for each ICMP packet
to reach the router or host, plus the time for the ICMP Time Exceeded
message to return to the host.
An exclamation point (!) following any of these values indicates that the
Port Unreachable message returned by the destination has a maximum
hop count of 0 or 1. This can occur if the destination uses the maximum
hop count value from the arriving packet as the maximum hop count in
its ICMP reply. The reply does not arrive at the source until the destination
receives a traceroute packet with a maximum hop count equal to the
number of hops between the source and destination.
An asterisk (*) indicates that the timeout period expired before MSS
received a Time Exceeded message for the packet.
198 CHAPTER 6: IP SERVICES COMMANDS
If Traceroute receives an ICMP error message other than a Time Exceeded
or Port Unreachable message, MSS displays one of the error codes
described in Table 43 instead of displaying the round-trip time or an
asterisk (*).
Table 43 describes the traceroute error messages.
See Also
ping on page 140
Table 43 Error messages for traceroute
Field Description
!N No route to host. The network is unreachable.
!H No route to host. The host is unreachable.
!P Connection refused. The protocol is unreachable.
!F Fragmentation needed but Do Not Fragment (DNF) bit was set.
!S Source route failed.
!A Communication administratively prohibited.
?Unknown error occurred.
7AAA COMMANDS
Use authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) commands to
provide a secure network connection and a record of user activity.
Location policy commands override any virtual LAN (VLAN) or security
ACL assignment by AAA or the local WX database to help you control
access locally.
(Security ACLs are packet filters. For command descriptions, see
Chapter 12.)
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents AAA commands alphabetically. Use Table 44 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 44 AAA Commands by Usage
Type Command
Authentication set authentication console on page 228
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication proxy on page 238
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication proxy on page 206
200 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
clear authentication web on page 207
Local Authorization
for Password Users
set user on page 256
clear user on page 213
set user attr on page 257
clear user attr on page 214
set usergroup on page 259
clear usergroup on page 215
set user group on page 258
clear user group on page 215
clear usergroup attr on page 216
Local Authorization
for MAC Users
set mac-user on page 245
clear mac-user on page 209
set mac-user attr on page 246
clear mac-user attr on page 209
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212
clear mac-user group on page 210
clear mac-usergroup on page 211
Web authorization set web-aaa on page 260
Accounting set accounting {admin | console} on page 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} on page 224
display accounting statistics on page 220
clear accounting on page 201
AAA information display aaa on page 217
Mobility Profiles set mobility-profile on page 253
set mobility-profile mode on page 255
display mobility-profile on page 222
clear mobility-profile on page 213
Location Policy set location policy on page 241
display location policy on page 222
clear location policy on page 208
Table 44 AAA Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear accounting 201
clear accounting Removes accounting services for specified wireless users with
administrative access or network access.
Syntax — clear accounting {admin | dot1x} {user-glob}
admin — Users with administrative access to the WX switch through a
console connection or through a Telnet or Web Manager connection.
dot1x — Users with network access through the WX switch. Users
with network access are authorized to use the network through either
an IEEE 802.1X method or their media access control (MAC) address.
user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes accounting services for
authorized network user Nin:
WX4400# clear accounting dot1x Nin
success: change accepted.
See Also
set accounting {admin | console} on page 223
display accounting statistics on page 220
202 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
clear authentication
admin
Removes an authentication rule for administrative access through Telnet
or Web Manager.
Syntax — clear authentication admin user-glob
user-glob — A single user or set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears authentication for
administrator Jose:
WX4400# clear authentication admin Jose
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication web on page 207
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
clear authentication console 203
clear authentication
console
Removes an authentication rule for administrative access through the
Console.
Syntax — clear authentication console user-glob
user-glob — A single user or set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The syntax descriptions for the clear authentication commands have
been separated for clarity. However, the options and behavior for the
clear authentication console command are the same as in previous
releases.
Examples — The following command clears authentication for
administrator Regina:
WX4400# clear authentication console Regina
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
display aaa on page 217
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication web on page 207
set authentication console on page 228
204 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
clear authentication
dot1x
Removes an 802.1X authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication dot1x {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies.
wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s
wired-authentication port.
user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes 802.1X authentication
for network users with usernames ending in @thiscorp.com who try to
access SSID finance:
WX4400# clear authentication dot1x ssid finance
*@thiscorp.com
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication web on page 207
display aaa on page 217
set authentication dot1x on page 230
clear authentication last-resort 205
clear authentication
last-resort
Removes a last-resort authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication last-resort {ssid ssid-name |
wired}
ssid ssid-name —SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies.
wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s
wired-authentication port.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes a last-resort
authentication rule for wired-authentication access:
WX4400# clear authentication last-resort wired
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication mac on page 205
clear authentication web on page 207
display aaa on page 217
set authentication last-resort on page 234
clear authentication
mac
Removes a MAC authentication rule.
Syntax — clear authentication mac {ssid ssid-name | wired}
mac-addr-glob
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies.
wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s
wired-authentication port.
206 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
mac-addr-glob — MAC address glob associated with the rule you are
removing. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes a MAC authentication
rule for access to SSID thatcorp by MAC addresses beginning with
aa:bb:cc:
WX4400# clear authentication mac ssid thatcorp aa:bb:cc:*
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication web on page 207
display aaa on page 217
set authentication mac on page 236
clear authentication
proxy
Removes a proxy rule for third-party AP users.
Syntax — clear authentication proxy ssid ssid-name user-glob
ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule applies.
user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
clear authentication web 207
Examples — The following command removes the proxy rule for SSID
mycorp and userglob **:
WX-1200# clear authentication proxy ssid mycorp **
See Also
set authentication proxy on page 238
on page 260
clear authentication
web
Removes a WebAAA rule.
Syntax — clear authentication web {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies.
wired — Clears a rule used for access over an WX switch’s
wired-authentication port.
user-glob — User-glob associated with the rule you are removing.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes WebAAA for SSID
research and userglob temp*@thiscorp.com:
WX4400# clear authentication web ssid research
temp*@thiscorp.com
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
clear authentication console on page 203
208 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
clear authentication mac on page 205
display aaa on page 217
set authentication web on page 239
clear location policy Removes a rule from the location policy on a WX switch.
Syntax — clear location policy rule-number
rule-number — Index number of a location policy rule to remove
from the location policy.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To determine the index numbers of location policy rules, use
the display location policy command. Removing all the ACEs from the
location policy disables this function on the WX switch.
Examples — The following command removes location policy rule 4
from an WX switch’s location policy:
WX4400# clear location policy 4
success: clause 4 is removed.
See Also
display location policy on page 222
set location policy on page 241
clear mac-user 209
clear mac-user Removes a user profile from the local database on the WX switch, for a
user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To remove a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr
mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting a MAC user’s profile from the database deletes the
assignment of any attributes in the profile to the user.
Examples — The following command removes the user profile for a user
at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
set mac-user attr on page 246
clear mac-user attr Removes an authorization attribute from the user profile in the local
database on the WX switch, for a user who is authenticated by a MAC
address.
(To remove an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr attr attribute-name
mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
210 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the MAC
user for a particular service or session characteristic. (For a list of
authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes an access control list
(ACL) from the profile of a user at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 attr filter-id
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set mac-user attr on page 246
clear mac-user
group
Removes a user profile from a MAC user group in the local database on
the WX switch, for a user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To remove a MAC user group profile in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-user mac-addr group
mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing a MAC user from a MAC user group removes the
group name from the user’s profile, but does not delete the user group
from the local WX database. To remove the group, use clear
mac-usergroup.
clear mac-usergroup 211
Examples — The following command deletes the user profile for a user
at MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06 from its user group:
WX4400# clear mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 group
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-usergroup on page 211
display aaa on page 217
set mac-user on page 245
clear
mac-usergroup
Removes a user group from the local database on the WX switch, for a
group of users who are authenticated by a MAC address.
(To delete a MAC user group in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-usergroup group-name
group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To remove a user from a MAC user group, use the clear
mac-user group command.
Examples — The following command deletes the MAC user group
eastcoasters from the local database:
WX4400# clear mac-usergroup eastcoasters
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212
display aaa on page 217
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
212 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
clear
mac-usergroup attr
Removes an authorization attribute from a MAC user group in the local
database on the WX switch, for a group of users who are authenticated
by a MAC address.
(To unconfigure an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear mac-usergroup group-name attr attribute-name
group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the MAC
users in the user group for a particular service or session characteristic.
(For a list of authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To remove the group itself, use the clear mac-usergroup
command.
Examples — The following command removes the members of the MAC
user group eastcoasters from a VLAN assignment by deleting the
VLAN-Name attribute from the group:
WX4400# clear mac-usergroup eastcoasters attr vlan-name
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-usergroup on page 211
display aaa on page 217
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
clear mobility-profile 213
clear
mobility-profile
Removes a Mobility Profile entirely.
Syntax — clear mobility-profile name
name — Name of an existing Mobility Profile.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the Mobility Profile for
user Nin:
WX1200# clear mobility-profile Nin
success: change accepted.
See Also
set mobility-profile on page 253
set mobility-profile mode on page 255
display mobility-profile on page 222
clear user Removes a user profile from the local database on the WX switch, for a
user with a password.
(To remove a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username
username — Username of a user with a password.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting the user’s profile from the database deletes the
assignment of any attributes in the profile to the user.
214 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Examples — The following command deletes the user profile for user
Nin:
WX4400# clear user Nin
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set user on page 256
clear user attr Removes an authorization attribute from the user profile in the local
database on the WX switch, for a user with a password.
(To remove an authorization attribute from a RADIUS user profile, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username attr attribute-name
username — Username of a user with a password.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize the user
for a particular service or session characteristic. (For a list of
authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the Session-Timeout
attribute from Hosni’s user profile:
WX4400# clear user Hosni attr session-timeout
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set user attr on page 257
clear user group 215
clear user group Removes a user with a password from membership in a user group in the
local database on the WX switch.
(To remove a user from a user group in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear user username group
username — Username of a user with a password.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing the user from the group removes the group name
from the user’s profile, but does not delete either the user or the user
group from the local WX database. To remove the group, use clear
usergroup.
Examples — The following command removes the user Nin from a user
group:
WX4400# clear user Nin group
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear usergroup on page 215
display aaa on page 217
set user group on page 258
clear usergroup Removes a user group and its attributes from the local database on the
WX switch, for users with passwords.
(To delete a user group in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear usergroup group-name
group-name — Name of an existing user group.
216 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Removing a user group from the local WX database does not
remove the user profiles of the group’s members from the database.
Examples — The following command deletes the cardiology user group
from the local database:
WX4400# clear usergroup cardiology
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear usergroup attr on page 216
display aaa on page 217
set usergroup on page 259
clear usergroup attr Removes an authorization attribute from a user group in the local
database on the WX switch.
(To remove an authorization attribute in RADIUS, see the documentation
for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — clear usergroup group-name attr attribute-name
group-name — Name of an existing user group.
attribute-name — Name of an attribute used to authorize all the
users in the group for a particular service or session characteristic. (For
a list of authorization attributes, see Table 47 on page 247.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
display aaa 217
Examples — The following command removes the members of the user
group cardiology from a network access time restriction by deleting the
Time-Of-Day attribute from the group:
WX4400# clear usergroup cardiology attr time-of-day
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear usergroup on page 215
display aaa on page 217
set usergroup on page 259
display aaa Displays all current AAA settings.
Syntax — display aaa
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In Version 4.0, Web Portal
secion added to indicate the state of the WebAAA feature.
Examples — To display all current AAA settings, type the following
command:
WX4400# display aaa
Default Values
authport=1812 acctport=1813 timeout=5 acct-timeout=5
retrans=3 deadtime=0 key=(null) author-pass=(null)
Radius Servers
Server Addr Ports T/o Tries Dead State
--------------------------------------------------------------------
rs-3 198.162.1.1 1821 1813 5 3 0 UP
rs-4 198.168.1.2 1821 1813 77 11 2 UP
rs-5 198.162.1.3 1821 1813 42 23 0 UP
Server groups
sg1: rs-3
sg2: rs-4
sg3: rs-5
Web Portal
enabled
218 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
set authentication admin Jose sg3
set authentication console * none
set authentication mac ssid mycorp * local
set authentication dot1x ssid mycorp Geetha eap-tls
set authentication dot1x ssid mycorp * peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
set authentication dot1x ssid any ** peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
set accounting dot1x Nin ssid mycorp stop-only sg2
set accounting admin Natasha start-stop local
set authentication last-resort ssid guestssid local
user Nin
Password = 082c6c64060b (encrypted)
Filter-Id = acl-999.in
Filter-Id = acl-999.out
user last-resort-guestssid
Vlan-Name = k2
user last-resort-any
Vlan-Name = foo
mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06
usergroup eastcoasters
session-timeout = 99
Table 45 describes the fields that can appear in display aaa output.
Table 45 display aaa Output
Field Description
Default Values RADIUS default values for all parameters.
authport UDP port on the WX switch for transmission of RADIUS
authorization and authentication messages. The default
port is 1812.
acctport UDP port on the WX switch for transmission of RADIUS
accounting records. The default is port 1813.
timeout Number of seconds the WX switch waits for a RADIUS
server to respond before retransmitting. The default is
5 seconds.
acct-timeout Number of seconds the WX switch waits for a RADIUS
server to respond to an accounting request before
retransmitting. The default is 5 seconds.
retrans Number of times the WX switch retransmits a message
before determining a RADIUS server unresponsive. The
default is 3 times.
display aaa 219
See Also
set accounting {admin | console} on page 223
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
deadtime Number of minutes the WX switch waits after determining
a RADIUS server is unresponsive before trying to reconnect
with this server. During the dead time, the RADIUS server
is ignored by the WX switch. The default is 0 minutes.
key Shared secret key, or password, used to authenticate to a
RADIUS server. The default is no key.
author-pass Password used for outbound authentication to a RADIUS
server, used in conjunction with a last-resort username. By
default, a MAC user’s MAC address is also used as that
user’s password, and no global password is set.
Radius Servers Information about active RADIUS servers.
Server Name of each RADIUS server currently active.
Addr IP address of each RADIUS server currently active.
Ports UDP ports that the WX switch uses for authentication
messages and for accounting records.
T/o Setting of timeouts on each RADIUS server currently active.
Tries Number of retransmissions configured for each RADIUS
server currently active. The default is 3 times.
Dead Length of time until the server is considered responsive
again.
State Current state of each RADIUS server currently active:
UP (operating)
DOWN (unavailable)
Server groups Names of RADIUS server groups and member servers
configured on the WX switch.
Web Portal State of the WebAAA feature:
enabled
disabled
set commands List of commands used to configure AAA on the WX
switch.
user and user group
profiles List of user and user group profiles stored in the local
database on the WX switch.
Table 45 display aaa Output (continued)
220 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
display accounting
statistics
Displays the AAA accounting records for wireless users. The records are
stored in the local database on the WX switch.
(To display RADIUS accounting records, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — display accounting statistics
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the locally stored accounting records, type the
following command:
WX4400# display accounting statistics
Sep 26 11:01:48 Acct-Status-Type=START Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Event-Timestamp=1064599308
Sept 26 12:50:21 Acct-Status-Type=STOP Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Acct-Session-Time=6513
Event-Timestamp=1064605821 Acct-Output-Octets=332
Acct-Input-Octets=61
Sep 26 12:50:33 Acct-Status-Type=START Acct-Authentic=2
User-Name=geetha AAA_TTY_ATTR=2 Event-Timestamp=1064605833
Table 46 describes the fields that can appear in display accounting
statistics output.
Table 46 display accounting statistics Output
Field Description
Date and time Date and time of the accounting record.
display accounting statistics 221
See Also
clear accounting on page 201
display aaa on page 217
set accounting {admin | console} on page 223
Acct-Status-Type Type of accounting record:
START
STOP
UPDATE
Acct-Authentic Location where the user was authenticated (if
authentication took place) for the session:
1 — RADIUS server
2 — Local WX database
User-Name Username of a user with a password.
Acct-Multi-Session-Id Unique accounting ID for multiple related sessions in a log
file.
AAA_TTY_ATTR For sessions conducted through a console or
administrative Telnet connection, the Telnet terminal
number.
Event-Timestamp Time (in seconds since January 1, 1970) at which the event
was triggered. (See RFC 2869 for more information.)
Acct-Session-Time Number of seconds that the session has been online.
Acct-Output-Octets Number of octets the WX switch has sent during the
session.
Acct-Input-Octets Number of octets the WX switch has received during the
session.
Acct-Output-Packets Number of packets the WX switch has sent during the
session.
Acct-Input-Packets Number of packets the WX switch has received during the
session.
Vlan-Name Name of the client’s VLAN.
Calling-Station-Id MAC address of the supplicant (client).
Nas-Port-Id Number of the port and radio on the MAP access point
through which the session was conducted.
Called-Station-Id MAC address of the MAP access point through which the
client reached the network.
Table 46 display accounting statistics Output (continued)
222 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
display location
policy
Displays the list of location policy rules that make up the location policy
on an WX switch.
Syntax — display location policy
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the list of location policy
rules in the location policy on an WX switch:
WX4400 display location policy
Id Clauses
----------------------------------------------------------------
1) deny if user eq *.theirfirm.com
2) permit vlan guest_1 if vlan neq *.wodefirm.com
3) permit vlan bld4.tac inacl tac_24.in if user eq *.ny.wodefirm.com
See Also
clear location policy on page 208
set location policy on page 241
display
mobility-profile
Displays the named Mobility Profile. If you do not specify a Mobility
Profile name, this command shows all Mobility Profile names and port
lists on the WX.
Syntax — display mobility-profile [name]
name — Name of an existing Mobility Profile.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the Mobility Profile
magnolia:
WX1200# display mobility-profile magnolia
set accounting {admin | console} 223
Mobility Profiles
Name Ports
=========================
magnolia AP 2
See Also
clear mobility-profile on page 213
set mobility-profile on page 253
set accounting
{admin | console}
Sets up accounting services for specified wireless users with
administrative access, and defines the accounting records and where they
are sent.
Syntax — set accounting {admin | console} {user-glob}
{start-stop | stop-only} method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
admin — Users with administrative access to the WX switch through
Telnet or Web Manager.
console — Users with administrative access to the WX switch
through a console connection.
user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
This option does not apply if mac is specified. For mac, specify a
mac-addr-glob. (See “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
start-stop — Sends accounting records at the start and end of a
network session.
stop-only — Sends accounting records only at the end of a network
session.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to process accounting records. Specify one or
more of the following methods in priority order. If the first method
does not succeed, MSS tries the second method, and so on.
224 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
A method can be one of the following:
local — Stores accounting records in the local database on the
WX switch. When the local accounting storage space is full, MSS
overwrites older records with new ones.
server-group-name — Stores accounting records on one or more
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers. You
can also enter the names of existing RADIUS server groups as
methods.
Defaults — Accounting is disabled for all users by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For network users with start-stop accounting whose records
are sent to a RADIUS server, MSS sends interim updates to the RADIUS
server when the user roams.
Examples — The following command issues start-and-stop accounting
records at the local WX database for administrator Natasha, when she
accesses the switch using Telnet or Web Manager:
WX4400# set accounting admin Natasha start-stop local
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear accounting on page 201
display accounting statistics on page 220
set accounting
{dot1x | mac | web}
Sets up accounting services for specified wireless users with network
access, and defines the accounting records and where they are sent.
Syntax — set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} {ssid ssid-name |
wired} {user-glob |mac-addr-glob} {start-stop | stop-only}
method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
dot1x — Users with network access through the WX switch who are
authenticated by 802.1X.
mac — Users with network access through the WX switch who are
authenticated by MAC authentication
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} 225
web — Users with network access through the WX switch who are
authenticated by WebAAA
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this accounting rule applies.
To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this accounting rule specifically to users who are
authenticated on a wired authentication port.
user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access or
network access.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character — either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
This option does not apply if mac is specified. For mac, specify a
mac-addr-glob. (See “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
mac-addr-glob — A single user or set of users with access via a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)
This option applies only when mac is specified.
start-stop — Sends accounting records at the start and end of a
network session.
stop-only — Sends accounting records only at the end of a network
session.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to process accounting records. Specify one or
more of the following methods in priority order. If the first method
does not succeed, MSS tries the second method, and so on.
A method can be one of the following:
local — Stores accounting records in the local database on the
WX switch. When the local accounting storage space is full, MSS
overwrites older records with new ones.
server-group-name — Stores accounting records on one or more
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) servers. You
can also enter the names of existing RADIUS server groups as
methods.
226 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Defaults — Accounting is disabled for all users by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For network users with start-stop accounting whose records
are sent to a RADIUS server, MSS sends interim updates to the RADIUS
server when the user roams.
Examples — The following command issues stop-only records to the
RADIUS server group sg2 for network user Nin, who is authenticated by
802.1X:
WX4400# set accounting dot1x Nin stop-only sg2
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear accounting on page 201
display accounting statistics on page 220
set authentication
admin
Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
users with administrative access through Telnet or Web Manager.
Syntax — set authentication admin
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access
over the network through Telnet or Web Manager.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups
on the WX switch for authentication.
set authentication admin 227
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
none — For users with administrative access only, MSS performs no
authentication, but prompts for a username and password and
accepts any combination of entries, including blanks.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all admin users.
The default authentication method in an admin authentication rule is
local. MSS checks the local WX database for authentication.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The syntax descriptions for the set authentication commands have been
separated for clarity. However, the options and behavior for the set
authentication admin command are the same as in previous releases.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users. (For details, see “User Globs, MAC Address
Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
console command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear
in the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.
228 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
If a AAA rule specifies local as a secondary AAA method, to be used if the
RADIUS servers are unavailable, and MSS authenticates a client with the
local method, MSS starts again at the beginning of the method list when
attempting to authorize the client. This can cause unexpected delays
during client processing and can cause the client to time out before
completing logon.
Examples — The following command configures administrator Jose,
who connects via Telnet, for authentication on RADIUS server group sg3:
WX4400# set authentication admin Jose sg3
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication admin on page 202
display aaa on page 217
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication
console
Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
users with administrative access through a console connection.
Syntax — set authentication console
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
user-glob — Single user or set of users with administrative access
through the switch’s console.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
set authentication console 229
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups
on the WX switch for authentication.
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
none — For users with administrative access only, MSS performs
no authentication, but prompts for a username and password and
accepts any combination of entries, including blanks.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all console
users, and the default authentication method in a console authentication
rule is none. MSS requires no username or password, by default. These
users can press Enter at the prompts for administrative access.
3Com recommends that you change the default setting unless the WX
switch is in a secure physical location.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users. (For details, see “User Globs, MAC Address
Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
console command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear
in the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
230 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.
Examples — To set the console port so that it does not enforce
username-password authentication for administrators, type the following
command:
WX4400# set authentication console * none
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication console on page 203
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication
dot1x
Configures authentication and defines how and where it is performed for
specified wireless or wired authentication clients who use an IEEE 802.1X
authentication protocol to access the network through the WX switch.
Syntax — set authentication dot1x {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob [bonded] protocol method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users
connected to a wired authentication port.
user-glob — A single user or a set of users with 802.1X network
access.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character — either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
set authentication dot1x 231
bonded — Enables Bonded Auth™ (bonded authentication). When
this feature is enabled, MSS authenticates the user only if the machine
the user is on has already been authenticated.
protocol — Protocol used for authentication. Specify one of the
following:
eap-md5 — Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) with
message-digest algorithm 5. For wired authentication clients:
Uses challenge-response to compare hashes
Provides no encryption or integrity checking for the connection
eap-tls — EAP with Transport Layer Security (TLS):
Provides mutual authentication, integrity-protected negotiation,
and key exchange
Requires X.509 public key certificates on both sides of the
connection
Provides encryption and integrity checking for the connection
Cannot be used with RADIUS server authentication
peap-mschapv2 — Protected EAP (PEAP) with Microsoft Challenge
Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 (MS-CHAP-V2). For
wireless clients:
Uses TLS for encryption and data integrity checking and server-side
authentication
Provides MS-CHAP-V2 mutual authentication
Only the server side of the connection needs a certificate.
The wireless client authenticates using TLS to set up an encrypted
session. Then MS-CHAP-V2 performs mutual authentication using
the specified AAA method.
pass-through — MSS sends all the EAP protocol processing to a
RADIUS server.
EAP-MD5 does not work with Microsoft wired authentication clients.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one and up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
232 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on
the WX switch for authentication.
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
RADIUS servers cannot be used with the EAP-TLS protocol.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users.
Bonded authentication is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)
You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
You cannot configure client authentication that uses both the EAP-TLS
protocol and one or more RADIUS servers. EAP-TLS authentication is
supported only on the local WX database.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
dot1x command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
set authentication dot1x 233
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
If the user does not support 802.1X, MSS attempts to perform MAC
authentication for the user. In this case, if the switch’s configuration
contains a set authentication mac command that matches the SSID the
user is attempting to access and the user’s MAC address, MSS uses the
method specified by the command. Otherwise, MSS uses local MAC
authentication by default.
If the username does not match an authentication rule for the SSID the
user is attempting to access, MSS uses the fallthru authentication type
configured for the SSID, which can be last-resort, web (for WebAAA),
or none.
Examples — The following command configures EAP-TLS authentication
in the local WX database for SSID mycorp and 802.1X client Geetha:
WX4400# set authentication dot1x ssid mycorp Geetha eap-tls
local
success: change accepted.
The following command configures PEAP-MS-CHAP-V2 authentication at
RADIUS server groups sg1 through sg3 for all 802.1X clients at
example.com who want to access SSID examplecorp:
WX4400# set authentication dot1x ssid examplecorp
*@example.com peap-mschapv2 sg1 sg2 sg3
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication dot1x on page 204
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
234 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
set authentication
last-resort
Configures an authentication rule to grant network access to a user who
is not otherwise granted or denied access by 802.1X, or granted access
by MAC authentication.
Syntax — set authentication last-resort
{ssid ssid-name | wired} method1 [method2] [method3]
[method4]
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users
connected to a wired authentication port.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on
the WX switch for authentication.
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users. When using RADIUS for authentication, a last-resort
user’s default authorization password is 3Com.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)
set authentication last-resort 235
You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
last-resort command, MSS applies them in the order in which they
appear in the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method,
and so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
MSS uses a last-resort authentication rule under the following conditions:
The client is not denied access by 802.1X or does not support 802.1X.
The client’s MAC address does not match a MAC authentication rule.
The fallthru method is last-resort. (For a wireless authentication rule,
the fallthru method is specified by the set service-profile
auth-fallthru command. For a wired authentication rule, the fallthru
method is specified by the auth-fall-thru option of the set port type
wired-auth command.)
For wireless access, MSS appends the requested SSID name to the user
name last-resort. For example, if the requested SSID is mycorp, MSS
attempts to authenticate the user last-resort-mycorp. If the RADIUS server
or local database used as the authentication method has the user
last-resort-mycorp, access is granted. Otherwise, access is denied.
If the SSID specified in the last-resort authentication rule is any, MSS
searches for user last-resort-any. The any in the username is not a
wildcard. The username must be last-resort-any, exactly as spelled here.
Examples — The following command configures a last-resort
authentication rule in the local WX database for SSID mycorp:
WX4400# set authentication last-resort ssid mycorp local
success: change accepted.
236 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
See Also
clear authentication last-resort on page 205
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication
mac
Configures authentication and defines where it is performed for specified
non-802.1X users with network access through a media access control
(MAC) address.
Syntax — set authentication mac
{ssid ssid-name | wired} mac-addr-glob method1
[method2] [method3] [method4]
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users
connected to a wired authentication port.
mac-addr-glob — A single user or set of users with access via a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address, or use the wildcard (*) character to
specify a set of MAC addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address
Globs” on page 27.)
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one of up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on
the WX switch for authentication.
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
For more information, see “Usage.”
set authentication mac 237
Defaults — By default, authentication is deactivated for all MAC users,
which means MAC address authentication fails by default. When using
RADIUS for authentication, a MAC user’s MAC address is also used as the
authorization password for that user, and no global authorization
password is set.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of MAC addresses by “globbing.” (For details, see “User
Globs, MAC Address Globs, and VLAN Globs” on page 26.)
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
mac command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
ignores any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the RADIUS server group.
If the switch’s configuration contains a set authentication mac
command that matches the SSID the user is attempting to access and the
user’s MAC address, MSS uses the method specified by the command.
Otherwise, MSS uses local MAC authentication by default.
If the username does not match an authentication rule for the SSID the
user is attempting to access, MSS uses the fallthru authentication type
configured for the SSID, which can be last-resort, web (for WebAAA),
or none.
Examples — To use the local WX database to authenticate all users who
access the mycorp2 SSID by their MAC address, type the following
command:
WX4400# set authentication ssid mycorp2 mac ** local
success: change accepted.
238 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
See Also
clear authentication mac on page 205
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication web on page 239
set authentication
proxy
Configures a proxy authentication rule for a third-party AP’s wireless
users.
Syntax — set authentication proxy ssid ssid-name user-glob
radius-server-group
ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule applies.
user-glob — A single user or a set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
radius-server-group — A group of RADIUS servers used for
authentication.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
set authentication web 239
Examples — The following command configures a proxy authentication
rule that matches on all usernames associated with SSID mycorp. MSS
uses RADIUS server group srvrgrp1 to proxy RADIUS requests and hence
to authenticate and authorize the users.
WX-1200# set authentication proxy ssid mycorp ** srvrgrp1
See Also
clear authentication proxy on page 206
set radius proxy client on page 470
set radius proxy port on page 471
set authentication
web
Configures an authentication rule to allow a user to log in to the network
using a web page served by the WX switch. The rule can be activated if
the user is not otherwise granted or denied access by 802.1X, or granted
access by MAC authentication.
Syntax — set authentication web {ssid ssid-name | wired}
user-glob method1 [method2] [method3] [method4]
user-glob — A single user or a set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
ssid ssid-name — SSID name to which this authentication rule
applies. To apply the rule to all SSIDs, type any.
wired — Applies this authentication rule specifically to users
connected to a wired authentication port.
method1, method2, method3, method4 — At least one and up to four
methods that MSS uses to handle authentication. Specify one or more
of the following methods in priority order. MSS applies multiple
methods in the order you enter them.
A method can be one of the following:
local — Uses the local database of usernames and user groups on
the WX switch for authentication.
240 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
server-group-name — Uses the defined group of RADIUS servers
for authentication. You can enter up to four names of existing
RADIUS server groups as methods.
RADIUS servers cannot be used with the EAP-TLS protocol.
For more information, see “Usage.”
Defaults — By default, authentication is unconfigured for all clients with
network access through MAP ports or wired authentication ports on the
WX switch. Connection, authorization, and accounting are also disabled
for these users.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure different authentication methods for
different groups of users by “globbing.” (For details, see “User Globs” on
page 26.)
You can configure a rule either for wireless access to an SSID, or for wired
access through a WX switch’s wired authentication port. If the rule is for
wireless access to an SSID, specify the SSID name or specify any to match
on all SSID names. If the rule is for wired access, specify wired instead of
an SSID name.
If you specify multiple authentication methods in the set authentication
web command, MSS applies them in the order in which they appear in
the command, with these results:
If the first method responds with pass or fail, the evaluation is final.
If the first method does not respond, MSS tries the second method, and
so on.
However, if local appears first, followed by a RADIUS server group, MSS
overrides any failed searches in the local WX database and sends an
authentication request to the server group.
MSS uses a WebAAA rule only under the following conditions:
The client is not denied access by 802.1X or does not support 802.1X.
The client’s MAC address does not match a MAC authentication rule.
set location policy 241
The fallthru method is web. (For a wireless authentication rule, the
fallthru method is specified by the set service-profile auth-fallthru
command. For a wired authentication rule, the fallthru method is
specified by the auth-fall-thru option of the set port type wired-auth
command.)
Examples — The following command configures a WebAAA rule in the
local WX database for SSID ourcorp and userglob rnd*:
WX4400# set authentication web ssid ourcorp rnd* local
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication web on page 207
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set location policy Creates and enables a location policy on an WX switch. A location policy
enables you to locally set or change authorization attributes for a user
afer the user is authorized by AAA, without making changes to the AAA
server.
Syntax — set location policy deny if {ssid operator ssid-name |
vlan operator vlan-glob | user operator user-glob |
port port-list | dap dap-num}
[before rule-number | modify rule-number ]
Syntax — set location policy permit {vlan vlan-name |
inacl inacl-name | outacl outacl-name}
if {ssid operator ssid-name | vlan operator vlan-glob |
user operator user-glob | port port-list | dap dap-num}
[before rule-number | modify rule-number]
deny — Denies access to the network to users with characteristics that
match the location policy rule.
242 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
permit — Allows access to the network or to a specified VLAN,
and/or assigns a particular security ACL to users with characteristics
that match the location policy rule.
Action options — For a permit rule, MSS changes the attributes
assigned to the user to the values specified by the following options:
vlan vlan-name — Name of an existing VLAN to assign to users with
characteristics that match the location policy rule.
inacl inacl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to apply to
packets sent to the WX switch with characteristics that match the
location policy rule.
Optionally, you can add the suffix .in to the name.
outacl outacl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to apply to
packets sent from the WX switch with characteristics that match the
location policy rule.
Optionally, you can add the suffix .out to the name.
Condition options — MSS takes the action specified by the rule if all
conditions in the rule are met. You can specify one or more of the
following conditions:
ssid operator ssid-name — SSID with which the user is associated.
The operator must be eq, which applies the location policy rule to all
users associated with the SSID. Asterisks (wildcards) are not supported
in SSID names. You must specify the complete SSID name.
vlan operator vlan-glob — VLAN-Name attribute assigned by AAA
and condition by which to determine if the location policy rule applies.
Replace operator with one of the following operands:
eq — Applies the location policy rule to all users assigned VLAN
names matching vlan-glob.
neq — Applies the location policy rule to all users assigned VLAN
names not matching vlan-glob.
For vlan-glob, specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard
character (**) to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk
wildcard character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or
following the first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period
(.). (For details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)
set location policy 243
user operator user-glob — Username and condition by which to
determine if the location policy rule applies. Replace operator with
one of the following operands:
eq — Applies the location policy rule to all usernames matching
user-glob.
neq — Applies the location policy rule to all usernames not
matching user-glob.
For user-glob, specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard
character (**) to specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk
wildcard character (*) to specify a set of usernames up to or following
the first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “User Globs” on page 26.)
before rule-number — Inserts the new location policy rule in front of
another rule in the location policy. Specify the number of the existing
location policy rule. (To determine the number, use the display
location policy command.)
modify rule-number — Replaces the rule in the location policy with
the new rule. Specify the number of the existing location policy rule.
(To determine the number, use the display location policy
command.)
port port-list — List of physical port(s) by which to determine if the
location policy rule applies.
Defaults — By default, users are permitted VLAN access and assigned
security ACLs according to the VLAN-Name and Filter-Id attributes
applied to the users during normal authentication and authorization.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. SSID option added in MSS
Version 3.2.
Usage — Only a single location policy is allowed per WX switch. Once
configured, the location policy becomes effective immediately. To disable
location policy operation, use the clear location policy command.
244 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Conditions within a rule are ANDed. All conditions in the rule must match
for MSS to take the specified action. If the location policy contains
multiple rules, MSS compares the user information to the rules one at a
time, in the order the rules appear in the switch’s configuration file,
beginning with the rule at the top of the list. MSS continues comparing
until a user matches all conditions in a rule or until there are no more
rules.
The order of rules in the location policy is important to ensure users are
properly granted or denied access. To position rules within the location
policy, use before rule-number and modify rule-number in the set
location policy command, and the clear location policy rule-number
command.
When applying security ACLs:
Use inacl inacl-name to filter traffic that enters the switch from users via
an MAP access port or wired authentication port, or from the network via
a network port.
Use outacl outacl-name to filter traffic sent from the switch to users via
an MAP access port or wired authentication port, or from the network via
a network port.
You can optionally add the suffixes .in and .out to inacl-name and
outacl-name so that they match the names of security ACLs stored in the
local WX database.
Examples — The following command denies network access to all users
at *.theirfirm.com, causing them to fail authorization:
WX4400# set location policy deny if user eq *.theirfirm.com
The following command authorizes access to the guest_1 VLAN for all
users who are not at *.wodefirm.com:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan guest_1 if user neq
*.wodefirm.com
The following command authorizes users at *.ny.ourfirm.com to access
the bld4.tac VLAN instead, and applies the security ACL tac_24 to the
traffic they receive:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan bld4.tac
outacl tac_24 if user eq *.ny.ourfirm.com
set mac-user 245
The following command authorizes access to users on VLANs with names
matching bld4.* and applies security ACLs svcs_2 to the traffic they send
and svcs_3 to the traffic they receive:
WX4400# set location policy permit inacl svcs_2 outacl svcs_3
if vlan eq bldg4.*
The following command authorizes users entering the network on WX
ports 1 and 2 to use the floor2 VLAN, overriding any settings from AAA:
WX4400# set location policy permit vlan floor2 if port 1-2
The following command places all users who are authorized for SSID
tempvendor_a into VLAN kiosk_1:
WX1200# set location policy permit vlan kiosk_1 iff ssid eq
tempvendor_a
success: change accepted
See Also
clear location policy on page 208
display location policy on page 222
set mac-user Configures a user profile in the local database on the WX switch for a
user who can be authenticated by a MAC address, and optionally adds
the user to a MAC user group.
(To configure a MAC user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for
your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-user mac-addr [group group-name]
mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
group-name — Name of an existing MAC user group.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not require MAC users to belong to user groups.
246 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Users authenticated by MAC address can be authenticated only for
network access through the WX switch. MSS does not support passwords
for MAC users.
Examples — The following command creates a user profile for a user at
MAC address 01:02:03:04:05:06 and assigns the user to the eastcoasters
user group:
WX4400# set mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 group eastcoasters
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-user on page 209
display aaa on page 217
set mac-user attr Assigns an authorization attribute in the local database on the WX switch
to a user who is authenticated by a MAC address.
(To assign authorization attributes through RADIUS, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-user mac-addr attr attribute-name value
mac-addr — MAC address of the user, in hexadecimal numbers
separated by colons (:). You can omit leading zeros.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize the MAC user for a particular service or session
characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values that you
can assign to local users, see Table 47.
set mac-user attr 247
Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users
Attribute Description Valid Value(s)
encryption-type Type of encryption
required for access by
the client. Clients who
attempt to use an
unauthorized encryption
method are rejected.
One of the following numbers that
identifies an encryption algorithm:
1—AES_CCM (Advanced
Encryption Standard using Counter
with CBC-MAC)
2—Reserved
4—TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol)
8—WEP_104 (the default)
(Wired-Equivalent Privacy protocol
using 104 bits of key strength)
16—WEP_40 (Wired-Equivalent
Privacy protocol using 40 bits of
key strength)
32—NONE (no encryption)
64—Static WEP
In addition to these values, you can
specify a sum of them for a
combination of allowed encryption
types. For example, to specify
WEP_104 and WEP_40, use 24.
end-date Date and time after
which the user is no
longer allowed to be on
the network.
Date and time, in the following
format:
YY/MM/DD-HH:MM
You can use end-date alone or with
start-date. You also can use
start-date, end-date, or both in
conjunction with time-of-day.
248 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
filter-id Inbound or outbound
ACL to apply to the
user.
If configured in the WX switch’s local
database, this attribute can be an
access control list (ACL) to filter
outbound or inbound traffic. Use the
following format:
filter-id inboundacl.in
or
filter-id outboundacl.out
If you are configuring the attribute on
a RADIUS server, the value field of
filter-id can specify up to two ACLs.
Any of the following are valid:
filter-id = "Profile=acl1"
filter-id = "OutboundACL=acl2"
filter-id = "Profile=acl1
OutboundACL=acl2"
(Each example goes on a single line on
the server.) The format in which to
specify the values depends on the
RADIUS server.
Regardless of whether the attributes
are defined locally or on a RADIUS
server, the ACLs must already be
configured on the WX switch.
idle-timeout This option is not implemented in the current MSS version.
mobility-profile
(network access
mode only)
Mobility Profile attribute
for the user. (For more
information, see set
mobility-profile on
page 253.)
Name of an existing Mobility Profile,
which can be up to 32 alphanumeric
characters, with no tabs or spaces.
If the Mobility Profile feature is
enabled, and a user is assigned the
name of a Mobility Profile that does
not exist on the WX switch, the user is
denied access.
Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
set mac-user attr 249
service-type Type of access the user
is requesting. One of the following numbers:
2—Framed; for network user access
6—Administrative; for administrative
access to the WX switch, with
authorization to access the enabled
(configuration) mode. The user must
enter the enable command to access
the enabled mode.
7—NAS-Prompt; for administrative
access to the nonenabled mode only.
In this mode, the enable command is
not available and the user cannot log
in to the enabled mode.
For administrative sessions, the WX
switch will send 7 (NAS-Prompt) unless
the service-type attribute has been
configured for the user.
The RADIUS server can reply with one
of the values listed above.
If the service-type is not set on the
RADIUS server, administrative users
receive NAS-Prompt access, and
network users receive Framed access.
session-timeout
(network access
mode only)
Maximum number of
seconds for the user’s
session.
Number between 0 and
4,294,967,296 seconds
(approximately 136.2 years).
ssid
(network access
mode only)
SSID the user is allowed
to access after
authentication.
Name of the SSID you want the user to
use. The SSID must be configured in a
service profile, and the service profile
must be used by a radio profile
assigned to MAP radios in the Mobility
Domain.
start-date Date and time at which
the user becomes
eligible to access the
network.
MSS does not
authenticate the user
unless the attempt to
access the network
occurs at or after the
specified date and time,
but before the end-date
(if specified).
Date and time, in the following
format:
YY/MM/DD-HH:MM
You can use start-date alone or with
end-date. You also can use
start-date, end-date, or both in
conjunction with time-of-day.
Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
250 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
time-of-day
(network access
mode only)
Day(s) and time(s)
during which the user is
permitted to log into the
network.
After authorization, the
user’s session can last
until either the
Time-Of-Day range or
the Session-Timeout
duration (if set) expires,
whichever is shorter.
One of the following:
never—Access is always denied.
any—Access is always allowed.
al—Access is always allowed.
One or more ranges of values that
consist of one of the following day
designations (required), and a time
range in hhmm-hhmm 4-digit
24-hour format (optional):
mo—Monday
tu—Tuesday
we—Wednesday
th—Thursday
fr—Friday
sa—Saturday
su—Sunday
wk—Any day between Monday
and Friday
Separate values or a series of ranges
(except time ranges) with commas (,)
or a vertical bar (|). Do not use spaces.
The maximum number of characters is
253.
You can use time-of-day in
conjunction with start-date,
end-date, or both.
Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
set mac-user attr 251
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set mac-user attr
with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear mac-user attr.
You cannot set the Filter-ID attribute in the local database.
Examples — The following command assigns input access control list
(ACL) acl-03 to filter the packets from a user at MAC address
01:02:03:04:05:06:
WX4400# set mac-user 01:02:03:04:05:06 attr filter-id
acl-03.in
success: change accepted.
url
(network access
mode only)
URL to which the user is
redirected after
successful WebAAA.
Web URL, in standard format. For
example:
http://www.example.com
You must include the http:// portion.
You can dynamically include any of
the variables in hte URL string:
$u—Username
$v—VLAN
$s—SSID
$p—Service profile name
To use the literal character $ or ?, use
the following:
$$
$q
vlan-name
(network access
mode only)
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
assignment.
On some RADIUS
servers, you might need
to use the standard
RADIUS attribute
Tunnel-Pvt-Group-ID,
instead of VLAN-Name.
Name of a VLAN that you want the
user to use. The VLAN must be
configured on an WX switch within
the Mobility Domain to which this WX
switch belongs.
Table 47 Authentication Attributes for Local Users (continued)
252 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
The following command restricts a user at MAC address
06:05:04:03:02:01 to network access between 7 p.m. on Mondays and
Wednesdays and 7 a.m. on Tuesdays and Thursdays:
WX4400# set mac-user 06:05:04:03:02:01 attr time-of-day
mo1900-1159,tu0000-0700,we1900-1159,th0000-0700
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-user attr on page 209
display aaa on page 217
set mac-usergroup
attr
Creates a user group in the local database on the WX switch for users
who are authenticated by a MAC address, and assigns authorization
attributes for the group.
(To configure a user group and assign authorization attributes through
RADIUS, see the documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set mac-usergroup
group-name attr attribute-name value
group-name — Name of a MAC user group. Specify a name of up to
32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize all MAC users in the group for a particular service
or session characteristic. (For a list of authorization attributes, see
Table 47 on page 247.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set mac-usergroup
attr with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear
mac-usergroup attr.
set mobility-profile 253
Examples — The following command creates the MAC user group
eastcoasters and assigns the group members to VLAN orange:
WX4400# set mac-usergroup eastcoasters attr vlan-name orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mac-usergroup attr on page 212
display aaa on page 217
set mobility-profile Creates a Mobility Profile and specifies the MAP access point and/or
wired authentication ports on the WX switch through which any user
assigned to the profile is allowed access.
Syntax — set mobility-profile name name {port {none | all |
port-list}} | {dap {none | all | dap-num}}
name — Name of the Mobility Profile. Specify up to 32 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
none — Prevents any user to whom this profile is assigned from
accessing any MAP access point or wired authentication port on the
WX switch.
all — Allows any user to whom this profile is assigned to access all
MAP access ports and wired authentication port on the WX switch.
port-list — List of MAP access ports or wired authentication ports
through which any user assigned this profile is allowed access. The
same port can be used in multiple Mobility Profile port lists.
dap-num — List of Distributed MAP connections through which any
user assigned this profile is allowed access. The same Distributed MAP
can be used in multiple Mobility Profile port lists.
Defaults — No default Mobility Profile exists on the WX switch. If you do
not assign Mobility Profile attributes, all users have access through all
ports, unless denied access by other AAA servers or by access control lists
(ACLs).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
254 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
Usage — To assign a Mobility Profile to a user or group, specify it as an
authorization attribute in one of the following commands:
set user attr mobility-profile name
set usergroup attr mobility-profile name
set mac-user attr mobility-profile name
set mac-usergroup attr mobility-profile name
To enable the use of the Mobility Profile feature on the WX switch, use
the set mobility-profile mode command.
CAUTION: When the Mobility Profile feature is enabled, a user is denied
access if assigned a Mobility-Profile attribute in the local WX switch
database or RADIUS server when no Mobility Profile of that name exists
on the WX switch.
To change the ports in a profile, use set mobility-profile again with the
updated port list.
Examples — The following commands create the Mobility Profile
magnolia, which restricts user access to port 2; enable the Mobility Profile
feature on the WX switch; and assign the magnolia Mobility Profile to
user Jose.
WX1200# set mobility-profile name magnolia port 2
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set mobility-profile mode enable
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set user Jose attr mobility-profile magnolia
success: change accepted.
The following command adds port 3 to the magnolia Mobility Profile
(which is already assigned to port 2):
WX1200# set mobility-profile name magnolia port 3
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mobility-profile on page 213
display mobility-profile on page 222
set mac-user attr on page 246
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
set mobility-profile mode on page 255
set mobility-profile mode 255
set user attr on page 257
set usergroup on page 259
set mobility-profile
mode
Enables or disables the Mobility Profile feature on the WX switch.
CAUTION: When the Mobility Profile feature is enabled, a user is denied
access if assigned a Mobility-Profile attribute in the local WX switch
database or RADIUS server when no Mobility Profile of that name exists
on the WX switch.
Syntax — set mobility-profile mode {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the use of the Mobility Profile feature on the WX
switch.
disable — Specifies that all Mobility Profile attributes are ignored by
the WX switch.
Defaults — The Mobility Profile feature is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To enable the use of the Mobility Profile feature, type the
following command:
WX1200# set mobility-profile mode enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mobility-profile on page 213
display mobility-profile on page 222
set mobility-profile on page 253
256 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
set user Configures a user profile in the local database on the WX switch for a
user with a password.
(To configure a user profile in RADIUS, see the documentation for your
RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set user username password string (encrypted)
username — Username of a user with a password.
password string — Password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters,
with no spaces.
encrypted — Indicates that the password string you entered is
already in its encrypted form. If you use this option, MSS does not
encrypt the displayed form of the password string, and instead
displays the string exactly as you entered it. If you omit this option,
MSS does encrypt the displayed form of the string
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The display config command shows the encrypted option
with this command, even when you omit the option. The encrypted
option appears in the configuration because MSS automatically encrypts
the password when you create the user (unless you use the encrypted
option when you enter the password)
Although MSS allows you to configure a user password for the special
“last-resort” guest user, the password has no effect. Last-resort users can
never access a WX in administrative mode and never require a password.
Examples — The following command creates a user profile for user Nin
in the local database, and assigns the password goody:
WX4400# set user Nin password goody
success: User Nin created
The following command assigns the password chey3nne to the admin
user:
WX4400# set user admin password chey3nne
set user attr 257
success: User admin created
The following command changes Nin’s password from goody to
29Jan04:
WX4400# set user Nin password 29Jan04
See Also
clear user on page 213
display aaa on page 217
set user attr Configures an authorization attribute in the local database on the WX
switch for a user with a password.
(To assign authorization attributes in RADIUS, see the documentation for
your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set user username attr attribute-name value
username — Username of a user with a password.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize the user for a particular service or session
characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values that you
can assign to network users, see Table 47 on page 247.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set user attr with
the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear user attr.
Examples — The following command assigns user Tamara to VLAN
orange:
WX4400# set user Tamara attr vlan-name orange
success: change accepted.
258 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
The following command assigns Tamara to the Mobility Profile tulip.
WX4400# set user Tamara attr mobility-profile tulip
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear user attr on page 214
display aaa on page 217
set user group Adds a user to a user group. The user must have a password and a profile
that exists in the local database on the WX switch.
(To configure a user in RADIUS, see the documentation for your RADIUS
server.)
Syntax — set user username group group-name
username — Username of a user with a password.
group-name — Name of an existing user group for password users.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not require users to belong to user groups.
To create a user group, user the command set usergroup.
Examples — The following command adds user Hosni to the cardiology
user group:
WX4400# set user Hosni group cardiology
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear user group on page 215
display aaa on page 217
set usergroup 259
set usergroup Creates a user group in the local database on the WX switch for users
and assigns authorization attributes for the group.
(To create user groups and assign authorization attributes in RADIUS, see
the documentation for your RADIUS server.)
Syntax — set usergroup group-name attr attribute-name value
group-name — Name of a group for password users. Specify a name
of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
attribute-name value — Name and value of an attribute you are
using to authorize all users in the group for a particular service or
session characteristic. For a list of authorization attributes and values
that you can assign to users, see Table 47 on page 247.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To change the value of an attribute, enter set usergroup attr
with the new value. To delete an attribute, use clear usergroup attr.
To add a user to a group, user the command set user group.
Examples — The following command adds the user group cardiology to
the local database and assigns all the group members to VLAN crimson:
WX4400# set usergroup cardiology vlan-name crimson
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear usergroup on page 215
clear usergroup attr on page 216
display aaa on page 217
260 CHAPTER 7: AAA COMMANDS
set web-aaa Globally enables or disables WebAAA on an WX switch.
Syntax — set web-aaa {enable | disable}
enable — Enables WebAAA on the switch.
disable — Disables WebAAA on the switch.
Defaults — Enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command disables or reenables support for WebAAA.
However, WebAAA has additional configuration requirements. For
information, see the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter in
the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — To disable WebAAA, type the following command:
WX4400# set web-aaa disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear authentication web on page 207
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
set user on page 256
8MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
Use Mobility Domain commands to configure and manage Mobility
Domain groups.
A Mobility Domain is a system of WX switches and MAP access points
working together to support a roaming user (client). One WX switch acts
as a seed switch, which maintains and distributes a list of IP addresses of
the domain members.
3Com recommends that you run the same MSS version on all the WX
switches in a Mobility Domain.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents Mobility Domain commands alphabetically. Use
Table 48 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 48 Mobility Domain Commands by Usage
Type Command
Mobility Domain set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on
page 267
set mobility-domain member on page 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266
display mobility-domain status on page 263
display mobility-domain config on page 263
clear mobility-domain member on page 262
clear mobility-domain on page 262
262 CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
clear
mobility-domain
Clears all Mobility Domain configuration and information from a WX
switch, regardless of whether the WX switch is a seed or a member of a
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear mobility-domain
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command has no effect if the WX switch is not configured
as part of a Mobility Domain.
Examples — To clear a Mobility Domain from a WX switch within the
domain, type the following command:
WX1200# clear mobility-domain
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mobility-domain member on page 262
set mobility-domain member on page 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on page 267
clear
mobility-domain
member
On the seed WX switch, removes the identified member from the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — clear mobility-domain member ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member, in dotted
decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
display mobility-domain config 263
Usage — This command has no effect if the WX switch member is not
configured as part of a Mobility Domain or the current WX switch is not
the seed.
Examples — The following command clears a Mobility Domain member
with the IP address 192.168.0.1:
WX1200# clear mobility-domain member 192.168.0.1
See Also
set mobility-domain member on page 265
display
mobility-domain
config
Displays the configuration of the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display mobility-domain config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the Mobility Domain
configuration:
WX4400# display mobility-domain config
This WX is a member, with seed 192.168.14.6
See Also
clear mobility-domain on page 262
set mobility-domain member on page 265
display mobility-domain status on page 263
display
mobility-domain
status
On the seed WX, displays the Mobility Domain status and members.
Syntax — display mobility-domain status
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
264 CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display Mobility Domain status, type the following
command:
WX4400# display mobility-domain status
Mobility Domain name: Pleasanton
Member State Status
--------------- ------------- --------------
192.168.253.11 STATE_UP MEMBER
192.168.253.12 STATE_DOWN MEMBER
192.168.253.14 STATE_UP SEED
Table 49 describes the fields in the display.
See Also
clear mobility-domain on page 262
set mobility-domain member on page 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip on page 266
Table 49 display mobility-domain Output
Field Description
Mobility Domain
name Name of the Mobility Domain
Member IP addresses of the seed WX switch and members in the
Mobility Domain
State State of the WX switch in the Mobility Domain:
STATE_UP
STATE_DOWN
Status Role of the WX switch in the Mobility Domain:
MEMBER
SEED
set mobility-domain member 265
set
mobility-domain
member
On the seed WX switch, adds a member to the list of Mobility Domain
members. If the current WX switch is not configured as a seed, this
command is rejected.
Syntax — set mobility-domain member ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member in dotted
decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command must be entered from the seed WX switch.
Examples — The following commands add three WX switches with the
IP addresses 192.168.1.8, 192.168.1.9, and 192.168.1.10 as members of
a Mobility Domain whose seed is the current WX switch:
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.8
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.9
success: change accepted.
WX4400# set mobility-domain member 192.168.1.10
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear mobility-domain member on page 262
display mobility-domain config on page 263
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name on page 267
266 CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
set
mobility-domain
mode member
seed-ip
On a nonseed WX switch, sets the IP address of the seed WX switch. This
command is used on a member WX to configure it as a member. If the
WX switch is currently part of another Mobility Domain or using another
seed, this command overwrites that configuration.
Syntax — set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip ip-addr
ip-addr — IP address of the Mobility Domain member, in dotted
decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the current WX switch as a
nonseed member of the Mobility Domain whose seed has the IP address
192.168.1.8:
WX4400# set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 192.168.1.8
mode is: member
seed IP is: 192.168.1.8
See Also
clear mobility-domain on page 262
display mobility-domain config on page 263
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name 267
set
mobility-domain
mode seed
domain-name
Creates a Mobility Domain by setting the current WX switch as the seed
device and naming the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name
mob-domain-name
mob-domain-name — Name of the Mobility Domain. Specify between
1 and 16 characters with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before you use this command, the current WX switch must
have its IP address set with the set system ip-address command. After
you enter this command, all Mobility Domain traffic is sent and received
from the specified IP address.
You must explicitly configure only one WX switch per domain as the
seed. All other WX switches in the domain receive their Mobility Domain
information from the seed.
Examples — The following command creates a Mobility Domain named
Pleasanton with the current WX switch as the seed:
WX4400# set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name Pleasanton
mode is: seed
domain name is: Pleasanton
See Also
clear mobility-domain member on page 262
display mobility-domain status on page 263
268 CHAPTER 8: MOBILITY DOMAIN COMMANDS
9MANAGED ACCESS POINT
COMMANDS
Use MAP access point commands to configure and manage MAP access
points. Be sure to do the following before using the commands:
Define the country-specific IEEE 802.11 regulations on the WX switch.
(See set system countrycode on page 54.)
Install the MAP access point and connect it to a port on the WX
switch.
Configure a MAP access port (for a directly connected MAP) or a
Distributed MAP. (See set port type ap on page 87 and set dap on
page 77.)
CAUTION: Changing the system country code after MAP configuration
disables MAP access points and deletes their configuration. If you change
the country code on a WX switch, you must reconfigure all MAP access
points.
MAP Access Point
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents MAP access point commands alphabetically. Use
Table 50 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage
Type Command
Automatic
Configuration of
Distributed MAPs
set dap auto on page 306
set dap auto mode on page 308
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
set {ap | dap} group on page 313
270 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on
page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on
page 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set dap auto radiotype on page 309
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
External Antenna set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315
Radio Profile
Assignment
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set radio-profile mode on page 342
clear radio-profile on page 274
set radio-profile service-profile on page 346
display radio-profile on page 298
SSID Assignment set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile beacon on page 355
Radio Properties set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329
set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336
set radio-profile rts-threshold on page 346
set radio-profile frag-threshold on page 339
set radio-profile short-retry on page 350
set radio-profile long-retry on page 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341
set radio-profile preamble-length on page 345
set radio-profile countermeasures on page 337
set radio-profile active-scan on page 330
set radio-profile wmm on page 350
Authentication and
Encryption
set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
MAP Access Point Commands by Usage 271
set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on
page 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on
page 368
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363
display service-profile on page 302
clear service-profile on page 275
RF Auto-Tuning set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on
page 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on
page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on
page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on
page 335
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on
page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on
page 321
Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
272 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
clear {ap | dap}
radio
Disables a MAP radio and resets it to its factory default settings.
Syntax — clear {ap port-list | dap dap-num } radio {1 | 2 |
all}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to reset a radio.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to reset a
radio.
display auto-tune neighbors on page 292
display auto-tune attributes on page 290
MAP-WX security set dap fingerprint on page 312
set dap security on page 326
Radio State set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
Dual Homing set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
Load Balancing set {ap | dap} group on page 313
display {ap | dap} group on page 285
MAP
Administration and
Maintenance
set {ap | dap} name on page 315
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
reset {ap | dap} on page 305
set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325
clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272
display {ap | dap} group on page 285
display {ap | dap} status on page 287
display {ap | dap} counters on page 280
display dap global on page 295
display dap connection on page 294
display dap unconfigured on page 297
display {ap | dap} qos-stats on page 282
display {ap | dap} etherstats on page 284
Table 50 Map Access Point Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear {ap | dap} radio 273
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
radio all — All radios on the MAP.
Defaults — The clear ap radio command resets the radio to the default
settings listed in Table 51 and in Table 66 on page 342.
Access — Enabled
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you clear a radio, MSS performs the following actions:
Clears the transmit power, channel, and external antenna setting from
the radio.
Removes the radio from its radio profile and places the radio in the
default radio profile.
This command does not affect the PoE setting.
Examples — The following command disables and resets radio 2 on the
MAP access point connected to port 3:
WX1200# clear ap 3 radio 2
Table 51 Radio-Specific Parameters
Parameter Default Value Description
channel 802.11b — 6
802.11a — Lowest
valid channel number
for the country of
operation
Number of the channel in
which a radio transmits and
receives traffic
tx-power Highest setting allowed for
the country of operation
or highest setting
supported on the
hardware, whichever is
lower.
Transmit power of a radio, in
decibels referred to
1 milliwatt (dBm)
antennatype internal
(The default for model
MAP-262 is ANT1060.)
External antenna model
Note: This parameter applies
only to MAPs that support
external antennas.
274 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set port type ap on page 87
clear radio-profile Removes a radio profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear radio-profile name [parameter]
name — Radio profile name.
parameter — Radio profile parameter:
beacon-interval
dtim-interval
frag-threshold
long-retry
max-rx-lifetime
max-tx-lifetime
preamble-length
rts-threshold
service-profile
short-retry
(For information about these parameters, see the set radio-profile
commands that use them.)
Defaults — If you reset an individual parameter, the parameter is
returned to the default value listed in Table 66 on page 342.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you specify a parameter, the setting for the parameter is
reset to its default value. The settings of the other parameters are
unchanged and the radio profile remains in the configuration. If you do
not specify a parameter, the entire radio profile is deleted from the
configuration. All radios that use this profile must be disabled before you
can delete the profile.
clear service-profile 275
Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp1 and reset the beaconed-interval parameter to its
default value:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval
success: change accepted.
The following commands disable the radios that are using radio profile
rptest and remove the profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rptest mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rptest
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set radio-profile mode on page 342
clear service-profile Removes a service profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear service-profile name
name — Service profile name.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the service profile is mapped to a radio profile, you must
remove it from the radio profile first. (After disabling all radios that use
the radio profile, use the clear radio-profile name service-profile name
command.)
Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp6, remove service-profile svcprof6 from rp6, then clear
svcprof6 from the configuration.
WX4400# set radio-profile rp6 mode disable
WX4400# clear radio-profile rp6 service-profile svcprof6
276 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear radio-profile on page 274
set radio-profile mode on page 342
clear service-profile Removes a service profile or resets one of the profile’s parameters to its
default value.
Syntax — clear service-profile name
name — Service profile name.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 3.0.
Usage — If the service profile is mapped to a radio profile, you must
remove it from the radio profile first. (After disabling all radios that use
the radio profile, use the clear radio-profile name service-profile name
command.)
Examples — The following commands disable the radios that are using
radio profile rp6, remove service-profile svcprof6 from rp6, then clear
svcprof6 from the configuration.
WX1200# set radio-profile rp6 mode disable
WX1200# clear radio-profile rp6 service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.
WX1200# clear service-profile svcprof6
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear radio-profile on page 274
set radio-profile mode on page 342
display {ap | dap} config 277
display {ap | dap}
config
Displays global and radio-specific settings for an MAP access point.
Syntax — display ap config [port-list [radio {1 | 2}]]
Syntax — display dap config [dap-num [radio {1 | 2}]]
port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display configuration settings.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
configuration settings.
radio 1 — Shows configuration information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows configuration information for radio 2. (This option
does not apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS lists information separately for each MAP access point.
Examples — The following example shows configuration information for
an MAP access point on WX port 2:
WX1200# display ap config 2
Port 1: AP model: AP2750, POE: enable, bias: high, name: MAP01
boot-download-enable: YES
load balancing group: none
Radio 1: type: 802.11g, mode: enabled, channel: dynamic
tx pwr: dynamic, profile: default
auto-tune max-power: default, min-client-rate: 5.5, max-retransmissions: 10
The following example shows configuration information for a Distributed
MAP access point configured on connection 1:
WX4400# display dap config 1
Dap 1: Serial-Id: M9DE48B012F00, MAP model: AP2750, bias: high, name: DAP1
boot-download-enable: YES
Radio 1: type: 802.11a, mode: disabled, channel: dynamic
tx pwr: 11, profile: default
auto-tune max-power: default, min-client-rate: 24, max-retransmissions: 10
Table 52 describes the fields in this display.
278 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Table 52 Output for display ap config
Field Description
Port WX port number.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is directly
connected to the WX switch and the WX switch’s port is
configured as a MAP access port.
DAP Connection ID for the Distributed MAP.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.
Serial-Id Serial ID of the MAP access point.
Note: This field is displayed only for Distributed MAPs.
AP model MAP access point model number.
POE PoE state on the WX port:
Enable
Disable
bias Bias of the WX connection to the MAP:
High
Low
name MAP access point name.
fingerprint Hexadecimal fingerprint of the MAP’s public encryption key.
This field is displayed only for Distributed MAPs. If the field is
blank, the key has not been verified yet by an administrator.
boot-download-
enable State of the firmware upgrade option:
YES (automatic upgrades are enabled)
NO (automatic upgrades are disabled)
load balancing group Names of the MAP load-balancing groups to which the MAP
access point belongs. If the value is None, the access point
does not belong to any load balancing groups.
Note: This field is displayed only if the MAP is a member of a
group.
Radio Radio number. The information listed below this field applies
specifically to the radio.
type Radio type:
802.11a
802.11b
802.11g
display {ap | dap} config 279
See Also
display dap connection on page 294
display dap global on page 295
display dap unconfigured on page 297
display radio-profile on page 298
set dap on page 77
set port type ap on page 87
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
mode Radio state:
Enabled
Disabled
channel Channel number.
antennatype External antenna model, if applicable.
tx pwr Transmit power, in dBm.
profile Radio profile that manages the radio. Until you assign the
radio to a radio profile, MSS assigns the radio to the default
radio profile.
auto-tune
max-power Maximum power level the RF Auto-Tuning feature can set on
the radio.
The value default means RF Auto-Tuning can set the
power up to the maximum level allowed for the country
of operation.
A specific numeric value means you or another
administrator set the maximum value.
auto-tune
min-client-rate Minimum data rate the radio must maintain for associated
clients. When RF Auto-Tuning is enabled, the radio can
temporarily increase its power to maintain the data rate with
an associated client.
auto-tune
max-retransmissions Maximum percentage of packets that can be retransmitted
by a client before RF Auto-Tuning increases power.
Note: Only packets that are received twice by the MAP are
counted as retransmissions. If a client retransmits a packet
but the MAP receives only a single copy of the packet, the
packet is not counted as a retransmission.
Table 52 Output for display ap config (continued)
Field Description
280 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set {ap | dap} group on page 313
set {ap | dap} name on page 315
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype on page 315
set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325
display {ap | dap}
counters
Displays MAP access point and radio statistics counters.
Syntax — display ap counters [port-list [radio {1 | 2}]]
Syntax — display dap counters [dap-num [radio {1 | 2}]]
port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display statistics counters.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
statistics counters.
radio 1 — Shows statistics counters for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows statistics counters for radio 2. (This option does not
apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display statistics counters and other information for
individual user sessions, use the display sessions network command.
Examples — The following command shows statistics counters for an
MAP access point on port 6:
WX1200# display ap counters 6
Port: 6 radio: 1
=================================
LastPktXferRate 2 PktTxCount 91594255
display {ap | dap} counters 281
NumCntInPwrSave 4294966683MultiPktDrop 0
LastPktRxSigStrength -54 MultiBytDrop 0
LastPktSigNoiseRatio 40 User Sessions 5
TKIP Pkt Transfer Ct 0 MIC Error Ct 0
TKIP Pkt Replays 0 TKIP Decrypt Err 0
CCMP Pkt Decrypt Err 0 CCMP Pkt Replays 0
CCMP Pkt Transfer Ct 0 RadioResets 0
TxUniPkt TxUniByte RxPkt RxByte UndcrptPkt
TxMultiPkt TxMultiByte UndcrptByte
PhyError
1.0: 164492 0 9631741 0 405041 8913512 0 0 13963
2.0: 603 0 248716 0 191103 4608065 0 0 30547
5.5: 370594 52742 27616521 4445625 2427 133217 0 0 723
11.0: 8016 0 2590353 0 85479 3897587 0 0 1195
TOTL: 543705 52742 40087331 4445625 684050 17552381 0 0 46441
Table 53 describes the fields in this display.
Table 53 Output for display ap counters
Field Description
Port WX port number.
radio Radio number.
LastPktXferRate Data transmit rate, in Mbps, of the last packet received by
the MAP access point.
NumCntInPwrSave Number of clients currently in power save mode.
LastPktRxSigStrength Signal strength, in dBm, of the last packet received by the
MAP access point.
LastPktSigNoiseRatio Signal-to-noise ratio, in decibels (dB), of the last packet
received by the MAP access point.
TKIP Pkt Transfer Ct Total number of TKIP packets sent and received by the radio.
TKIP Pkt Replays Number of packets dropped because they were detected as
TKIP replays. TKIP replays are packets received outside the
TKIP sequence counter window.
CCMP Pkt Decrypt
Err Number of times a decryption error occurred with a packet
encrypted with CCMP.
CCMP Pkt Transfer
Ct Total number of CCMP packets sent and received by the
radio.
PktTxCount Number of packets transmitted by the radio.
282 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
display sessions network on page 503
display {ap | dap}
qos-stats
Displays statistics for MAP forwarding queues.
Syntax — display dap qos-stats [dap-num]
Syntax — display ap qos-stats [port-list]
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display QoS
statistics counters.
MultiPktDrop Number of multicast packets dropped by the radio.
MultiBytDrop Number of multicast bytes dropped by the radio.
User Sessions Number of users currently associated with the radio.
MIC Error Ct Number of times the radio received a TKIP-encrypted frame
with an invalid MIC.
TKIP Decrypt Err Number of times a decryption error occurred with a packet
encrypted with TKIP.
CCMP Pkt Replays Number of packets dropped because they were detected as
CCMP replays. CCMP replays are packets received outside
the CCMP sequence counter window.
RadioResets Number of times the radio has been reset.
TxUniPkt Number of unicast packets transmitted by the radio.
Note: This and the following statistics are listed separately
for each data rate.
TxMultiPkt Number of multicast packets transmitted by the radio.
TxUniByte Number of unicast bytes transmitted by the radio.
TxMultiByte Number of multicast bytes transmitted by the radio.
RxPkt Number of packets received by the radio.
RxByte Number of bytes received by the radio.
UndcrptPkt Number of undecryptable packets received by the radio.
UndcrptByte Number of undecryptable bytes received by the radio.
PhyError Number of packets received by the radio that contained
Physical layer (PHY) errors.
Table 53 Output for display ap counters (continued)
Field Description
display {ap | dap} qos-stats 283
port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display QoS statistics counters.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command shows statistics for the MAP
forwarding queues on a Distributed MAP:
WX-1200# display dap qos-stats 4
CoS Queue Tx
===========================
DAP: 4 radio: 1
1,2 Background 19
0,3 BestEffort 437
4,5 Video 3034
6,7 Voice 3068
CoS Queue Tx
===========================
DAP: 4 radio: 2
1,2 Background 11
0,3 BestEffort 221
4,5 Video 3631
6,7 Voice 7892
Table 54 describes the fields in this display.
Table 54 Output for display {ap | dap} qos-stats
Field Description
CoS CoS value associated with the forwarding queues.
Queue Forwarding queue.
DAP
or
Port
Distributed MAP number or MAP port number.
radio Radio number.
Tx Number of packets transmitted to the air from the
queue.
284 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
display {ap | dap}
etherstats
Displays Ethernet statistics for a MAP’s Ethernet ports.
Syntax — display {ap | dap} etherstats [port-list | dap-num]
port-list — List of WX switch ports directly connected to the MAPs
for which to display counters.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
counters.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays Ethernet statistics for the
Ethernet ports on Distributed MAP 1:
WX4400# display dap etherstats 1
DAP: 1 ether: 1
=================================
RxUnicast: 75432 TxGoodFrames: 55210
RxMulticast: 18789 TxSingleColl: 32
RxBroadcast: 8 TxLateColl: 0
RxGoodFrames: 94229 TxMaxColl: 0
RxAlignErrs: 0 TxMultiColl: 47
RxShortFrames: 0 TxUnderruns: 0
RxCrcErrors: 0 TxCarrierLoss: 0
RxOverruns: 0 TxDeferred: 150
RxDiscards: 0
Table 55 describes the fields in this display.
Table 55 Output of display ap etherstats
Field Description
RxUnicast Number of unicast frames received.
RxMulticast Number of multicast frames received.
RxBroadcast Number of broadcast frames received.
RxGoodFrames Number of frames received properly from the link.
RxAlignErrs Number of received frames that were both misaligned and
contained a CRC error.
display {ap | dap} group 285
display {ap | dap}
group
Displays configuration information and load-balancing status for MAP
access point groups.
Syntax — display {ap | dap} group [name]
name — Name of an MAP group or Distributed MAP group.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
RxShortFrames Number of received frames that were shorter than the
minimum frame length.
RxCrcErrors Number of received frames that were discarded due to
CRC errors.
RxOverruns Number of frames known to be lost due to a temporary
lack of hardware resources.
RxDiscards Number of frames known to be lost due to a temporary
lack of software resources.
TxGoodFrames Number of frames transmitted properly on the link.
TxSingleColl Number of transmitted frames that encountered a single
collision.
TxLateColl Number of frames that were not transmitted because they
encountered a collision outside the normal collision
window.
TxMaxColl Number of frames that were not transmitted because they
encountered the maximum allowed number of collisions.
Typically, this occurs only during periods of heavy traffic on
the network.
TxMultiColl Number of transmitted frames that encountered more
than one collision.
TxUnderruns Number of frames that were not transmitted or
retransmitted due to temporary lack of hardware
resources.
TxCarrierLoss Number of frames transmitted despite the detection of a
deassertion of CRS during the transmission.
TxDeferred Number of frames deferred before transmission due to
activity on the link.
Table 55 Output of display ap etherstats (continued)
Field Description
286 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command displays information for MAP
access point group loadbalance1:
WX1200# display ap group loadbalance1
Load Balance Grp Port Clients Status Refused
---------------- ---- ------- --------- -------
loadbalance1 1 1 Accepting 0
loadbalance1 6 6 Refusing 2
Table 56 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
“set {ap | dap} group” on page 313
Table 56 Output for display ap group
Field Description
Load Balance Grp Name of the MAP access point group.
Port WX port number.
Clients Number of active client sessions on the MAP access point.
Status Association status of the MAP access point:
Accepting — The MAP access point is accepting new
associations.
Refusing — The MAP access point is refusing new
associations.
Refused Number of association requests refused by the MAP access
point due to load balancing. MSS resets this counter to 0
when the WX switch is restarted, MSS is reloaded, or the
access point is removed from the group.
display {ap | dap} status 287
display {ap | dap}
status
Displays MAP access point and radio status information.
Syntax — display ap status [terse] [port-list | all [radio
{1 | 2}]]
Syntax — display dap status [terse] [dap-num [radio {1 |
2}]]
terse — Displays a brief line of essential status information for each
MAP.
port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) for
which to display status.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display status.
all — Shows status information for all directly attached MAP access
points and all Distributed MAP access points configured on the switch.
radio 1 — Shows status information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows status information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. True base MAC addresses of
radios are displayed in MSS Version 3.2. Previously, the base MAC
address displayed for a radio was the true base MAC address plus 2. Note
that a radio’s base MAC address is also used as the BSSID of the first SSID
configured on the radio. In Version 4.0, added terse, display dap status:
all, new field for fingerprint, and added MAP-WX security status to State
field. Note: the fingerprint field and security state apply to the display for
Distributed MAPs only.
Examples — The following command displays the status of a Distributed
MAP:
WX4400# display dap status 1
Dap: 1, IP-addr: 10.2.34.56 (vlan 'default'), MAP model: AP2750,
manufacturer: 3Com, name: DAP1
fingerprint: b4:f9:2a52:37:58:f4:d0:10:75:43:2f:45:c9:52:c3
====================================================
State: operational (not encrypted)
CPU info: IBM:PPC speed=266666664 Hz version=405GPr
288 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
id=0x28f10158a47f0408 ram=33554432
s/n=0332600444 hw_rev=A3
Uptime: 21 hours, 27 minutes, 51 seconds
Radio 1 type: 802.11a, state: configure succeed [Enabled]
operational channel: 64 operational power: 14
base mac: 00:0b:0e:00:d2:c1
bssid1: 00:0b:0e:00:d2:94, ssid: private
The following command displays the status of a directly connected MAP:
WX1200# display ap status 1
Port: 1, AP model: AP2750, manufacturer 3Com, name: MAP01
====================================================
State: operational
CPU info: IBM:PPC speed=266666664 Hz version=405GPr
id=0x28b08a1e047f1d0f ram=33554432
s/n=0333000288 hw_rev=A3
Uptime: 3 hours, 44 minutes, 28 seconds
Radio 1 type: 802.11g, state: configure succeed [Enabled] (802.11b protect)
operational channel: 1 operational power: 15
base mac: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:00
bssid1: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:00, ssid: public
bssid2: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:02, ssid: employee-net
bssid3: 00:0b:0e:00:d1:04, ssid: mycorp-tkip
Table 57 describes the fields in this display.
Table 57 Output for display ap status
Field Description
DAP Connection ID for the Distributed MAP.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.
Port WX port number.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is directly
connected to the WX switch and the WX switch’s port is
configured as an MAP access port.
IP-addr IP address of the MAP. The address is assigned to the MAP
by a DHCP server.
Note: This field is applicable only if the MAP is configured on
the WX switch as a Distributed MAP.
display {ap | dap} status 289
AP model MAP access point model number.
manufacturer Company that made the MAP access point.
name MAP access point name.
Link Status of this link with the MAP access point and the MAP
port at the other end of the link. The status can be up or
down.
MAP port MAP port number connected to this WX port.
State State of the MAP:
init — The MAP has been recognized by the WX but has
not yet begun booting.
booting — The MAP has asked the WX for a boot
image.
image downloading — The MAP is receiving a boot
image from the WX.
image downloaded — The MAP has received a boot
image from the WX and is booting.
configuring — The MAP has booted and is ready to
receive or is already receiving configuration parameters
from the WX.
operational — The MAP has received configuration
parameters for one or more radios and is ready to accept
client connections.
configure failure — One or more of the radio
parameters received from the WX is invalid.
For Distributed MAPs, this field also indicates whether the
MAP’s management traffic with the WX is encrypted, and
whether the MAP’s fingerprint has been verified on the
WX:
not encrypted—The management session is not
encrypted.
encrypted but fingerprint not verified—The MAP’s
management traffic is encrypted, but the MAP’s
fingerprint has not been verified in MSS.
encrypted and verified—The MAP’s management
traffic is encrypted and the MAP’s fingerprint has been
verified in MSS.
Table 57 Output for display ap status (continued)
Field Description
290 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
display auto-tune
attributes
Displays the current values of the RF attributes RF Auto-Tuning uses to
decide whether to change channel or power settings.
Syntax — display auto-tune attributes
[ap map-num [radio {1 | 2 | all}]]
Syntax — display auto-tune attributes
[dap dap-num [radio {1 | 2 | all}]]
map-num — MAP port connected to the MAP access point for which to
display RF attributes.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display RF
attributes.
CPU info Specifications and identification of the CPU.
For MAP models MAP-352, MAP-341, and MAP-52, the ID
portion of this field is not applicable.
Uptime Amount of time since the MAP last rebooted using this link.
Note: This field is displayed only when this link is the MAP
access point’s primary link.
Radio 1 type
Radio 2 type
802.11 type and configuration state of the radio.
The configure succeed state indicates that the MAP has
received configuration parameters for the radio and the
radio is ready to accept client connections.
For 802.11b/g radios, 802.11b protect indicates that the
radio is in 802.11b protection mode and is therefore
operating only at 802.11b rates.
Sweep Mode indicates that a disabled radio is
nonetheless participating in rogue detection scans. Even
though this message appears only for disabled radios, all
radios, enabled or disabled, participate in rogue
detection.
Countermeasures Enabled indicates that the radio is
sending countermeasures packets to combat a rogue.
operational channel The channel on which the radio is currently operating.
operational power The power level at which the radio is currently operating.
base mac Base MAC address of the radio.
bssid, ssid SSIDs configured on the radio and their BSSIDs.
Table 57 Output for display ap status (continued)
Field Description
display auto-tune attributes 291
radio 1 — Shows RF attribute information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows RF attribute information for radio 2. (This option
does not apply to single-radio models.)
radio all — Shows RF attribute information for both radios.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays RF attribute information
for radio 1 on the directly connected MAP access point on port 2:
WX1200# display auto-tune attributes ap 2 radio 1
Auto-tune attributes for port 2 radio 1:
Noise: -92 Packet Retransmission Count: 0
Utilization: 0 Phy Errors Count: 0
CRC Errors count: 122
Table 58 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
display auto-tune neighbors on page 292
Table 58 Output for display auto-tune attributes
Field Description
Noise Noise threshold on the active channel. RF Auto-Tuning
prefers channels with low noise levels over channels with
higher noise levels.
Utilization Number of multicast packets per second that a radio can
send on a channel while continuously sending fixed size
frames over a period of time. The number of packets that are
successfully transmitted indicates how busy the channel is.
CRC Errors count Number of frames received by the radio on that active
channel that had CRC errors. A high CRC error count can
indicate a hidden node or co-channel interference.
Packet
Retransmission
Count
Number of retransmitted packets sent from the client to the
radio on the active channel. Retransmissions can indicate
that the client is not receiving ACKs from the MAP radio.
Phy Errors Count Number of frames received by the MAP radio that had
physical layer errors on the active channel. Phy errors can
indicate interference from a non-802.11 device.
292 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
display radio-profile on page 298
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
display auto-tune
neighbors
Displays the other 3Com radios and third-party 802.11 radios that a
3Com radio can hear.
Syntax — display auto-tune neighbors
[ap map-num [radio {1|2|all}]]
Syntax — display auto-tune neighbors
[dap dap-num [radio {1|2|all}]]
map-num — MAP port connected to the MAP access point for which to
display neighbors.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
neighbors.
radio 1 — Shows neighbor information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows neighbor information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)
radio all — Shows neighbor information for both radios.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
display auto-tune neighbors 293
Usage — For simplicity, this command displays a single entry for each
3Com radio, even if the radio is supporting multiple BSSIDs. However,
BSSIDs for third-party 802.11 radios are listed separately, even if a radio is
supporting more than one BSSID.
Information is displayed for a radio if the radio sends beacon frames or
responds to probe requests. Even if a radio’s SSIDs are unadvertised,
3Com radios detect the empty beacon frames (beacon frames without
SSIDs) sent by the radio, and include the radio in the neighbor list.
Examples — The following command displays neighbor information for
radio 1 on the directly connected MAP access point on port 2:
WX1200# display auto-tune neighbors ap 2 radio 1
Total number of entries for port 2 radio 1: 5
Channel Neighbor BSS/MAC RSSI
------- ----------------- ----
1 00:0b:85:06:e3:60 -46
1 00:0b:0e:00:0a:80 -78
1 00:0b:0e:00:d2:c0 -74
1 00:0b:85:06:dd:00 -50
1 00:0b:0e:00:05:c1 -72
Table 59 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
display auto-tune attributes on page 290
display radio-profile on page 298
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331
Table 59 Output for display auto-tune neighbors
Field Description
Channel Channel on which the BSSID is detected.
Neighbor BSS/MAC BSSID detected by the radio.
RSSI Received signal strength indication (RSSI), in decibels referred
to 1 milliwatt (dBm). A higher value indicates a stronger
signal.
294 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
display dap
connection
Displays the system IP address of the WX switch that has the active data
connection for a Distributed MAP.
Syntax — display dap connection
[dap-num | serial-id serial-ID]
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
information about its active connection.
serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The serial-id parameter displays the active connection for the
specified Distributed MAP even if that MAP is not configured on this WX
switch. If you instead use the command with the dap-num parameter or
without a parameter, connection information is displayed only for
Distributed MAPs that are configured on this WX switch.
If a Distributed MAP is configured on this WX switch (or another WX
switch in the same Mobility Domain) but does not have an active
connection, the command does not display information for the MAP. To
show configured Distributed MAPs regardless of connection status, use
the display dap global command.
Examples — The following command displays information for all Distributed
MAPs configured on this WX switch that have active connections:
WX1200# display dap connection
Total number of entries: 2
DAP Serial Id DAP IP Address WX IP Address
--- ----------- --------------- ---------------
2 M9DE48B012F00 10.10.2.27 10.3.8.111
4 M9DE48B123400 10.10.3.34 10.3.8.111
display dap global 295
The following command displays connection information specifically for a
Distributed MAP with serial ID M9DE48B6EAD00:
WX1200# display dap connection serial-id M9DE48B6EAD00
Total number of entries: 1
DAP Serial Id DAP IP Address WX IP Address
--- ----------- --------------- ---------------
9 M9DE48B6EAD00 10.10.4.88 10.9.9.11
Table 60 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display dap global on page 295
display dap unconfigured on page 297
display dap global Displays configuration information for Distributed MAPs configured on
WX switches in the Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display dap global [dap-num | serial-id serial-ID]
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
configuration settings.
serial-id serial-ID — MAP access point serial ID.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 60 Output of display dap connection
Field Description
DAP Connection ID you assigned to the Distributed MAP.
If the connection is configured on another WX switch, this
field contains a hyphen ( - ).
Serial Id Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.
DAP IP Address IP address assigned by DHCP to the Distributed MAP.
WX IP Address System IP address of the WX switch on which the MAP has
an active connection. This is the switch that the MAP used
for booting and configuration and is using for data transfer.
296 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Usage — To show information only for Distributed MAPs that have
active connections, use the display dap connection command.
Examples — The following command displays configuration information
for all Distributed MAPs configured on WX switches in the Mobility
Domain:
WX4400# display dap global
Total number of entries: 8
DAP Serial Id WX IP Address Bias
--- ----------- --------------- ----
1 M9DE48B012F00 10.3.8.111 HIGH
- M9DE48B012F00 10.4.3.2 LOW
2 M9DE48B123400 10.3.8.111 LOW
- M9DE48B123400 10.4.3.2 HIGH
17 M9DE48B123600 10.3.8.111 HIGH
- M9DE48B123600 10.4.3.2 LOW
18 M9DE48B123700 10.3.8.111 LOW
- M9DE48B123700 10.4.3.2 HIGH
Table 61 describes the fields in this display.
Table 61 Output for display dap global
Field Description
DAP Connection ID you assigned to the Distributed MAP.
Note: DAP numbers are listed only for Distributed MAPs
configured on this WX switch. If the field contains a
hyphen ( -), the Distributed MAP configuration displayed in
the row of output is on another WX switch.
Serial Id Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.
WX IP Address System IP address of the WX switch on which the Distributed
MAP is configured. A separate row of output is displayed for
each WX switch on which the Distributed MAP is configured.
Bias Bias of the WX switch for the Distributed MAP:
High
Low
display dap unconfigured 297
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display dap connection on page 294
display dap unconfigured on page 297
set dap on page 77
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
display dap
unconfigured
Displays Distributed MAPs that are physically connected to the network
but that are not configured on any WX switches.
Syntax — display dap unconfigured
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command also displays an MAP that is directly connected
to an WX switch, if the WX port to which the MAP is connected is
configured as a network port instead of a MAP access port, and if the
network port is a member of a VLAN.
If a Distributed MAP is configured on an WX switch in another Mobility
Domain, the MAP can appear in the output until the MAP is able to
establish a connection with an WX switch in its Mobility Domain. After
the MAP establishes a connection, the entry for the MAP ages out and no
longer appears in the command’s output.
Entries in the command output’s table age out after two minutes.
Examples — The following command displays information for two
Distributed MAPs that are not configured:
WX1200# display dap unconfigured
Total number of entries: 2
Serial Id Model IP Address Port Vlan
------------- ------ --------------- ---- --------
M9DE48B012F00 AP2750 10.3.8.54 5 default
M9DE48B123400 AP2750 10.3.8.57 6 vlan-eng
298 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Table 62 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
display dap connection on page 294
display dap global on page 295
display
radio-profile
Displays radio profile information.
Syntax — display radio-profile {name | ?}
name — Displays information about the named radio profile.
? — Displays a list of radio profiles.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS contains a default radio profile. 3Com recommends that
you do not change this profile but instead keep the profile for reference.
Examples — The following command shows radio profile information
for the default radio profile:
Table 62 Output for display dap unconfigured
Field Description
Serial Id Serial ID of the Distributed MAP.
Model MAP model number.
IP Address IP address of the MAP. This is the address that the MAP
receives from a DHCP server. The MAP uses this address to
send a Find WX message to request configuration
information from WX switches. However, the MAP cannot
use the address to establish a connection unless the MAP
first receives a configuration from an WX switch.
Port Port number on which this WX switch received the MAP’s
Find WX message.
VLAN VLAN on which this WX switch received the MAP’s Find
WX message.
display radio-profile 299
WX4400# display radio-profile default
Beacon Interval: 100 DTIM Interval: 1
Max Tx Lifetime: 2000 Max Rx Lifetime: 2000
RTS Threshold: 2346 Frag Threshold: 2346
Short Retry Limit: 5 Long Retry Limit: 5
Long Preamble: NO Allow 802.11g clients only: NO
Tune Channel: no Tune Power: no
Tune Channel Interval: 3600 Tune Power Interval: 600
Client Backoff Timer: 10 Channel Holddown: 300
Service profiles: default-dot1x, default-clear
Table 63 describes the fields in this display.
Table 63 Output for display radio-profile
Field Description
Beacon Interval Rate (in milliseconds) at which each MAP radio in the profile
advertises the beaconed SSID.
DTIM Interval Number of times after every beacon that each MAP radio in
the radio profile sends a delivery traffic indication map
(DTIM).
Max Tx Lifetime Number of milliseconds that a frame received by a radio in
the radio profile can remain in buffer memory.
Max Rx Lifetime Number of milliseconds that a frame scheduled to be
transmitted by a radio in the radio profile can remain in
buffer memory.
RTS Threshold Minimum length (in bytes) a frame can be for a radio in the
radio profile to use the RTS/CTS method to send the frame.
The RTS/CTS method clears the air of other traffic to avoid
corruption of the frame due to a collision with another
frame.
Frag Threshold Maximum length (in bytes) a frame is allowed to be without
being fragmented into multiple frames before transmission
by a radio in the radio profile.
Short Retry Limit Number of times a radio in the radio profile can send a short
unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment.
Long Retry Limit Number of times a radio in the radio profile can send a long
unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment. A long
unicast frame is a frame that is equal to or longer than the
RTS threshold.
300 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Long Preamble Indicates whether an 802.11b radio that uses this radio
profile advertises support for frames with long preambles
only:
YES — Advertises support for long preambles only.
NO — Advertises support for long and short preambles.
Allow 802.11g
clients only Indicates whether the 802.11b/g radios in the radio profile
restrict associations to 802.11g clients only:
No — 802.11b/g radios allow associations with both
802.11b and 802.11g clients.
No — 802.11b/g radios allow associations with 802.11g
clients only.
Note: This field applies only to 802.11b/g radios.
Tune Channel Indicates whether RF Auto-Tuning is enabled for dynamically
setting and tuning channels.
Tune Power Indicates whether RF Auto-Tuning is enabled for dynamically
setting and tuning power levels.
Tune Channel
Interval Interval, in seconds, at which RF Auto-Tuning decides
whether to change the channels on radios in a radio profile.
At the end of each interval, MSS processes the results of the
RF scans performed during the previous interval, and
changes radio channels if needed.
Tune Power Interval Interval, in seconds, at which RF Auto-Tuning decides
whether to change the power level on radios in a radio
profile. At the end of each interval, MSS processes the results
of the RF scans performed during the previous interval, and
changes radio power levels if needed.
Client Backoff Timer Interval, in minutes, at which radios in a radio profile reduce
power after temporarily increasing the power to maintain
the minimum data rate for an associated client. At the end of
each power-backoff interval, radios that temporarily
increased their power reduce it by 1 dBm. The power
backoff continues in 1 dBm increments after each interval
until the power returns to expected setting.
Channel Holddown Minimum number of seconds a radio in a radio profile must
remain at its current channel assignment before
RF Auto-Tuning can change the channel.
Table 63 Output for display radio-profile (continued)
Field Description
display radio-profile 301
See Also
set radio-profile 11g-only on page 329
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336
set radio-profile dtim-interval on page 338
set radio-profile frag-threshold on page 339
set radio-profile long-retry on page 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile preamble-length on page 345
set radio-profile rts-threshold on page 346
set radio-profile service-profile on page 346
set radio-profile short-retry on page 350
Service profiles Service profiles mapped to this radio profile. Each service
profile contains an SSID and encryption information for that
SSID.
Note: When you upgrade from 2.x, MSS creates a
default-dot1x service profile for encrypted SSIDs and a
default-clear service profile for unencrypted SSIDs. These
default service profiles contain the default encryption
settings for crypto SSIDs and clear SSIDs, respectively.
Table 63 Output for display radio-profile (continued)
Field Description
302 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
display
service-profile
Displays service profile information.
Syntax — display service-profile {name | ?}
name — Displays information about the named service profile.
? — Displays a list of service profiles.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays information for service
profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# display service-profile wpa_clients
ssid-name: private ssid-type: crypto
beacon: yes auth-fallthru: web-portal
WEP Key 1 value: <none> WEP Key 2 value: <none>
WEP Key 3 value: <none> WEP Key 4 value: <none>
WEP Unicast Index: 1 WEP Multicast Index: 1
Shared Key Auth: NO
WPA enabled:
ciphers: cipher-tkip
authentication: 802.1X
TKIP countermeasures time: 60000ms
Table 64 describes the fields in this display.
Table 64 Output for display service-profile
Field Description
ssid-name Service set identifier (SSID) managed by this service profile.
ssid-type SSID type:
crypto — Wireless traffic for the SSID is encrypted.
clear — Wireless traffic for the SSID is unencrypted.
beacon Indicates whether the radio sends beacons, to advertise the
SSID:
no
yes
display service-profile 303
auth-fallthru Secondary (fallthru) encryption type when a user tries to
authenticate but the WX switch managing the radio does
not have an authentication rule with a userglob that matches
the username.
last-resort — Automatically authenticates the user and
allows access to the SSID requested by the user, without
requiring a username and password.
none—Denies authentication and prohibits the user from
accessing the SSID.
web-portal — Redirects the user to a web page for login
to the SSID.
WEP Key 1 value State of static WEP key number 1. Radios can use this key to
encrypt traffic with static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP):
none —T he key is not configured.
preset — The key is configured.
Note: The WEP parameters apply to traffic only on the
encrypted SSID.
WEP Key 2 value State of static WEP key number 2:
none — The key is not configured.
preset — The key is configured.
WEP Key 3 value State of static WEP key number 3:
none — The key is not configured.
preset — The key is configured.
WEP Key 4 value State of static WEP key number 4:
none — The key is not configured.
preset — The key is configured.
WEP Unicast Index Index of the static WEP key used to encrypt unicast traffic on
an encrypted SSID.
WEP Multicast Index Index of the static WEP key used to encrypt multicast traffic
on an encrypted SSID.
Shared Key Auth Indicates whether shared-key authentication is enabled.
Table 64 Output for display service-profile (continued)
Field Description
304 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile beacon on page 355
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362
set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363
set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365
set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366
WPA enabled Indicates that the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) information
element (IE) is enabled. Additional fields display the settings
of other WPA parameters:
ciphers — Lists the WPA cipher suites advertised by
radios in the radio profile mapped to this service profile.
authentication — Lists the authentication methods
supported for WPA clients:
802.1X — dynamic authentication
PSK — preshared key authentication
TKIP countermeasures time — Indicates the amount of
time (in ms) MSS enforces countermeasures following a
second message integrity code (MIC) failure within a
60-second period.
Note: The WPA fields are displayed only when the WPA IE is
enabled.
Table 64 Output for display service-profile (continued)
Field Description
reset {ap | dap} 305
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
reset {ap | dap} Restarts an MAP access point.
Syntax — reset {ap port-list | dap dap-num}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points to
restart.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to reset.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you enter this command, the MAP access point drops all
sessions and reboots.
CAUTION: Restarting an MAP access point can cause data loss for users
who are currently associated with the MAP.
Examples — The following command resets the MAP access point on
port 6:
WX1200# reset ap 6
This will reset specified AP devices.
Would you like to continue? (y/n)y
success: rebooting ap attached to port 6
306 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set dap auto Creates a template for automatic configuration of Distributed MAPs.
Syntax — set dap auto
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — Table 65 lists the configurable template parameters and their
defaults. The only parameter that requires configuration is the template
mode. The template is disabled by default. To use the template to
configure Distributed MAPs, you must enable the template using the set
dap auto mode enable command.
The template uses the default radio profile by default. You can change
the profile using the set dap auto radio radio-profile command. You
can use set dap auto commands to change settings for the parameters
listed in Table 65. (The commands are listed in the “See Also” section.)
Table 65 Configurable Template Parameters for Distributed MAPs
Parameter Default Value
MAP Parameters
mode disabled
bias high
upgrade-firmware
(boot-download-enable) enable (YES)
group (load balancing group) none
blink
(Not shown in display dap config
output)
disable
Radio Parameters
radiotype (type)
(Applies only to single-radio MAP
models)
11g
(or 11b for country codes where
802.11g is not allowed)
mode enabled
set dap auto 307
Examples — The following command creates a template for automatic
Distributed MAP configuration:
WX1200# set dap auto
success: change accepted.
See Also
set dap auto mode on page 308
set dap auto radiotype on page 309
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
set {ap | dap} group on page 313
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on page 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
tx-pwr Highest setting allowed for the
country of operation
radio-profile (profile) default
max-power default
min-client-rate 5.5 for 802.11b/g
24 for 802.11a
max-retransmissions 10
Table 65 Configurable Template Parameters for Distributed MAPs (continued)
Parameter Default Value
308 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set dap auto mode Enables an WX switch’s template for automatic Distributed MAP
configuration.
Syntax — set dap auto mode {enable | disable}
enable — Enables the MAP configuration template.
disable — Disables the MAP configuration template.
Defaults — The MAP configuration template is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — You must use the set dap auto command to create the
template before you can enable it.
Examples — The following command enables the template for
automatic Distributed MAP configuration:
WX1200# set dap auto mode enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set dap auto on page 306
set dap auto radiotype on page 309
set {ap | dap} bias on page 310
set {ap | dap} blink on page 311
set {ap | dap} group on page 313
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate on page 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware on page 328
set dap auto radiotype 309
set dap auto
radiotype
Sets the radio type for single-MAP radios that use the MAP configuration
template.
Syntax — set dap auto [radiotype {11a | 11b| 11g}]
radiotype {11a | 11b| 11g
Radio type:
11a—802.11a
11b—802.11b
11g—802.11g
This option applies only to single-radio models. The value 11g does not
apply to model MAP-101.
Defaults — The default radio type for model MAP-101 is 802.11b. The
default radio type for model AP2750, MAP-241, and MAP-341, and for
the 802.11b/g radios in models AP3750, AP8750, MAP-52, MAP-252,
MAP-262, MAP-352, and MAP-372 is 802.11g in regulatory domains
that support 802.11g, or 802.11b in regulatory domains that do not
support 802.11g.
MAP radios configured for 802.11g also allow associations from 802.11b
clients by default. To disable support for 802.11b associations, use the
set radio-profile 11g-only command on the radio profile that contains
the radio.
Examples — The following command sets the radio type to 802.11b:
WX12000# set dap auto radiotype 11b
success: change accepted.
See Also
set dap auto on page 306
310 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set {ap | dap} bias Changes the bias for a MAP. Bias is the priority of one WX switch over
other WX switches for booting and configuring the MAP.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)} bias
{high | low}
ap port-list — List of ports on which to change the bias for directly
connected MAPs.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to change
the bias.
dap auto — Configures bias for the MAP configuration template. (See
set dap auto on page 306.)
high — High bias.
low — Low bias.
Defaults — The default bias is high.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template, MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — High bias is preferred over low bias. Bias applies only to WX
switches that are indirectly attached to the MAP through an intermediate
Layer 2 or Layer 3 network. A MAP always attempts to boot on MAP
port 1 first, and if an WX switch is directly attached on MAP port 1, the
MAP always boots from it.
If MAP port 1 is indirectly connected to WX switches through the
network, the MAP boots from the switch with the high bias for the MAP.
If the bias for all connections is the same, the MAP selects the switch that
has the greatest capacity to add more active MAPs. For example, if a MAP
is dual homed to two WX4400 wireless LAN switches, and one of the
switches has 50 active MAPs while the other switch has 60 active MAPs,
the new MAP selects the switch that has only 50 active MAPs.
If the boot request on MAP port 1 fails, the MAP attempts to boot over its
port 2, using the same process described above.
set {ap | dap} blink 311
MAP selection of an WX switch is sticky. After a MAP selects an WX
switch to boot from, the MAP continues to use that switch for its active
data link even if another switch configured with high bias for the MAP
becomes available.
Examples — The following command changes the bias for a Distributed
MAP to low:
WX4400# set dap 1 bias low
success: change accepted.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
set {ap | dap} blink Enables or disables LED blink mode on a MAP access point to make it
easy to identify.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP2750, the 11a LED blinks on and
off.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP3750, the health and radio LEDs
alternately blink green and amber.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP7250, the Radio LED flashes red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP8250, the Radio LED flashes red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on an AP8750, both Radio LEDs flash red
and the Power LED flashes green/orange. The Ethernet LED does not
change.
When blink mode is enabled on other models (MAP-xxx), the health and
radio LEDs alternately blink green and amber. By default, blink mode is
disabled.
312 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
blink {enable | disable}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to turn blink mode on or off.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to turn blink
mode on or off.
dap auto —Configures blink mode for the MAP configuration
template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
enable — Enables blink mode.
disable — Disables blink mode.
Defaults — LED blink mode is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — Changing the LED blink mode does not alter operation of the
MAP access point. Only the behavior of the LEDs is affected.
Examples — The following command enables LED blink mode on the
MAP access points connected to ports 3 and 4:
WX1200# set ap 3-4 blink enable
success: change accepted.
set dap fingerprint Verifies a MAP’s fingerprint on an WX switch. If MAP-WX security is
required by a WX switch, a MAP can establish a management session
with the switch only if you have verified the MAP’s identity by verifying its
fingerprint on the switch.
Syntax — set dap num fingerprint hex
dap dap-num — Number of the Distributed MAP whose fingerprint you
are verifying.
hex — The 16-digit hexadecimal number of the fingerprint. Use a colon
between each digit. Make sure the fingerprint you enter matches the
fingerprint used by the MAP.
set {ap | dap} group 313
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — MAPs are configured with an encryption key pair at the
factory. The fingerprint for the public key is displayed on a label on the
back of the MAP, in the following format:
RSA
aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:
aaaa:aaaa:aaaa:aaaa
If a MAP is already installed and operating, you can use the display dap
status command to display the fingerprint. The display dap config
command lists a MAP’s fingerprint only if the fingerprint has been verified
in MSS. If the fingerprint has not been verified, the fingerprint
information in the command output is blank.
Examples — The following example verifies the fingerprint for
Distributed MAP 8:
WX-1200# set dap 8 fingerprint
b4:f9:2a:52:37:58:f4:d0:10:75:43:2f:45:c9:52:c3
success: change accepted.
See Also
set dap security on page 326
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display {ap | dap} status on page 287
set {ap | dap} group Configures a named group of MAP access points. MSS automatically load
balances sessions among the access points in a group. To balance the
sessions, MSS rejects an association request for an access point’s radio if
that radio has at least four more active sessions than the radio of the
same type with the least number of active sessions within the group.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)} group name
ap port-list — List of MAP access ports to add to the group.
314 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to add to the group.
dap auto —Configures blink mode for the MAP configuration
template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
name — MAP access point group name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — MAP access points are not grouped by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — You can assign any subset or all of the MAP access points
connected to an WX switch to a group on that switch. All access points in
a group must be connected to the same WX switch.
If you use the name none, spelled in any combination of capital or
lowercase letters, the specified MAP access point is cleared from all MAP
access point groups.
Examples — The following command configures an MAP access point
group named loadbalance1 that contains the MAP access points on ports
1, 3, and 5:
WX1200# set ap 1,3,5 group loadbalance1
success: change accepted.
The following command removes the MAP access point on port 4 from all
MAP access point groups:
WX1200# set ap 4 group none
success: change accepted.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display {ap | dap} group on page 285
set {ap | dap} name 315
set {ap | dap} name Changes an MAP name.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} name name
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point to
rename.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to rename.
name — Alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — The default name of a directly attached MAP is based on the
port number of the MAP access port attached to the MAP. For example,
the default name for a MAP on MAP access port 1 is MAP01. The default
name of a Distributed MAP is based on the number you assign to it when
you configure the connection. For example, the default name for
Distributed MAP 1 is DMP01.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the name of the MAP
access point on port 1 to techpubs:
WX1200# set ap 1 name techpubs
success: change accepted.
See Also
“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277
set {ap | dap} radio
antennatype
Sets the model number for an external antenna.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio
{1 antennatype ANT1060 |ANT1120 |ANT1180 | internal}
{2 antennatype ANT5060 |ANT5120 |ANT5180 | internal}
{ {1|2} antennatype ANT3C591 | ANT3C592 | ANT3C597 | ANT3C598
| internal}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the channel.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
channel.
316 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models or to the AP8750.)
antennatype {ANT1060 |ANT1120 |ANT1180 | internal} —
802.11b/g external antenna models:
ANT1060 — 60° 802.11b/g antenna
ANT1120 — 120° 802.11b/g antenna
ANT1180 — 180° 802.11b/g antenna
internal — uses the internal antenna instead
antennatype {ANT5060 |ANT5120 |ANT5180 | internal} —
802.11a external antenna models:
ANT5060 — 60° 802.11a antenna
ANT5120 — 120° 802.11a antenna
ANT5180 — 180° 802.11a antenna
internal — uses the internal antenna instead
antennatype {ANT3C591 | ANT3C592 |ANT3C597 | ANT3C598 |
internal} — 802.11a/b/g dual-mode external antenna models:
ANT3C591 — High gain omni 802.11a/b/g antenna
ANT3C592 — Ceiling 802.11a/b/g antenna
ANT3C597 — Hallway 802.11a/b/g antenna
ANT3C598 — Panel 802.11a/b/g antenna
internal — uses the internal antenna instead
All radios use the internal antenna by default. (The MAP-262 802.11b/g
radio does not have an internal antenna, and uses model ANT1060 by
default.)
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Model numbers added for
802.11a external antennas, and the default changed to internal (except
for the MAP-262) in MSS Version 3.2.
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power 317
Usage — This command applies only to MAP models that support
external antennas. External 802.11b/g antennas are supported on
MAP-372, MAP-341, MAP-352, and MAP-262. External 802.11a
antennas are supported only on model MAP-372. External dual-mode
antennas are supported on AP2750, AP3750, AP7250, AP8250 and
AP8750.
Examples — The following command configures the 802.11b/g radio on
Distributed MAP 1 to use antenna model ANT1060:
WX4400# set dap 1 radio 1 antennatype ANT1060
success: change accepted.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune
max-power
Sets the maximum power that RF Auto-Tuning can set on a radio.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune max-power power-level
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the maximum power.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
maximum power.
dap auto — Sets the maximum power for radios configured by the
MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
power-level — Maximum power setting RF Auto-Tuning can assign
to the radio, expressed as the number of decibels in relation to 1
milliwatt (dBm). You can specify a value from 1 up to the maximum
value allowed for the country of operation.
The power-level can be a value from 1 to 20.
Defaults — The default maximum power setting that RF Auto-Tuning
can set on a radio is the highest setting allowed for the country of
operation or highest setting supported on the hardware, whichever is
lower.
318 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Examples — The following command sets the maximum power that
RF Auto-Tuning can set on radio 1 on the MAP access point on port 6 to
12 dBm.
WX1200# set ap 6 radio 1 auto-tune max-power 12
success: change accepted.
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune max-
retransmissions
Sets the maximum percentage of client retransmissions a radio can
experience before RF Auto-Tuning considers changing the channel on the
radio. A high percentage of retransmissions is a symptom of interference
on the channel.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto)}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune max-retransmissions retransmissions
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the maximum retransmissions.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
maximum retransmissions.
dap auto — Sets the maximum retransmissions for radios configured
by the MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
retransmissions — Percentage of packets that can result in
retransmissions without resulting in a channel change. You can
specify from 1 to 100.
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions 319
Defaults — The default is 10 percent.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — A retransmission is a packet sent from a client to a MAP radio
that the radio receives more than once. This can occur when the client
does not receive an 802.11 acknowledgement for a packet sent to the
radio.
If the radio receives only a single copy of a packet that is transmitted
multiple times by a client, the packet is not counted by the radio as a
retransmission. For example, if a packet is corrupted and the radio does
not receive it, but the second copy of the packet does reach the radio,
the radio does not count the packet as a retransmission since the radio
received only one recognizable copy of the packet.
The interval is 1000 packets. If more than the specified percentage of
packets within a group of 1000 packets received by the radio are
retransmissions, the radio increases power.
When the percentage of retransmissions exceeds the max-retransmissions
threshold, the radio does not immediately increase power. Instead, if the
data rate at which the radio is sending packets to the client is above the
minimum data rate allowed, the radio lowers the data rate by one
setting. If the retransmissions still exceed the maximum allowed, the
radio continues to lower the data rate, one setting at a time, until either
the retransmissions fall within the allowed percentile or the minimum
allowed data rate is reached.
If the retransmissions still exceed the threshold after the minimum
allowed data rate is reached, the radio increases power by 1 dBm. The
radio continues increasing the power in 1 dBm increments until the
retransmissions fall below the threshold.
After the retransmissions fall below the threshold, the radio reduces
power by 1 dBm. As long as retransmissions remain below the threshold,
the radio continues reducing power in 1 dBm increments until it returns
to its default power level.
320 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
A radio also can increase power, in 1 dBm increments, if a client falls
below the minimum allowed data rate. After a radio increases power, all
clients must be at the minimum data rate or higher and the maximum
retransmissions must be within the allowed percentile, before the radio
begins reducing power again.
Examples — The following command changes the max-retransmissions
value to 20:
WX1200# set ap 6 radio 1 auto-tune max-retransmissions 20
success: change accepted.
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
set {ap | dap} radio
channel
Sets an MAP radio’s channel.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio {1 | 2}
channel channel-number
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the channel.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
channel.
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
channel channel-number — Channel number. The valid channel
numbers depend on the country of operation.
Defaults — The default channel depends on the radio type:
The default channel number for 802.11b/g is 6.
The default channel number for 802.11a is the lowest valid channel
number for the country of operation.
Access — Enabled.
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune min-client-rate 321
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can configure a radio’s transmit power on the same
command line. Use the tx-power option.
This command is not valid if dynamic channel tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) is
enabled.
Examples — The following command configures the channel on the
802.11a radio on the MAP access point connected to port 5:
WX1200# set ap 5 radio 1 channel 36
success: change accepted.
The following command configures the channel and transmit power on
the 802.11b/g radio on the MAP access point connected to port 1:
WX1200# set ap 1 radio 1 channel 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.
See Also
“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power on page 325
set {ap | dap} radio
auto-tune
min-client-rate
Sets the minimum rate at which a radio is allowed to transmit traffic to
clients. The radio automatically increases its transmit power when
necessary to maintain at least the minimum rate with an associated client.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap (dap-num | auto}
radio {1 | 2} auto-tune min-client-rate rate
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the minimum data rate.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
minimum data rate.
dap auto — Sets the maximum power for radios configured by the
MAP configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
322 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
rate — Minimum data rate, in megabits per second (Mbps). The valid
values depend on the radio type:
For 802.11g radios—54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 11, 9, 6, 5.5, 2, or 1
For 802.11b radios—11, 5.5, 2, or 1
For 802.11a radios—54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, or 6
Defaults — The default minimum data transmit rate depends on the
radio type:
The default minimum data rate for 802.11b/g and 802.11b radios is
5.5 Mbps.
The default minimum data rate for 802.11a radios is 24 Mbps.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — If the data rate for traffic sent by a radio to an associated client
falls below the default minimum rate, the radio increases power, in
1 dBm increments, until all clients are at or above the minimum rate.
After all clients are at or above the minimum data transmit rate, the radio
reduces power by 1 dBm. As long as the radio continues to transmit at
the minimum data rate or higher for all clients, the radio continues
reducing power in 1 dBm increments until it returns to its normal power
level.
A radio also can increase power, in 1 dBm increments, if more than the
allowed percentage of packets received by the radio from a client are
retransmissions. After a radio increases power, all clients must be at the
minimum data rate or higher and the maximum retransmissions must be
within the allowed percentile, before the radio begins reducing power
again.
Examples —
set ap 6 radio 1 min-client-rate 11
See Also
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set {ap | dap} radio mode 323
set {ap | dap} radio
mode
Enables or disables a radio on an MAP access point.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}}
radio {1 | 2} mode {enable |disable}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to turn a radio on or off.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to turn a
radio on or off.
dap auto — Sets the radio mode for radios configured by the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
mode enable — Enables a radio.
mode disable — Disables a radio.
Defaults — MAP access point radios are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. MSS Version 4.0 added auto
option for configuration of the MAP configuration template.
Usage — To enable or disable one or more radios to which a profile is
assigned, use the set ap radio radio-profile command. To enable or
disable all radios that use a specific radio profile, use the set
radio-profile command.
Examples — The following command enables radio 1 on the MAP access
points connected to ports 1 through 5:
WX1200# set ap 1-5 radio 1 mode enable
success: change accepted.
The following command enables radio 2 on ports 1 through 3:
WX1200# set ap 1-3 radio 2 mode enable
success: change accepted.
324 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set {ap | dap} radio
radio-profile
Assigns a radio profile to a MAP radio and enables or disables the radio.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}} radio {1
| 2} radio-profile name mode {enable |disable}
ap port-list — List of ports.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP.
dap auto — Sets the radio profile for radios configured by the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
mode enable — Enables radios on the specified ports with the
parameter settings in the specified radio profile.
mode disable — Disables radios on the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto added for
configuration of the MAP configuration template in MSS Version 4.0 .
Usage — When you create a new profile, the radio parameters in the
profile are set to their factory default values.
To enable or disable all radios that use a specific radio profile, use set
radio-profile.
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power 325
Examples — The following command enables radio 1 on ports 3
through 6 assigned to radio profile rp1:
WX1200# set ap 3-6 radio 1 radio-profile rp1 mode enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear {ap | dap} radio on page 272
display radio-profile on page 298
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set {ap | dap} radio
tx-power
Sets an MAP radio’s transmit power.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap dap-num} radio {1 | 2}
tx-power power-level
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access points on
which to set the transmit power.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to set the
transmit power.
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
tx-power power-level — Number of decibels in relation to
1 milliwatt (dBm). The valid values depend on the country of
operation.
The maximum transmit power you can configure on any 3Com radio
is the maximum allowed for the country in which you plan to operate
the radio or one of the following values if that value is less than the
country maximum: on an 802.11a radio, 11 dBm for channel numbers
less than or equal to 64, or 10 dBm for channel numbers greater than
64; on an 802.11b/g radio, 16 dBm for all valid channel numbers for
802.11b, or 14 dBm for all valid channel numbers for 802.11g.
Defaults — The default transmit power on all MAP radio types is the
highest setting allowed for the country of operation or highest setting
supported on the hardware, whichever is lower.
326 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You also can configure a radio’s channel on the same
command line. Use the channel option.
This command is not valid if dynamic power tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) is
enabled.
Examples — The following command configures the transmit power on
the 802.11a radio on the MAP access point connected to port 5:
WX1200# set ap 5 radio 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.
The following command configures the channel and transmit power on
the 802.11b/g radio on the MAP access point connected to port 1:
WX1200# set ap 1 radio 1 channel 1 tx-power 10
success: change accepted.
See Also
“display {ap | dap} config” on page 277
set {ap | dap} radio channel on page 320
set dap security Sets security requirements for management sessions between an WX
switch and its Distributed MAPs.
This feature applies to Distributed MAPs only, not to directly connected
MAPs configured on MAP access ports. In addition, MAP models AP7250,
AP8250, AP8750, MAP-101 and MAP-122 do not have encryption keys
and do not support this feature regardless of how they are connected to
the WX switch.
The maximum transmission unit (MTU) for encrypted MAP management
traffic is 1498 bytes, whereas the MTU for unencrypted management
traffic is 1474 bytes. Make sure the devices in the intermediate network
between the WX switch and Distributed MAP can support the higher
MTU.
Syntax — set dap security {require | none | optional}
set dap security 327
require — Require all Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys that
have been verified in the CLI by an administrator. If a MAP does not
have an encryption key or the key has not been verified, the WX does
not establish a management session with the MAP.
optional — Allows MAPs to be managed by the switch even if they
do not have encryption keys or their keys have not been verified by an
administrator. Encryption is used for MAPs that support it.
none — Encryption is not used, even for MAPs that support it.
Defaults — The default setting is none.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — This parameter applies to all Distributed MAPs managed by the
switch. If you change the setting to required, the switch requires
Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys. The switch also requires their
fingerprints to be verified in MSS. When MAP security is required, a MAP
can establish a management session with the WX only if its fingerprint
has been verified by you in MSS.
A change to MAP security support does not affect management sessions
that are already established. To apply the new setting to an MAP, restart
the MAP.
Examples — The following command configures an WX to require
Distributed MAPs to have encryption keys:
WX-1200# set dap security require
See Also
set dap fingerprint on page 312
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display {ap | dap} status on page 287
328 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set {ap | dap}
upgrade-firmware
Disables or reenables automatic upgrade of an MAP access point’s boot
firmware.
Syntax — set {ap port-list | dap {dap-num | auto}}
upgrade-firmware {enable |disable}
ap port-list — List of ports connected to the MAP access point(s) on
which to allow automatic firmware upgrades.
dap dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP on which to allow
automatic firmware upgrades.
dap auto — Configures firmware upgrades for the MAP
configuration template. (See set dap auto on page 306.)
enable — Enables automatic firmware upgrades.
disable — Disables automatic firmware upgrades.
Defaults — Automatic firmware upgrades of MAP access points are
enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option auto to configure the
MAP configuration template added in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — When the feature is enabled on an WX port, an MAP access
point connected to that port upgrades its boot firmware to the latest
version stored on the WX switch while booting.
Examples — The following command disables automatic firmware
upgrades on the MAP access point connected to port 6:
WX1200# set ap 6 upgrade-firmware disable
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
set radio-profile 11g-only 329
set radio-profile
11g-only
Configures each 802.11b/g radio in a radio profile to allow associations
with 802.11g clients only.
Syntax — set radio-profile name 11g-only {enable | disable}
name — Radio profile name.
enable — Configures radios to allow associations with 802.11g
clients only.
disable — Configures radios to allow associations with 802.11g
clients and 802.11b clients.
Defaults — The default setting is disable. 3Com 802.11b/g radios allow
associations with 802.11g and 802.11b clients by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Even when association of 802.11b clients is disabled, if an 802.11b/g
radio detects a beacon from an 802.11b network, the radio enters
protection mode to guard against interference.
The set radio-profile 11g-only command does not affect the radio
support configured with the set port type ap command. For example, if
you configure a radio to be 802.11b only when you set the port type, the
set radio-profile 11g-only enable command does not enable 802.11g
support on the radio.
Examples — The following command configures the 802.11b/g radios in
radio profile rp1 to allow associations from 802.11g clients only:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 11g-only enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display radio-profile on page 298
set port type ap on page 87
set radio-profile mode on page 342
330 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set radio-profile
active-scan
Disables or reenables active RF detection scanning on the MAP radios
managed by a radio profile. When active scanning is enabled, MAP radios
look for rogue devices by sending probe any requests (probe requests
with a null SSID name), to solicit probe responses from other access
points.
Passive scanning is always enabled and cannot be disabled. During
passive scanning, radios look for rogues by listening for beacons and
probe responses.
Syntax — set radio-profile name active-scan {enable |
disable}
name — Radio profile name.
enable — Configures radios to actively scan for rogues.
disable — Configures radios to scan only passively for rogues by
listening for beacons and probe responses.
Defaults — Active scanning is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can enter this command on any WX switch in the Mobility
Domain. The command takes effect only on that switch.
Examples — The following command disables active scan in radio profile
radprof3:
WX-1200# set radio-profile radprof3 active-scan disable
success: change accepted.
set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-config
Disables or reenables dynamic channel tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) for the
MAP radios in a radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-config
{enable |disable}
name — Radio profile name.
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown 331
enable — Configures radios to dynamically select their channels
when the radios are started.
disable — Configures radios to use their statically assigned channels,
or the default channels if unassigned, when the radios are started.
Defaults — Dynamic channel assignment is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you disable RF Auto-Tuning for channels, MSS does not
dynamically set the channels when radios are first enabled and also does
not tune the channels during operation.
If RF Auto-Tuning for channels is enabled, MSS does not allow you to
manually change channels.
Examples — The following command disables dynamic channel tuning
for radios in the rp2 radio profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-config
disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-holddown
Sets the minimum number of seconds a radio in a radio profile must
remain at its current channel assignment before RF Auto-Tuning can
change the channel. The channel holddown provides additional stability
to the network by preventing the radio from changing channels too
rapidly in response to spurious RF anomalies such as short-duration
channel interference.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-holddown
holddown
name — Radio profile name.
332 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
holddown — Minimum number of seconds a radio must remain on its
current channel setting before RF Auto-Tuning is allowed to change
the channel. You can specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.
Defaults — The default RF Auto-Tuning channel holddown is 900
seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The channel holddown applies even if RF anomalies occur that
normally cause an immediate channel change.
Examples — The following command changes the channel holddown
for radios in radio profile rp2 to 600 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-holddown 600
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval on page 332
set radio-profile
auto-tune
channel-interval
Sets the interval at which RF Auto-Tuning decides whether to change the
channels on radios in a radio profile. At the end of each interval, MSS
processes the results of the RF scans performed during the previous
interval, and changes radio channels if needed.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune channel-interval
seconds
name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds RF Auto-Tuning waits before
changing radio channels to adjust to RF changes, if needed. You can
specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.
Defaults — The default channel interval is 3600 seconds (one hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer 333
Usage — 3Com recommends that you use an interval of at least 300
seconds (5 minutes).
RF Auto-Tuning can change a radio’s channel before the channel interval
expires in response to RF anomalies. Even in this case, channel changes
cannot occur more frequently than the channel holddown interval.
If you set the interval to 0, RF Auto-Tuning does not reevaluate the
channel at regular intervals. However, RF Auto-Tuning can still change
the channel in response to RF anomalies.
Examples — The following command sets the channel interval for radios
in radio profile rp2 to 2700 seconds (45 minutes):
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune channel-interval 2700
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown on page 331
set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-backoff-
timer
Sets the interval at which radios in a radio profile reduce power after
temporarily increasing the power to maintain the minimum data rate for
an associated client. At the end of each power-backoff interval, radios
that temporarily increased their power reduce it by 1 dBm. The power
backoff continues in 1 dBm increments after each interval until the power
returns to expected setting.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune power-backoff-timer
seconds
name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds radios wait before lowering the power
by 1 dBm. You can specify from 0 to 65535 seconds.
Defaults — The default power-backoff interval is 10 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
334 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
A radio can increase power again if required to preserve the minimum
data rate for an associated client.
Examples — The following command changes the power-backoff
interval for radios in radio profile rp2 to 15 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune
power-backoff-timer 15
success: change accepted.
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-config
Enables or disables dynamic power tuning (RF Auto-Tuning) for the MAP
radios in a radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune power-config
{enable |disable}
name — Radio profile name.
enable — Configures radios to dynamically set their power levels
when the MAPs are started.
disable — Configures radios to use their statically assigned power
levels, or the default power levels if unassigned, when the radios are
started.
Defaults — Dynamic power assignment is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When RF Auto-Tuning for power is disabled, MSS does not
dynamically set the power levels when radios are first enabled and also
does not tune power during operation with associated clients.
When RF Auto-Tuning for power is enabled, MSS does not allow you to
manually change the power level.
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval 335
Examples — The following command enables dynamic power tuning for
radios in the rp2 radio profile:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune power-config enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config on page 330
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval on page 335
set radio-profile
auto-tune
power-interval
Sets the interval at which RF Auto-Tuning decides whether to change the
power level on radios in a radio profile. At the end of each interval, MSS
processes the results of the RF scans performed during the previous
interval, and changes radio power levels if needed.
Syntax — set radio-profile name auto-tune
power-interval seconds
name — Radio profile name.
seconds — Number of seconds MSS waits before changing radio
power levels to adjust to RF changes, if needed. You can specify from
1 to 65535 seconds.
Defaults — The default power tuning interval is 300 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — RF Auto-Tuning also can temporarily increase a radio’s power
level to preserve the minimum data rate for an associated client. In this
case, the radio reduces its power in 1 dBm increments until the power
returns to the expected level.
336 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command sets the power interval for radios
in radio profile rp2 to 240 seconds:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 auto-tune power-interval 240
success: change accepted.
See Also
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power on page 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max- retransmissions on page 318
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff- timer on page 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config on page 334
set radio-profile
beacon-interval
Changes the rate at which each MAP radio in a radio profile advertises its
service set identifier (SSID).
Syntax — set radio-profile name beacon-interval interval
name — Radio profile name.
interval — Number of milliseconds (ms) between beacons. You can
specify from 25 ms to 8191 ms.
Defaults — The beacon interval for MAP radios is 100 ms by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the beacon interval for
radio profile rp1 to 200 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval 200
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile countermeasures 337
set
radio-profile
countermeasures
CAUTION: Countermeasures affect wireless service on a radio. When a
MAP radio is sending countermeasures, the radio is disabled for use by
network traffic, until the radio finishes sending the countermeasures.
Enables or disables countermeasures for on the MAP radios managed by
a radio profile. Countermeasures are packets sent by a radio to prevent
clients from being able to use rogue access points.
MAP radios can also issue countermeasures against interfering devices.
An interfering device is not part of the network but also is not a rogue.
No client connected to the device has been detected communicating with
any network entity listed in the forwarding database (FDD) of any WX
switch in the Mobility Domain. Although the interfering device is not
connected to your network, the device might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.
Syntax — set radio-profile name countermeasures { all | rogue }
name — Radio profile name.
all — Configures radios to attack rogues and interfering devices.
rogue — Configures radios to attack rogues only.
Defaults — Countermeasures are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command enables countermeasures in radio
profile radprof3 for rogues only:
WX-1200# set radio-profile radprof3 countermeasures rogue
success: change accepted.
The following command disables countermeasures in radio profile
radprof3:
WX-1200# clear radio-profile radprof3 countermeasures
success: change accepted.
338 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set radio-profile
dtim-interval
Changes the number of times after every beacon that each MAP radio in
a radio profile sends a delivery traffic indication map (DTIM). An MAP
access point sends the multicast and broadcast frames stored in its
buffers to clients who request them in response to the DTIM.
The DTIM interval applies to both the beaconed SSID and the
nonbeaconed SSID.
Syntax — set radio-profile name dtim-interval interval
name — Radio profile name.
interval — Number of times the DTIM is transmitted after every
beacon. You can enter a value from 1 through 31.
Defaults — By default, MAP access points send the DTIM once after
each beacon.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
The DTIM interval does not apply to unicast frames.
Examples — The following command changes the DTIM interval for
radio profile rp1 to 2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 dtim-interval 2
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile frag-threshold 339
set radio-profile
frag-threshold
Changes the fragmentation threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The fragmentation threshold specifies the maximum length a
frame is allowed to be without being broken into multiple frames before
transmission.
Syntax — set radio-profile name frag-threshold threshold
name — Radio profile name.
threshold — Maximum frame length, in bytes. You can enter a value
from 256 through 2346.
Defaults — The default fragmentation threshold for MAP radios is 2346
bytes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the fragmentation
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 1500 bytes:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 frag-threshold 1500
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile
long-retry
Changes the long retry threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile.
The long retry threshold specifies the number of times a radio can send a
long unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment. A long unicast
frame is a frame that is equal to or longer than the Request-to-Send (RTS)
threshold.
Syntax — set radio-profile name long-retry threshold
name — Radio profile name.
340 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
threshold — Number of times the radio can send the same long
unicast frame. You can enter a value from 1 through 15.
Defaults — The default long unicast retry threshold for MAP radios is 5
attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the long retry threshold
for radio profile rp1 to 8:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 long-retry 8
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile short-retry on page 350
set radio-profile
max-rx-lifetime
Changes the maximum receive threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The maximum receive threshold specifies the number of
milliseconds that a frame received by a radio can remain in buffer
memory.
Syntax — set radio-profile name max-rx-lifetime time
name — Radio profile name.
time — Number of milliseconds. You can enter a value from 500
(0.5 second) through 250,000 (250 seconds).
Defaults — The default maximum receive threshold for MAP radios is
2000 ms (2 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime 341
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the maximum receive
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 4000 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 max-rx-lifetime 4000
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime on page 341
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile
max-tx-lifetime
Changes the maximum transmit threshold for the MAP radios in a radio
profile. The maximum transmit threshold specifies the number of
milliseconds that a frame scheduled to be transmitted by a radio can
remain in buffer memory.
Syntax — set radio-profile name max-tx-lifetime time
name — Radio profile name.
time — Number of milliseconds. You can enter a value from 500
(0.5 second) through 250,000 (250 seconds).
Defaults — The default maximum transmit threshold for MAP radios is
2000 ms (2 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the maximum transmit
threshold for radio profile rp1 to 4000 ms:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 max-tx-lifetime 4000
success: change accepted.
342 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime on page 340
set radio-profile
mode
Creates a new radio profile, or disables or reenables all MAP radios that
are using a specific profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name [mode {enable | disable}]
radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
Use this command without the mode enable or mode disable
option to create a new profile.
mode enable — Enables the radios that use this profile.
mode disable — Disables the radios that use this profile.
Defaults — Each radio profile that you create has a set of properties with
factory default values that you can change with the other set
radio-profile commands in this chapter. Table 66 lists the parameters
controlled by a radio profile and their default values.
Table 66 Defaults for Radio Profile Parameters
Parameter Default Value
Radio Behavior When Parameter Set to
Default Value
11g-only disable Allows associations with 802.11g and
802.11b clients.
Note: This parameter applies only to
802.11b/g radios.
active-scan enable Sends probe any requests (probe requests
with a null SSID name) to solicit probe
responses from other access points.
auto-tune enable Allows dynamic configuration of channel
and power settings by MSS.
beacon-interval 100 Waits 100 ms between beacons.
countermeasures Not configured Does not issue countermeasures against
any device.
set radio-profile mode 343
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use the command without any optional parameters to create
new profile. If the radio profile does not already exist, MSS creates a new
radio profile. Use the enable or disable option to enable or disable all
the radios using a profile. To assign the profile to one or more radios, use
the set ap radio radio-profile command.
dtim-interval 1Sends the delivery traffic indication map
(DTIM) after every beacon.
frag-threshold 2346 Transmits frames up to 2346 bytes long
without fragmentation.
long-retry 5Sends a long unicast frame up to five times
without acknowledgment.
max-rx-lifetime 2000 Allows a received frame to stay in the
buffer for up to 2000 ms (2 seconds).
max-tx-lifetime 2000 Allows a frame that is scheduled for
transmission to stay in the buffer for up to
2000 ms (2 seconds).
preamble-length short Advertises support for short 802.11b
preambles, accepts either short or long
802.11b preambles, and generates unicast
frames with the preamble length specified
by the client.
Note: This parameter applies only to
802.11b/g radios.
rts-threshold 2346 Transmits frames longer than 2346 bytes
by means of the
Request-to-Send/Clear-to-Send (RTS/CTS)
method.
service-profile No service
profiles
defined
Default settings for all service profile
parameters, including encryption
parameters, are used.
short-retry 5Sends a short unicast frame up to five times
without acknowledgment.
wmm enable Prioritizes traffic based on the Wi-Fi
Multimedia (WMM) standard.
Table 66 Defaults for Radio Profile Parameters (continued)
Parameter Default Value
Radio Behavior When Parameter Set to
Default Value
344 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
To change a parameter in a radio profile, you must first disable all the
radios in the profile. After you complete the change, you can reenable
the radios.
To enable or disable specific radios without disabling all of them, use the
set ap radio command.
Examples — The following command configures a new radio profile
named rp1:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1
success: change accepted.
The following command enables the radios that use radio profile rp1:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode enable
The following commands disable the radios that use radio profile rp1,
change the beacon interval, then reenable the radios:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode disable
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 beacon-interval 200
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 mode enable
The following command enables the WPA IE on MAP radios in radio
profile rp2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 wpa-ie enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display {ap | dap} config on page 277
display radio-profile on page 298
set {ap | dap} radio mode on page 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile on page 324
set radio-profile preamble-length 345
set radio-profile
preamble-length
Changes the preamble length for which an 802.11b/g MAP radio
advertises support. This command does not apply to 802.11a.
Syntax — set radio-profile name
preamble-length {long | short}
name — Radio profile name.
long — Advertises support for long preambles.
short — Advertises support for short preambles.
Defaults — The default is short.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Changing the preamble length value affects only the support
advertised by the radio. Regardless of the preamble length setting (short
or long), an 802.11b/g radio accepts and can generate 802.11b/g frames
with either short or long preambles.
If a client associated with an 802.11b/g radio uses long preambles for
unicast traffic, the MAP access point still accepts frames with short
preambles but does not transmit frames with short preambles. This
change also occurs if the access point overhears a beacon from an
802.11b/g radio on another access point that indicates the radio has
clients that require long preambles.
You must disable all radios that use a radio profile before you can change
parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile mode command
.
Examples — The following command configures 802.11b/g radios that
use the radio profile rp_long to advertise support for long preambles
instead of short preambles:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp_long preamble-length long
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
346 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set radio-profile
rts-threshold
Changes the RTS threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile. The RTS
threshold specifies the maximum length a frame can be before the radio
uses the RTS/CTS method to send the frame. The RTS/CTS method clears
the air of other traffic to avoid corruption of the frame due to a collision
with another frame.
Syntax — set radio-profile name rts-threshold threshold
name — Radio profile name.
threshold — Maximum frame length, in bytes. You can enter a value
from 256 through 3000.
Defaults — The default RTS threshold for an MAP radio is 2346 bytes.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the RTS threshold for
radio profile rp1 to 1500 bytes:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 rts-threshold 1500
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile mode on page 342
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile
service-profile
Maps a service profile to a radio profile. All radios that use the radio
profile also use the parameter settings, including SSID and encryption
settings, in the service profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name service-profile name
radio-profile name — Radio profile name of up to 16 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
set radio-profile service-profile 347
service-profile name — Service profile name of up to 16
alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — A radio profile does not have a service profile associated
with it by default. In this case, the radios in the radio profile use the
default settings for parameters controlled by the service profile. Table 67
lists the parameters controlled by a service profile and their default
values.
Table 67 Defaults for Service Profile Parameters
Parameter Default Value
Radio Behavior When Parameter Set
to Default Value
auth-dot1x enable When the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
information element (IE) is enabled, uses
802.1X to authenticate WPA clients.
auth-fallthru web-portal Uses WebAAA for users who do not
match an 802.1X or MAC authentication
rule for the SSID requested by the user.
auth-psk disable Does not support using a preshared key
(PSK) to authenticate WPA clients.
auth-fallthru web-portal Uses WebAAA for users who do not
match an 802.1X or MAC authentication
rule for the SSID requested by the user.
beacon enable Sends beacons to advertise the SSID
managed by the service profile.
cipher-ccmp disable Does not use Counter with Cipher Block
Chaining Message Authentication Code
Protocol (CCMP) to encrypt traffic sent to
WPA clients.
cipher-tkip enable When the WPA IE is enabled, uses
Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) to
encrypt traffic sent to WPA clients.
cipher-wep104 disable Does not use Wired Equivalent Privacy
(WEP) with 104-bit keys to encrypt traffic
sent to WPA clients.
cipher-wep40 disable Does not use WEP with 40-bit keys to
encrypt traffic sent to WPA clients.
psk-phrase No passphrase
defined Uses dynamically generated keys rather
than statically configured keys to
authenticate WPA clients.
348 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must configure the service profile before you can map it to
a radio profile. You can map the same service profile to more than one
radio profile.
psk-raw No preshared
key defined Uses dynamically generated keys rather
than statically configured keys to
authenticate WPA clients.
rsn-ie disable Does not use the RSN IE in transmitted
frames. (The RSN IE is required for
802.11i. RSN is sometimes called WPA2.)
shared-key-auth disable Does not use shared-key authentication.
This parameter does not enable PSK
authentication for WPA. To enable PSK
encryption for WPA, use the
set radio-profile auth-psk command.
ssid-name private Uses the SSID name private.
ssid-type crypto Encrypts wireless traffic for the SSID.
tkip-mc-time 60000 Uses Michael countermeasures for 60,000
ms (60 seconds) following detection of a
second MIC failure within 60 seconds.
web-aaa-form Not configured For WebAAA users, serves the default
login web page or, if configured, the
SSID-specific login web page.
wep key-index No keys
defined Uses dynamic WEP rather than static WEP.
If you configure a WEP key for static WEP,
MSS continues to also support dynamic
WEP.
wep active-
multicast-index 1Uses WEP key 1 for static WEP encryption
of multicast traffic if WEP encryption is
enabled and keys are defined.
wep active-unicast-
index 1Uses WEP key 1 for static WEP encryption
of unicast traffic if WEP encryption is
enabled and keys are defined.
wpa-ie disable Does not use the WPA IE in transmitted
frames.
Table 67 Defaults for Service Profile Parameters (continued)
Parameter Default Value
Radio Behavior When Parameter Set
to Default Value
set radio-profile service-profile 349
You must disable all radios that use a radio profile before you can change
parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile mode command
.
Examples — The following command maps service-profile wpa_clients
to radio profile rp2:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp2 service-profile wpa_clients
success: change accepted.
See Also
display service-profile on page 302
set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile beacon on page 355
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile rsn-ie on page 362
set service-profile shared-key-auth on page 363
set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365
set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
350 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set radio-profile
short-retry
Changes the short retry threshold for the MAP radios in a radio profile.
The short retry threshold specifies the number of times a radio can send a
short unicast frame without receiving an acknowledgment.
Syntax — set radio-profile name short-retry threshold
name — Radio profile name.
threshold — Number of times the radio can send the same short
unicast frame. You can enter a value from 1 through 15.
Defaults — The default short unicast retry threshold for MAP radios is 5
attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must disable all radios that are using a radio profile before
you can change parameters in the profile. Use the set radio-profile
mode command
.
Examples — The following command changes the short retry threshold
for radio profile rp1 to 3:
WX4400# set radio-profile rp1 short-retry 3
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set radio-profile long-retry on page 339
set radio-profile
wmm
Disables or reenables Wi-Fi Multimedia (WMM) on the MAP radios in a
radio profile.
Syntax — set radio-profile name wmm {enable | disable}
name — Radio profile name.
enable — Enables WMM.
disable — Disables WMM.
set service-profile auth-dot1x 351
Defaults — WMM is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — When WMM is disabled, MAP forwarding prioritization is
optimized for SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP) instead of WMM, and the
MAP does not tag packets it sends to the WX. Otherwise, classification
and tagging remain in effect. (For information, see the “Wi-Fi
Multimedia” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Configuration Guide.)
If you plan to use SVP or another non-WMM type of prioritization, you
must configure ACLs to tag the packets. (See the “Enabling Prioritization
for Legacy Voice over IP” section in the “Configuring and Managing
Security ACLs” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller
Configuration Guide..)
Examples — The following command disables WMM in radio profile
radprofsvp:
WX1200# set radio-profile radprofsvp wmm disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radio-profile mode on page 342
display radio-profile on page 298
set service-profile
auth-dot1x
Disables or reenables 802.1X authentication of Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) clients by MAP radios, when the WPA information element (IE) is
enabled in the service profile that is mapped to the radio profile that the
radios are using.
Syntax — set service-profile
name auth-dot1x {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables 802.1X authentication of WPA clients.
disable — Disables 802.1X authentication of WPA clients.
352 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, 802.1X authentication of WPA
clients is enabled by default. If the WPA IE is disabled, the auth-dot1x
setting has no effect.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not disable dynamic WEP for non-WPA
clients. To disable dynamic WEP for non-WPA clients, enable the WPA IE
(if not already enabled) and disable the 40-bit WEP and 104-bit WEP
cipher suites in the WPA IE, if they are not already disabled.
To use 802.1X authentication for WPA clients, you also must enable the
WPA IE.
If you disable 802.1X authentication of WPA clients, the only method
available for authenticating the clients is preshared key (PSK)
authentication. To use this, you must enable PSK support and configure a
passphrase or key.
Examples — The following command disables 802.1X authentication for
WPA clients that use service profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# set service-profile wpa_clients auth-dot1x disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display service-profile on page 302
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
auth-fallthru
Specifies the authentication type for users who do not match an 802.1X
or MAC authentication rule for an SSID managed by the service profile.
When a user tries to associate with an SSID, MSS checks the
authentication rules for that SSID for a userglob that matches the
username. If the SSID does not have an authentication rule that matches
the username, authentication for the user falls through to the fallthru
method.
set service-profile auth-fallthru 353
The fallthru method is a service profile parameter, and applies to all
radios within the radio profiles that are mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name auth-fallthru
{last-resort |none |web-portal}
last-resort — Automatically authenticates the user and allows
access to the SSID requested by the user, without requiring a
username and password.
none — Denies authentication and prohibits the user from accessing
the SSID.
The authentication method none you can specify for administrative
access is different from the fallthru authentication type none, which
applies only to network access. The authentication method none allows
access to the WX switch by an administrator. The fallthru authentication
type none denies access to a network user. (See “set service-profile
auth-fallthru” on page 352.)
web-portal — Serves the user a web page from the WX switch’s
nonvolatile storage for secure login to the network.
Defaults — The default fallthru authentication type is web-portal.
If a username does not match a userglob in an authentication rule for the
SSID requested by the user, the WX switch that is managing the radio the
user is connected to redirects the user to a web page located on the WX
switch. The user must type a valid username and password on the web
page to access the SSID.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Option web-portal renamed
to web-portal in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The last-resort fallthru authentication type allows any user to
access any SSID managed by the service profile. This method does not
require the user to provide a username or password. Use the last-resort
method only if none of the SSIDs managed by the service profile require
secure access.
354 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
The web-portal authentication type requires additional configuration
items. (See the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.)
Examples — The following command sets the fallthru authentication for
SSIDS managed by the service profile rnd_lab to none:
WX4400# set service-profile rnd_lab auth-fallthru none
success: change accepted.
See Also
display service-profile on page 302
set web-aaa on page 260
set service-profile web-aaa-form on page 366
set service-profile
auth-psk
Enables preshared key (PSK) authentication of Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA) clients by MAP radios in a radio profile, when the WPA
information element (IE) is enabled in the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name auth-psk {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables PSK authentication of WPA clients.
disable — Disables PSK authentication of WPA clients.
Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, PSK authentication of WPA
clients is enabled by default. If the WPA IE is disabled, the auth-psk
setting has no effect.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command affects authentication of WPA clients only.
To use PSK authentication, you also must configure a passphrase or key.
In addition, you must enable the WPA IE.
set service-profile beacon 355
The WebAAA fallthru authentication type is not supported in conjunction
with WPA encryption using preshared keys (PSK) for the same SSID. These
options are configurable together but are not compatible. WebAAA
traffic is not encrypted, whereas the PSK four-way handshake requires a
client to already be authenticated and for encryption to be in place.
Examples — The following command enables PSK authentication for
service profile wpa_clients:
WX4400# set service-profile wpa_clients auth-psk enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display service-profile on page 302
set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
beacon
Disables or reenables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service
profile.
A MAP radio responds to an 802.11 probe any request with only the
beaconed SSID(s). For a nonbeaconed SSID, radios respond only to
directed 802.11 probe requests that match the nonbeaconed SSID’s SSID
string.
When you disable beaconing for an SSID, the radio still sends beacon
frames, but the SSID name in the frames is blank.
Syntax — set service-profile name beaconed {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service
profile.
disable — Disables beaconing of the SSID managed by the service
profile.
Defaults — Beaconing is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
356 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables beaconing of the SSID
managed by service profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 beacon disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display service-profile on page 302
set radio-profile beacon-interval on page 336
set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile
cipher-ccmp
Enables Counter with Cipher Block Chaining Message Authentication
Code Protocol (CCMP) encryption with WPA clients, for a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-ccmp
{enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables CCMP encryption for WPA clients.
disable — Disables CCMP encryption for WPA clients.
Defaults — CCMP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use CCMP, you must also enable the WPA IE.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use CCMP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-ccmp enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-tkip 357
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
cipher-tkip
Disables or reenables Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) encryption in
a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile
name cipher-tkip {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables TKIP encryption for WPA clients.
disable — Disables TKIP encryption for WPA clients.
Defaults — When the WPA IE is enabled, TKIP encryption is enabled by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use TKIP, you must also enable the WPA IE.
Examples — The following command disables TKIP encryption in service
profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-tkip disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile tkip-mc-time on page 365
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
358 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set service-profile
cipher-wep104
Enables dynamic Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) with 104-bit keys, in a
service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-wep104 {enable |
disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables 104-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.
disable — Disables 104-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.
Defaults — 104-bit WEP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use 104-bit WEP with WPA clients, you must also enable the
WPA IE.
When 104-bit WEP in WPA is enabled in the service profile, radios
managed by a radio profile that is mapped to the service profile can also
support non-WPA clients that use dynamic WEP.
To support WPA clients that use 40-bit dynamic WEP, you must enable
WEP with 40-bit keys. Use the set service-profile cipher-wep40
command.
Microsoft Windows XP does not support WEP with WPA. To configure a
service profile to provide dynamic WEP for XP clients, leave WPA disabled
and use the set service-profile wep commands.
To support non-WPA clients that use static WEP, you must configure
static WEP keys. Use the set service-profile wep key-index command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use 104-bit WEP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-wep104 enable
success: change accepted.
set service-profile cipher-wep40 359
See Also
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
cipher-wep40
Enables dynamic Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) with 40-bit keys, in a
service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name cipher-wep40 {enable |
disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables 40-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.
disable — Disables 40-bit WEP encryption for WPA clients.
Defaults — 40-bit WEP encryption is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use 40-bit WEP with WPA clients, you must also enable the
WPA IE.
When 40-bit WEP in WPA is enabled in the service profile, radios
managed by a radio profile that is mapped to the service profile can also
support non-WPA clients that use dynamic WEP.
To support WPA clients that use 104-bit dynamic WEP, you must enable
WEP with 104-bit keys in the service profile. Use the set service-profile
cipher-wep104 command.
Microsoft Windows XP does not support WEP with WPA. To configure a
service profile to provide dynamic WEP for XP clients, leave WPA disabled
and use the set service-profile wep commands.
To support non-WPA clients that use static WEP, you must configure
static WEP keys. Use the set service-profile wep key-index command.
360 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use 40-bit WEP encryption:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 cipher-wep40 enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
psk-phrase
Configures a passphrase for preshared key (PSK) authentication to use for
authenticating WPA clients, in a service profile. Radios use the PSK as a
pairwise master key (PMK) to derive unique pairwise session keys for
individual WPA clients.
Syntax — set service-profile name psk-phrase passphrase
name — Service profile name.
passphrase — An ASCII string up to 63 characters long. The string
can contain blanks if you use quotation marks at the beginning and
end of the string.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS converts the passphrase into a 256-bit binary number for
system use and a raw hexadecimal key to store in the WX switch's
configuration. Neither the binary number nor the passphrase itself is ever
displayed in the configuration.
To use PSK authentication, you must enable it and you also must enable
the WPA IE.
set service-profile psk-raw 361
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp3 to
use passphrase “1234567890123<>?=+&% The quick brown fox jumps
over the lazy sl”:
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 psk-phrase "1234567890123<>
?=+&% The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy sl"
success: change accepted.
See Also
set mac-user attr on page 246
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile psk-raw on page 361
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
psk-raw
Configures a raw hexadecimal preshared key (PSK) to use for
authenticating WPA clients, in a service profile. Radios use the PSK as a
pairwise master key (PMK) to derive unique pairwise session keys for
individual WPA clients.
Syntax — set service-profile name psk-raw hex
name — Service profile name.
hex — A 64-bit ASCII string representing a 32-digit hexadecimal
number. Enter the two-character ASCII form of each hexadecimal
number.
Defaults — None.
Examples — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS converts the hexadecimal number into a 256-bit binary
number for system use. MSS also stores the hexadecimal key in the WX
switch's configuration. The binary number is never displayed in the
configuration.
To use PSK authentication, you must enable it and you also must enable
the WPA IE.
362 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp3 to
use a raw PSK with PSK clients:
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 psk-raw c25d3fe4483e867
d1df96eaacdf8b02451fa0836162e758100f5f6b87965e59d
success: change accepted.
See Also
set mac-user attr on page 246
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile psk-phrase on page 360
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
set service-profile
rsn-ie
Enables the Robust Security Network (RSN) Information Element (IE). The
RSN IE advertises the RSN authentication methods and cipher suites
supported by radios in the radio profile mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name rsn-ie {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables the RSN IE.
disable — Disables the RSN IE.
Defaults — The RSN IE is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables the RSN IE in service
profile sprsn:
WX4400# set service-profile sprsn rsn-ie enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile shared-key-auth 363
set service-profile
shared-key-auth
Enables shared-key authentication, in a service profile.
Use this command only if advised to do so by 3Com. This command does
not enable preshared key (PSK) authentication for Wi-Fi Protected Access
(WPA). To enable PSK encryption for WPA, use the
set service-profile auth-psk command.
Syntax — set service-profile name shared-key-auth {enable |
disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables shared-key authentication.
disable — Disables shared-key authentication.
Defaults — Shared-key authentication is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables shared-key authentication
in service profile sp4:
WX4400# set service-profile sp4 shared-key-auth enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display radio-profile on page 298
set radio-profile mode on page 342
set service-profile
ssid-name
Configures the SSID name in a service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name ssid-name ssid-name
name — Service profile name.
ssid-name — Name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. You can
include blank spaces in the name, if you delimit the name with single
or double quotation marks. You must use the same type of quotation
mark (either single or double) on both ends of the string
Defaults — The default SSID name is private.
364 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Support added for blank
spaces in the SSID name in Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command applies the name guest to the
SSID managed by service profile clear_wlan:
WX4400# set service-profile clear_wlan ssid-name guest
success: change accepted.
The following command applies the name corporate users to the SSID
managed by service profile mycorp_srvcprf:
WX4400# set service-profile mycorp_srvcprf ssid-name
“corporate users”
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile ssid-type on page 364
set service-profile
ssid-type
Specifies whether the SSID managed by a service profile is encrypted or
unencrypted.
Syntax — set service-profile name ssid-type [clear | crypto]
name — Service profile name.
clear — Wireless traffic for the service profile’s SSID is not encrypted.
crypto — Wireless traffic for the service profile’s SSID is encrypted.
Defaults — The default SSID type is crypto.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the SSID type for service
profile clear_wlan to clear:
WX4400# set service-profile clear_wlan ssid-type clear
success: change accepted.
set service-profile tkip-mc-time 365
See Also
set service-profile ssid-name on page 363
set service-profile
tkip-mc-time
Changes the length of time that MAP radios use countermeasures if two
message integrity code (MIC) failures occur within 60 seconds. When
countermeasures are in effect, MAP radios dissociate all TKIP and WPA
WEP clients and refuse all association and reassociation requests until the
countermeasures end.
Syntax — set service-profile name tkip-mc-time wait-time
name — Service profile name.
wait-time — Number of milliseconds (ms) countermeasures remain
in effect. You can specify from 0 to 60,000.
Defaults — The default countermeasures wait time is 60,000 ms (60
seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Countermeasures apply only to TKIP and WEP clients. This
includes WPA WEP clients and non-WPA WEP clients. CCMP clients are
not affected.
The TKIP cipher suite must be enabled. The WPA IE also must be enabled.
Examples — The following command changes the countermeasures
wait time for service profile sp3 to 30,000 ms (30 seconds):
WX4400# set service-profile sp3 tkip-mc-time 30000
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile wpa-ie on page 370
366 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set service-profile
web-aaa-form
Specifies a custom login page to serve to WebAAA users who request the
SSID managed by the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name web-aaa-form url
name — Service profile name.
url — WX subdirectory name and HTML page name of the login
page. Specify the full path. For example, corpa-ssid/corpa.html.
Defaults — The 3Com Web login page is served by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — 3Com recommends that you create a subdirectory for the
custom page and place all the page’s files in that subdirectory. Do not
place the custom page in the root directory of the switch’s user file area.
If the custom login page includes gif or jpg images, their path names are
interpreted relative to the directory from which the page is served.
To use WebAAA, the fallthru authentication type in the service profile
that manages the SSID must be set to web. To use WebAAA for a wired
authentication port, edit the port configuration with the set port type
wired-auth command.
Examples — The following commands create a subdirectory named
corpa-ssid, copy a custom login page named corpa-login.html and a jpg
image named corpa-logo.jpg into that subdirectory, and set the Web
login page for service profile to corpa-login.html:
WX4400# mkdir corpa-ssid
success: change accepted.
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-login.html corpa-ssid/corpa-login.html
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517 bytes/sec]
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-logo.jpg corpa-ssid/corpa-logo.jpg
success: received 1202 bytes in 0.402 seconds [ 2112 bytes/sec]
WX4400# dir corpa-ssid
===============================================================================
file:
Filename Size Created
file:corpa-login.html 637 bytes Aug 12 2004, 15:42:26
file:corpa-logo.jpg 1202 bytes Aug 12 2004, 15:57:11
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index 367
Total: 1839 bytes used, 206577 Kbytes free
WX4400# set service-profile corpa-service web-aaa-form corpa-ssid/
corpa-login.html
success: change accepted.
See Also
copy on page 542
dir on page 598
display service-profile on page 302
mkdir on page 553
set port type wired-auth on page 91
set service-profile auth-fallthru on page 352
set web-aaa on page 260
set service-profile
wep
active-multicast-
index
Specifies the static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key (one of four) to
use for encrypting multicast frames.
Syntax — set service-profile
name wep active-multicast-index num
name — Service profile name.
num — WEP key number. You can enter a value from 1 through 4.
Defaults — If WEP encryption is enabled and WEP keys are defined,
MAP radios use WEP key 1 to encrypt multicast frames, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before using this command, you must configure values for the
WEP keys you plan to use. Use the set service-profile wep key-index
command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use WEP key 2 for encrypting multicast traffic:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep active-multicast-index 2
success: change accepted.
368 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
See Also
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile
wep active-unicast-
index
Specifies the static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key (one of four) to
use for encrypting unicast frames.
Syntax — set service-profile
name wep active-unicast-index num
name — Service profile name.
num — WEP key number. You can enter a value from 1 through 4.
Defaults — If WEP encryption is enabled and WEP keys are defined,
MAP radios use WEP key 1 to encrypt unicast frames, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before using this command, you must configure values for the
WEP keys you plan to use. Use the set service-profile wep key-index
command.
Examples — The following command configures service profile sp2 to
use WEP key 4 for encrypting unicast traffic:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep active-unicast-index 4
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367
set service-profile wep key-index on page 369
set service-profile wep key-index 369
set service-profile
wep key-index
Sets the value of one of four static Wired-Equivalent Privacy (WEP) keys
for static WEP encryption.
Syntax — set service-profile name wep key-index num key value
name — Service profile name.
key-index num — WEP key index. You can enter a value from 1
through 4.
key value — Hexadecimal value of the key. You can enter a
10-character ASCII string representing a 5-digit hexadecimal number
or a 26-character ASCII string representing a 13-digit hexadecimal
number. You can use numbers or letters. ASCII characters in the
following ranges are supported:
0 to 9
A to F
a to f
Defaults — By default, no static WEP keys are defined.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS automatically enables static WEP when you define a WEP
key. MSS continues to support dynamic WEP.
If you plan to use static WEP, do not map more than 8 service profiles
that contain static WEP keys to the same radio profile.
Examples — The following command configures WEP key index 1 for
service profile sp2 to aabbccddee:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wep key-index 1 key
aabbccddee
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile wep active-multicast- index on page 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast- index on page 368
370 CHAPTER 9: MANAGED ACCESS POINT COMMANDS
set service-profile
wpa-ie
Enables the WPA information element (IE) in wireless frames. The WPA IE
advertises the WPA authentication methods and cipher suites supported
by radios in the radio profile mapped to the service profile.
Syntax — set service-profile name wpa-ie {enable | disable}
name — Service profile name.
enable — Enables the WPA IE.
disable — Disables the WPA IE.
Defaults — The WPA IE is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When the WPA IE is enabled, the default authentication
method is 802.1X. There is no default cipher suite. You must enable the
cipher suites you want the radios to support.
Examples — The following command enables the WPA IE in service
profile sp2:
WX4400# set service-profile sp2 wpa-ie enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set service-profile auth-dot1x on page 351
set service-profile auth-psk on page 354
set service-profile cipher-ccmp on page 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip on page 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 on page 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 on page 359
10 STP COMMANDS
Use Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands to configure and manage
spanning trees on the virtual LANs (VLANs) configured on a wireless LAN
switch or controller, to maintain a loop-free network.
STP Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents STP commands alphabetically. Use the following
table to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 68 STP Commands by Usage
Type Command
STP State set spantree on page 388
display spantree on page 376
display spantree blockedports on page 379
Bridge Priority set spantree priority on page 397
Port Cost set spantree portcost on page 392
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
clear spantree portcost on page 372
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373
Port Priority set spantree portpri on page 394
set spantree portvlanpri on page 396
clear spantree portpri on page 373
clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374
Timers set spantree fwddelay on page 390
set spantree hello on page 390
set spantree maxage on page 391
Fast Convergence set spantree portfast on page 393
display spantree portfast on page 380
372 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
clear spantree
portcost
Resets to the default value the cost of a network port or ports on paths to
the STP root bridge in all VLANs on a WX switch.
Syntax — clear spantree portcost port-list
port-list — List of ports. The port cost is reset on the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command resets the cost in all VLANs. To reset the cost for
only specific VLANs, use the clear spantree portvlancost command.
Examples — The following command resets the STP port cost on ports 5
and 6 to the default value:
WX1200# clear spantree portcost 5-6
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373
display spantree on page 376
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
set spantree portcost on page 392
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
Fast
Convergence,
cont.
set spantree backbonefast on page 389
display spantree backbonefast on
page 378
set spantree uplinkfast on page 397
display spantree uplinkfast on page 387
Statistics display spantree statistics on page 381
clear spantree statistics on page 375
Table 68 STP Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear spantree portpri 373
clear spantree
portpri
Resets to the default value the priority of a network port or ports for
selection as part of the path to the STP root bridge in all VLANs on a
wireless LAN switch or controller.
Syntax — clear spantree portpri port-list
port-list — List of ports. The port priority is reset to 32 (the default)
on the specified ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command resets the priority in all VLANs. To reset the
priority for only specific VLANs, use the clear spantree portvlanpri
command.
Examples — The following command resets the STP priority on port 6 to
the default:
WX1200# clear spantree portpri 6
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374
display spantree on page 376
set spantree portpri on page 394
set spantree portvlanpri on page 396
clear spantree
portvlancost
Resets to the default value the cost of a network port or ports on paths to
the STP root bridge for a specific VLAN on a wireless LAN switch, or for all
VLANs.
Syntax — clear spantree portvlancost port-list {all | vlan
vlan-id}
port-list — List of ports. The port cost is reset on the specified
ports.
all — Resets the cost for all VLANs.
374 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets the cost for only
the specified VLAN.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not change a port’s cost for VLANs other than the
one(s) you specify.
Examples — The following command resets the STP cost for port 2 in
VLAN sunflower:
WX4400# clear spantree portvlancost 2 vlan sunflower
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portcost on page 372
display spantree on page 376
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
set spantree portcost on page 392
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
clear spantree
portvlanpri
Resets to the default value the priority of a network port or ports for
selection as part of the path to the STP root bridge, on one VLAN or all
VLANs.
Syntax — clear spantree portvlanpri port-list {all | vlan
vlan-id}
port-list — List of ports. The port priority is reset to 32 (the default)
on the specified ports.
all — Resets the priority for all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets the priority for
only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
clear spantree statistics 375
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not change a port’s priority for VLANs other than the
one(s) you specify.
Examples — The following command resets the STP priority for port 2 in
VLAN avocado:
WX4400# clear spantree portvlanpri 2 vlan avocado
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portpri on page 373
display spantree on page 376
set spantree portpri on page 394
set spantree portvlanpri on page 396
clear spantree
statistics
Clears STP statistics counters for a network port or ports and resets them
to 0.
Syntax — clear spantree statistics port-list [vlan vlan-id]
port-list — List of ports. Statistics counters are reset on the
specified ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS resets statistics
counters for only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears STP statistics counters for
ports 1, 3, and 5 through 8, for all VLANs:
WX1200# clear spantree statistics 1,3,5-8
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree statistics on page 381
376 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
display spantree Displays STP configuration and port-state information.
Syntax — display spantree
[port-list | vlan vlan-id] [active]
port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays STP information for all ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays STP information for all VLANs.
active — Displays information for only the active (forwarding) ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays STP information for VLAN
default:
WX1200# display spantree vlan default
VLAN 1
Spanning tree mode PVST+
Spanning tree type IEEE
Spanning tree enabled
Designated Root 00-02-4a-70-49-f7
Designated Root Priority 32768
Designated Root Path Cost 19
Designated Root Port 1
Root Max Age 20 sec Hello Time 2 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Bridge ID MAC ADDR 00-0b-0e-02-76-f7
Bridge ID Priority 32768
Bridge Max Age 20 sec Hello Time 2 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Port Vlan Port-State Cost Prio Portfast
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1 Forwarding 19 128 Disabled
2 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
3 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
4 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
5 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
6 1 Forwarding 19 128 Disabled
display spantree 377
7 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
8 1 Disabled 19 128 Disabled
Table 69 describes the fields in this display.
Table 69 Output for display spantree
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number.
Spanning tree mode In the current software version, the mode is always PVST+,
which means Per VLAN Spanning Tree+.
Spanning tree type In the current software version, the type is always IEEE,
which means MSS STP is 802.1D-compatible.
Spanning tree
enabled State of STP on the VLAN.
Designated Root MAC address of the spanning tree’s root bridge.
Designated Root
Priority Bridge priority of the root bridge.
Designated Root Path
Cost Cumulative cost from this bridge to the root bridge. If this
WX switch is the root bridge, then the root cost is 0.
Designated Root Port Port through which this WX switch reaches the root bridge.
If this WX switch is the root bridge, this field says We are
the root.
Root Max Age Maximum acceptable age for hello packets on the root
bridge.
Root Hello Time Hello interval on the root bridge.
Root Forward Delay Forwarding delay value on the root bridge.
Bridge ID MAC ADDR This WX switch’s MAC address.
Bridge ID Priority This WX switch’s bridge priority.
Bridge Max Age This WX switch’s maximum acceptable age for hello
packets.
Bridge Hello Time This WX switch’s hello interval.
Bridge Forward Delay This WX switch’s forwarding delay value.
Port Port number.
Only network ports are listed. STP does not apply to 3Com
Wireless LAN Managed Access Point AP2750 ports or wired
authentication ports.
Vlan VLAN ID.
378 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
See Also
display spantree blockedports on page 379
display spantree
backbonefast
Indicates whether the STP backbone fast convergence feature is enabled
or disabled.
Syntax — display spantree backbonefast
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Port-State STP state of the port:
Blocking — The port is not forwarding Layer 2 traffic
but is listening to and forwarding STP control traffic.
Disabled — The port is not forwarding any traffic,
including STP control traffic. The port might be
administratively disabled or the link might be
disconnected.
Forwarding — The port is forwarding Layer 2 traffic.
Learning — The port is learning the locations of other
WX switches in the spanning tree before changing state
to forwarding.
Listening — The port is comparing its own STP
information with information in STP control packets
received by the port to compute the spanning tree and
change state to blocking or forwarding.
Cost STP cost of the port.
Prio STP priority of the port.
Portfast State of the uplink fast convergence feature:
Enabled
Disabled
Table 69 Output for display spantree (continued)
Field Description
display spantree blockedports 379
Examples — The following example shows the command output on a
WX switch with backbone fast convergence enabled:
WX4400# display spantree backbonefast
Backbonefast is enabled
See Also
set spantree backbonefast on page 389
display spantree
blockedports
Lists information about wireless LAN switch ports that STP has blocked on
one or all of its VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree blockedports [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays information for blocked ports on all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The command lists information separately for each VLAN.
Examples — The following command shows information about blocked
ports on a WX switch for the default VLAN (VLAN 1):
WX4400# display spantree blockedports vlan default
Port Vlan Port-State Cost Prio Portfast
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 190 Blocking 4 128 Disabled
Number of blocked ports (segments) in VLAN 1 : 1
The port information is the same as the information displayed by the
display spantree command. See Table 69 on page 377.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
380 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
display spantree
portfast
Displays STP uplink fast convergence information for all network ports or
for one or more network ports.
Syntax — display spantree portfast [port-list]
port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays uplink fast convergence information for all ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows uplink fast convergence
information for all ports:
WX1200# display spantree portfast
Port Vlan Portfast
------------------------- ---- ----------
1 1 disable
2 1 disable
3 1 disable
4 1 enable
5 1 disable
6 1 disable
7 1 disable
8 1 disable
Table 70 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
set spantree portfast on page 393
Table 70 Output for display spantree portfast
Field Description
Port Port number.
VLAN VLAN number.
Portfast State of the uplink fast convergence feature:
Enable
Disable
display spantree portvlancost 381
display spantree
portvlancost
Shows the cost of a port on a path to the STP root bridge, for each of the
port’s VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree portvlancost port-list
port-list — List of ports.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the STP port cost of port 1:
WX4400# display spantree portvlancost 1
port 1 VLAN 1 have path cost 19
See Also
clear spantree portcost on page 372
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373
display spantree on page 376
set spantree portcost on page 392
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
display spantree
statistics
Displays STP statistics for one or more WX network ports.
Syntax — display spantree statistics
[port-list [vlan vlan-id]]
port-list — List of ports. If you do not specify any ports, MSS
displays STP statistics for all ports.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays STP statistics for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
382 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
Usage — The command displays statistics separately for each port.
Examples — The following command shows STP statistics for port 1:
WX4400# display spantree statistics 1
BPDU related parameters
Port 1 VLAN 1
spanning tree enabled for VLAN = 1
port spanning tree enabled
state Forwarding
port_id 0x8015
port_number 0x5
path cost 0x4
message age (port/VLAN) 0(20)
designated_root 00-0b-0e-00-04-30
designated cost 0x0
designated_bridge 00-0b-0e-00-04-30
designated_port 38
top_change_ack FALSE
config_pending FALSE
port_inconsistency none
Port based information statistics
config BPDU's xmitted(port/VLAN) 0 (1)
config BPDU's received(port/VLAN) 21825 (43649)
tcn BPDU's xmitted(port/VLAN) 0 (0)
tcn BPDU's received(port/VLAN) 2 (2)
forward transition count (port/VLAN) 1 (1)
scp failure count 0
root inc trans count (port/VLAN) 1 (1)
inhibit loopguard FALSE
loop inc trans count 0 (0)
Status of Port Timers
forward delay timer INACTIVE
forward delay timer value 15
message age timer ACTIVE
message age timer value 0
topology change timer INACTIVE
display spantree statistics 383
topology change timer value 0
hold timer INACTIVE
hold timer value 0
delay root port timer INACTIVE
delay root port timer value 0
delay root port timer restarted is FALSE
VLAN based information & statistics
spanning tree type ieee
spanning tree multicast address 01-00-0c-cc-cc-cd
bridge priority 32768
bridge MAC address 00-0b-0e-12-34-56
bridge hello time 2
bridge forward delay 15
topology change initiator: 0
last topology change occured: Tue Jul 01 2003 22:33:36.
topology change FALSE
topology change time 35
topology change detected FALSE
topology change count 1
topology change last recvd. from 00-0b-0e-02-76-f6
Other port specific info
dynamic max age transition 0
port BPDU ok count 21825
msg age expiry count 0
link loading 0
BPDU in processing FALSE
num of similar BPDU's to process 0
received_inferior_bpdu FALSE
next state 0
src MAC count 21807
total src MAC count 21825
curr_src_mac 00-0b-0e-00-04-30
next_src_mac 00-0b-0e-02-76-f6
Table 71 describes the fields in this display.
384 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics
Field Description
Port Port number.
VLAN VLAN ID.
Spanning Tree enabled
for vlan State of the STP feature on the VLAN.
port spanning tree State of the STP feature on the port.
state STP state of the port:
Blocking — The port is not forwarding Layer 2 traffic
but is listening to and forwarding STP control traffic.
Disabled — The port is not forwarding any traffic,
including STP control traffic. The port might be
administratively disabled or the link might be
disconnected.
Forwarding — The port is forwarding Layer 2 traffic.
Learning — The port is learning the locations of other
WX switches in the spanning tree before changing
state to forwarding.
Listening — The port is comparing its own STP
information with information in STP control packets
received by the port to compute the spanning tree and
change state to blocking or forwarding.
port_id STP port ID.
port_number STP port number.
path cost Cost to use this port to reach the root bridge. This is part
of the total path cost (designated cost).
message age Age of the protocol information for a port and the value of
the maximum age parameter (shown in parenthesis)
recorded by the switch.
designated_root MAC address of the root bridge.
designated cost Total path cost to reach the root bridge.
designated_bridge Bridge to which this switch forwards traffic away from the
root bridge.
designated_port STP port through which this switch forwards traffic away
from the root bridge.
top_change_ack Value of the topology change acknowledgment flag in the
next configured bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) to be
transmitted on the associated port. The flag is set in reply
to a topology change notification BPDU.
display spantree statistics 385
config_pending Indicates whether a configured BPDU is to be transmitted
on expiration of the hold timer for the port.
port_inconsistency Indicates whether the port is in an inconsistent state.
config BPDU’s xmitted Number of BPDUs transmitted from the port. A number in
parentheses indicates the number of configured BPDUs
transmitted by the WX switch for this VLAN’s spanning
tree.
config BPDU’s received Number of BPDUs received by this port. A number in
parentheses indicates the number of configured BPDUs
received by the WX switch for this VLAN’s spanning tree.
tcn BPDU’s xmitted Number of topology change notification (TCN) BDPUs
transmitted on this port.
tcn BPDU’s received Number of TCN BPDUs received on this port.
forward transition
count Number of times the port state transitioned to the
forwarding state.
scp failure count Number of service control point (SCP) failures.
root inc trans count Number of times the root bridge changed.
inhibit loopguard State of the loop guard. In the current release, the state is
always FALSE.
loop inc trans count Number of loops that have occurred.
forward delay timer Status of the forwarding delay timer. This timer monitors
the time spent by a port in the listening and learning
states.
forward delay timer
value Current value of the forwarding delay timer, in seconds.
message age timer Status of the message age timer. This timer measures the
age of the received protocol information recorded for a
port.
message age timer
value Current value of the message age timer, in seconds.
topology change timer Status of the topology change timer. This timer determines
the time period during which configured BPDUs are
transmitted with the topology change flag set by this WX
switch when it is the root bridge, after detection of a
topology change.
topology change timer
value Current value of the topology change timer, in seconds.
Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field Description
386 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
hold timer Status of the hold timer. This timer ensures that
configured BPDUs are not transmitted too frequently
through any bridge port.
hold timer value Current value of the hold timer, in seconds.
delay root port timer Status of the delay root port timer, which enables fast
convergence when uplink fast convergence is enabled.
delay root port timer
value Current value of the delay root port timer.
delay root port timer
restarted is Whether the delay root port timer has been restarted.
spanning tree type Type of spanning tree. The type is always IEEE.
spanning tree multicast
address Destination address used to send out configured BPDUs on
a bridge port.
bridge priority STP priority of this WX switch.
bridge MAC address MAC address of this WX switch.
bridge hello time Value of the hello timer interval, in seconds, when this WX
switch is the root or is attempting to become the root.
bridge forward delay Value of the forwarding delay interval, in seconds, when
this WX switch is the root or is attempting to become the
root.
topology change
initiator Port number that initiated the most recent topology
change.
last topology change
occurred System time when the most recent topology change
occurred.
topology change Value of the topology change flag in configuration BPDUs
to be transmitted by this WX switch on VLANs for which
the switch is the designated bridge.
topology change time Time period, in seconds, during which BPDUs are
transmitted with the topology change flag set by this WX
switch when it is the root bridge, after detection of a
topology change. It is equal to the sum of the switch’s
maximum age and forwarding delay parameters.
topology change
detected Indicates whether a topology change has been detected
by the switch.
topology change count Number of times the topology change has occurred.
topology change last
recvd. from MAC address of the bridge from which the WX switch last
received a topology change.
Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field Description
display spantree uplinkfast 387
See Also
clear spantree statistics on page 375
display spantree
uplinkfast
Shows uplink fast convergence information for one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — display spantree uplinkfast [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a VLAN,
MSS displays STP statistics for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
dynamic max age
transition Number of times the maximum age parameter was
changed dynamically.
port BPDU ok count Number of valid port BPDUs received.
msg age expiry count Number of expired messages.
link loading Indicates whether the link is oversubscribed.
BPDU in processing Indicates whether BPDUs are currently being processed.
num of similar BPDU’s
to process Number of similar BPDUs received on a port that need to
be processed.
received_inferior_bpdu Indicates whether the port has received an inferior BPDU
or a response to a Root Link Query (RLQ) BPDU.
next state Port state before it is set by STP.
src MAC count Number of BPDUs with the same source MAC address.
total src MAC count Number of BPDUs with all the source MAC addresses.
curr_src_mac Source MAC address of the current received BPDU.
next_src_mac Other source MAC address from a different source.
Table 71 Output for display spantree statistics (continued)
Field Description
388 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
Examples — The following command shows uplink fast convergence
information for all VLANs:
WX4400# display spantree uplinkfast
VLAN port list
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 1(fwd),2,3
Table 72 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
set spantree uplinkfast on page 397
set spantree Enables or disables STP on one VLAN or all VLANs configured on a WX
switch.
Syntax — set spantree {enable | disable }
[{all | vlan vlan-id | port port-list vlan-id}]
enable — Enables STP.
disable — Disables STP.
all — Enables or disables STP on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS enables or disables STP
on only the specified VLAN, on all ports within the VLAN.
port port-list vlan-id — Port number or list and the VLAN the
ports are in. MSS enables or disables STP on only the specified ports,
within the specified VLAN.
Defaults — Disabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 72 Output for display spantree uplinkfast
Field Description
VLAN VLAN number.
port list Ports in the uplink group. The port that is forwarding
traffic is indicated by fwd. The other ports are blocking
traffic.
set spantree backbonefast 389
Examples — The following command enables STP on all VLANs
configured on a WX switch:
WX4400# set spantree enable
success: change accepted.
The following command disables STP on VLAN burgundy:
WX4400# set spantree disable vlan burgundy
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
set spantree
backbonefast
Enables or disables STP backbone fast convergence on a wireless LAN
switch. This feature accelerates a port’s recovery following the failure of
an indirect link.
CAUTION: The backbone fast convergence feature is not compatible
with switches that are running standard IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree
implementations. This includes switches running Rapid Spanning Tree or
Multiple Spanning Tree.
Syntax — set spantree backbonefast {enable | disable}
enable — Enables backbone fast convergence.
disable — Disables backbone fast convergence.
Defaults — STP backbone fast path convergence is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you plan to use the backbone fast convergence feature, you
must enable it on all the bridges in the spanning tree.
Examples — The following command enables backbone fast
convergence:
WX4400# set spantree backbonefast enable
success: change accepted.
390 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
See Also
display spantree backbonefast on page 378
set spantree
fwddelay
Changes the period of time after a topology change that a WX switch
which is not the root bridge waits to begin forwarding Layer 2 traffic on
one or all of its configured VLANs. (The root bridge always forwards
traffic.)
Syntax — set spantree fwddelay delay {all | vlan vlan-id}
delay — Delay value. You can specify from 4 through 30 seconds.
all — Changes the forwarding delay on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the forwarding
delay on only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default forwarding delay is 15 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the forwarding delay on
VLAN pink to 20 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree fwddelay 20 vlan pink
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
set spantree hello Changes the interval between STP hello messages sent by a wireless LAN
switch when operating as the root bridge, on one or all of its configured
VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree hello interval {all | vlan vlan-id}
interval — Interval value. You can specify from 1 through 10
seconds.
all — Changes the interval on all VLANs.
set spantree maxage 391
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the interval on
only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default hello timer interval is 2 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the hello interval for all
VLANs to 4 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree hello 4 all
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
set spantree
maxage
Changes the maximum age for an STP root bridge hello packet that is
acceptable to a wireless LAN switch acting as a designated bridge on one
or all of its VLANs. After waiting this period of time for a new hello
packet, the WX switch determines that the root bridge is unavailable and
issues a topology change message.
Syntax — set spantree maxage aging-time {all | vlan vlan-id}
aging-time — Maximum age value. You can specify from 6 through
40 seconds.
all — Changes the maximum age on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the maximum
age on only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default maximum age for root bridge hello packets is 20
seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
392 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
Examples — The following command changes the maximum acceptable
age for root bridge hello packets on all VLANs to 15 seconds:
WX4400# set spantree maxage 15 all
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
set spantree
portcost
Changes the cost that transmission through a network port or ports in
the default VLAN on a wireless LAN switch adds to the total cost of a
path to the STP root bridge.
Syntax — set spantree portcost port-list cost cost
port-list — List of ports. MSS applies the cost change to all the
specified ports.
cost cost — Numeric value. You can specify a value from 1 through
65,535. STP selects lower-cost paths over higher-cost paths.
Defaults — The default port cost depends on the port speed and link
type. Table 73 lists the defaults for STP port path cost.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Table 73 STP Port Path Cost Defaults
Port Speed Link Type Default Port Path Cost
1000 Mbps Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group) 3
1000 Mbps Full Duplex 4
100 Mbps Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group) 15
100 Mbps Full Duplex 18
100 Mbps Half Duplex 19
10 Mbps Full Duplex Aggregate
Link (Port Group) 90
10 Mbps Full Duplex 95
10 Mbps Half Duplex 100
set spantree portfast 393
Usage — This command applies only to the default VLAN (VLAN 1). To
change the cost of a port in another VLAN, use the set spantree
portvlancost command.
Examples — The following command changes the cost on ports 3 and 4
to 20:
WX1200# set spantree portcost 3,4 cost 20
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portcost on page 372
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373
display spantree on page 376
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
set spantree portvlancost on page 395
set spantree
portfast
Enables or disables STP port fast convergence on one or more ports on a
wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set spantree portfast port port-list {enable | disable}
port port-list — List of ports. MSS enables the feature on the
specified ports.
enable — Enables port fast convergence.
disable — Disables port fast convergence.
Defaults — STP port fast convergence is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use port fast convergence on ports that are directly connected
to servers, hosts, or other MAC stations.
Examples — The following command enables port fast convergence on
ports 2, 5, and 7:
WX1200# set spantree portfast port 2,4,7 enable
success: change accepted.
394 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
See Also
display spantree portfast on page 380
set spantree portpri Changes the STP priority of a network port or ports for selection as part
of the path to the STP root bridge in the default VLAN on a wireless LAN
switch.
Syntax — set spantree portpri port-list priority value
port-list — List of ports. MSS changes the priority on the specified
ports.
priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0
(highest priority) through 255 (lowest priority).
Defaults — The default STP priority for all network ports is 128.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to the default VLAN (VLAN 1). To
change the priority of a port in another VLAN, use the set spantree
portvlanpri command.
Examples — The following command sets the priority of ports 3 and 4 to
48:
WX1200# set spantree portpri 3-4 priority 48
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portpri on page 373
clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374
display spantree on page 376
set spantree portvlanpri on page 396
set spantree portvlancost 395
set spantree
portvlancost
Changes the cost of a network port or ports on paths to the STP root
bridge for a specific VLAN on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set spantree portvlancost port-list cost cost {all |
vlan vlan-id}
port-list — List of ports. MSS applies the cost change to all the
specified ports.
cost cost — Numeric value. You can specify a value from 1 through
65,535. STP selects lower-cost paths over higher-cost paths.
all — Changes the cost on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the cost on
only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default port cost depends on the port speed and link
type. (See Table 68 on page 371.)
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the cost on ports 3 and 4
to 20 in VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set spantree portvlancost 3,4 cost 20 vlan mauve
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portcost on page 372
clear spantree portvlancost on page 373
display spantree on page 376
display spantree portvlancost on page 381
set spantree portcost on page 392
396 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
set spantree
portvlanpri
Changes the priority of a network port or ports for selection as part of
the path to the STP root bridge, on one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree portvlanpri
port-list priority value {all | vlan vlan-id}
port-list — List of ports. MSS changes the priority on the specified
ports.
priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0
(highest priority) through 255 (lowest priority).
all — Changes the priority on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the priority on
only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default STP priority for all network ports is 128.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the priority of ports 3 and 4 to
48 on VLAN mauve:
WX1200# set spantree portvlanpri 3-4 priority 48 vlan mauve
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear spantree portpri on page 373
clear spantree portvlanpri on page 374
display spantree on page 376
set spantree portpri on page 394
set spantree priority 397
set spantree
priority
Changes the STP root bridge priority of a wireless LAN switch on one or
all of its VLANs.
Syntax — set spantree priority value {all | vlan vlan-id}
priority value — Priority value. You can specify a value from 0
through 65,535. The bridge with the lowest priority value is elected to
be the root bridge for the spanning tree.
all — Changes the bridge priority on all VLANs.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS changes the bridge
priority on only the specified VLAN.
Defaults — The default root bridge priority for the switch on all VLANs is
32,768 for the WX4400 and 49,152 for the WX1200 and WXR100.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command sets the bridge priority of VLAN
pink to 69:
WX4400# set spantree priority 69 vlan pink
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree on page 376
set spantree
uplinkfast
Enables or disables STP uplink fast convergence on a wireless LAN switch.
This feature enables a WX switch with redundant links to the network
backbone to immediately switch to the backup link to the root bridge if
the primary link fails.
Syntax — set spantree uplinkfast {enable | disable}
enable — Enables uplink fast convergence.
disable — Disables uplink fast convergence.
Defaults — Disabled.
Access — Enabled.
398 CHAPTER 10: STP COMMANDS
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The uplink fast convergence feature is applicable to bridges
that are acting as access switches to the network core (distribution layer)
but are not in the core themselves. Do not enable the feature on WX
switches that are in the network core.
Examples — The following command enables uplink fast convergence:
WX4400# set spantree uplinkfast enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display spantree uplinkfast on page 387
11 IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Use Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping commands
to configure and manage multicast traffic reduction on a WX.
Commands by
usage
This chapter presents IGMP snooping commands alphabetically. Use the
Table 74 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 74 IGMP Commands by Usage
Type Command
IGMP Snooping State set igmp on page 411
display igmp on page 400
Proxy Reporting set igmp proxy-report on page 416
Pseudo-querier set igmp querier on page 419
display igmp querier on page 405
Timers set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qri on page 418
set igmp lmqi on page 412
set igmp rv on page 420
Router Solicitation set igmp mrsol on page 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi on page 414
Multicast Routers set igmp mrouter on page 413
display igmp mrouter on page 404
Multicast Receivers set igmp receiver on page 419
display igmp receiver-table on
page 407
Statistics display igmp statistics on page 409
clear igmp statistics on page 400
400 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
clear igmp statistics Clears IGMP statistics counters on one VLAN or all VLANs on a wireless
LAN switch and resets them to 0.
Syntax — clear igmp statistics [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, IGMP statistics are cleared for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command clears IGMP statistics for all
VLANs:
WX1200# clear igmp statistics
IGMP statistics cleared for all vlans
See Also — display igmp statistics on page 409
display igmp Displays IGMP configuration information and statistics.
Syntax — display igmp [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays IGMP information for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays IGMP information for
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp vlan orange
VLAN: orange
IGMP is enabled
Proxy reporting is on
Mrouter solicitation is on
Querier functionality is off
Configuration values: qi: 125 oqi: 300 qri: 100 lmqi: 10 rvalue: 2 Multicast
display igmp 401
router information:
Port Mrouter-IPaddr Mrouter-MAC Type TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----- -----
1 192.28.7.5 00:01:02:03:04:05 dvmrp 17
Group Port Receiver-IP Receiver-MAC TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- -----
224.0.0.2 none none none undef
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.11 00:02:04:06:08:0b 258
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.13 00:02:04:06:08:0d 258
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.14 00:02:04:06:08:0e 258
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.12 00:02:04:06:08:0c 258
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.10 00:02:04:06:08:0a 258
Querier information:
Querier for vlan orange
Port Querier-IP Querier-MAC TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- -----
1 193.122.135.178 00:0b:cc:d2:e9:b4 23
IGMP vlan member ports: 1, 2, 3
IGMP static ports: none
IGMP statistics for vlan orange:
IGMP message type Received Transmitted Dropped
----------------- -------- ----------- -------
General-Queries 0 0 0
GS-Queries 0 0 0
Report V1 0 0 0
Report V2 5 1 4
Leave 0 0 0
Mrouter-Adv 0 0 0
Mrouter-Term 0 0 0
Mrouter-Sol 50 101 0
DVMRP 4 4 0
PIM V1 0 0 0
PIM V2 0 0 0
Topology notifications: 0
Packets with unknown IGMP type: 0
Packets with bad length: 0
Packets with bad checksum: 0
Packets dropped: 4
Table 75 describes the fields in this display.
402 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Table 75 Output for display igmp
Field Description
VLAN VLAN name. MSS displays information separately for each
VLAN.
IGMP is enabled
(disabled) IGMP state.
Proxy reporting Proxy reporting state.
Mrouter solicitation Multicast router solicitation state.
Querier functionality Pseudo-querier state.
Configuration values
(qi) Query interval.
Configuration values
(oqi) Other-querier-present interval.
Configuration values
(qri) Query response interval.
Configuration values
(lmqi) Last member query interval.
Configuration values
(rvalue) Robustness value.
Multicast router
information List of multicast routers and active multicast groups. The
fields containing this information are described separately.
The display igmp mrouter command shows the same
information.
Port Number of the physical port through which the WX can
reach the router.
Mrouter-IPaddr IP address of the multicast router interface.
Mrouter-MAC MAC address of the multicast router interface.
Type How the WX learned that the port is a multicast router
port:
conf — Static multicast port configured by an
administrator
madv — Multicast advertisement
quer — IGMP query
dvmrp — Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
(DVMRP)
pimv1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
version 1
pimv2 — PIM version 2
display igmp 403
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if not
refreshed. For static multicast router entries, the
time-to-live (TTL) value is undef. Static multicast router
entries do not age out.
Group IP address of a multicast group. The display igmp
receiver-table command shows the same information as
these receiver fields.
Port Physical port through which the WX can reach the group’s
receiver.
Receiver-IP IP address of the client receiving the group.
Receiver-MAC MAC address of the client receiving the group.
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a group membership message from the
receiver. For static multicast receiver entries, the TTL value
is undef. Static multicast receiver entries do not age out.
Querier information Information about the subnet’s multicast querier. If the
querier is another WX switch, the fields described below
are applicable. If the querier is the WX itself, the output
indicates how many seconds remain until the next general
query message. If IGMP snooping does not detect a
querier, the output indicates this. The display igmp
querier command shows the same information.
Querier for vlan VLAN containing the querier. Information is listed
separately for each VLAN.
Querier-IP IP address of the querier.
Querier-MAC MAC address of the querier.
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a query message from the querier.
IGMP vlan member
ports Physical ports in the VLAN. This list includes all network
ports configured to be in the VLAN and all ports MSS
dynamically assigns to the VLAN when a user assigned to
the VLAN becomes a receiver. For example, the list can
include a MAP access port that is not configured to be in
the VLAN when a user associated with the 3Com Wireless
LAN Managed Access Point AP2750 on that port becomes
a receiver for a group. When all receivers on a dynamically
added port age out, MSS removes the port from the list.
IGMP static ports Static receiver ports.
IGMP statistics Multicast message and packet statistics. These are the
same statistics displayed by the display igmp statistics
command.
Table 75 Output for display igmp (continued)
Field Description
404 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
See Also
display igmp mrouter on page 404
display igmp querier on page 405
display igmp receiver-table on page 407
display igmp statistics on page 409
display igmp
mrouter
Displays the multicast routers in a WX’s subnet, on one VLAN or all
VLANs. Routers are listed separately for each VLAN, according to the port
number through which the wireless LAN switch can reach the router.
Syntax — display igmp mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays the multicast routers in all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the multicast routers in
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp mrouter vlan orange
Multicast routers for vlan orange
Port Mrouter-IPaddr Mrouter-MAC Type TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- ----- -----
1 192.28.7.5 00:01:02:03:04:05 dvmrp 33
Table 76 describes the fields in this display.
VLAN VLAN name. MSS displays information separately for each
VLAN.
IGMP is enabled
(disabled) IGMP state.
Table 75 Output for display igmp (continued)
Field Description
display igmp querier 405
See Also
display igmp mrouter on page 404
set igmp mrouter on page 413
display igmp
querier
Shows information about the active multicast querier, on one VLAN or all
VLANs. Queriers are listed separately for each VLAN. Each VLAN can have
only one querier.
Syntax — display igmp querier [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays querier information for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
Table 76 Output for display igmp mrouter
Field Description
Multicast routers for vlan VLAN containing the multicast routers. Ports are
listed separately for each VLAN.
Port Number of the physical port through which the WX
can reach the router.
Mrouter-IPaddr IP address of the multicast router.
Mrouter-MAC MAC address of the multicast router.
Type How the WX learned that the port is a multicast
router port:
conf — Static multicast port configured by an
administrator
madv — Multicast advertisement
quer — IGMP query
dvmrp — Distance Vector Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP)
pimv1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
version 1
pimv2 — PIM version 2
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if
unused. For static multicast router entries, the TTL
value is undef. Static multicast router entries do not
age out.
406 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays querier information for
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan orange
Querier for vlan orange
Port Querier-IP Querier-MAC TTL
---- --------------- ----------------- -----
1 193.122.135.178 00:0b:cc:d2:e9:b4 23
The following command shows the information MSS displays when the
querier is the WX itself:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan default
Querier for vlan default:
I am the querier for vlan default, time to next query is 20
The output indicates how many seconds remain before the
pseudo-querier on the WX switch broadcasts the next general query
report to IP address 224.0.0.1, the multicast all-systems group.
If IGMP snooping does not detect a querier, the output indicates this
finding, as shown in the following example:
WX1200# display igmp querier vlan red
Querier for vlan red:
There is no querier present on vlan red
This condition does not necessarily indicate a problem. For example,
election of the querier might be in progress.
Table 67 describes the fields in this display. Table 76 on page 405
describes the fields in the display when a querier other than the WX is
present.
Table 77 Output for display igmp mrouter
Field Description
Querier for vlan VLAN containing the querier. Information is listed separately for
each VLAN.
Querier-IP IP address of the querier interface.
Querier-MAC MAC address of the querier interface.
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX does
not receive a query message from the querier.
display igmp receiver-table 407
See Also
set igmp querier on page 419
display igmp
receiver-table
Displays the receivers to which a WX forwards multicast traffic. You can
display receivers for all VLANs, a single VLAN, or a group or groups
identified by group address and network mask.
Syntax — display igmp receiver-table [vlan vlan-id]
[group group-ip-addr/mask-length]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays the multicast receivers on all VLANs.
group group-ip-addr/mask-length — IP address and subnet mask
of a multicast group, in CIDR format (for example, 239.20.20.10/24).
If you do not specify a group address, MSS displays the multicast
receivers for all groups.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays all multicast receivers in
VLAN orange:
WX1200# display igmp receiver-table vlan orange
VLAN: orange
Session Port Receiver-IP Receiver-MAC TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- -----
224.0.0.2 none none none undef
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.11 00:02:04:06:08:0b 179
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.13 00:02:04:06:08:0d 179
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.14 00:02:04:06:08:0e 179
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.12 00:02:04:06:08:0c 179
237.255.255.255 5 10.10.10.10 00:02:04:06:08:0a 179
408 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
The following command lists all receivers for multicast groups
237.255.255.1 through 237.255.255.255, in all VLANs:
WX1200# display igmp receiver-table group 237.255.255.0/24
VLAN: red
Session Port Receiver-IP Receiver-MAC TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- -----
237.255.255.2 2 10.10.20.19 00:02:04:06:09:0d 112
237.255.255.119 3 10.10.30.31 00:02:04:06:01:0b 112
VLAN: green
Session Port Receiver-IP Receiver-MAC TTL
--------------- ---- --------------- ----------------- -----
237.255.255.17 1 10.10.40.41 00:02:06:08:02:0c 12
237.255.255.255 6 10.10.60.61 00:05:09:0c:0a:01 111
Table 78 describes the fields in this display.
See Also
set igmp receiver on page 419
Table 78 Output for display igmp receiver-table
Field Description
VLAN VLAN that contains the multicast receiver ports. Ports are
listed separately for each VLAN.
Session IP address of the multicast group being received.
Port Physical port through which the WX can reach the
receiver.
Receiver-IP IP address of the receiver.
Receiver-MAC MAC address of the receiver.
TTL Number of seconds before this entry ages out if the WX
does not receive a group membership message from the
receiver. For static multicast receiver entries, the TTL value
is undef. Static multicast receiver entries do not age out.
display igmp statistics 409
display igmp
statistics
Shows IGMP statistics.
Syntax — display igmp statistics [vlan vlan-id]
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS displays IGMP statistics for all VLANs.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays IGMP statistics for VLAN
orange:
WX1200# display igmp statistics vlan orange
IGMP statistics for vlan orange:
IGMP message type Received Transmitted Dropped
----------------- -------- ----------- -------
General-Queries 0 0 0
GS-Queries 0 0 0
Report V1 0 0 0
Report V2 5 1 4
Leave 0 0 0
Mrouter-Adv 0 0 0
Mrouter-Term 0 0 0
Mrouter-Sol 50 101 0
DVMRP 4 4 0
PIM V1 0 0 0
PIM V2 0 0 0
Topology notifications: 0
Packets with unknown IGMP type: 0
Packets with bad length: 0
Packets with bad checksum: 0
Packets dropped: 4
Table 79 describes the fields in this display.
410 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Table 79 Output of display igmp statistics
Field Description
IGMP statistics
for vlan VLAN name. Statistics are listed separately for each VLAN.
IGMP message
type Type of IGMP message:
General-Queries — General group membership queries sent by
the multicast querier (multicast router or pseudo-querier).
GS-Queries — Group-specific queries sent by the multicast
querier to determine whether there are receivers for a specific
group.
Report V1 — IGMP version 1 group membership reports sent
by clients who want to be receivers for the groups.
Report V2 — IGMP version 2 group membership reports sent
by clients who want to be receivers for the groups.
Leave — IGMP version 2 leave messages sent by clients who
want to stop receiving traffic for a group. Leave messages apply
only to IGMP version 2.
Mrouter-Adv — Multicast router advertisement packets. A
multicast router sends this type of packet to advertise the IP
address of the sending interface as a multicast router interface.
Mrouter-Term — Multicast router termination messages. A
multicast router sends this type of message when multicast
forwarding is disabled on the router interface, the router
interface is administratively disabled, or the router itself is
gracefully shutdown.
Mrouter-Sol — Multicast router solicitation messages. A
multicast client or a WX sends this type of message to
immediately solicit multicast router advertisement messages
from the multicast routers in the subnet.
DVMRP — Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)
messages. Multicast routers running DVMRP exchange multicast
information with these messages.
PIM V1 — Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) version 1
messages. Multicast routers running PIMv1 exchange multicast
information with these messages.
PIM V2 — PIM version 2 messages.
Received Number of packets received.
Transmitted Number of packets transmitted. This number includes both
multicast packets originated by the WX and multicast packets
received and then forwarded by the WX.
Dropped Number of IGMP packets dropped by the WX.
set igmp 411
See Also
clear igmp statistics on page 400
set igmp Disables or reenables IGMP snooping on one VLAN or all VLANs on a
wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set igmp {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
enable — Enables IGMP snooping.
disable — Disables IGMP snooping.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, IGMP snooping is disabled or reenabled on all VLANs.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command disables IGMP snooping on VLAN
orange:
WX1200# set igmp disable vlan orange
success: change accepted
See Also
set igmp rv on page 420
Topology
notifications Number of Layer 2 topology change notifications received by the
WX.
In the current software version, the value in this field is always 0.
Packets with
unknown
IGMP type
Number of multicast packets received with an unrecognized
multicast type.
Packets with
bad length Number of packets with an invalid length.
Packets with
bad IGMP
checksum
Number of packets with an invalid IGMP checksum value.
Packets
dropped Number of multicast packets dropped by the WX.
Table 79 Output of display igmp statistics (continued)
Field Description
412 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
set igmp lmqi Changes the IGMP last member query interval timer on one VLAN or all
VLANs on a wireless LAN switch.
Syntax — set igmp lmqi tenth-seconds [vlan vlan-id]
lmqi tenth-seconds — Amount of time (in tenths of a second) that
the WX waits for a response to a group-specific query after receiving a
leave message for that group, before removing the receiver that sent
the leave message from the list of receivers for the group. If there are
no more receivers for the group, the WX switch also sends a leave
message for the group to multicast routers. You can specify a value
from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.
Defaults — The default last member query interval is 10 tenths of a
second (1 second).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command changes the last member query
interval on VLAN orange to 5 tenths of a second:
WX1200# set igmp lmqi 5 vlan orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp mrouter on page 413
set igmp mrouter 413
set igmp mrouter Adds or removes a port in a WX’s list of ports on which it forwards traffic
to multicast routers. Static multicast ports are immediately added to or
removed from the list of router ports and do not age out.
Syntax — set igmp mrouter port port-list {enable | disable}
port port-list — Port list. MSS adds or removes the specified ports
in the list of static multicast router ports.
enable — Adds the port to the list of static multicast router ports.
disable — Removes the port from the list of static multicast router
ports.
Defaults — By default, no ports are static multicast router ports.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following command adds port 6 as a static multicast
router port:
WX1200# set igmp mrouter port 6 enable
success: change accepted.
The following command removes port 6 from the static multicast router
port list:
WX1200# set igmp mrouter port 6 disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display igmp statistics on page 409
414 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
set igmp mrsol Enables or disables multicast router solicitation by a WX.
Syntax — set igmp mrsol {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
enable — Enables multicast router solicitation.
disable — Disables multicast router solicitation.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, multicast router solicitation is disabled or enabled on all VLANs.
Defaults — Multicast router solicitation is disabled on all VLANs by
default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command enables multicast router
solicitation on VLAN orange:
WX1200# set igmp mrsol enable vlan orange
success: change accepted
See Also
set igmp mrsol mrsi on page 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi Changes the interval between multicast router solicitations by a WX on
one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp mrsol mrsi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
seconds — Number of seconds between multicast router solicitations.
You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS changes the multicast router solicitation interval for all
VLANs.
Defaults — The interval between multicast router solicitations is 30
seconds by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set igmp oqi 415
Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following example changes the multicast router
solicitation interval to 60 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp mrsol mrsi 60
success: change accepted.
See Also
set igmp mrsol on page 414.
set igmp oqi Changes the IGMP other-querier-present interval timer on one VLAN or
all VLANs on a WX.
Syntax — set igmp oqi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
oqi seconds — Number of seconds that the WX waits for a general
query to arrive before electing itself the querier. You can specify a
value from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.
Defaults — The default other-querier-present interval is 255 seconds
(4.25 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX cannot become the querier unless the pseudo-querier
feature is enabled on the WX switch. When the feature is enabled, the
WX becomes the querier for a subnet so long as the WX does not receive
a query message from a router with a lower IP address than the IP
address of the WX in that subnet. To enable the pseudo-querier feature,
use set igmp querier.
Examples — The following command changes the other-querier-present
interval on VLAN orange to 200 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp oqi 200 vlan orange
success: change accepted.
416 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
See Also
set igmp lmqi on page 412
set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp qri on page 418
set igmp querier on page 419
set igmp mrouter on page 413
set igmp rv on page 420
set igmp
proxy-report
Disables or reenables proxy reporting by a WX on one VLAN or all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp proxy-report {enable | disable}
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, proxy reporting is disabled or reenabled on all VLANs.
enable — Enables proxy reporting.
disable — Disables proxy reporting.
Defaults — Proxy reporting is enabled on all VLANs by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Proxy reporting reduces multicast overhead by sending only
one membership report for a group to the multicast routers and
discarding other membership reports for the same group. If you disable
proxy reporting, the WX sends all membership reports to the routers,
including multiple reports for the same group.
Examples — The following example disables proxy reporting on VLAN
orange:
WX1200# set igmp proxy-report disable vlan orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
set igmp rv on page 420
set igmp qi 417
set igmp qi Changes the IGMP query interval timer on one VLAN or all VLANs on a
WX.
Syntax — set igmp qi seconds [vlan vlan-id]
qi seconds — Number of seconds that elapse between general
queries sent by the WX when the WX switch is the querier for the
subnet. You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.
Defaults — The default query interval is 125 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The query interval is applicable only when the WX is querier for
the subnet. For the WX switch to become the querier, the pseudo-querier
feature must be enabled on the WX and the WX must have the lowest IP
address among all the WX switches eligible to become a querier. To
enable the pseudo-querier feature, use the set igmp querier command.
Examples — The following command changes the query interval on
VLAN orange to 100 seconds:
WX1200# set igmp qi 100 vlan orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
set igmp lmqi on page 412
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qri on page 418
set igmp querier on page 419
set igmp mrouter on page 413
set igmp rv on page 420
418 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
set igmp qri Changes the IGMP query response interval timer on one VLAN or all
VLANs on a WX.
Syntax — set igmp qri tenth-seconds [vlan vlan-id]
qri tenth-seconds — Amount of time (in tenths of a second) that
the WX waits for a receiver to respond to a group-specific query
message before removing the receiver from the receiver list for the
group. You can specify a value from 1 through 65,535.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the timer change applies to all VLANs.
Defaults — The default query response interval is 100 tenths of a second
(10 seconds).
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The query response interval is applicable only when the WX is
querier for the subnet. For the WX to become the querier, the
pseudo-querier feature must be enabled on the WX and the WX must
have the lowest IP address among all the WX switches eligible to become
a querier. To enable the pseudo-querier feature, use set igmp querier.
Examples — The following command changes the query response
interval on VLAN orange to 50 tenths of a second (5 seconds):
WX1200# set igmp qri 50 vlan orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
set igmp lmqi on page 412
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp querier on page 419
set igmp rv on page 420
set igmp querier 419
set igmp querier Enables or disables the IGMP pseudo-querier on a WX, on one VLAN or
all VLANs.
Syntax — set igmp querier {enable | disable} [vlan vlan-id]
enable — Enables the pseudo-querier.
disable — Disables the pseudo-querier.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, the pseudo-querier is enabled or disabled on all VLANs.
Defaults — The pseudo-querier is disabled on all VLANs by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — 3Com recommends that you use the pseudo-querier only
when the VLAN contains local multicast traffic sources and no multicast
router is servicing the subnet.
Examples — The following example enables the pseudo-querier on the
orange VLAN:
WX1200# set igmp querier enable vlan orange
success: change accepted.
See Also
display igmp querier on page 405
set igmp receiver Adds or removes a network port in the list of ports on which a WX
forwards traffic to multicast receivers. Static multicast receiver ports are
immediately added to or removed from the list of receiver ports and do
not age out.
Syntax — set igmp receiver port port-list {enable | disable}
port port-list — Network port list. MSS adds the specified ports to
the list of static multicast receiver ports.
enable — Adds the port to the list of static multicast receiver ports.
disable — Removes the port from the list of static multicast receiver
ports.
420 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
Defaults — By default, no ports are static multicast receiver ports.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You cannot add MAP access ports or wired authentication
ports as static multicast ports. However, MSS can dynamically add these
port types to the list of multicast ports based on multicast traffic.
Examples — The following command adds port 7 as a static multicast
receiver port:
WX1200# set igmp receiver port 7 enable
success: change accepted.
The following command removes port 7 from the list of static multicast
receiver ports:
WX1200# set igmp receiver port 7 disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
display igmp receiver-table on page 407
set igmp rv Changes the robustness value for one VLAN or all VLANs on a WX.
Robustness adjusts the IGMP timers to the amount of traffic loss that
occurs on the network.
Syntax — set igmp rv num [vlan vlan-id]
num — Robustness value. You can specify a value from 2 through 255.
Set the robustness value higher to adjust for more traffic loss.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. If you do not specify a
VLAN, MSS changes the robustness value for all VLANs.
Defaults — The default robustness value for all VLANs is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set igmp rv 421
See Also
set igmp oqi on page 415
set igmp qi on page 417
set igmp qri on page 418
422 CHAPTER 11: IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS
12 SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Use security ACL commands to configure and monitor security access
control lists (ACLs). Security ACLs filter packets to restrict or permit
network usage by certain users or traffic types, and can assign to packets
a class of service (CoS) to define the priority of treatment for packet
filtering.
(Security ACLs are different from the location policy on a WX switch,
which helps you locally control user access. For location policy
commands, see “AAA Commands” on page 199.)
Security ACL
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents security ACL commands alphabetically. Use
Table 80 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 80 Security ACL Commands by Usage
Type Command
Create Security ACLs set security acl on page 439
display security acl dscp on page 428
display security acl on page 429
display security acl info on page 431
clear security acl on page 424
Commit Security ACLs commit security acl on page 427
rollback security acl on page 438
Map Security ACLs set security acl map on page 444
display security acl map on page 432
clear security acl map on page 425
Monitor Security ACLs display security acl hits on page 430
hit-sample-rate on page 437
display security acl resource-usage on
page 433
424 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
clear security acl Clears a specified security ACL, an access control entry (ACE), or all
security ACLs, from the edit buffer. When used with the command
commit security acl, clears the ACE from the running configuration.
Syntax — clear security acl {acl-name | all} [editbuffer-index]
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to clear. ACL names
start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Clears all security ACLs.
editbuffer-index — Number that indicates which access control
entry (ACE) in the security ACL to clear. If you do not specify an ACE,
all ACEs are cleared from the ACL.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command deletes security ACLs only in the edit buffer.
You must use the commit security acl command with this command to
delete the ACL or ACE from the running configuration and nonvolatile
storage.
The clear security acl command deletes a security ACL, but does not
stop its current filtering function if the ACL is mapped to any virtual LANs
(VLANs), ports, or virtual ports, or if the ACL is applied in a Filter-Id
attribute to an authenticated user or group of users with current sessions.
Examples — The following commands display the current security ACL
configuration, clear acl_133 in the edit buffer, commit the deletion to the
running configuration, and redisplay the ACL configuration to display
that it no longer contains acl_133:
clear security acl map 425
WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_133 (hits #1 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.6 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
WX4400# clear security acl acl_133
WX4400# commit security acl acl_133
configuration accepted
WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
See Also
clear security acl map on page 425
commit security acl on page 427
display security acl info on page 431
set security acl on page 439
clear security acl
map
Deletes the mapping between a security ACL and a virtual LAN (VLAN),
one or more physical ports, or a virtual port. Or deletes all ACL maps to
VLANs, ports, and virtual ports on a WX switch.
Security ACLs are applied to users or groups dynamically via the Filter-Id
attribute. To delete a security ACL from a user or group in the local WX
database, use the command clear user attr, clear mac-user
attr, clear usergroup attr, or clear mac-usergroup attr. To delete a
security ACL from a user or group on an external RADIUS server, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.
426 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Syntax — clear security acl map {acl-name | all} {vlan vlan-id |
port port-list [tag tag-value] | dap dap-num} {in | out}
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to clear. ACL names
start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Removes security ACL mapping from all physical ports, virtual
ports, and VLANs on a WX switch.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS removes the security
ACL from the specified VLAN.
port port-list — Port list. MSS removes the security ACL from the
specified WX physical port or ports.
tag tag-value — Tag value that identifies a virtual port in a VLAN.
Specify a value from 1 through 4095. MSS removes the security ACL
from the specified virtual port.
dap dap-num — One or more Distributed MAPs, based on their
connection IDs. Specify a single connection ID, or specify a
comma-separated list of connection IDs, a hyphen-separated range, or
any combination, with no spaces. MSS removes the security ACL from
the specified Distributed MAPs.
in — Removes the security ACL from traffic coming into the WX
switch.
out — Removes the security ACL from traffic going out of the WX
switch.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To clear a security ACL map, type the name of the ACL with
the VLAN, physical port or ports, virtual port tag, or Distributed MAP and
the direction of the packets to stop filtering. This command deletes the
ACL mapping, but not the ACL.
Examples — To clear the mapping of security ACL acljoe from port 4 for
incoming packets, type the following command:
WX4400# clear security acl map acljoe port 4 in
clear mapping accepted
commit security acl 427
To clear all physical ports, virtual ports, and VLANs on a WX switch of the
ACLs mapped for incoming and outgoing traffic, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear security acl map all
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear security acl on page 424
display security acl map on page 432
set security acl map on page 444
commit security acl Saves a security ACL, or all security ACLs, in the edit buffer to the running
configuration and nonvolatile storage on the WX switch. Or, when used
with the clear security acl command, commit security acl deletes a
security ACL, or all security ACLs, from the running configuration and
nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — commit security acl {acl-name | all}
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to commit. ACL names
must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Commits all security ACLs in the edit buffer.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use the commit security acl command to save security ACLs
into, or delete them from, the permanent configuration. Until you
commit the creation or deletion of a security ACL, it is stored in an edit
buffer and is not enforced. After you commit a security ACL, it is removed
from the edit buffer.
A single commit security acl all command commits the creation and/or
deletion of whatever display security acl info all editbuffer shows to
be currently stored in the edit buffer.
428 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Examples — The following commands commit all the security ACLs in
the edit buffer to the configuration, display a summary of the committed
ACLs, and show that the edit buffer has been cleared:
WX4400# commit security acl all
configuration accepted
WX4400# display security acl
ACL table
ACL Type Class Mapping
----------------------- ---- ------ -------
acl_123 IP Static
acl_124 IP Static
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
acl editbuffer information for all
See Also
clear security acl on page 424
display security acl on page 429
display security acl info on page 431
rollback security acl on page 438
set security acl on page 439
display security acl
dscp
Displays a table that maps Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
values to their equivalent combinations of IP precedence values and IP
ToS values.
Use the table to look up the values to use with the precedence and tos
options in an ACE when you want the ACE to match on their equivalent
DSCP value.
Syntax — display security acl dscp
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
display security acl 429
The IP precedence and ToS fields use 7 bits, while the DSCP field uses
only 6 bits. Following the DSCP field is a 2-bit ECN field that can be set by
other devices based on network congestion. If you are filtering based on
DSCP value, you need two ACEs to ensure that the ACL matches
regardless of the value of the seventh bit. Use the first ACE to match on
the precedence and ToS values corresponding to the DSCP value. Use the
second ACE to match on the same precedence value but on the ToS value
plus 1. (For an example, see the “Using ACLs to Change CoS” section of
the “Configuring and Managing Security ACLs” chapter in the Wireless
LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command displays the table:
WX-1200# display security acl dscp
DSCP TOS precedence tos
dec hex dec hex
-----------------------------------------------
0 0x00 0 0x00 0 0
1 0x01 4 0x04 0 2
2 0x02 8 0x08 0 4
...
63 0x3f 252 0xfc 7 14
See Also
set security acl on page 439
display security acl Displays a summary of security ACLs that are committed — saved in the
running configuration and nonvolatile storage — or a summary of ACLs
in the edit buffer.
Syntax — display security acl [editbuffer]
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
430 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Examples — To display a summary of the committed security ACLs on a
WX switch, type the following command:
WX4400# display security acl
ACL table
ACL Type Class Mapping
---------------------------- ---- ------ -------
acl_123 IP Static Port 2 In
acl_133 IP Static Port 4 In
acl_124 IP Static
To view a summary of the security ACLs in the edit buffer, type the
following command:
WX4400# display security acl editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer table
ACL Type Status
---------------------------- ---- --------------
acl_122 IP Not committed
acl_132 IP Not committed
acl-144 IP Not committed
See Also
clear security acl on page 424
display security acl info on page 431
set security acl on page 439
display security acl
hits
Displays the number of packets filtered by security ACLs (“hits”) on the
WX switch. Each time a packet is filtered by a security ACL, the hit
counter increments.
Syntax — display security acl hits
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For MSS to count hits for a security ACL, you must specify hits
in the set security acl commands that define ACE rules for the ACL.
display security acl info 431
Examples — To display the security ACL hits on a WX switch, type the
following command:
WX4400# display security acl hits
ACL hit-counters
Index Counter ACL-name
----- -------------------- --------
1 0 acl_2
2 0 acl_175
3 916 acl_123
See Also
hit-sample-rate on page 437
set security acl on page 439
display security acl
info
Displays the contents of a specified security ACL or all security ACLs that
are committed — saved in the running configuration and nonvolatile
storage — or the contents of security ACLs in the edit buffer before they
are committed.
Syntax — display security acl info {acl-name |all}
[editbuffer]
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to display. ACL names
must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Displays the contents of all security ACLs.
editbuffer — Displays the contents of the specified security ACL or
all security ACLs that are stored in the edit buffer after being created
with set security acl. If you do not use this parameter, only
committed ACLs are shown.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
432 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Examples — To display the contents of all security ACLs committed on a
WX switch, type the following command:
WX4400# display security acl info all
ACL information for all
set security acl ip acl_123 (hits #5 462)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 192.168.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
set security acl ip acl_134 (hits #3 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
set security acl ip acl_135 (hits #2 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. deny IP source IP 192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
The following command displays the contents of acl_123 in the edit
buffer, including the committed ACE rules 1 and 2 and the uncommitted
rule 3:
WX4400# display security acl info acl_123 editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for acl_123
set security acl ip acl_123 (ACEs 3, add 3, del 0, modified 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 192.168.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
3. deny SRC source IP 192.168.1.234 255.255.255.255 enable-hits
See Also
clear security acl on page 424
commit security acl on page 427
set security acl on page 439
display security acl
map
Displays the VLANs, ports, and virtual ports on the WX switch to which a
security ACL is assigned.
Syntax — display security acl map acl-name
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL for which to show
static mapping. ACL names must start with a letter and are
case-insensitive.
Defaults — None.
display security acl resource-usage 433
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the port to which security
ACL acl_111 is mapped:
WX4400# display security acl map acl_111
ACL acl_111 is mapped to:
Port 4 in
See Also
clear security acl map on page 425
display security acl map on page 432
set security acl map on page 444
display security acl
resource-usage
Displays statistics about the resources used by security ACL filtering on
the WX switch.
Syntax — display security acl resource-usage
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command with the help of 3Com to diagnose an ACL
resource problem. (To obtain 3Com Technical Support, see “Obtaining
Support for your Product” on page 607.)
434 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Examples — To display security ACL resource usage, type the following
command:
WX4400# display security acl resource-usage
ACL resources
Classifier tree counters
------------------------
Number of rules : 2
Number of leaf nodes : 1
Stored rule count : 2
Leaf chain count : 1
Longest leaf chain : 2
Number of non-leaf nodes : 0
Uncompressed Rule Count : 2
Maximum node depth : 1
Sub-chain count : 0
PSCBs in primary memory : 0 (max: 512)
PSCBs in secondary memory : 0 (max: 9728)
Leaves in primary : 2 (max: 151)
Leaves in secondary : 0 (max 12096)
Sum node depth : 1
Information on Network Processor status
---------------------------------------
Fragmentation control : 0
UC switchdest : 0
ACL resources
Port number : 0
Number of action types : 2
LUdef in use : 5
Default action pointer : c8007dc
L4 global : True
No rules : False
Non-IP rules : False
Root in first : True
Static default action : False
No per-user (MAC) mapping : True
Out mapping : False
In mapping : True
No VLAN or PORT mapping : False
No VPORT mapping : True
Table 81 explains the fields in the display security acl resource-usage
output.
display security acl resource-usage 435
Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage
Field Description
Number of rules Number of security ACEs currently mapped to ports or
VLANs.
Number of leaf nodes Number of security ACL data entries stored in the rule tree.
Stored rule count Number of security ACEs stored in the rule tree.
Leaf chain count Number of chained security ACL data entries stored in the
rule tree.
Longest leaf chain Longest chain of security ACL data entries stored in the rule
tree.
Number of non-leaf
nodes Number of nodes with no data entries stored in the rule tree.
Uncompressed Rule
Count Number of security ACEs stored in the rule tree, including
duplicates—ACEs in ACLs applied to multiple ports, virtual
ports, or VLANs.
Maximum node
depth Number of data elements in the rule tree, from the root to
the furthest data entry (leaf).
Sub-chain count Sum of action types represented in all security ACL data
entries.
PSCBs in primary
memory Number of pattern search control blocks (PSCBs) stored in
primary node memory.
PSCBs in secondary
memory Number of PSCBs stored in secondary node memory.
Leaves in primary Number of security ACL data entries stored in primary leaf
memory.
Leaves in secondary Number of ACL data entries stored in secondary leaf
memory.
Sum node depth Total number of security ACL data entries.
Fragmentation
control Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.
Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.
UC switchdest Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.
Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.
Port number Control value for handling fragmented IP packets.
Note: The current MSS version filters only the first packet of
a fragmented IP packet and passes the remaining fragments.
Number of action
types Number of actions that can be performed by ACLs. This
value is always 2, because ACLs can either permit or deny.
436 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
LUdef in use Number of the lookup definition (LUdef) table currently in
use for packet handling.
Default action
pointer Memory address used for packet handling, from which
default action data is obtained when necessary.
L4 global Security ACL mapping on the WX switch:
True — Security ACLs are mapped.
False — No security ACLs are mapped.
No rules Security ACE rule mapping on the WX switch:
True — No security ACEs are mapped.
False — Security ACEs are mapped.
Non-IP rules Non-IP security ACE mapping on the WX switch:
True — Non-IP security ACEs are mapped.
False — Only IP security ACEs are mapped.
Note: The current MSS version supports security ACEs for IP
only.
Root in first Leaf buffer allocation:
True — Enough primary leaf buffers are allocated in
nonvolatile memory to accommodate all leaves.
False — Insufficient primary leaf buffers are allocated in
nonvolatile memory to accommodate all leaves.
Static default action Definition of a default action:
True — A default action types is defined.
False — No default action type is defined.
No per-user (MAC)
mapping Per-user application of a security ACL with the Filter-Id
attribute, on the WX switch:
True — No security ACLs are applied to users.
False — Security ACLs are applied to users.
Out mapping Application of security ACLs to outgoing traffic on the WX
switch:
True — Security ACLs are mapped to outgoing traffic.
False — No security ACLs are mapped to outgoing
traffic.
Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage (continued)
Field Description
hit-sample-rate 437
hit-sample-rate Specifies the time interval, in seconds, at which the packet counter for
each security ACL is sampled for display. The counter counts the number
of packets filtered by the security ACL — or “hits.”
Syntax — hit-sample-rate seconds
seconds — Number of seconds between samples. A sample rate of 0
(zero) disables the sample process.
Defaults — By default, the hits are not sampled.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To view counter results for a particular ACL, use the display
security acl info acl-name command. To view the hits for all security
ACLs, use the display security acl hits command.
In mapping Application of security ACLs to incoming traffic on the WX
switch:
True — Security ACLs are mapped to incoming traffic.
False — No security ACLs are mapped to incoming
traffic.
No VLAN or PORT
mapping Application of security ACLs to WX VLANs or ports on the
WX switch:
True — No security ACLs are mapped to VLANs or ports.
False — Security ACLs are mapped to VLANs or ports.
No VPORT mapping Application of security ACLs to WX virtual ports on the WX
switch:
True — No security ACLs are mapped to virtual ports.
False — Security ACLs are mapped to virtual ports.
Table 81 Output of display security acl resource-usage (continued)
Field Description
438 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
Examples — The first command sets MSS to sample ACL hits every
15 seconds. The second and third commands display the results. The
results show that 916 packets matching security acl_153 were sent since
the ACL was mapped.
WX4400# hit-sample-rate 15
WX4400# display security acl info acl_153
ACL information for acl_153
set security acl ip acl_153 (hits #3 916)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 20.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 destination IP any enable-hits
WX4400# display security acl hits
ACL hit counters
Index Counter ACL-name
----- -------------------- -----------
1 0 acl_2
2 0 acl_175
3 916 acl_153
See Also
display security acl hits on page 430
display security acl info on page 431
rollback security acl Clears changes made to the security ACL edit buffer since it was last
saved. The ACL is rolled back to its state after the last commit security
acl command was entered. All uncommitted ACLs in the edit buffer are
cleared.
Syntax — rollback security acl {acl-name | all}
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to roll back. ACL names
must start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
all — Rolls back all security ACLs in the edit buffer, clearing all
uncommitted ACEs.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set security acl 439
Examples — The following commands show the edit buffer before a
rollback, clear any changes in the edit buffer to security acl_122, and
show the edit buffer after the rollback:
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for all
set security acl ip acl_122 (ACEs 3, add 3, del 0, modified 0)
---------------------------------------------------------
1. permit IP source IP 20.0.1.11 0.0.0.255 destination IP any enable-hits
2. deny IP source IP 20.0.2.11 0.0.0.0 destination IP any
3. deny SRC source IP 192.168.1.234 255.255.255.255 enable-hits
WX4400# rollback security acl acl_122
WX4400# display security acl info all editbuffer
ACL edit-buffer information for all
See Also
display security acl on page 429
set security acl In the edit buffer, creates a security access control list (ACL), adds one
access control entry (ACE) to a security ACL, and/or reorders ACEs in the
ACL. The ACEs in an ACL filter IP packets by source IP address, a Layer 4
protocol, or IP, ICMP, TCP, or UDP packet information.
By source address
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
source-ip-addr mask [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]
By Layer 4 protocol
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
protocol-number {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr
mask} [precedence precedence] [tos tos] [before
editbuffer-index | modify editbuffer-index] [hits]
By IP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
ip {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr mask} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]
440 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
By ICMP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] |
deny} icmp {source-ip-addr mask destination-ip-addr mask [type
icmp-type] [code icmp-code] [precedence precedence ] [tos tos]
[before editbuffer-index | modify editbuffer-index] [hits]
By TCP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] |deny}
tcp {source-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]
destination-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [established] [before editbuffer-index |
modify editbuffer-index] [hits]
By UDP packets
Syntax — set security acl ip acl-name {permit [cos cos] | deny}
udp {source-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]
destination-ip-addr mask [operator port [port2]]} [precedence
precedence] [tos tos] [before editbuffer-index | modify
editbuffer-index] [hits]
acl-name — Security ACL name. ACL names must be unique within
the WX switch, must start with a letter, and are case-insensitive.
Specify an ACL name of up to 32 of the following characters:
Letters a through z and A through Z
Numbers 0 through 9
Hyphen (-), underscore (_), and period (.)
3Com recommends that you do not use the same name with different
capitalizations for ACLs. For example, do not configure two separate
ACLs with the names acl_123 and ACL_123.
In an ACL name, do not include the term all, default-action, map,
help, or editbuffer.
permit — Allows traffic that matches the conditions in the ACE.
cos cos — For permitted packets, a class-of-service (CoS) level for
packet handling. Specify a value from 0 through 7:
1 or 2—Background. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding
queue 4.
set security acl 441
0 or 3—Best effort. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding
queue 3.
4 or 5—Video. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding queue 2.
Use CoS level 4 or 5 for voice over IP (VoIP) packets other than
SpectraLink Voice Priority (SVP).
6 or 7—Voice. Packets are queued in MAP forwarding queue 1.
In MSS Version 3.0, use 6 or 7 only for VoIP phones that use SVP,
not for other types of traffic.
deny — Blocks traffic that matches the conditions in the ACE.
protocol — IP protocol by which to filter packets:
ip
tcp
udp
icmp
A protocol number between 0 and 255.
(For a complete list of IP protocol names and numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/protocol-numbers.)
source-ip-addr mask — IP address and wildcard mask of the
network or host from which the packet is being sent. Specify both
address and mask in dotted decimal notation. For more information,
see “Wildcard Masks” on page 26.
operator port [port2] — Operand and port number(s) for matching
TCP or UDP packets to the number of the source or destination port
on source-ip-addr or destination-ip-addr. Specify one of the following
operands and the associated port:
eq — Packets are filtered for only port number.
gt — Packets are filtered for all ports that are greater than port
number.
lt — Packets are filtered for all ports that are less than port
number.
neq — Packets are filtered for all ports except port number.
range — Packets are filtered for ports in the range between port
and port2. To specify a port range, enter two port numbers. Enter
the lower port number first, followed by the higher port number.
442 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
(For a complete list of TCP and UDP port numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers.)
destination-ip-addr mask — IP address and wildcard mask of the
network or host to which the packet is being sent. Specify both
address and mask in dotted decimal notation. For more information,
see “Wildcard Masks” on page 26.
type icmp-type — Filters ICMP messages by type. Specify a value
from 0 through 255. (For a list of ICMP message type and code
numbers, see www.iana.org/assignments/icmp-parameters.)
code icmp-code — For ICMP messages filtered by type, additionally
filters ICMP messages by code. Specify a value from 0 through 255.
(For a list of ICMP message type and code numbers, see
www.iana.org/assignments/icmp-parameters.)
precedence precedence — Filters packets by precedence level.
Specify a value from 0 through 7:
0 — routine precedence
1 — priority precedence
2 — immediate precedence
3 — flash precedence
4 — flash override precedence
5 — critical precedence
6 — internetwork control precedence
7 — network control precedence
tos tos — Filters packets by type of service (TOS) level. Specify one of
the following values, or any sum of these values up to 15. For
example, a tos value of 9 filters packets with the TOS levels minimum
delay (8) and minimum monetary cost (1).
8 — minimum delay
4 — maximum throughput
2 — maximum reliability
1 — minimum monetary cost
0 — normal
established — For TCP packets only, applies the ACE only to
established TCP sessions and not to new TCP sessions.
set security acl 443
before editbuffer-index — Inserts the new ACE in front of another
ACE in the security ACL. Specify the number of the existing ACE in the
edit buffer. Index numbers start at 1. (To display the edit buffer, use
display security acl editbuffer.)
modify editbuffer-index — Replaces an ACE in the security ACL
with the new ACE. Specify the number of the existing ACE in the edit
buffer. Index numbers start at 1. (To display the edit buffer, use
display security acl editbuffer.)
hits — Tracks the number of packets that are filtered based on a
security ACL, for all mappings.
Defaults — Permitted packets are assigned to class-of-service (CoS)
class 0 by default.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The WX switch does not apply security ACLs until you activate
them with the commit security acl command and map them to a VLAN,
port, or virtual port, or to a user. If the WX switch is reset or restarted,
any ACLs in the edit buffer are lost.
You cannot perform ACL functions that include permitting, denying, or
marking with a Class of Service (CoS) level on packets with a multicast or
broadcast destination address.
The order of security ACEs in a security ACL is important. Once an ACL is
active, its ACEs are checked according to their order in the ACL. If an ACE
criterion is met, its action takes place and any ACEs that follow are
ignored.
ACEs are listed in the order in which you create them, unless you move
them. To position security ACEs within a security ACL, use before
editbuffer-index and modify editbuffer-index.
Examples — The following command adds an ACE to security acl_123
that permits packets from IP address 192.168.1.11/24 and counts the
hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_123 permit
192.168.1.11 0.0.0.255 hits
444 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
The following command adds an ACE to acl_123 that denies packets
from IP address 192.168.2.11:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_123 deny 192.168.2.11
0.0.0.0
The following command creates acl_125 by defining an ACE that denies
TCP packets from source IP address 192.168.0.1 to destination IP address
192.168.0.2 for established sessions only, and counts the hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_125 deny tcp
192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0 192.168.0.2 0.0.0.0 established hits
The following command adds an ACE to acl_125 that denies TCP packets
from source IP address 192.168.1.1 to destination IP address
192.168.1.2, on destination port 80 only, and counts the hits:
WX4400# set security acl ip acl_125 deny tcp
192.168.1.1 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.2 0.0.0.0 eq 80 hits
Finally, the following command commits the security ACLs in the edit
buffer to the configuration:
WX4400# commit security acl all
configuration accepted
See Also
clear security acl on page 424
commit security acl on page 427
display security acl on page 429
set security acl map Assigns a committed security ACL to a VLAN, physical port or ports,
virtual port, or Distributed MAP on the WX switch.
To assign a security ACL to a user or group in the local WX database, use
the command set user attr, set mac-user attr, set usergroup attr, or
set mac-usergroup attr with the Filter-Id attribute. To assign a security
ACL to a user or group with Filter-Id on a RADIUS server, see the
documentation for your RADIUS server.
set security acl map 445
Syntax — set security acl map acl-name {vlan vlan-id |
port port-list [tag tag-list] | dap dap-num} {in | out}
acl-name — Name of an existing security ACL to map. ACL names
start with a letter and are case-insensitive.
vlan vlan-id — VLAN name or number. MSS assigns the security
ACL to the specified VLAN.
port port-list — Port list. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified physical WX port or ports.
tag tag-list — One or more values that identify a virtual port in a
VLAN. Specify a single tag value from 1 through 4095. Or specify a
comma-separated list of values, a hyphen-separated range, or any
combination, with no spaces. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified virtual port or ports.
dap dap-num — One or more Distributed MAPs, based on their
connection IDs. Specify a single connection ID, or specify a
comma-separated list of connection IDs, a hyphen-separated range, or
any combination, with no spaces. MSS assigns the security ACL to the
specified Distributed MAPs.
in — Assigns the security ACL to traffic coming into the WX switch.
out — Assigns the security ACL to traffic coming from the WX switch.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Before you can map a security ACL, you must use the
commit security acl command to save the ACL in the running
configuration and nonvolatile storage.
For best results, map only one input security ACL and one output security
ACL to each VLAN, physical port, virtual port, or Distributed MAP to filter
a flow of packets. If more than one security ACL filters the same traffic,
MSS applies only the first ACL match and ignores any other matches.
Examples — The following command maps security ACL acl_133 to
port 4 for incoming packets:
WX4400 set security acl map acl_133 port 4 in
success: change accepted.
446 CHAPTER 12: SECURITY ACL COMMANDS
See Also
clear security acl map on page 425
commit security acl on page 427
set mac-user attr on page 246
set mac-usergroup attr on page 252
set security acl on page 439
set user attr on page 257
set user group on page 258
display security acl map on page 432
13 CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
Use cryptography commands to configure and manage certificates and
public-private key pairs for system authentication. Depending on your
network configuration, you must create keys and certificates to
authenticate the WX switch to IEEE 802.1X wireless clients for which the
WX switch performs authentication, and to 3Com wireless switch
manager (3WXM) and Web Manager.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents cryptography commands alphabetically. Use
Table 82 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 82 Cryptography Commands by Usage
Type Command
Encryption Keys crypto generate key on page 451
display crypto key ssh on page 461
PKCS #7 Certificates crypto generate request on page 452
crypto ca-certificate on page 448
display crypto ca-certificate on
page 459
crypto certificate on page 449
display crypto certificate on page 460
PKCS #12 Certificate crypto otp on page 456
crypto pkcs12 on page 457
Self-Signed Certificate crypto generate self-signed on
page 454
448 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
crypto ca-certificate Installs a certificate authority’s own PKCS #7 certificate into the WX
certificate and key storage area.
Syntax — crypto ca-certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
PEM-formatted certificate
admin — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the
administrative certificate for the WX switch.
The administrative certificate authenticates the WX to 3Com wireless
switch manager (3XWM) or Web Manager.
eap — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) certificate for the WX switch.
The EAP certificate authenticates the WX to 802.1X supplicants
(clients).
webaaa — Stores the certificate authority’s certificate that signed the
WebAAA certificate for the WX switch.
The Web certificate authenticates the WX to clients who use
WebAAA.
PEM-formatted certificate — ASCII text representation of the
certificate authority PKCS #7 certificate, consisting of up to
4096 characters that you have obtained from the certificate authority.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The Privacy-Enhanced Mail protocol (PEM) format is used for
representing a PKCS #7 certificate in ASCII text. PEM uses base64
encoding to convert the certificate to ASCII text, then puts the encoded
text between the following delimiters:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
crypto certificate 449
To use this command, you must already have obtained a copy of the
certificate authority’s certificate as a PKCS #7 object file. Then do the
following:
1Open the PKCS #7 object file with an ASCII text editor such as Notepad
or vi.
2Enter the crypto ca-certificate command on the CLI command line.
3When MSS prompts you for the PEM-formatted certificate, paste the
PKCS #7 object file onto the command line.
Examples — The following command adds the certificate authority’s
certificate to WX certificate and key storage:
WX4400# crypto ca-certificate admin
Enter PEM-encoded certificate
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIDwDCCA2qgAwIBAgIQL2jvuu4PO5FAQCyewU3ojANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQUFADCB
mzerMClaweVQQTTooewi\wpoer0QWNFNkj90044mbdrl1277SWQ8G7DiwYUtrqoQplKJvxz
.....
Lm8wmVYxP56M;CUAm908C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
See Also
display crypto ca-certificate on page 459
crypto certificate Installs one of the WX switch’s PKCS #7 certificates into the certificate
and key storage area on the WX switch. The certificate, which is issued
and signed by a certificate authority, authenticates the WX switch either
to 3WXM or Web Manager, or to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
Syntax — crypto certificate {admin | eap | webaaa }
PEM-formatted certificate
admin — Stores the certificate authority’s administrative certificate,
which authenticates the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Stores the certificate authority’s Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) certificate, which authenticates the WX switch to
802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Stores the certificate authority’s WebAAA certificate, which
authenticates the WX to clients who use WebAAA.
450 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
PEM-formatted certificate — ASCII text representation of the
PKCS #7 certificate, consisting of up to 4096 characters, that you
have obtained from the certificate authority.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
certificate request with the crypto generate request command, sent
the request to the certificate authority, and obtained a signed copy of the
WX switch certificate as a PKCS #7 object file. Then do the following:
1Open the PKCS #7 object file with an ASCII text editor such as Notepad
or vi.
2Enter the crypto certificate command on the CLI command line.
3When MSS prompts you for the PEM-formatted certificate, paste the
PKCS #7 object file onto the command line.
The WX switch verifies the validity of the public key associated with this
certificate before installing it, to prevent a mismatch between the WX
switch’s private key and the public key in the installed certificate.
Examples — The following command installs a certificate:
WX4400# crypto certificate admin
Enter PEM-encoded certificate
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIBdTCP3wIBADA2MQswCQYDVQQGEwJVUzELMAkGA1UECBMCQOExGjAYBgNVBAMU
EXR1Y2hwdWJzQHRycHouY29tMIGfMAOGCSqGSIb3DQEBAQAA4GNADCBiQKBgQC4
.....
2L8Q9tk+G2As84QYLm8wmVY>xP56M;CUAm908C2foYgOY40=
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
See Also
crypto generate request on page 452
crypto generate self-signed on page 454
crypto generate key 451
crypto generate key Generates an RSA public-private encryption key pair that is required for a
Certificate Signing Request (CSR) or a self-signed certificate. For SSH, the
command generates an SSH authentication key.
Syntax — crypto generate key {admin | eap | ssh | webaaa }
{512 | 1024 | 2048}
admin — Generates an administrative key pair for authenticating the
WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Generates an EAP key pair for authenticating the WX switch to
802.1X supplicants (clients).
ssh — Generates a key pair for authenticating the WX switch to
Secure Shell (SSH) clients.
webaaa — Generates an administrative key pair for authenticating the
WX switch to WebAAA clients.
512 | 1024 | 2048 — Length of the key pair in bits.
The minimum key size for SSH is 1024.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can overwrite a key by generating another key of the same
type.
Examples — To generate an administrative key for use with 3WXM, type
the following command:
WX4400# crypto generate key admin 1024
key pair generated
See Also display crypto key ssh on page 461
452 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
crypto generate
request
Generates a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). This command outputs a
PEM-formatted PKCS #10 text string that you can cut and paste to
another location for delivery to a certificate authority.
This command generates either an administrative CSR for use with
3WXM and Web Manager, or an EAP CSR for use with 802.1X clients.
Syntax — crypto generate request {admin | eap | webaaa}
admin — Generates a request for an administrative certificate to
authenticate the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Generates a request for an EAP certificate to authenticate the
WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Generates a request for a WebAAA certificate to
authenticate the WX switch to WebAAA clients.
After you type the command, you are prompted for the following
variables:
Country Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the
country in which the WX switch is operating, in 2 alphanumeric
characters with no spaces.
State Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the
name of the state, in 2 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Locality Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the locality,
in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Organizational Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the
organization, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Organizational Unit string — (Optional) Specify the name of the
organizational unit, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces.
Common Name string — Specify a unique name for the WX switch, in
up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Use a fully qualified
name if such names are supported on your network. This field is
required.
Email Address string — (Optional) Specify your email address, in
up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Unstructured Name string — (Optional) Specify any name, in up to
80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
crypto generate request 453
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
public-private encryption key pair with the crypto generate key
command.
Enter crypto generate request admin, crypto generate request eap,
or crypto generate request webaaa and press Enter. When you are
prompted, type the identifying values in the fields, or press Enter if the
field is optional. You must enter a common name for the WX switch.
This command outputs a PKCS #10 text string in Privacy-Enhanced Mail
protocol (PEM) format that you paste to another location for submission
to the certificate authority. You then send the request to the certificate
authority to obtain a signed copy of the WX switch certificate as a
PKCS #7 object file.
Examples — To request an administrative certificate from a certificate
authority, type the following command:
WX4400# crypto generate request admin
Country Name: US
State Name: CA
Locality Name: Pleasanton
Organizational Name: MyCorp
Organizational Unit: ENG
Common Name: ENG
Email Address: admin@example.com
Unstructured Name: admin
CSR for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----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-----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST-----
454 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
See Also
crypto certificate on page 449
crypto generate key on page 451
crypto generate
self-signed
Generates a self-signed certificate for either an administrative certificate
for use with 3WXM or an EAP certificate for use with 802.1X wireless
users.
Syntax — crypto generate self-signed {admin | eap | webaaa}
admin — Generates an administrative certificate to authenticate the
WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Generates an EAP certificate to authenticate the WX switch to
802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Generates a WebAAA certificate to authenticate the WX
switch to WebAAA clients.
After you type the command, you are prompted for the following
variables:
Country Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the
country in which the WX switch is operating, in 2 alphanumeric
characters with no spaces.
State Name string — (Optional) Specify the abbreviation for the
name of the state, in 2 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Locality Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the locality,
in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Organizational Name string — (Optional) Specify the name of the
organization, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Organizational Unit string — (Optional) Specify the name of the
organizational unit, in up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no
spaces.
Common Name string — Specify a unique name for the WX switch, in
up to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces. Use a fully qualified
name if such names are supported on your network. This field is
required.
crypto generate self-signed 455
Note: If you are generating a WebAAA (webaaa) certificate, use a
common name that looks like a domain name (two or more strings
connected by dots, with no spaces). For example, use common.name
instead of common name. The string is not required to be an actual
domain name. It simply needs to be formatted like one.
Email Address string — (Optional) Specify your email address, in up
to 80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Unstructured Name string — (Optional) Specify any name, in up to
80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must already have generated a
public-private encryption key pair with the crypto generate key
command.
To generate a self-signed administrative certificate, type the following
command:
WX4400# crypto generate self-signed admin
Country Name:
State Name:
Locality Name:
Organizational Name:
Organizational Unit:
Common Name: wx1@example.com
Email Address:
Unstructured Name:
CSR for admin is
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----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 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
BAMCBkAwSAYJYIZIAYb4QgENBDsWOXRoaXMgY2VydGlmaWNhdGUgaXMgY29tcGxl
dGVseSB1bnRydXN0d29ydGh5LiBJcyB0aGF0IE9LPzAPBgNVHRMBAf8EBTADAQH/
MA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBAUAA4GBAHUOhMG/Zbgojvxb+hopdNzWmjAL8Cr8lX4/g2W2
clyq55Y3SF+L6CmGxUmlLR5ZsM9KuEIZLPtKsCurIhiPft4g52fkCC/EdibxXlUb
kw8IUADwGiE1T21OM8vmm4EIKM7tyyEF0b94dqFxZQfSsJp+Up6d8LBnBRYDxzPd
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
See Also
crypto certificate on page 449
crypto generate key on page 451
crypto otp Sets a one-time password (OTP) for use with the crypto pkcs12
command.
Syntax — crypto otp {admin | eap | webaaa} one-time-password
admin — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12
object file for an administrative certificate and key pair—and
optionally the certificate authority’s own certificate—to authenticate
the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12 object
file for an EAP certificate and key pair—and optionally the certificate
authority’s own certificate—to authenticate the WX switch to 802.1X
supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Creates a one-time password for installing a PKCS #12
object file for a WebAAA certificate and key pair—and optionally the
certificate authority’s own certificate—to authenticate the WX switch
to WebAAA clients.
one-time-password — Password of at least 1 alphanumeric
character, with no spaces, for clients other than Microsoft Windows
clients. The password must be the same as the password protecting
the PKCS #12 object file.
Note: On an WX switch that handles communications to and from
Microsoft Windows clients, use a one-time password of 31 characters
or fewer.
The following characters cannot be used as part of the one-time
password of a PKCS #12 file:
Quotation marks (“ ”)
crypto pkcs12 457
Question mark (?)
Ampersand (&)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The password allows the public-private key pair and certificate
to be installed together from the same PKCS #12 object file. MSS erases
the one-time password after processing the crypto pkcs12 command or
when you reboot the WX switch.
3Com recommends that you create a password that is memorable to you
but is not subject to easy guesses or a dictionary attack. For best results,
create a password of alphanumeric uppercase and lowercase characters.
Examples — The following command creates the one-time password
hap9iN#ss for installing an EAP certificate and key pair:
WX4400# crypto generate otp eap hap9iN#ss
OTP set
See Also
crypto pkcs12 on page 457
crypto pkcs12 Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file into the certificate and key storage area
on the WX switch. This object file contains a public-private key pair, an
WX certificate signed by a certificate authority, and the certificate
authority’s certificate.
Syntax — crypto pkcs12 {admin | eap | webaaa} file-location-url
admin — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for an administrative
certificate and key pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s
own certificate — for authenticating the WX switch to 3WXM or Web
Manager.
eap — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for an EAP certificate and key
pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s own certificate — for
authenticating the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
458 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
webaaa — Unpacks a PKCS #12 object file for a WebAAA certificate
and key pair — and optionally the certificate authority’s own
certificate — for authenticating the WX switch to WebAAA clients.
file-location-url — Location of the PKCS #12 object file to be
installed. Specify a location of between 1 and 128 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — The password you enter with the crypto otp command
must be the same as the one protecting the PKCS #12 file.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To use this command, you must have already created a
one-time password with the crypto otp command.
You must also have the PKCS #12 object file available. You can download
a PKCS #12 object file via TFTP from a remote location to the local
nonvolatile storage system on the WX switch.
Examples — The following commands copy a PKCS #12 object file for
an EAP certificate and key pair—and optionally the certificate authority’s
own certificate—from a TFTP server to nonvolatile storage on the WX
switch, create the one-time password hap9iN#ss, and unpack the
PKCS #12 file:
WX4400# copy tftp://192.168.253.1/2048full.p12 2048full.p12
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517
bytes/sec]
WX4400# crypto otp eap hap9iN#ss
OTP set
WX4400# crypto pkcs12 eap 2048full.p12
Unwrapped from PKCS12 file:
keypair
device certificate
CA certificate
See Also
crypto otp on page 456
display crypto ca-certificate 459
display crypto
ca-certificate
Displays information about the certificate authority’s PEM-encoded
PKCS #7 certificate.
Syntax — display crypto ca-certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
admin — Displays information about the certificate authority’s
certificate that signed the administrative certificate for the WX switch.
The administrative certificate authenticates the WX to 3WXM or Web
Manager.
eap — Displays information about the certificate authority’s certificate
that signed the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) certificate for
the WX switch.
The EAP certificate authenticates the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants
(clients).
webaaa — Displays information about the certificate authority’s
certificate that signed the WebAAA certificate for the WX switch.
The WebAAA certificate authenticates the WX switch to WebAAA
clients.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display information about the certificate of a certificate
authority, type the following command:
WX4400# display crypto ca-certificate
Table 83 describes the fields in the display.
Table 83 display crypto ca-certificate Output
Fields Description
Version Version of the X.509 certificate.
Serial Number A unique identifier for the certificate or signature.
Subject Name of the certificate owner.
Signature Algorithm Algorithm that created the signature, such as RSA MD5 or
RSA SHA.
460 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
See Also
crypto ca-certificate on page 448
display crypto certificate on page 460
display crypto
certificate
Displays information about one of the cryptographic certificates installed
on the WX switch.
Syntax — display crypto certificate {admin | eap | webaaa}
admin — Displays information about the administrative certificate that
authenticates the WX switch to 3WXM or Web Manager.
eap — Displays information about the EAP certificate that
authenticates the WX switch to 802.1X supplicants (clients).
webaaa — Displays information about the WebAAA certificate that
authenticates the WX switch to WebAAA clients.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must have generated a self-signed certificate or obtained a
certificate from a certificate authority before displaying information about
the certificate.
Examples — To display information about a cryptographic certificate,
type the following command:
WX4400# display crypto certificate eap
Table 84 describes the fields of the display.
Issuer Certificate authority that issued the certificate or
signature.
Validity Time period for which the certificate is valid.
Table 83 display crypto ca-certificate Output (continued)
display crypto key ssh 461
See Also
crypto generate self-signed on page 454
display crypto ca-certificate on page 459
display crypto key
ssh
Displays SSH authentication key information. This command displays the
checksum (also called a fingerprint) of the public SSH authentication key.
When you connect to the WX switch with an SSH client, you can
compare the SSH key checksum displayed by the WX switch with the one
displayed by the client to verify that you really are connected to the WX
switch and not another device. Generally, SSH clients remember the
encryption key after the first connection, so you need to check the key
only once.
Syntax — display crypto key ssh
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display SSH key information, type the following
command:
WX4400# display crypto key ssh
ec:6f:56:7f:d1:fd:c0:28:93:ae:a4:f9:7c:f5:13:04
See Also crypto generate key on page 451
Table 84 crypto certificate Output
Fields Description
Version Version of the X.509 certificate.
Serial Number A unique identifier for the certificate or signature.
Subject Name of the certificate owner.
Signature Algorithm Algorithm that created the signature, such as RSA MD5 or
RSA SHA.
Issuer Certificate authority that issued the certificate or
signature.
Validity Time period for which the certificate is valid.
462 CHAPTER 13: CRYPTOGRAPHY COMMANDS
14 RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP
COMMANDS
Use RADIUS commands to set up communication between an WX switch
and groups of up to four RADIUS servers for remote authentication,
authorization, and accounting (AAA) of administrators and network
users.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents RADIUS commands alphabetically. Use Table 85 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their uses.
(For information about RADIUS attributes, see the RADIUS appendix in
the Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.)
Table 85 RADIUS Commands by Usage
Type Command
RADIUS Client set radius client system-ip on page 469
clear radius client system-ip on page 465
RADIUS Servers set radius on page 468
set radius server on page 472
clear radius on page 464
clear radius server on page 467
Server Groups set server group on page 474
set server group load-balance on
page 475
clear server group on page 467
RADIUS Proxy set radius proxy client on page 470
set radius proxy port on page 471
clear radius proxy client on page 466
clear radius proxy port on page 466
464 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
clear radius Resets parameters that were globally configured for RADIUS servers to
their default values.
Syntax — clear radius {deadtime | key | retransmit |
timeout }
deadtime — Number of minutes to wait after declaring an
unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying the RADIUS
server.
key — Password (shared secret key) used to authenticate to the
RADIUS server.
retransmit — Number of transmission attempts made before
declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable.
timeout — Number of seconds to wait for the RADIUS server to
respond before retransmitting.
Defaults — Global RADIUS parameters have the following default
values:
deadtime—0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key—No key
retransmit—3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
timeout—5 seconds
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To override the globally set values on a particular RADIUS
server, use the set radius server command.
Examples — To reset all global RADIUS parameters to their factory
defaults, type the following commands:
WX4400# clear radius deadtime
success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear radius key
success: change accepted.
WX4400# clear radius retransmit
success: change accepted.
clear radius client system-ip 465
WX4400# clear radius timeout
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radius on page 468
set radius server on page 472
display aaa on page 217
clear radius client
system-ip
Removes the WX switch’s system IP address from use as the permanent
source address in RADIUS client requests from the switch to its RADIUS
server(s).
Syntax — clear radius client system-ip
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The clear radius client system-ip command causes the WX
switch to use the IP address of the interface through which it sends a
RADIUS client request as the source IP address. The WX switch selects a
source interface address based on information in its routing table as the
source address for RADIUS packets leaving the switch.
Examples — To clear the system IP address as the permanent source
address for RADIUS client requests, type the following command:
WX4400# clear radius client system-ip
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set radius client system-ip on page 469
466 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
clear radius proxy
client
Removes a RADIUS proxy client entry for a third-party AP.
Syntax — clear radius proxy client all
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears all RADIUS proxy client
entries from the switch:
WX-1200# clear radius proxy client all
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radius proxy client on page 470
clear radius proxy
port
Removes a RADIUS proxy port configured for a third-party AP.
Syntax — clear radius proxy port all
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears all RADIUS proxy port
entries from the switch:
WX-1200# clear radius proxy port all
success: change accepted.
See Also
set radius proxy port on page 471
clear radius server 467
clear radius server Removes the named RADIUS server from the WX configuration.
Syntax — clear radius server server-name
server-name — Name of a RADIUS server configured to perform
remote AAA services for the WX switch.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes the RADIUS server rs42
from a list of remote AAA servers:
WX4400# clear radius server rs42
success: change accepted.
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set radius server on page 472
clear server group Removes a RADIUS server group from the configuration, or disables load
balancing for the group.
Syntax — clear server group group-name [load-balance]
group-name — Name of a RADIUS server group configured to perform
remote AAA services for WX switches.
load-balance — Ability of group members to share demand for
services among servers.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Deleting a server group removes the server group from the
configuration. However, the members of the server group remain.
468 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
Examples — To remove the server group sg-77 type the following
command:
WX4400# clear server group sg-77
success: change accepted.
To disable load balancing in a server group shorebirds, type the following
command:
WX4400# set server group shorebirds load-balance disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
set server group on page 474
set radius Configures global defaults for RADIUS servers that do not explicitly set
these values themselves. By default, the WX switch automatically sets all
these values except the password (key).
Syntax — set radius {deadtime minutes | key string |
retransmit number | timeout seconds}
deadtime minutes — Number of minutes the WX switch waits after
declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying
the RADIUS server. You can specify from 0 to 1440 minutes.
key string — Password (shared secret key) used to authenticate to
the RADIUS server. You must provide the same password that is
defined on the RADIUS server. The password can be 1 to 32
characters long, with no spaces or tabs.
retransmit number — Number of transmission attempts the WX
switch makes before declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server
unavailable. You can specify from 1 to 100 retries.
timeout seconds — Number of seconds the WX switch waits for the
RADIUS server to respond before retransmitting. You can specify from
1 to 65,535.
Defaults — Global RADIUS parameters have the following default
values:
deadtime — 0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key — No key
set radius client system-ip 469
retransmit — 3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
timeout — 5 seconds
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can specify only one parameter per command line.
Examples — The following commands sets the dead time to 5 minutes,
the RADIUS key to goody, the number of retransmissions to 1, and the
timeout to 21 seconds on all RADIUS servers connected to the WX
switch:
WX1200# set radius deadtime 5
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius key goody
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius retransmit 1
success: change accepted.
WX1200# set radius timeout 21
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear radius server on page 467
display aaa on page 217
set radius server on page 472
set radius client
system-ip
Causes all RADIUS requests to be sourced from the IP address specified by
the set system ip-address command, providing a permanent source IP
address for RADIUS packets sent from the WX switch.
Syntax — set radius client system-ip
Defaults — None. If you do not use this command, RADIUS packets
leaving the WX have the source IP address of the outbound interface,
which can change as routing conditions change.
Examples — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
470 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
Usage — The WX system IP address must be set before you use this
command.
Examples — The following command sets the WX system IP address as
the address of the RADIUS client:
WX4400# set radius client system-ip
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear radius client system-ip on page 465
set system ip-address on page 57
set radius proxy
client
Adds a RADIUS proxy entry for a third-party AP. The proxy entry specifies
the IP address of the AP and the UDP port on which the WX switch listens
for RADIUS traffic from the AP.
Syntax — set radius proxy client address ip-address
[port udp-port-number] key string
address ip-address — IP address of the third-party AP. Enter the
address in dotted decimal notation.
port udp-port-number — UDP port on which the WX switch listens
for RADIUS traffic from the AP.
key string — Password (shared secret key) the WX switch uses to
authenticate and encrypt RADIUS communication.
Defaults — The default UDP port number is 1812.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command configures a RADIUS proxy entry
for a third-party AP RADIUS client at 10.20.20.9, sending RADIUS traffic
to the default UDP port 1812 on the WX:
set radius proxy port 471
WX-1200# set radius proxy client address 10.20.20.9 key
radkey1
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear radius proxy client on page 466
set authentication proxy on page 238
set radius proxy port on page 471
set radius proxy
port
Configures the WX port connected to a third-party AP as a RADIUS proxy
for the SSID supported by the AP.
Syntax — set radius proxy port port-list [tag tag-value]
ssid ssid-name
port-list — WX port(s) connected to the third-party AP.
tag tag-value — 802.1Q tag value in packets sent by the
third-party AP for the SSID.
ssid ssid-name — SSID supported by the third-party AP.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS 4.0.
Usage — AAA for third-party AP users has additional configuration
requirements. See the “Configuring AAA for Users of Third-Party APs”
section in the “Configuring AAA for Network Users” chapter of the
Wireless LAN Switch and Controller Configuration Guide.
Enter a separate command for each SSID, and its tag value, you want the
WX to support.
Examples — The following command maps SSID mycorp to packets
received on port 3 or 4, using 802.1Q tag value 104:
WX-1200# set radius proxy port 3-4 tag 104 ssid mycorp
success: change accepted.
472 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
See Also
clear radius proxy port on page 466
set authentication proxy on page 238
set radius proxy client on page 470
set radius server Configures RADIUS servers and their parameters. By default, the WX
switch automatically sets all these values except the password (key).
Syntax — set radius server server-name
[address ip-address] [auth-port port-number] [acct-port
port-number] [timeout seconds] [retransmit number] [deadtime
minutes] [key string] [author-password password]
server-name — Unique name for this RADIUS server. Enter an
alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters, with no blanks.
address ip-address — IP address of the RADIUS server. Enter the
address in dotted decimal notation.
auth-port port-number — UDP port that the WX switch uses for
authentication and authorization.
acct-port port-number — UDP port that the WX switch uses for
accounting.
timeout seconds — Number of seconds the WX switch waits for the
RADIUS server to respond before retransmitting. You can specify from
1 to 65,535 seconds.
retransmit number — Number of transmission attempts made
before declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable. You can
specify from 1to100 retries.
deadtime minutes — Number of minutes the WX switch waits after
declaring an unresponsive RADIUS server unavailable before retrying
that RADIUS server. Specify between 0 (zero) and 1440 minutes
(24 hours). A zero value causes the switch to identify unresponsive
servers as available.
key string — Password (shared secret key) the WX switch uses to
authenticate to the RADIUS server. You must provide the same
password that is defined on the RADIUS server. The password can be
1 to 32 characters long, with no spaces or tabs.
set radius server 473
author-password password — Password used for authorization to a
RADIUS server for MAC users. Specify a password of up to
32 alphanumeric characters with no spaces or tabs.
Defaults — Default values are listed below:
auth-port — UDP port 1812
acct-port — UDP port 1813
timeout — 5 seconds
retransmit — 3 (the total number of attempts, including the first
attempt)
deadtime — 0 (zero) minutes (The WX switch does not designate
unresponsive RADIUS servers as unavailable.)
key — No key
author-password — When using RADIUS for authentication, a MAC
user’s MAC address is also used as the default authorization password
for that user, and no global authorization password is set. A last-resort
user’s default authorization password is 3Com.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — For a given RADIUS server, the first instance of this command
must set both the server name and the IP address and can include any or
all of the other optional parameters. Subsequent instances of this
command can be used to set optional parameters for a given RADIUS
server.
To configure the server as a remote authenticator for the WX switch, you
must add it to a server group with the set server group command.
Do not use the same name for a RADIUS server and a RADIUS server
group.
Examples — To set a RADIUS server named RS42 with IP address
198.162.1.1 to use the default accounting and authorization ports with a
timeout interval of 30 seconds, two transmit attempts, 5 minutes of dead
time, and a key string of keys4u, type the following command:
WX1200# set radius server RS42 address 198.162.1.1 timeout 30
retransmit 2 deadtime 5 key keys4U
474 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
See Also
display aaa on page 217
set authentication admin on page 226
set authentication console on page 228
set authentication dot1x on page 230
set authentication last-resort on page 234
set authentication mac on page 236
set authentication web on page 239
set radius on page 468
set server group on page 474
set server group Configures a group of one to four RADIUS servers.
Syntax — set server group group-name members server-name1
[server-name2] [server-name3] [server-name4]
group-name — Server group name of up to 32 characters, with no
spaces or tabs.
members server-name1, server-name2, server-name3,
server-name4 — The names of one or more configured RADIUS
servers. You can enter up to four server names.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You must assign all group members simultaneously, as shown
in the example. To enable load balancing, use set server group
load-balance enable.
Do not use the same name for a RADIUS server and a RADIUS server
group.
Examples — To set server group shorebirds with members heron, egret,
and sandpiper, type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds members heron egret
set server group load-balance 475
sandpiper
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear server group on page 467
display aaa on page 217
set server group load-balance on page 475
set server group
load-balance
Enables or disables load balancing among the RADIUS servers in a server
group.
Syntax — set server group group-name load-balance
{enable |disable}
group-name — Server group name of up to 32 characters.
load-balance enable |disable — Enables or disables load
balancing of authentication requests among the servers in the group.
Defaults — Load balancing is disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You can optionally enable load balancing after assigning the
server group members. If you configure load balancing, MSS sends each
AAA request to a separate server, starting with the first one on the list
and skipping unresponsive servers. If no server in the group responds,
MSS moves to the next method configured with set authentication and
set accounting.
In contrast, if load balancing is not configured, MSS always begins with
the first server in the list and sends unfulfilled requests to each
subsequent server in the group before moving on to the next configured
AAA method.
Examples — To enable load balancing between the members of server
group shorebirds, type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds load-balance enable
success: change accepted.
476 CHAPTER 14: RADIUS AND SERVER GROUP COMMANDS
To disable load balancing between shorebirds server group members,
type the following command:
WX1200# set server group shorebirds load-balance disable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear server group on page 467
clear radius server on page 467
display aaa on page 217
set server group on page 474
15 802.1X MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS
Use 802. IEEE X management commands to modify the default settings
for IEEE 802.1X sessions on an WX switch. For best results, change the
settings only if you are aware of a problem with the WX switch’s 802.1X
performance.
CAUTION: 802.1X parameter settings are global for all SSIDs configured
on the switch.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents 802.1X commands alphabetically. Use Table 86 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use. For information
about configuring 802.1X commands for user authentication, see “AAA
Commands” on page 199.
Table 86 802.1X Commands by Usage
Type Command
Wired Authentication Port
Control
set dot1x port-control on page 490
clear dot1x port-control on page 479
set dot1x authcontrol on page 486
Keys set dot1x key-tx on page 488
set dot1x tx-period on page 494
clear dot1x tx-period on page 483
set dot1x wep-rekey on page 495
set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496
Bonded Authentication clear dot1x bonded-period on page 478
set dot1x bonded-period on page 487
Reauthentication set dot1x reauth on page 491
set dot1x reauth-max on page 492
478 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
clear dot1x
bonded-period
Resets the Bonded Auth period to its default value.
Syntax — clear dot1x bonded-period
Defaults — The default bonded authentication period is 0 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the Bonded period to its default, type the following
command:
WX4400# clear dot1x bonded-period
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x bonded-period on page 487
Reauthentication, cont. clear dot1x reauth-max on page 481
set dot1x reauth-period on page 493
clear dot1x reauth-period on page 481
Retransmission set dot1x max-req on page 489
clear dot1x max-req on page 479
Quiet Period and Timeouts set dot1x quiet-period on page 491
clear dot1x quiet-period on page 480
set dot1x timeout auth-server on page 493
clear dot1x timeout auth-server on
page 482
set dot1x timeout supplicant on page 494
clear dot1x timeout supplicant on page 482
Settings, Active Clients, and
Statistics
display dot1x on page 483
Table 86 802.1X Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear dot1x max-req 479
clear dot1x max-req Resets to the default setting the number of Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) requests that the WX switch retransmits to a supplicant
(client).
Syntax — clear dot1x max-req
Defaults — The default number is 20.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the number of 802.1X requests the WX can send
to the default setting, type the following command:
WX4400# clear dot1x max-req
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x max-req on page 489
clear dot1x
port-control
Resets all wired authentication ports on the WX switch to default 802.1X
authentication.
Syntax — clear dot1x port-control
By default, all wired authentication ports are set to auto and they process
authentication requests as determined by the set authentication dot1X
command.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command is overridden by the set dot1x authcontrol
command. The clear dot1x port-control command returns port control
to the method configured. This command applies only to wired
authentication ports.
480 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Examples — Type the following command to reset the wired
authentication port control:
WX4400# clear dot1x port-control
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x port-control on page 490
clear dot1x
quiet-period
Resets the quiet period after a failed authentication to the default setting.
Syntax — clear dot1x quiet-period
Defaults — The default is 60 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the 802.1X quiet
period to the default:
WX4400# clear dot1x quiet-period
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x quiet-period on page 491
clear dot1x reauth-max 481
clear dot1x
reauth-max
Resets the maximum number of reauthorization attempts to the default
setting.
Syntax — clear dot1x reauth-max
Defaults — The default is 2 attempts.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the maximum
number of reauthorization attempts to the default:
WX4400# clear dot1x reauth-max
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x reauth-max on page 492
clear dot1x
reauth-period
Resets the time period that must elapse before a reauthentication
attempt, to the default time period.
Syntax — clear dot1x reauth-period
Defaults — The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the default
reauthentication time period:
WX4400# clear dot1x reauth-period
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x reauth-period on page 493
482 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
clear dot1x timeout
auth-server
Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse
before the WX times out a request to a RADIUS server.
Syntax — clear dot1x timeout auth-server
Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To reset the default timeout for requests to an
authentication server, type the following command:
WX4400# clear dot1x timeout auth-server
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x timeout auth-server on page 493
clear dot1x timeout
supplicant
Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse before
the WX switch times out an authentication session with a supplicant (client).
Syntax — clear dot1x timeout supplicant
Defaults — The default for the authentication timeout sessions is
30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the timeout period
for an authentication session:
WX4400# clear dot1x timeout supplicant
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x timeout supplicant on page 494
clear dot1x tx-period 483
clear dot1x
tx-period
Resets to the default setting the number of seconds that must elapse
before the WX switch retransmits an EAP over LAN (EAPoL) packet.
Syntax — clear dot1x tx-period
Defaults — The default is 5 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to reset the EAPoL
retransmission time:
WX4400# clear dot1x tx-period
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x tx-period on page 494
display dot1x Displays 802.1X client information for statistics and configuration
settings.
Syntax — display dot1x {clients | stats | config}
clients — Displays information about active 802.1X clients,
including client name, MAC address, and state.
stats — Displays global 802.1X statistics associated with connecting
and authenticating.
config — Displays a summary of the current configuration.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
484 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Format of 802.1X
authentication rule information in display dot1x config output
changed in MSS Version 3.2. The rules are still listed at the top of the
display, but more information is shown for each rule.
Examples — Type the following command to display the 802.1X clients:
WX4400# display dot1x clients
MAC Address State Vlan Identity
------------- ------- ------ ----------
00:20:a6:48:01:1f Connecting (unknown)
00:05:3c:07:6d:7c Authenticated vlan-it EXAMPLE\jose
00:05:5d:7e:94:83 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\singh
00:02:2d:86:bd:38 Authenticated vlan-eng bard@xmple.com
00:05:5d:7e:97:b4 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\havel
00:05:5d:7e:98:1a Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\nash
00:0b:be:a9:dc:4e Authenticated vlan-pm xalik@xmple.com
00:05:5d:7e:96:e3 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\mishan
00:02:2d:6f:44:77 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\ethan
00:05:5d:7e:94:89 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\fmarshall
00:06:80:00:5c:02 Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\bmccarthy
00:02:2d:6a:de:f2 Authenticated vlan-pm neailey@xmple.com
00:02:2d:5e:5b:76 Authenticated vlan-pm EXAMPLE\tamara
00:02:2d:80:b6:e1 Authenticated vlan-cs dmc@xmple.com
00:30:65:16:8d:69 Authenticated vlan-wep MAC authenticated
00:02:2d:64:8e:1b Authenticated vlan-eng EXAMPLE\wong
Type the following command to display the 802.1X configuration:
WX1200# display dot1x config
802.1X user policy
----------------------
'host/bob-laptop.mycorp.com' on ssid 'mycorp' doing PASSTHRU
'bob.mycorp.com' on ssid 'mycorp' doing PASSTHRU (bonded)
display dot1x 485
802.1X parameter setting
---------------- -------
supplicant timeout 30
auth-server timeout 30
quiet period 5
transmit period 5
reauthentication period 3600
maximum requests 2
key transmission enabled
reauthentication enabled
authentication control enabled
WEP rekey period 1800
WEP rekey enabled
Bonded period 60
port 5, authcontrol: auto, max-sessions: 16
port 6, authcontrol: auto, max-sessions: 1
port 7, authcontrol: auto, max-sessions: 1
port 8, authcontrol: auto, max-sessions: 1
Type the following command to display 802.1X statistics:
WX4400# display dot1x stats
802.1X statistic value
---------------- -----
Enters Connecting: 709
Logoffs While Connecting: 112
Enters Authenticating: 467
Success While Authenticating: 0
Timeouts While Authenticating: 52
Failures While Authenticating: 0
Reauths While Authenticating: 0
Starts While Authenticating: 31
Logoffs While Authenticating: 0
Starts While Authenticated: 85
Logoffs While Authenticated: 1
Bad Packets Received: 0
Table 87 explains the counters in the display dot1x stats output.
486 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
set dot1x
authcontrol
Provides a global override mechanism for 802.1X authentication
configuration on wired authentication ports.
Syntax — set dot1x authcontrol {enable | disable}
enable — Allows all wired authentication ports running 802.1X to
use the authentication specified per port by the set dot1X
port-control command.
disable — Forces all wired authentication ports running 802.1X to
unconditionally accept all 802.1X authentication attempts with an
EAP Success message (ForceAuth).
Table 87 display dot1x stats Output
Field Description
Enters Connecting Number of times that the WX switch state transitions to the
CONNECTING state from any other state.
Logoffs While
Connecting Number of times that the WX switch state transitions from
CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an
EAPoL-Logoff message.
Enters Authenticating Number of times that the state wildcard transitions.
Success While
Authenticating Number of times the WX switch state transitions from
AUTHENTICATING from AUTHENTICATED, as a result of an
EAP-Response/Identity message being received from the
supplicant (client).
Timeouts While
Authenticating Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING.
Failures While
Authenticating Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATION to HELD.
Reauths While
Authenticating Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of a reauthentication request (reAuthenticate = TRUE).
Starts While
Authenticating Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of an EAPoL-Start message being received from the
Supplicant (client).
Logoffs While
Authenticating Number of times that the WX switch state wildcard
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING, as a result
of an EAPoL-logoff message being received from the
Supplicant (client).
Bad Packets Received Number of EAPoL packets received that have an invalid
version or type.
set dot1x bonded-period 487
Defaults — By default, authentication control for individual wired
authentication is enabled.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command applies only to wired authentication ports.
Examples — To enable per-port 802.1X authentication on wired
authentication ports, type the following command:
WX4400# set dot1x authcontrol enable
success: dot1x authcontrol enabled.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x port-control on page 490
set dot1x
bonded-period
Changes the Bonded Auth™ (bonded authentication) period, which is
the number of seconds MSS retains session information for an
authenticated machine while waiting for the 802.1X client on the
machine to start (re)authentication for the user.
You must set the bonded period to longer than 0 seconds to enable
bonded authentication.
Syntax — set dot1x bonded-period seconds
seconds — Number of seconds MSS retains session information for an
authenticated machine while waiting for a client to (re)authenticate
on the same machine. You can change the bonded authentication
period to a value from 1 to 300 seconds.
Defaults — The default bonded period is 0 seconds, which disables the
feature.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
488 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Usage — Normally, the Bonded Auth period needs to be set only if the
network has Bonded Auth clients that use dynamic WEP, or use WEP-40
or WEP-104 encryption with WPA or RSN. These clients can be affected
by the 802.1X reauthentication parameter or the RADIUS
Session-Timeout parameter.
3Com recommends that you try 60 seconds, and change the period to a
longer value only if clients are unable to authenticate within 60 seconds.
The bonded authentication period applies only to 802.1X authentication
rules that contain the bonded option.
Examples — To set the bonded authentication period to 60 seconds,
type the following command:
WX4400# set dot1x bonded-period 60
success: change accepted.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x bonded-period on page 478
set dot1x key-tx Enables or disables the transmission of encryption key information to the
supplicant (client) in EAP over LAN (EAPoL) key messages, after
authentication is successful.
Syntax — set dot1x key-tx {enable | disable}
enable — Enables transmission of encryption key information to
clients.
disable — Disables transmission of encryption key information to
clients.
Defaults — Key transmission is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set dot1x max-req 489
Examples — Type the following command to enable key transmission:
WX4400# set dot1x key-tx enable
success: dot1x key transmission enabled.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times the WX retransmits an EAP request
to a supplicant (client) before ending the authentication session.
Syntax — set dot1x max-req number-of-retransmissions
number-of-retransmissions — Specify a value between 0 and 10.
Defaults — The default number of EAP retransmissions is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To support SSIDs that have both 802.1X and static WEP clients,
MSS sends a maximum of two ID requests, even if this parameter is set to
a higher value. Setting the parameter to a higher value does affect all
other types of EAP messages.
Examples — Type the following command to set the maximum number
of EAP request retransmissions to three attempts:
WX4400# set dot1x max-req 3
success: dot1x max request set to 3.
See Also
clear dot1x max-req on page 479
display dot1x on page 483
490 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
set dot1x
port-control
Determines the 802.1X authentication behavior on individual wired
authentication ports or groups of ports.
Syntax — set dot1x port-control
{forceauth | forceunauth | auto} port-list
forceauth — Forces the specified wired authentication port(s) to
unconditionally authorize all 802.1X authentication attempts, with an
EAP success message.
forceunauth — Forces the specified wired authentication port(s) to
unconditionally reject all 802.1X authentication attempts with an EAP
failure message.
auto — Allows the specified wired authentication ports to process
802.1X authentication normally as determined for the user by the set
authentication dot1X command.
port-list — One or more wired authentication ports for which to
set 802.1X port control.
Defaults — By default, wired authentication ports are set to auto.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command affects only wired authentication ports.
Examples — The following command forces port 1 to unconditionally
accept all 802.1X authentication attempts:
WX4400# set dot1x port-control forceauth 1
success: authcontrol for 1 is set to FORCE-AUTH.
See Also
display port status on page 70
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x quiet-period 491
set dot1x
quiet-period
Sets the number of seconds an WX remains quiet and does not respond
to a supplicant after a failed authentication.
Syntax — set dot1x quiet-period seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 0 and 65,535.
Defaults — The default is 60 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the quiet period to
90 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x quiet-period 90
success: dot1x quiet period set to 90.
See Also
clear dot1x quiet-period on page 480
set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496
set dot1x reauth Determines whether the WX switch allows the reauthentication of
supplicants (clients).
Syntax — set dot1x reauth {enable | disable}
enable — Permits reauthentication.
disable — Denies reauthentication.
Defaults — Reauthentication is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to enable reauthentication of
supplicants (clients):
WX4400# set dot1x reauth enable
success: dot1x reauthentication enabled.
492 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x reauth-max on page 492
set dot1x reauth-period on page 493
set dot1x
reauth-max
Sets the number of reauthentication attempts that the WX switch makes
before the supplicant (client) becomes unauthorized.
Syntax — set dot1x reauth-max number-of-attempts
number-of-attempts — Specify a value between 1 and 10.
Defaults — The default number of reauthentication attempts is 2.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If the number of reauthentications for a wired authentication
client is greater than the maximum number of reauthentications allowed,
MSS sends an EAP failure packet to the client and removes the client from
the network. However, MSS does not remove a wireless client from the
network under these circumstances.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of
authentication attempts to 8:
WX4400# set dot1x reauth-max 8
success: dot1x max reauth set to 8.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x reauth-max on page 481
set dot1x reauth-period 493
set dot1x
reauth-period
Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch
attempts reauthentication.
Syntax — set dot1x reauth-period seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 60 (1 minute) and 1,641,600
(19 days).
Defaults — The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
to 100 before reauthentication is attempted:
WX4400# set dot1x reauth-period 100
success: dot1x auth-server timeout set to 100.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x reauth-period on page 481
set dot1x timeout
auth-server
Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch times
out a request to a RADIUS authentication server.
Syntax — set dot1x timeout auth-server seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.
Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the authentication
server timeout to 60 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x timeout auth-server 60
success: dot1x auth-server timeout set to 60.
494 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x timeout auth-server on page 482
set dot1x timeout
supplicant
Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch times
out an authentication session with a supplicant (client).
Syntax — set dot1x timeout supplicant seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.
Defaults — The default is 30 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
for authentication session timeout to 300:
WX4400# set dot1x timeout supplicant 300
success: dot1x supplicant timeout set to 300.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x timeout auth-server on page 482
set dot1x tx-period Sets the number of seconds that must elapse before the WX switch
retransmits an EAPoL packet.
Syntax — set dot1x tx-period seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 1 and 65,535.
Defaults — The default is 5 seconds.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set dot1x wep-rekey 495
Examples — Type the following command to set the number of seconds
before the WX switch retransmits an EAPoL packet to 300:
WX4400# set dot1x tx-period 300
success: dot1x tx-period set to 300.
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
clear dot1x tx-period on page 483
set dot1x
wep-rekey
Enables or disables Wired Equivalency Privacy (WEP) rekeying for
broadcast and multicast encryption keys.
Syntax — set dot1X wep-rekey {enable | disable}
enable — Causes the broadcast and multicast keys for WEP to be
rotated at an interval set by the set dot1x wep-rekey-period for
each radio, associated VLAN, and encryption type. The WX generates
the new broadcast and multicast keys and pushes the keys to the
clients via EAPoL key messages.
disable — WEP broadcast and multicast keys are never rotated.
Defaults — WEP key rotation is enabled, by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Reauthentication is not required for WEP key rotation to take
place. Broadcast and multicast keys are always rotated at the same time,
so all members of a given radio, VLAN, or encryption type receive the
new keys at the same time.
Examples — Type the following command to disable WEP key rotation:
WX4400# set dot1x wep-rekey disable
success: wep rekeying disabled
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x wep-rekey-period on page 496
496 CHAPTER 15: 802.1X MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
set dot1x
wep-rekey-period
Sets the interval for rotating the WEP broadcast and multicast keys.
Syntax — set dot1x wep-rekey-period seconds
seconds — Specify a value between 30 and 1,641,600 (19 days).
Defaults — The default is 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to set the WEP-rekey period
to 300 seconds:
WX4400# set dot1x wep-rekey-period 300
success: dot1x wep-rekey-period set to 300
See Also
display dot1x on page 483
set dot1x wep-rekey on page 495
16 SESSION MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS
Use session management commands to display and clear
administrative and network user sessions.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents session management commands alphabetically. Use
Table 88 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
clear sessions Clears all administrative sessions, or clears administrative console or
Telnet sessions.
Syntax — clear sessions {admin | console |
telnet [client [session-id]]}
admin — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to the
WX switch through a Telnet or SSH connection or a console plugged
into the switch.
console — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a console plugged into the switch.
telnet — Clears sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a Telnet connection.
telnet client [session-id] — Clears all Telnet client sessions from
the CLI to remote devices, or clears an individual session identified by
session ID.
Table 88 Session Management Commands by Usage
Type Command
Administrative Sessions display sessions on page 500
clear sessions on page 497
Network Sessions display sessions network on page 503
clear sessions network on page 498
498 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear all administrator sessions type the following
command:
WX4400# clear sessions admin
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y
To clear all administrative sessions through the console, type the
following command:
WX4400# clear sessions console
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y
To clear all administrative Telnet sessions, type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions telnet
This will terminate manager sessions,
do you wish to continue? (y|n) [n]y
To clear Telnet client session 0, type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions telnet client 0
See Also
display sessions on page 500
clear sessions
network
Clears all network sessions for a specified username or set of usernames,
MAC address or set of MAC addresses, virtual LAN (VLAN) or set of
VLANs, or session ID.
Syntax — clear sessions network {user user-glob | mac-addr
mac-addr-glob | vlan vlan-glob | session-id local-session-id}
user user-glob — Clears all network sessions for a single user or set
of users.
clear sessions network 499
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
mac-addr mac-addr-glob — Clears all network sessions for a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address in hexadecimal numbers separated by
colons (:), or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a set of MAC
addresses. (For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
vlan vlan-glob — Clears all network sessions on a single VLAN or a
set of VLANs.
Specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**)
to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk wildcard
character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or following the
first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)
session-id local-session-id — Clears the specified 802.1X
network session. To find local session IDs, use the display sessions
command.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The clear sessions network command clears network
sessions by deauthenticating and, for wireless clients, disassociating
them.
Examples — To clear all sessions for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05,
type the following command:
WX4400# clear sessions network mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05
To clear session 9, type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network session-id 9
SM Apr 11 19:53:38 DEBUG SM-STATE: localid 9, mac 00:06:25:09:39:5d,
flags 0000012fh, to change state to KILLING
Localid 9, globalid SESSION-9-893249336 moved from ACTIVE to KILLING
(client=00:06:25:09:39:5d)
500 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
To clear the session of user Natasha, type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network user Natasha
To clear the sessions of users whose name begins with the characters Jo,
type the following command:
WX1200# clear sessions network user Jo*
To clear the sessions of all users on VLAN red, type the following
command:
WX1200# clear sessions network vlan red
See Also
display sessions on page 500
display sessions network on page 503
display sessions Displays session information and statistics for all users with administrative
access to the WX switch, or for administrative users with either console or
Telnet access.
Syntax — display sessions {admin | console | telnet
[client]}
admin — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a Telnet or SSH connection or a console
plugged into the switch.
console — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a console plugged into the switch.
telnet — Displays sessions for all users with administrative access to
the WX switch through a Telnet connection.
telnet client — Displays Telnet sessions from the CLI to remote
devices.
Defaults — None.
Access — All, except for display sessions telnet client, which has
enabled access.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
display sessions 501
Examples — To view information about sessions of administrative users,
type the following command:
WX4400> display sessions admin
Tty Username Time (s) Type
------- -------------------- -------- ----
tty0 3644 Console
tty2 tech 6 Telnet
tty3 sshadmin 381 SSH
3 admin sessions
To view information about console users’ sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400> display sessions console
Tty Username Time (s)
------- -------------------- --------
console 8573
1 console session
To view information about Telnet users sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400> display sessions telnet
Tty Username Time (s)
------- -------------------- --------
tty2 sea 7395
To view information about Telnet client sessions, type the following
command:
WX4400# display sessions telnet client
Session Server Address Server Port Client Port
------- -------------- ------------ -----------
0 192.168.1.81 23 48000
1 10.10.1.22 23 48001
Table 89 describes the fields of the display sessions admin, display
sessions console, and display sessions telnet displays.
502 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 90 describes the fields of the display sessions telnet client
display.
See Also
clear sessions on page 497
Table 89 display sessions admin, display sessions console, and display sessions
telnet Output
Field Description
Tty The Telnet terminal number, or console for administrative
users connected through the console port.
Username Up to 30 characters of the name of an authenticated user.
Time (s) Number of seconds the session has been active.
Type Type of administrative session:
Console
SSH
Telnet
Table 90 display sessions telnet client Output
Field Description
Session Session number assigned by MSS when the client session is
established.
Server Address IP address of the remote device.
Server Port TCP port number of the remote device’s TCP server.
Client Port TCP port number MSS is using for the client side of the
session.
display sessions network 503
display sessions
network
Displays summary or verbose information about all network sessions, or
network sessions for a specified username or set of usernames, MAC
address or set of MAC addresses, VLAN or set of VLANs, or session ID.
Syntax — display sessions network
[user user-glob | mac-addr mac-addr-glob | ssid ssid-name
vlan vlan-glob | session-id session-id | wired] [verbose]
user user-glob — Displays all network sessions for a single user or
set of users.
Specify a username, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**) to
specify all usernames, or use the single-asterisk wildcard character (*)
to specify a set of usernames up to or following the first delimiter
character—either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For details, see “User
Globs” on page 26.)
mac-addr mac-addr-glob — Displays all network sessions for a MAC
address. Specify a MAC address in hexadecimal numbers separated by
colons (:).
Or use the wildcard character (*) to specify a set of MAC addresses.
(For details, see “MAC Address Globs” on page 27.)
ssid ssid-name — Displays all network sessions for an SSID.
vlan vlan-glob — Displays all network sessions on a single VLAN or a
set of VLANs.
Specify a VLAN name, use the double-asterisk wildcard character (**)
to specify all VLAN names, or use the single-asterisk wildcard
character (*) to specify a set of VLAN names up to or following the
first delimiter character, either an at sign (@) or a period (.). (For
details, see “VLAN Globs” on page 28.)
session-id local-session-id — Displays the specified network
session. To find local session IDs, use the display sessions command.
The verbose option is not available with this form of the display
sessions network command.
wired — Displays all network sessions on wired authentication ports.
verbose — Provides detailed output for all network sessions or ones
displayed by username, MAC address, or VLAN name.
Defaults — None.
Access — All.
504 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS displays information about network sessions in three
types of displays. See the following tables for field descriptions.
Summary display — See Table 91 on page 506.
Verbose display — See Table 92 on page 506.
display sessions network session-id display — See Table 93 on
page 508.
Examples — To display summary information for all network sessions,
type display sessions network. For example:
WX1200# display sessions network
User Sess IP or MAC VLAN Port/
Name ID Address Name Radio
------------------------------ ---- ----------------- --------------- -----
EXAMPLE\Natasha 4* 10.10.40.17 vlan-eng 3/1
host/laptop11.exmpl.com 6* 10.10.40.16 vlan-eng 3/2
nin@exmpl.com 539* 10.10.40.17 vlan-eng 1/1
EXAMPLE\hosni 302* 10.10.40.10 vlan-eng 3/1
563 00:0b:be:15:46:56 (none) 1/2
jose@exmpl.com 380* 10.30.40.8 vlan-eng 1/1
00:30:65:16:8d:69 443* 10.10.40.19 vlan-wep 3/1
EXAMPLE\Geetha 459* 10.10.40.18 vlan-eng 3/2
8 sessions total
The following command displays summary information about the
sessions for MAC address 00:05:5d:7e:98:1a:
WX1200# display sessions network mac-addr 00:05:5d:7e:98:1a
User Sess IP or MAC VLAN Port/
Name ID Address Name Radio
--------------------------- ---- --------------- ------------ -----
EXAMPLE\Havel 13* 10.10.10.40 vlan-eng 1/2
The following command displays summary information about all the
sessions of users whose names begin with E:
WX1200# display sessions network user E*
User Sess IP or MAC VLAN Port/
Name ID Address Name Radio
--------------------------- ---- --------------- ------------ -----
EXAMPLE\Singh 12* 10.10.10.30 vlan-eng 3/2
EXAMPLE\Havel 13* 10.10.10.40 vlan-eng 1/2
2 sessions match criteria (of 3 total)
display sessions network 505
(Table 91 on page 506 describes the summary displays of display
sessions network commands.)
The following command displays detailed (verbose) session information
about user nin@example.com:
WX1200# display sessions network user nin@example.com verbose
User Sess IP or MAC VLAN Port/
Name ID Address Name Radio
----------------------------- ---- ----------------- --------------- -----
nin@example.com 5* 10.20.30.40 vlan-eng 1/1
Client MAC: 00:02:2d:6e:ab:a5 GID: SESS-5-000430-686792-d8b3c564
State: ACTIVE (prev AUTHORIZED)
now on: WX 192.168.12.7, AP/radio 1/1, AP 00:0b:0e:00:05:fe, as of 00:23:32 ago
1 sessions match criteria (of 10 total)
The following command displays verbose output about the sessions of all
current network users:
WX1200# display sessions network verbose
User Sess IP or MAC VLAN Port/
Name ID Address Name Radio
------------------------------ ---- ----------------- --------------- -----
SHUTTLE2\exmpl 6* 10.3.8.55 default 3/1
Client MAC: 00:06:25:13:08:33 GID: SESS-4-000404-98441-c807c14b
State: ACTIVE (prev AUTHORIZED)
now on: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 3/1, AP 00:0b:0e:ff:00:3a, as of
00:00:24 ago
from: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 6/1, AP 00:0b:0e:00:05:d7, as of
00:01:07 ago
from: WX 10.3.8.103, AP/radio 3/1, AP 00:0b:0e:ff:00:3a, as of
00:01:53 ago
1 sessions total
(Table 92 on page 506 describes the additional fields of the verbose
output of display sessions network commands.)
The following command displays information about network session 27:
WX1200# display sessions network session-id 27
Global Id: SESS-27-000430-835586-58dfe5a
State: ACTIVE
Port/Radio: 3/1
MAC Address: 00:00:2d:6f:44:77
User Name: EXAMPLE Natasha
IP Address: 10.10.40.17
Vlan Name: vlan-eng
506 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Tag: 1
Session Timeout: 1800
Authentication Method: PEAP, using server 10.10.70.20
Session statistics as updated from AP:
Unicast packets in: 653
Unicast bytes in: 46211
Unicast packets out: 450
Unicast bytes out: 50478
Multicast packets in: 317
Multicast bytes in: 10144
Number of packets with encryption errors: 0
Number of bytes with encryption errors: 0
Last packet data rate: 2
Last packet signal strength: -67 dBm
Last packet data S/N ratio: 55
Table 91 describes the output of this command. For descriptions of the
fields of display sessions network session-id output, see Table 93 on
page 508.
Table 91 display sessions network (summary) Output
Field Description
User Name Up to 30 characters of the name of the authenticated user
of this session.
Sess ID Locally unique number that identifies this session. An asterisk
(*) next to the session ID indicates currently active sessions.
IP or MAC Address IP address of the session user, or the user’s MAC address if
the user has not yet received an IP address.
VLAN Name Name of the VLAN associated with the session.
Port/Radio Number of the port and radio through which the user is
accessing this session.
Table 92 Additional display sessions network verbose Output
Field Description
Client MAC MAC address of the session user.
GID Global session ID, a unique session number within a Mobility Domain.
display sessions network 507
State Status of the session:
AUTH, ASSOC REQ — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol.
AUTH AND ASSOC — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol, and the user is being authenticated.
AUTHORIZING — User has been authenticated (for example, by
the 802.1X protocol and an AAA method), and is entering AAA
authorization.
AUTHORIZED — User has been authorized by an AAA method.
ACTIVE — User’s AAA attributes have been applied, and the user
is active on the network.
DEASSOCIATED — One of the following:
Wireless client has sent the WX switch a disassociate message.
User associated with one of the current WX switch’s MAP access
points has appeared at another WX switch in the Mobility Domain.
ROAMING AWAY — The W switch has been sent a request to
transfer the user, who is roaming, to another WX switch.
STATUS UPDATED — WX switch is receiving a final update from
an MAP access point about the user, who has roamed away.
WEB_AUTHING — User is being authenticated by WebAAA.
WIRED AUTH’ING — User is being authenticated by the 802.1X
protocol on a wired authentication port.
KILLING — User’s session is being cleared, because of 802.1X
authentication failure, entry of a clear command, or some other
event.
now on IP address and port and radio numbers of the session’s current WX
switch, the MAC address of the MAP access point, and the last update
time.
from IP address and port and radio numbers of the session’s previous WX
switch, the MAC address of the MAP access point, and the last update
time. Up to six roaming events are tracked in this display.
Table 92 Additional display sessions network verbose Output (continued)
Field Description
508 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 93 display sessions network session-id Output
Field Description
Global Id A unique session identifier within the Mobility Domain.
State Status of the session:
AUTH, ASSOC REQ — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol.
AUTH AND ASSOC — Client is being associated by the 802.1X
protocol, and the user is being authenticated.
AUTHORIZING — User has been authenticated (for example,
by the 802.1X protocol and an AAA method), and is entering
AAA authorization.
AUTHORIZED — User has been authorized by an AAA method.
ACTIVE — User’s AAA attributes have been applied, and the
user is active on the network.
DEASSOCIATED — One of the following:
Wireless client has sent the WX switch a disassociate message.
User associated with one of the current WX switch’s MAP
access points has appeared at another WX switch in the
Mobility Domain.
ROAMING AWAY — The WX switch has been sent a request to
transfer the user, who is roaming, to another WX switch.
STATUS UPDATED — WX switch is receiving a final update
from an MAP access point about the user, who has roamed
away.
WEB_AUTHING — User is being authenticated by WebAAA.
WIRED AUTH’ING — User is being authenticated by the
802.1X protocol on a wired authentication port.
KILLING — User’s session is being cleared, because of 802.1X
authentication failure, entry of a clear command, or some other
event.
Port/Radio Number of the port and radio through which the user is accessing
this session.
MAC address MAC address of the session user.
User Name Name of the authenticated user of this session
IP Address IP address of the session user.
Vlan Name Name of the VLAN associated with the session.
Tag System-wide supported VLAN tag type.
display sessions network 509
See Also
clear sessions network on page 498
Session
Timeout Assigned session timeout in seconds.
Authentication
Method Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used to authenticate
the session user, and the IP address of the authentication server.
Session
statistics as
updated from
AP
Time the session statistics were last updated from the MAP access
point, in seconds since a fixed standard date and time.
Unicast packets
in Total number of unicast packets received from the user by the WX
(64-bit counter).
Unicast bytes
in Total number of unicast bytes received from the user by the WX
(64-bit counter).
Unicast packets
out Total number of unicast packets sent by the WX to the user (64-bit
counter).
Unicast bytes
out Total number of unicast bytes sent by the WX to the user (64-bit
counter).
Multicast
packets in Total number of multicast packets received from the user by the
WX (64-bit counter).
Multicast bytes
in Total number of multicast bytes received from the user by the WX
(64-bit counter).
Number of
packets with
encryption
errors
Total number of decryption failures.
Number of
bytes with
encryption
errors
Total number of bytes with decryption errors.
Last packet
data rate Data transmit rate, in megabits per second (Mbps), of the last
packet received by the MAP access point.
Last packet
signal strength Signal strength, in decibels referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm), of the last
packet received by the MAP access point.
Last packet
data S/N ratio Signal-to-noise ratio of the last packet received by the MAP access
point.
Table 93 display sessions network session-id Output (continued)
Field Description
510 CHAPTER 16: SESSION MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
17 RF DETECTION COMMANDS
MSS automatically performs RF detection scans on enabled and disabled
radios to detect rogue access points. A rogue access point is a BSSID
(MAC address associated with an SSID) that does not belong to a 3Com
switch and is not a member of the ignore list configured on the seed
switch of the Mobility Domain.
MSS can issue countermeasures against rogue devices to prevent clients
from being able to use them.
You can configure RF detection parameters on individual WX switches.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents RF detection commands alphabetically. Use
Table 94 to locate the commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 94 RF Detection Commands by Usage
Type Command
Rogue Information display rfdetect clients on page 535
display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521
display rfdetect data on page 518
display rfdetect visible on page 526
display rfdetect counters on page 515
Countermeasures display rfdetect countermeasures on page 517
Permitted
Vendor List
set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533
display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525
clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515
512 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
clear rfdetect Deprecated in MSS Version 3.0. Rogue detection takes place automatically
in MSS Version 3.0. You do not need to configure RF detection scans.
clear rfdetect
attack-list
Removes a MAC address from the attack list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect attack-list mac-addr
mac-addr — MAC address you want to remove from the attack list.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 from the attack list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect attack-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: 11:22:33:44:55:66 is no longer in attacklist.
Permitted SSID List set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532
display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525
clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514
Client Black List set rfdetect black-list on page 529
display rfdetect black-list on page 535
clear rfdetect black-list on page 513
Attack List set rfdetect attack-list on page 528
display rfdetect attack-list on page 534
clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512
Ignore List set rfdetect ignore on page 530
display rfdetect ignore on page 520
clear rfdetect ignore on page 513
MAP Signatures set rfdetect signature on page 532
Log Messages set rfdetect log on page 531
Table 94 RF Detection Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
clear rfdetect black-list 513
See Also
set rfdetect attack-list on page 528
display rfdetect attack-list on page 534
clear rfdetect
black-list
Removes a MAC address from the client black list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect black-list mac-addr
mac-addr — MAC address you want to remove from the black list.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command removes MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 from the black list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect black-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: 11:22:33:44:55:66 is no longer blacklisted.
See Also
set rfdetect black-list on page 529
display rfdetect black-list on page 535
clear rfdetect
countermeasures
mac
Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0.
clear rfdetect
ignore
Removes a device from the ignore list for RF scans. MSS does not
generate log messages or traps for the devices in the ignore list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect ignore mac-addr
mac-addr — Basic service set identifier (BSSID), which is a MAC
address, of the device to remove from the ignore list.
514 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command removes BSSID aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
from the ignore list for RF scans:
WX1200# clear rfdetect ignore aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
success: aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 is no longer ignored.
See Also
display rfdetect ignore on page 520
set rfdetect ignore on page 530
clear rfdetect
ssid-list
Removes an SSID from the permitted SSID list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect ssid-list ssid-name
ssid-name — SSID name you want to remove from the permitted
SSID list.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command clears SSID mycorp from the
permitted SSID list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect ssid-list mycorp
success: mycorp is no longer in ssid-list.
See Also
set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532
display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525
clear rfdetect vendor-list 515
clear rfdetect
vendor-list
Removes an entry from the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — clear rfdetect vendor-list {client | ap} mac-addr |
all
client|ap — Specifies whether the entry is for an AP brand or a
client brand.
mac-addr|all — Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) to remove.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command removes client OUI
aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 from the permitted vendor list:
WX-1200# clear rfdetect vendor-list client aa:bb:cc:00:00:00
success: aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 is no longer in client
vendor-list.
See Also
set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533
display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525
display rfdetect
counters
Displays statistics for rogue and Intrusion Detection System (IDS) activity
detected by the MAPs managed by a WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect counters
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS 4.0.
516 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Examples — The following command shows counters for rogue activity
detected by a WX switch:
WX-1200# display rfdetect counters
Type Current Total
----------------- ----------- ------------
Rogue access points 0 0
Interfering access points 139 1116
Rogue 802.11 clients 0 0
Interfering 802.11 clients 4 347
802.11 adhoc clients 0 1
Unknown 802.11 clients 20 965
Interfering 802.11 clients seen on wired network 0 0
802.11 probe request flood 0 0
802.11 authentication flood 0 0
802.11 null data flood 0 0
802.11 mgmt type 6 flood 0 0
802.11 mgmt type 7 flood 0 0
802.11 mgmt type d flood 0 0
802.11 mgmt type e flood 0 0
802.11 mgmt type f flood 0 0
802.11 association flood 0 0
802.11 reassociation flood 0 0
802.11 disassociation flood 0 0
Weak wep initialization vectors 0 0
Spoofed access point mac-address attacks 0 0
Spoofed client mac-address attacks 0 0
Ssid masquerade attacks 1 12
Spoofed deauthentication attacks 0 0
Spoofed disassociation attacks 0 0
Null probe responses 626 11380
Broadcast deauthentications0 0
FakeAP ssid attacks 0 0
FakeAP bssid attacks 0 0
Netstumbler clients 0 0
Wellenreiter clients 0 0
Trapeze active scans 1796 4383
Wireless bridge frames 196 196
Adhoc client frames 8 0
Access points present in attack-list 0 0
Access points not present in ssid-list 0 0
Access points not present in vendor-list 0 0
Clients not present in vendor-list 0 0
Clients added to automatic black-list 0 0
display rfdetect countermeasures 517
display rfdetect
countermeasures
Displays the current status of countermeasures against rogues in the
Mobility Domain.
Syntax — display rfdetect countermeasures
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. As of Version 4.0, output no
longer lists rogues for which countermeasures have not been started.
Usage — This command is valid only on the seed switch of the Mobility
Domain.
Examples — The following example displays countermeasures status for
the Mobility Domain:
WX1200# display rfdetect countermeasures
Total number of entries: 190
Rogue MAC Type Countermeasures WX-IPaddr Port/Radio
Radio Mac /Channel
----------------- ----- ------------------ --------------- -------------
00:0b:0e:00:71:c0 intfr 00:0b:0e:44:55:66 10.1.1.23 dap 4/1/6
00:0b:0e:03:00:80 rogue 00:0b:0e:11:22:33 10.1.1.23 dap 2/1/11
...
Table 95 describes the fields in this display.
Table 95 display rfdetect countermeasures Output
Field Description
Rogue MAC BSSID of the rogue.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is not
supposed to be on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network
and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
518 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
See Also
clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512
set rf detect countermeasures on page 530
set rfdetect countermeasures mac on page 530
display rfdetect
data
Displays information about the APs detected by a WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect data
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.Vendor, Type and Flags fields
added to MSS Version 4.0
Usage — You can enter this command on any WX switch in the Mobility
Domain. The output applies only to the switch on which you enter the
command. To display all devices that a specific 3Com radio has detected,
even if the radio is managed by another WX switch, use the display
rfdetect visible command.
To display rogue information for the entire Mobility Domain, use the
display rfdetect mobility-domain command on the seed switch.
Only one MAC address is listed for each 3Com radio, even if the radio is
beaconing multiple SSIDs.
Countermeasures
Radio MAC MAC address of the 3Com radio sending countermeasures
against the rogue.
If the field value is Not Started, MSS has not started
countermeasures against the rogue yet.
WX-IPaddr System IP address of the WX switch that is managing the
MAP that is sending or will send countermeasures.
Port/Radio/Channel Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
countermeasures radio. For a Distributed MAP, the
connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)
Table 95 display rfdetect countermeasures Output (continued)
Field Description
display rfdetect data 519
Examples — The following command shows the devices detected by this
WX switch during the most recent RF detection scan:
WX1200# display rfdetect data
Total number of entries: 197
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4 = 40-bit WEP, w = WEP(non-WPA)
BSSID Vendor Type Port/Radio/Ch Flags RSSI Age SSID
----------------- ------- ----- ------------- ------ ---- --- -----------------
00:07:50:d5:cc:91 Cisco intfr 3/1/6 i----w -61 6 r27-cisco1200-2
00:07:50:d5:dc:78 Cisco intfr 3/1/6 i----w -82 6 r116-cisco1200-2
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54 Cisco intfr 3/1/2 i----- -57 6
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0 3Com intfr 3/1/11 i----- -57 6 public
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2 3Com intfr 3/1/11 i-t1-- -86 6 3Comwlan
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4 3Com intfr 3/1/11 ic---- -85 6 3ComWX-ccmp
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6 3Com intfr 3/1/11 i-t--- -85 6 3Com-tkip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8 3Com intfr 3/1/11 i----w -83 6 3Com-voip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca 3Com intfr 3/1/11 i----- -85 6 3Com-webaaa
...
Table 96 describes the fields in this display.
Table 96 display rfdetect data Output
Field Description
BSSID MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.
Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is not supposed to be on the
network. The device has an entry in an WX switch’s FDB
and is therefore on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network but
is not a rogue. The device does not have an entry in an
WX switch’s FDB and is not actually on the network, but
might be causing RF interference with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Port/Radio/Channel Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP, the
connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)
520 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
See Also
display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521
display rfdetect visible on page 526
display rfdetect
ignore
Displays the BSSIDs of third-party devices that MSS ignores during RF
scans. MSS does not generate log messages or traps for the devices in the
ignore list.
Syntax — display rfdetect ignore
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following example displays the list of ignored devices:
WX4400# display rfdetect ignore
Total number of entries: 2
Ignore MAC
-----------------
aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
aa:bb:cc:44:55:66
See Also
clear rfdetect ignore on page 513
set rfdetect ignore on page 530
Flags Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.
The other flags indicate the encryption used by the rogue.
For flag definitions, see the key in the command output.
Table 96 display rfdetect data Output
Field Description
display rfdetect mobility-domain 521
display rfdetect
mobility-domain
Displays the rogues detected by all WX switches in the Mobility Domain
during RF detection scans.
Syntax — display rfdetect mobility-domain
[ssid ssid-name | bssid mac-addr]
ssid ssid-name — Displays rogues that are using the specified SSID.
bssid mac-addr — Displays rogues that are using the specified
BSSID.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. bssid and ssid options, Vendor,
Type, and Flags fields added in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — This command is valid only on the seed switch of the Mobility
Domain. To display rogue information for an individual switch, use the
display rfdetect data command on that switch.
Examples — The following example displays information for all SSIDs
detected in the Mobility Domain:
WS1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain
Total number of entries: 194
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc, u = unresolved
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4 = 40-bit WEP, w = WEP(non-WPA)
BSSID Vendor Type Flags SSID
----------------- ------------ ----- ------ --------------------------------
00:07:50:d5:cc:91 Cisco intfr i----w r27-cisco1200-2
00:07:50:d5:dc:78 Cisco intfr i----w r116-cisco1200-2
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54 Cisco intfr i-----
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0 3Com intfr i----- public
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2 3Com intfr i----w 3Comwlan
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4 3Com intfr ic---- 3Com-ccmp
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6 3Com intfr i----w 3Com-tkip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8 3Com intfr i----w 3Com-voip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca 3Com intfr i----- 3Com-webaaa
...
522 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
The lines in this display are compiled from data from multiple listeners
(MAP radios). If an item has the value unresolved, not all listeners agree
on the value for that item. Generally, an unresolved state occurs only
when an MAP or a Mobility Domain is still coming up, and lasts only
briefly.
The following command displays detailed information for rogues using
SSID 3Com-webaaa.
WS1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain ssid 3Com-webaaa
BSSID: 00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca Vendor: 3Com SSID: 3Com-webaaa
Type: intfr Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/1/11 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6a
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -85 SSID: 3Com-webaaa
BSSID: 00:0b:0e:00:7a:8a Vendor: 3Com SSID: 3Com-webaaa
Type: intfr Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/1/1 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6a
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -75 SSID: 3Com-webaaa
WX-IPaddress: 10.3.8.103 Port/Radio/Ch: dap 1/1/1 Mac:
00:0b:0e:76:56:82
Device-type: interfering Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -76 SSID: 3Com-webaaa
Two types of information are shown. The lines that are not indented
show the BSSID, vendor, and information about the SSID. The indented
lines that follow this information indicate the listeners (MAP radios) that
detected the SSID. Each set of indented lines is for a separate MAP
listener.
In this example, two BSSIDs are mapped to the SSID. Separate sets of
information are shown for each of the BSSIDs, and information about the
listeners for each BSSID are shown.
display rfdetect mobility-domain 523
The following command displays detailed information for a BSSID.
WX1200# display rfdetect mobility-domain bssid
00:0b:0e:00:04:d1
BSSID: 00:0b:0e:00:04:d1 Vendor: Cisco SSID: notmycorp
Type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
WX-IPaddress: 10.8.121.102 Port/Radio/Ch: 3/2/56 Mac:
00:0b:0e:00:0a:6b
Device-type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -72 SSID: notmycorp
WX-IPaddress: 10.3.8.103 Port/Radio/Ch: dap 1/1/157 Mac:
00:0b:0e:76:56:82
Device-type: rogue Adhoc: no Crypto-types: clear
RSSI: -72 SSID: notmycorp
Table 97 and Table 98 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 97 display rfdetect mobility-domain Output
Field Description
BSSID MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.
Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is not supposed to be
on the network. The device has an entry in a WX
switch’s FDB and is therefore on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network but is not a rogue. The device does not
have an entry in a WX switch’s FDB and is not
actually on the network, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Flags Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.
The other flags indicate the encryption used by the
rogue.
For flag definitions, see the key in the command
output.
SSID SSID used by the detected device.
524 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Table 98 display rfdetect mobility-domain ssid or bssid Output
Field Description
BSSID MAC address of the SSID used by the detected device.
Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.
SSID SSID used by the detected device.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is
not supposed to be on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Adhoc Indicates whether the rogue is an infrastructure rogue
(is using an AP) or is operating in ad-hoc mode.
Crypto-Types Encryption type:
clear (no encryption)
ccmp
tkip
wep104 (WPA 104-bit WEP)
wep40 (WPA 40-bit WEP)
wep (non-WPA WEP)
WX-IPaddress System IP address of the WX switch that detected the
rogue.
Port/Radio/Channel Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP,
the connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)
Mac MAC address of the radio that detected the rogue.
Device-type Device type detected by the MAP radio.
Adhoc Ad-hoc status (yes or no) detected by the MAP radio.
Crypto-Types Encryption type detected by the MAP radio.
RSSI Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength
of the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels
referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm).
SSID SSID mapped to the BSSID.
display rfdetect ssid-list 525
See Also
display rfdetect data on page 518
display rfdetect visible on page 526
display rfdetect
ssid-list
Displays the entries in the permitted SSID list.
Syntax — display rfdetect ssid-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the permitted SSID list on
WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect ssid-list
Total number of entries: 3
SSID
-----------------
mycorp
corporate
guest
See Also
clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514
set rfdetect ssid-list on page 532
display rfdetect
vendor-list
Displays the entries in the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — display rfdetect vendor-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
526 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Examples — The following example shows the permitted vendor list on
WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect vendor-list
Total number of entries: 1
OUI Type
----------------- ------
aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 client
11:22:33:00:00:00 ap
See Also
clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515
set rfdetect vendor-list on page 533
display rfdetect
visible
Displays the BSSIDs discovered by a specific 3Com radio. The data
includes BSSIDs transmitted by other 3Com radios as well as by
third-party access points.
Syntax — display rfdetect visible mac-addr
Syntax — display rfdetect visible ap map-num [radio {1|2}]
Syntax — display rfdetect visible dap
dap-num [radio {1|2}]
mac-addr — Base MAC address of the 3Com radio.
To display the base MAC address of a 3Com radio, use the
display {ap | dap} status command.
map-num — Port connected to the MAP access point for which to
display neighboring BSSIDs.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP for which to display
neighboring BSSIDs.
radio 1 — Shows neighbor information for radio 1.
radio 2 — Shows neighbor information for radio 2. (This option does
not apply to single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
display rfdetect visible 527
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. Vendor, Type, and Flags fields
added in Version 4.0.
Usage — If a 3Com radio is supporting more than one SSID, each of the
corresponding BSSIDs is listed separately.
To display rogue information for the entire Mobility Domain, use the
display rfdetect mobility-domain command on the seed switch.
Examples — The following command displays information about the
rogues detected by radio 1 on MAP port 3:
WX1200# display rfdetect visible ap 3 radio 1
Total number of entries: 104
Flags: i = infrastructure, a = ad-hoc
c = CCMP, t = TKIP, 1 = 104-bit WEP, 4 = 40-bit WEP, w = WEP(non-WPA)
Transmit MAC Vendor Type Ch RSSI Flags SSID
----------------- ------- ----- --- ---- ------ --------------------------------
00:07:50:d5:cc:91 Cisco intfr 6 -60 i----w r27-cisco1200-2
00:07:50:d5:dc:78 Cisco intfr 6 -82 i----w r116-cisco1200-2
00:09:b7:7b:8a:54 Cisco intfr 2 -54 i-----
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c0 3Com intfr 11 -57 i----- public
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c2 3Com intfr 11 -86 i-t1-- 3Comwlan
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c4 3Com intfr 11 -85 ic---- 3Com-ccmp
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c6 3Com intfr 11 -85 i-t--- 3Com-tkip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:c8 3Com intfr 11 -83 i----w 3Com-voip
00:0a:5e:4b:4a:ca 3Com intfr 11 -85 i----- 3Com-webaaa
...
Table 99 describes the fields in this display.
Table 99 display rfdetect visible Output
Field Description
Transmit MAC MAC address the rogue device that sent the 802.11 packet
detected by the MAP radio.
Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the rogue device.
528 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
See Also
display rfdetect data on page 518
display rfdetect mobility-domain on page 521
set rfdetect
active-scan
Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. You now can disable or reenable active
scan in individual radio profiles. See set radio-profile active-scan on
page 330.
set rfdetect
attack-list
Adds an entry to the attack list. The attack list specifies the MAC address
of devices that MSS should issue countermeasures against whenever the
devices are detected on the network. The attack list can contain the MAC
addresses of APs and clients.
Syntax — set rfdetect attack-list mac-addr
mac-addr — MAC address you want to attack.
Defaults — The attack list is empty by default.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is not
supposed to be on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your network
and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF interference
with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Ch Channel number on which the radio detected the rogue.
RSSI Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength of
the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels referred
to 1 milliwatt (dBm).
Flags Classification and encryption information for the rogue:
The i, a, or u flag indicates the classification.
The other flags indicate the encryption used by the rogue.
For flag definitions, see the key in the command output.
SSID SSID used by the detected device.
Table 99 display rfdetect visible Output (continued)
Field Description
set rfdetect black-list 529
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The attack list applies only to the WX switch on which the list is
configured. WX switches do not share attack lists.
Examples — The following command adds MAC address
aa:bb:cc:44:55:66 to the attack list:
WX-1200# set rfdetect attack-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: MAC 11:22:33:44:55:66 is now in attacklist.
See Also
clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512
display rfdetect attack-list on page 534
set rfdetect
black-list
Adds an entry to the client black list. The client black list specifies clients
that are not allowed on the network. MSS drops all packets from the
clients on the black list.
Syntax — set rfdetect black-list mac-addr
mac-addr — MAC address you want to place on the black list.
Defaults — The client black list is empty by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — In addition to manually configured entries, the list can contain
entries added by MSS. MSS can place a client in the black list due to an
association, reassociation or disassociation flood from the client.
The client black list applies only to the WX switch on which the list is
configured. WX switches do not share client black lists.
530 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Examples — The following command adds client MAC address
11:22:33:44:55:66 to the black list:
WX-8# set rfdetect black-list 11:22:33:44:55:66
success: MAC 11:22:33:44:55:66 is now blacklisted.
See Also
set rfdetect black-list on page 529
display rfdetect black-list on page 535
set rf detect
countermeasures
Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0. You now can disable or reenable active
scan in individual radio profiles. See set radio-profile countermeasures
on page 337.
set rfdetect
countermeasures
mac
Deprecated in MSS Version 4.0.
set rfdetect ignore Configures a list of known devices to ignore during an RF scan. MSS does
not generate log messages or traps for the devices in the ignore list.
Syntax — set rfdetect ignore mac-addr
mac-addr — BSSID (MAC address) of the device to ignore.
Defaults — MSS reports all unknown BSSIDs detected during an RF scan.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Use this command to identify third-party APs and other devices
you are already aware of and do not want MSS to report following RF
scans.
If you try to initiate countermeasures against a device on the ignore list,
the ignore list takes precedence and MSS does not issue the
countermeasures. Countermeasures apply only to rogue devices.
set rfdetect log 531
Examples — The following command configures MSS to ignore BSSID
aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 during RF scans:
WX1200# set rfdetect ignore aa:bb:cc:11:22:33
success: MAC aa:bb:cc:11:22:33 is now ignored.
See Also
clear rfdetect ignore on page 513
display rfdetect ignore on page 520
set rfdetect log Disables or reenables generation of log messages when rogues are
detected or when they disappear.
Syntax — set rfdetect log {enable | disable}
enable — Enables logging of rogues.
disable — Disables logging of rogues.
Defaults — RF detection logging is enabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
The log messages for rogues are generated only on the seed and appear
only in the seed’s log message buffer. Use the display log buffer
command to display the messages in the seed switch’s log message
buffer.
Examples — The following command enables RF detection logging for
the Mobility Domain managed by this seed switch:
WX1200# set rfdetect log enable
success: rfdetect logging is enabled.
See Also
display log buffer on page 582
532 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
set rfdetect
signature
Enables MAP signatures. A MAP signature is a set of bits in a
management frame sent by a MAP that identifies that MAP to MSS. If
someone attempts to spoof management packets from a 3Com MAP,
MSS can detect the spoof attempt.
Syntax — set rfdetect signature {enable | disable}
enable — Enables MAP signatures.
disable — Disables MAP signatures.
Defaults — MAP signatures are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The command applies only to MAPs managed by the WX
switch on which you enter the command. To enable signatures on all
MAPs in a Mobility Domain, enter the command on each WX switch in
the Mobility Domain.
You must use the same MAP signature setting (enabled or disabled) on all
WX switches in a Mobility Domain.
Examples — The following command enables MAP signatures on an WX
switch:
WX1200# set rfdetect signature enable
success: signature is now enabled.
set rfdetect ssid-list Adds an SSID to the permitted SSID list. The permitted SSID list specifies
the SSIDs that are allowed on the network. If MSS detects packets for an
SSID that is not on the list, the AP that sent the packets is classified as a
rogue. MSS issues countermeasures against the rogue if they are
enabled.
Syntax — set rfdetect ssid-list ssid-name
ssid-name — SSID name you want to add to the permitted SSID list.
set rfdetect vendor-list 533
Defaults — The permitted SSID list is empty by default and all SSIDs are
allowed. However, after you add an entry to the list, MSS allows traffic
only for the SSIDs that are on the list.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The permitted SSID list applies only to the WX switch on which
the list is configured. WX switches do not share permitted SSID lists.
Examples — The following command adds SSID mycorp to the list of
permitted SSIDs:
WX-1200# set rfdetect ssid-list mycorp
success: ssid mycorp is now in ssid-list.
See Also
clear rfdetect ssid-list on page 514
display rfdetect ssid-list on page 525
set rfdetect
vendor-list
Adds an entry to the permitted vendor list. The permitted vendor list
specifies the third-party AP or client vendors that are allowed on the
network. MSS does not list a device as a rogue or interfering device if the
device’s OUI is in the permitted vendor list.
Syntax — set rfdetect vendor-list {client | ap} mac-addr | all
client | ap — Specifies whether the entry is for an AP brand or a
client brand.
mac-addr | all — Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) to remove.
Defaults — The permitted vendor list is empty by default and all vendors
are allowed. However, after you add an entry to the list, MSS allows only
the devices whose OUIs are on the list.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
534 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Usage — The permitted vendor list applies only to the WX switch on
which the list is configured. WX switches do not share permitted vendor
lists.
Examples — The following command adds an entry for clients whose
MAC addresses start with aa:bb:cc:
WX-1200# set rfdetect vendor-list client aa:bb:cc:00:00:00
success: MAC aa:bb:cc:00:00:00 is now in client vendor-list.
The trailing 00:00:00 value is required.
See Also
clear rfdetect vendor-list on page 515
display rfdetect vendor-list on page 525
display rfdetect
attack-list
Displays information about the MAC addresses in the attack list.
Syntax — display rfdetect attack-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the attack list on WX switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect attack-list
Total number of entries: 1
Attacklist MAC Port/Radio/Chan RSSI SSID
----------------- ----------------- ------ ------------
11:22:33:44:55:66 dap 2/1/11 -53 rogue-ssid
See Also
clear rfdetect attack-list on page 512
set rfdetect attack-list on page 528
display rfdetect black-list 535
display rfdetect
black-list
Displays information abut the clients in the client black list.
Syntax — display rfdetect black-list
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following example shows the client black list on WX
switch:
WX1200# display rfdetect black-list
Total number of entries: 1
Blacklist MAC Type Port TTL
----------------- ----------------- ------- ---
11:22:33:44:55:66 configured - -
11:23:34:45:56:67 assoc req flood 3 25
See Also
clear rfdetect black-list on page 513
set rfdetect black-list on page 529
display rfdetect
clients
Displays the wireless clients detected by an WX switch.
Syntax — display rfdetect clients [mac mac-addr]
mac mac-addr
Displays detailed information for a specific client.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
536 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Examples — The following command shows information about all
wireless clients detected by an WX switch’s MAPs:
WX1200# display rfdetect clients
Total number of entries: 30
Client MAC Client AP MAC AP Port/Radio NoL Type Last
Vendor Vendor /Channel seen
----------------- ------- ----------------- ------- ------------- --- ----- ----
00:03:7f:bf:16:70 Unknown Unknown dap 1/1/6 1 intfr 207
00:04:23:77:e6:e5 Intel Unknown dap 1/1/2 1 intfr 155
00:05:5d:79:ce:0f D-Link Unknown dap 1/1/149 1 intfr 87
00:05:5d:7e:96:a7 D-Link Unknown dap 1/1/149 1 intfr 117
00:05:5d:7e:96:ce D-Link Unknown dap 1/1/157 1 intfr 162
00:05:5d:84:d1:c5 D-Link Unknown dap 1/1/1 1 intfr 52
The following command displays more details about a specific client:
WX1200# display rfdetect clients mac 00:0c:41:63:fd:6d
Client Mac Address: 00:0c:41:63:fd:6d, Vendor: Linksys
Port: dap 1, Radio: 1, Channel: 11, RSSI: -82, Rate: 2, Last Seen (secs ago): 84
Bssid: 00:0b:0e:01:02:00, Vendor: 3Com, Type: intfr, Dst: ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
Last Rogue Status Check (secs ago): 3
The first line lists information for the client. The other lines list
information about the most recent 802.11 packet detected from the
client.
Table 100 and Table 101 describe the fields in these displays.
Table 100 display rfdetect clients Output
Field Description
Client MAC MAC address of the client.
Client Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the client.
AP MAC MAC address of the radio with which the rogue client is
associated.
AP Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the AP with which
the rogue client is associated.
Port/Radio/Channel Port number, radio number, and channel number of the
radio that detected the rogue. For a Distributed MAP,
the connection number is labeled dap. (This stands for
distributed ap.)
display rfdetect clients 537
NoL Number of listeners. This is the number of MAP radios
that detected the rogue client.
Type Classification of the rogue device:
rogue — Wireless device that is on the network but
is not supposed to be on the network.
intfr — Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.
known — Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Last seen Number of seconds since an MAP radio last detected
802.11 packets from the device.
Table 101 display rfdetect clients mac Output
Field Description
RSSI Received signal strength indication (RSSI)—the strength
of the RF signal detected by the MAP radio, in decibels
referred to 1 milliwatt (dBm).
Rate The data rate of the client.
Last Seen Number of seconds since an MAP radio last detected
802.11 packets from the device.
BSSID MAC address of the SSID with which the rogue client is
associated.
Vendor Company that manufactures or sells the AP with which
the rogue client is associated.
Typ Classification of the rogue device:
rogue—Wireless device that is on the network but is
not supposed to be on the network.
intfr—Wireless device that is not part of your
network and is not a rogue, but might be causing RF
interference with MAP radios.
known—Device that is a legitimate member of the
network.
Dst MAC addressed to which the last 802.11 packet
detected from the client was addressed.
Table 100 display rfdetect clients Output (continued)
Field Description
538 CHAPTER 17: RF DETECTION COMMANDS
Last Rogue Status Check Number of seconds since the WX switch looked on the
air for the AP with which the rogue client is associated.
The switch looks for the client’s AP by sending a packet
from the wired side of the network addressed to the
client, and watching the air for a wireless packet
containing the client’s MAC address.
Table 101 display rfdetect clients mac Output (continued)
Field Description
18 FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Use file management commands to manage system files and to display
software and boot information.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents file management commands alphabetically. Use
Table 102 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 102 File Management Commands by Usage
Type Command
Software Version reset system on page 554
display version on page 549
Boot Settings set boot partition on page 559
set boot configuration-file on page 558
display boot on page 547
clear boot config on page 541
File Management dir on page 545
copy on page 542
delete on page 544
mkdir on page 553
rmdir on page 556
Configuration File save config on page 557
load config on page 551
display config on page 548
System Backup
and Restore
backup on page 540
restore on page 555
540 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
backup Creates an archive of WX system files and optionally, user file, in Unix
tape archive (tar) format.
Syntax backup system [tftp:/ip-addr/]filename [all |
critical]
[tftp:/ip-addr/]filename — Name of the archive file to create.
You can store the file locally in the switch’s nonvolatile storage or on a
TFTP server.
all — Backs up system files and all the files in the user files area.
The user files area contains the set of files listed in the file section of
dir command output.
critical — Backs up system files only, including the configuration
file used when booting, and certificate files. The size of an archive
created by this option is generally 1MB or less.
Defaults — All.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.2.
Usage — You can create an archive located on a TFTP server or in the
switch’s nonvolatile storage. If you specify a TFTP server as part of the
filename, the archive is copied directly to the TFTP server and not stored
locally on the switch.
Use the critical option if you want to back up or restore only the
system-critical files required to operate and communicate with the
switch. Use the all option if you also want to back up or restore WebAAA
pages, backup configuration files, image files, and any other files stored
in the user files area of nonvolatile storage.
Neither option archives image files or any other files listed in the Boot
section of dir command output. The all option archives image files only if
they are present in the user files area.
Archive files created by the all option are larger than files created by the
critical option. The file size depends on the files in the user area, and the
file can be quite large if the user area contains image files.
clear boot config 541
The backup command places the boot configuration file into the archive.
(The boot configuration file is the Configured boot configuration in the
display boot command’s output.) If the running configuration contains
changes that have not been saved, these changes are not in the boot
configuration file and are not archived. To make sure the archive contains
the configuration that is currently running on the switch, use the
save config command to save the running configuration to the boot
configuration file, before using the backup command.
Examples — The following command creates an archive of the
system-critical files and copies the archive directly to a TFTP server. The
filename in this example includes a TFTP server IP address, so the archive
is not stored locally on the switch.
WX1200# backup system tftp:/10.10.20.9/sysa_bak critical
success: sent 28263 bytes in 0.324 seconds [ 87231 bytes/sec]
See Also
dir on page 545
restore on page 555
clear boot config Resets to the factory default the configuration that MSS loads during a
reboot.
Syntax — clear boot config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following commands back up the configuration file on
an WX switch, reset the switch to its factory default configuration, and
reboot the switch:
WX4400# copy configuration tftp://10.1.1.1/backupcfg
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]
WX4400# clear boot config
success: Reset boot config to factory defaults.
WX4400# reset system force
...... rebooting ......
542 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
See Also
display config on page 548
reset system on page 554
copy Performs the following copy operations:
Copies a file from a TFTP server to nonvolatile storage.
Copies a file from nonvolatile storage or temporary storage to a TFTP
server.
Copies a file from one area in nonvolatile storage to another.
Copies a file to a new filename in nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — copy source-url destination-url
source-url — Name and location of the file to copy. The uniform
resource locator (URL) can be one of the following:
[subdirname/]filename
file:[subdirname/]filename
tftp://ip-addr/[subdirname/]filename
tmp:filename
For the filename, specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,
with no spaces. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation.
The subdirname/ option specifies a subdirectory.
destination-url — Name of the copy and the location where to
place the copy. The URL can be one of the following:
[subdirname/]filename
file:[subdirname/]filename
tftp://ip-addr/[subdirname/]filename
If you are copying a system image file into nonvolatile storage, the
filename must include the boot partition name. You can specify one of
the following:
boot0:/filename
boot1:/filename
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
copy 543
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The filename and file:filename URLs are equivalent. You can
use either URL to refer to a file in an WX switch’s nonvolatile memory. The
tftp://ip-addr/filename URL refers to a file on a TFTP server. If DNS is
configured on the WX switch, you can specify a TFTP server’s hostname as
an alternative to specifying the IP address.
The tmp:filename URL specifies a file in temporary storage. You can copy
a file out of temporary storage but you cannot copy a file into temporary
storage. Temporary storage is reserved for use by MSS.
If you are copying a system image file into nonvolatile storage, the
filename must be preceded by the boot partition name, which can be
boot0 or boot1. Enter the filename as boot0:/filename or
boot1:/filename. You must specify the boot partition that was not used
to load the currently running image.
Examples — The following command copies a file called floorwx from
nonvolatile storage to a TFTP server:
WX4400# copy floorwx tftp://10.1.1.1/floorwx
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]
The following command copies a file called closetwx from a TFTP server to
nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/closetwx closetwx
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517
bytes/sec]
The following command copies system image WXA03001.Rel from a TFTP
server to boot partition 1 in nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.107/WXA03001.Rel
boot1:WXA03001.Rel
............................................................
................................................success:
received 9163214 bytes in 105.939 seconds [ 86495 byt
es/sec]
The following commands rename test-config to new-config by copying it
from one name to the other in the same location, then deleting
test-config:
WX4400# copy test-config new-config
544 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
WX4400# delete test-config
success: file deleted.
The following command copies file corpa-login.html from a TFTP server
into subdirectory corpa in an WX switch’s nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy tftp://10.1.1.1/corpa-login.html corpa/corpa-login.html
success: received 637 bytes in 0.253 seconds [ 2517 bytes/sec]
See Also
delete on page 544
dir on page 545
delete Deletes a file.
CAUTION: MSS does not prompt you to verify whether you want to
delete a file. When you press Enter after typing a delete command, MSS
immediately deletes the specified file.
MSS does not allow you to delete the currently running software image
file or the running configuration.
Syntax — delete url
url — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,
with no spaces.
If the file is in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name, followed
by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
subdir_a/file_a.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — You might want to copy the file to a TFTP server as a backup
before deleting the file.
dir 545
Examples — The following commands copy file testconfig to a TFTP
server and delete the file from nonvolatile storage:
WX4400# copy testconfig tftp://10.1.1.1/testconfig
success: sent 365 bytes in 0.401 seconds [ 910 bytes/sec]
WX4400# delete testconfig
success: file deleted.
The following commands delete file dang_doc from subdirectory dang:
WX4400# delete dang/dang_doc
success: file deleted.
See Also
copy on page 542
dir on page 545
dir Displays a list of the files in nonvolatile storage and temporary files.
Syntax — dir [subdirname]
subdirname — Subdirectory name. If you specify a subdirectory name,
the command lists the files in that subdirectory. Otherwise, the
command lists the files in the root directory and also lists the
subdirectories.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the files in the root
directory:
WX4400# dir
===============================================================================
file:
Filename Size Created
file:configuration 17 KB May 21 2004, 18:20:53
file:configuration.txt 379 bytes May 09 2004, 18:55:17
file:dangcfg 13 KB May 16 2004, 18:30:44
dangdir/ 512 bytes May 16 2004, 17:23:44
old/ 512 bytes Sep 23 2003, 21:58:48
Total: 32 Kbytes used, 207824 Kbytes free
546 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
===============================================================================
Boot:
Filename Size Created
*boot0:bload 746 KB May 09 2004, 19:02:16
*boot0:WXA03002.Rel 8182 KB May 09 2004, 18:58:16
boot1:WXA03001.Rel 8197 KB May 21 2004, 18:01:02
Boot0: Total: 8928 Kbytes used, 3312 Kbytes free
Boot1: Total: 8197 Kbytes used, 4060 Kbytes free
===============================================================================
temporary files:
Filename Size Created
Total: 0 bytes used, 93537 Kbytes free
Total: 15 Kbytes used, 90941 Kbytes free
The following command displays the files in the old subdirectory:
WX4400# dir old
===============================================================================
file:
Filename Size Created
file:configuration.txt 3541 bytes Sep 22 2003, 22:55:44
file:configuration.xml 24 KB Sep 22 2003, 22:55:44
Total: 27 Kbytes used, 207824 Kbytes free
Table 103 describes the fields in the dir output.
See Also
copy on page 542
delete on page 544
Table 103 Output for dir
Field Description
Filename Filename or subdirectory name.
For files, the directory name is shown in front of the filename (for
example, file:configuration). The file: directory is the root directory.
For subdirectories, a forward slash is shown at the end of the
subdirectory name (for example, old/ ).
In the boot partitions list (Boot:), an asterisk (*) indicates the boot partition
from which the currently running image was loaded and the image filename.
Size Size in Kbytes or bytes.
Created System time and date when the file was created or copied onto the
switch.
Total Number of kilobytes in use to store files and the number that are still free.
display boot 547
display boot Displays the system image and configuration filenames used after the last
reboot and configured for use after the next reboot.
Syntax — display boot
Defaults — None.
Access — Access.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command shows the boot information for a
WX switch:
WX1200# display boot
Configured boot image: boot0:WXB03002.Rel
Configured boot configuration: file:newconfig
Booted version: 3.0.1
Booted image: boot1:WXB03001.Rel
Booted configuration: file:configuration
Product model: WX1200
Table 104 describes the fields in the display boot output.
See Also
display version on page 549
reset system on page 554
set boot configuration-file on page 558
Table 104 Output for display boot
Field Description
Configured boot
image Boot partition and image filename MSS will use to boot next
time the software is rebooted.
Configured boot
configuration Configuration filename MSS will use to boot next time the
software is rebooted.
Booted version Software version the switch is running.
Booted image Boot partition and image filename MSS used the last time
the software was rebooted. MSS is running this software
image.
Booted configuration Configuration filename MSS used to load the configuration
the last time the software was rebooted.
548 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
display config Displays the configuration running on the WX switch.
Syntax — display config [area area] [all]
area area — Configuration area. You can specify one of the
following:
aaa
acls
ap
arp
eapol
httpd
ip
ip-config
log
mobility-domain
ntp
portconfig
portgroup
radio-profile
rfdetect
service-profile
sm
snmp
snoop
spantree
system
trace
vlan
vlan-fdb
If you do not specify a configuration area, nondefault information for
all areas is displayed.
all — Includes configuration items that are set to their default values.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
display version 549
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0. In MSS Version 4.0, option
snoop added for remote traffic monitoring, and rfdevice was changed to
rfdetect.
Usage — If you do not use one of the optional parameters, configuration
commands that set nondefault values are displayed for all configuration
areas. If you specify an area, commands are displayed for that area only. If
you use the all option, the display also includes commands for
configuration items that are set to their default values.
Examples — The following command shows configuration information
for VLANs:
WX4400# display config area vlan
# Configuration nvgen'd at 2004-5-21 19:36:48
# Image 3.0.0
# Model WX4400
# Last change occurred at 2004-5-21 18:20:50
set vlan 1 port 1
See Also
load config on page 551
save config on page 557
display version Displays software and hardware version information for an WX switch
and, optionally, for any attached MAP access points.
Syntax — display version [details]
details — Includes additional software build information and
information about the MAP access points configured on the WX
switch.
Defaults — None
Access — All.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
550 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command displays version information for a
WX switch:
WX1200# display version
Mobility System Software, Version: 3.0.1
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Build Information: (build#168) TOP 2004-09-23 08:35:00
Model: WX1200
Hardware
Mainboard: version 1 ; FPGA version 0
PoE board: version 0 ; FPGA version 0
Serial number M8WE48BB8C7A0
Flash: 3.0.0.549 - md0a
Kernel: 3.0.0#130: Thu Sep 23 05:45:24 PDT 2004
BootLoader: 1.4 / 3.0.2
The following command displays additional software build information
and MAP access point information:
WX1200# display version details
Mobility System Software, Version: 3.0.1
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Build Information: (build#168) TOP 2004-09-23 08:35:00
Label: 3.0.1_092304_WX1200
Build Suffix: -d-O1-3com
Model: WX1200
Hardware
Mainboard: version 1 ; FPGA version 0
CPU Model: 405EP (Revision 9.80)
PoE board: version 0 ; FPGA version 0
Serial number M8WE48BB8C7A0
Flash: 3.0.1 - md0a
Kernel: 3.0.1#130: Thu Sep 23 05:45:24 PDT 2004
BootLoader: 1.4 / 3.0.2
Port/DAP AP Model Serial # Versions
-------- ---------- ----------- ------------------------
- /1 AP2750 M9DE48B012F00 H/W : A3
F/W1 : 4.2
F/W2 : N/A
S/W : 3.0.1_092304_WX1200
BOOT S/W : 3.0.1_090304
- /2 AP2750 M9DE48B123400 H/W : 4
load config 551
F/W1 : 4.2
F/W2 : 4.2
S/W : 3.0.1_092304_WX1200
BOOT S/W : 3.0.1_082504
Table 105 describes the fields in the display version output.
See Also
display boot on page 547
load config Loads configuration commands from a file and replaces the WX switch’s
running configuration with the commands in the loaded file.
CAUTION: This command completely removes the running configuration
and replaces it with the configuration contained in the file. 3Com
recommends that you save a copy of the current running configuration to
a backup configuration file before loading a new configuration.
Table 105 Output for display version
Field Description
Build Information Factory timestamp of the image file.
Label Software version and build date.
Build Suffix Build suffix.
Model Build model.
Hardware Version information for the WX switch’s motherboard and
Power over Ethernet (PoE) board.
Serial number Serial number of the WX switch.
Flash Flash memory version.
Kernel Kernel version.
BootLoader Boot code version.
Port/DAP Port number connected to an MAP access point.
AP Model MAP model number.
Serial # MAP serial number.
Versions MAP hardware, firmware, and software versions.
552 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Syntax — load config [url]
url — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric characters,
with no spaces.
If the file is in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name, followed
by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — The default file location is nonvolatile storage.
The current version supports loading a configuration file only from the
switch’s nonvolatile storage. You cannot load a configuration file directly
from a TFTP server.
If you do not specify a filename, MSS uses the same configuration
filename that was used for the previous configuration load. For example,
if the WX switch used configuration for the most recent configuration
load, MSS uses configuration again unless you specify a different
filename. To display the filename of the configuration file MSS loaded
during the last reboot, use the display boot command.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command completely replaces the running configuration
with the configuration in the file.
Examples — The following command reloads the configuration from the
most recently loaded configuration file:
WX4400# load config
Reloading configuration may result in lost of connectivity,
do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: Configuration reloaded
The following command loads configuration file testconfig1:
WX4400# load config testconfig1
Reloading configuration may result in lost of connectivity,
do you wish to continue? (y/n) [n]y
success: Configuration reloaded
mkdir 553
See Also
display boot on page 547
display config on page 548
save config on page 557
mkdir Creates a new subdirectory in nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — mkdir [subdirname]
subdirname — Subdirectory name. Specify between 1 and 32
alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following commands create a subdirectory called corp2
and display the root directory to verify the result:
WX4400# mkdir corp2
success: change accepted.
WX4400# dir
===============================================================================
file:
Filename Size Created
file:configuration 17 KB May 21 2004, 18:20:53
file:configuration.txt 379 bytes May 09 2004, 18:55:17
corp2/ 512 bytes May 21 2004, 19:22:09
corp_a/ 512 bytes May 21 2004, 19:15:48
file:dangcfg 13 KB May 16 2004, 18:30:44
dangdir/ 512 bytes May 16 2004, 17:23:44
old/ 512 bytes Sep 23 2003, 21:58:48
Total: 33 Kbytes used, 207822 Kbytes free
===============================================================================
Boot:
Filename Size Created
*boot0:bload 746 KB May 09 2004, 19:02:16
*boot0:WXA03002.Rel 8182 KB May 09 2004, 18:58:16
boot1:WXA03001.Rel 8197 KB May 21 2004, 18:01:02
Boot0: Total: 8928 Kbytes used, 3312 Kbytes free
Boot1: Total: 8197 Kbytes used, 4060 Kbytes free
554 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
===============================================================================
temporary files:
Filename Size Created
Total: 0 bytes used, 93537 Kbytes free
See Also
dir on page 545
rmdir on page 556
reset system Restarts an WX switch and reboots the software.
Syntax — reset system [force]
force — Immediately restarts the system and reboots, without
comparing the running configuration to the configuration file.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you do not use the force option, the command first
compares the running configuration to the configuration file. If the
running configuration and configuration file do not match, MSS does not
restart the WX switch but instead displays a message advising you to
either save the configuration changes or use the force option.
Examples — The following command restarts an WX switch that does
not have any unsaved configuration changes:
WX4400# reset system
This will reset the entire system. Are you sure (y/n)y
The following commands attempt to restart an WX switch with a running
configuration that has unsaved changes, and then force the switch to
restart:
WX4400# reset system
error: Cannot reset, due to unsaved configuration changes.
Use "reset system force" to override.
WX4400# reset system force
...... rebooting ......
restore 555
See Also
display boot on page 547
display version on page 549
save config on page 557
restore Unzips a system archive created by the backup command and copies the
files from the archive onto the switch.
Syntax — restore system [tftp:/ip-addr/]filename [all |
critical]
[tftp:/ip-addr/]filename — Name of the archive file to load. The
archive can be located in the switch’s nonvolatile storage or on a TFTP
server.
all — Restores system files and the user files from the archive.
critical — Restores system files only, including the configuration file
used when booting, and certificate files.
force — Replaces files on the switch with those in the archive, even if
the switch is not the same as the one from which the archive was
created.
CAUTION: Do not use this option unless advised to do so by 3Com TAC.
If you restore one switch’s system files onto another switch, you must
generate new key pairs and certificates on the switch.
Defaults — Critical.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.2.
Usage — If a file in the archive has a counterpart on the switch, the archive
version of the file replaces the file on the switch. The restore command does
not delete files that do not have counterparts in the archive. For example, the
command does not completely replace the user files area. Instead, files in the
archive are added to the user files area. A file in the user area is replaced only
if the archive contains a file with the same name.
556 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
If the archive’s files cannot fit on the switch, the restore operation fails.
3Com recommends deleting unneeded image files before creating or
restoring an archive.
The backup command stores the MAC address of the switch in the
archive. By default, the restore command works only if the MAC address
in the archive matches the MAC address of the switch where the restore
command is entered. The force option overrides this restriction and
allows you to unpack one switch’s archive onto another switch.
CAUTION: Do not use the force option unless you are certain you want
to replace the switch’s files with files from another switch. If you restore
one switch’s system files onto another switch, you must generate new
key pairs and certificates on the switch.
If the configuration running on the switch is different from the one in the
archive or you renamed the configuration file, and you want to retain
changes that were made after the archive was created, see the
“Managing System Files” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch and
Controller Configuration Guide.
Examples — The following command restores system-critical files on a
switch, from archive sysa_bak.
WX1200# restore system tftp:/10.10.20.9/sysa_bak
success: received 11908 bytes in 0.150 seconds [ 79386 bytes/sec]
success: restore complete.
See Also
backup on page 540
rmdir Removes a subdirectory from nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — rmdir [subdirname]
subdirname — Subdirectory name. Specify between 1 and 32
alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
save config 557
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — MSS does not allow the subdirectory to be removed unless it is
empty. Delete all files from the subdirectory before attempting to remove
it.
Examples — The following example removes subdirectory corp2:
WX4400# rmdir corp2
success: change accepted.
See Also
dir on page 545
mkdir on page 553
save config Saves the running configuration to a configuration file.
Syntax — save config [filename]
filename — Name of the configuration file. Specify between 1 and
128 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
To save the file in a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name,
followed by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — By default, MSS saves the running configuration as the
configuration filename used during the last reboot.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you do not specify a filename, MSS replaces the
configuration file loaded during the most recent reboot. To display the
filename of the configuration file MSS loaded during the most recent
reboot, use the display boot command.
The command completely replaces the specified configuration file with
the running configuration.
558 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command saves the running configuration to
the configuration file loaded during the most recent reboot. In this
example, the filename used during the most recent reboot is
configuration.
WX4400# save config
Configuration saved to configuration.
The following command saves the running configuration to a file named
testconfig1:
WX4400# save config testconfig1
Configuration saved to testconfig1.
See Also
display boot on page 547
display config on page 548
load config on page 551
set boot
configuration-file
Changes the configuration file to load after rebooting.
Syntax — set boot configuration-file filename
filename — Filename. Specify between 1 and 128 alphanumeric
characters, with no spaces.
To load the file from a subdirectory, specify the subdirectory name,
followed by a forward slash, in front of the filename. For example:
backup_configs/config_c.
Defaults — The default configuration filename is configuration.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The file must be located in the switch’s nonvolatile storage.
Examples — The following command sets the boot configuration file to
testconfig1:
WX4400# set boot configuration-file testconfig1
success: boot config set.
set boot partition 559
set boot partition Specifies the boot partition in which to look for the system image file
following the next system reset, software reload, or power cycle.
Syntax — set boot partition {boot0 | boot1}
boot0 — Boot partition 0.
boot1 — Boot partition 1.
Defaults — By default, an WX switch uses the same boot partition for
the next software reload that was used to boot the currently running
image.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To determine the boot partition that was used to load the
currently running software image, use the dir command.
Examples — The following command sets the boot partition for the next
software reload to partition 1:
WX4400# set boot partition boot1
success: Boot partition set to boot1.
See Also
copy on page 542
dir on page 545
reset system on page 554
560 CHAPTER 18: FILE MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
19 TRACE COMMANDS
Use trace commands to perform diagnostic routines. While MSS allows
you to run many types of traces, this chapter describes commands for
those traces you are most likely to use. For a complete listing of the types
of traces MSS allows, type the set trace ? command.
CAUTION: Using the set trace command can have adverse effects on
system performance. 3Com recommends that you use the lowest levels
possible for initial trace commands, and slowly increase the levels to get
the data you need.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents trace commands alphabetically. Use Table 106 to
locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 106 Trace Commands by Usage
Type Command
Trace set trace sm on page 567
set trace dot1x on page 566
set trace authentication on page 564
set trace authorization on page 565
display trace on page 563
save trace on page 564
clear trace on page 562
clear log trace on page 562
562 CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS
clear log trace Deletes the log messages stored in the trace buffer.
Syntax — clear log trace
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To delete the trace log, type the following command:
WX4400# clear log trace
See Also
display log buffer on page 582
set log on page 586
clear trace Deletes running trace commands and ends trace processes.
Syntax — clear trace {trace-area | all}
trace-area — Ends a particular trace process. Specify one of the
following keywords to end the traces documented in this chapter:
authorization — Ends an authorization trace
dot1x — Ends an 802.1X trace
authentication — Ends an authentication trace
sm — Ends a session manager trace
all — Ends all trace processes.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To clear all trace processes, type the following command:
WX4400# clear trace all
success: clear trace all
display trace 563
To clear the session manager trace, type the following command:
WX4400# clear trace sm
success: clear trace sm
See Also
display trace on page 563
set trace authentication on page 564
set trace authorization on page 565
set trace dot1x on page 566
set trace sm on page 567
display trace Displays information about traces that are currently configured on the
WX switch, or all possible trace options.
Syntax — display trace [all]
all — Displays all possible trace options and their configuration.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To view the traces currently running, type the following
command:
WX4400# display trace
milliseconds spent printing traces: 1885.614
Trace Area Level Mac User Port Filter
-------------------- ----- ----------------- ----------------- ---- --------
dot1x 5 0
sm 5 0
See Also
clear trace on page 562
set trace authentication on page 564
set trace authorization on page 565
set trace dot1x on page 566
set trace sm on page 567
564 CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS
save trace Saves the accumulated trace data for enabled traces to a file in the WX
switch’s nonvolatile storage.
Syntax — save trace filename
filename — Name for the trace file. To save the file in a subdirectory,
specify the subdirectory name, then a slash. For example: traces/trace1
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To save trace data into the file trace1 in the subdirectory
traces, type the following command:
WX4400# save trace traces/trace1
set trace
authentication
Traces authentication information.
Syntax — set trace authentication [mac-addr mac-address]
[port port-num] [user username] [level level]
mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
32 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in
the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
set trace authorization 565
Examples — The following command starts a trace for information
about user jose’s authentication:
WX4400# set trace authentication user jose
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear trace on page 562
display trace on page 563
set trace
authorization
Traces authorization information.
Syntax — set trace authorization [mac-addr mac-address]
[port port-num] [user username] [level level]
mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX a port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in the
output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where level 10
provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide user-readable
information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command starts a trace for information for
authorization for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace authorization mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear trace on page 562
display trace on page 563
566 CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS
set trace dot1x Traces 802.1X sessions.
Syntax — set trace dot1x [mac-addr mac-address] [port port-num]
[user username] [level level]
mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
80 alphanumeric characters with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in
the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command starts a trace for the 802.1X
sessions for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace dot1x mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05:
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear trace on page 562
display trace on page 563
set trace sm 567
set trace sm Traces session manager activity.
Syntax — set trace sm [mac-addr mac-address] [port port-num]
[user username] [level level]
mac-addr mac-address — Traces a MAC address. Specify a MAC
address, using colons to separate the octets (for example,
00:11:22:aa:bb:cc).
port port-num — Traces on a WX port number.
user username — Traces a user. Specify a username of up to
80 alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
level level — Determines the quantity of information included in
the output. You can set the level with an integer from 1 to 10, where
level 10 provides the most information. Levels 1 through 5 provide
user-readable information. If you do not specify a level, level 5 is the
default.
Defaults — The default trace level is 5.a
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to trace session manager
activity for MAC address 00:01:02:03:04:05:
WX4400# set trace sm mac-addr 00:01:02:03:04:05:
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear trace on page 562
display trace on page 563
568 CHAPTER 19: TRACE COMMANDS
20 SNOOP COMMANDS
Use snoop commands to monitor wireless traffic, by using a Distributed
MAP as a sniffing device. The MAP copies the sniffed 802.11 packets and
sends the copies to an observer, which is typically a protocol analyzer
such as Ethereal or Tethereal.
(For more information, including setup instructions for the monitoring
station, see the “Remotely Monitoring Traffic” section in the
“Troubleshooting an WX Switch” chapter of the Wireless LAN Switch
Configuration Guide.)
This chapter presents snoop commands alphabetically. Use the following
table to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 107 Snoop Commands by Usage
Remote monitoring
(snooping)
set snoop on page 571
display snoop info on page 577
clear snoop on page 570
set snoop map on page 574
display snoop map on page 577
display snoop on page 576
clear snoop map on page 570
set snoop mode on page 575
display snoop stats on page 578
570 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
clear snoop Deletes a snoop filter.
Syntax — clear snoop filter-name
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command deletes snoop filter snoop1:
WX1200# clear snoop snoop1
See Also
set snoop on page 571
display snoop info on page 577
clear snoop map Removes a snoop filter from an MAP radio.
clear snoop map filter-name dap dap-num radio {1 | 2}
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to which to snoop filter is
mapped.
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command removes snoop filter snoop2
from radio 2 on Distributed MAP 3:
WX1200# clear snoop map snoop2 dap 3 radio 2
success: change accepted.
set snoop 571
The following command removes all snoop filter mappings from all
radios:
WX1200# clear snoop map all
success: change accepted.
See Also
set snoop map on page 574
display snoop on page 576
display snoop map on page 577
set snoop Configures a snoop filter.
set snoop filter-name [condition-list] [observer ip-addr]
[snap-length num]
filter-name — Name for the filter. The name can be up to 32
alphanumeric characters, with no spaces.
condition-list — Match criteria for packets. Conditions in the list
are ANDed. Therefore, to be copied and sent to an observer, a packet
must match all criteria in the condition-list. You can specify up to
eight of the following conditions in a filter, in any order or
combination:
frame-type {eq | neq} {beacon | control | data |
management | probe}
channel {eq | neq} channel
bssid {eq | neq} bssid
src-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr
dest-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr
host-mac {eq | neq} mac-addr
mac-pair mac-addr1 mac-addr2
To match on packets to or from a specific MAC address, use the
dest-mac or src-mac option. To match on both send and receive
traffic for a host address, use the host-mac option. To match on a
traffic flow (source and destination MAC addresses), use the mac-pair
option. This option matches for either direction of a flow, and either
MAC address can be the source or destination address.
572 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
If you omit a condition, all packets match that condition. For example,
if you omit frame-type, all frame types match the filter.
For most conditions, you can use eq (equal) to match only on traffic
that matches the condition value. Use neq (not equal) to match only
on traffic that is not equal to the condition value.
observer ip-addr — Specifies the IP address of the station where
the protocol analyzer is located. If you do not specify an observer, the
MAP radio still counts the packets that match the filter.
snap-length num — Specifies the maximum number of bytes to
capture. If you do not specify a length, the entire packet is copied and
sent to the observer. 3Com recommends specifying a snap length of
100 bytes or less.
Defaults — No snoop filters are configured by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — Traffic that matches a snoop filter is copied after it is
decrypted. The decrypted (clear) version is sent to the observer.
For best results:
Do not specify an observer that is associated with the MAP where the
snoop filter is running. This configuration causes an endless cycle of
snoop traffic.
set snoop 573
If the snoop filter is running on a Distributed MAP, and the MAP used
a DHCP server in its local subnet to configure its IP information, and
the MAP did not receive a default gateway address as a result, the
observer must also be in the same subnet. Without a default gateway,
the MAP cannot find the observer.
The MAP that is running a snoop filter forwards snooped packets
directly to the observer. This is a one-way communication, from the
MAP to the observer. If the observer is not present, the MAP still sends
the snoop packets, which use bandwidth. If the observer is present
but is not listening to TZSP traffic, the observer continuously sends
ICMP error indications back to the MAP. These ICMP messages can
affect network and MAP performance.
Examples — The following command configures a snoop filter named
snoop1 that matches on all traffic, and copies the traffic to the device
that has IP address 10.10.30.2:
WX1200# set snoop snoop1 observer 10.10.30.2 snap-length 100
The following command configures a snoop filter named snoop2 that
matches on all data traffic between the device with MAC address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff and the device with MAC address 11:22:33:44:55:66,
and copies the traffic to the device that has IP address 10.10.30.3:
WX1200# set snoop snoop2 frame-type eq data mac-pair
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff 11:22:33:44:55:66 observer 10.10.30.3
snap-length 100
See Also
clear snoop on page 570
set snoop map on page 574
set snoop mode on page 575
display snoop info on page 577
display snoop stats on page 578
574 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
set snoop map Maps a snoop filter to a radio on a Distributed MAP. A snoop filter does
take effect until you map it to a radio and enable the filter.
Examples — set snoop map filter-name dap dap-num radio {1 | 2}
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
dap-num —Number of a Distributed MAP to which to map the snoop
filter.
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
Defaults — Snoop filters are unmapped by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — You can map the same filter to more than one radio. You can
map up to eight filters to the same radio. If more than one filter has the
same observer, the MAP sends only one copy of a packet that matches a
filter to the observer. After the first match, the MAP sends the packet and
stops comparing the packet against other filters for the same observer.
If the filter does not have an observer, the MAP still maintains a counter
of the number of packets that match the filter. (See display snoop stats
on page 578.)
Examples — The following command maps snoop filter snoop1 to radio
2 on Distributed MAP 3:
WX1200# set snoop map snoop1 dap 3 radio 2
success: change accepted.
set snoop mode 575
See Also
clear snoop map on page 570
set snoop on page 571
set snoop mode on page 575
display snoop map on page 577
display snoop stats on page 578
set snoop mode Enables a snoop filter. A snoop filter does not take effect until you map it
to an MAP radio and enable the filter.
set snoop {filter-name | all}
mode {enable [stop-after num-pkts] | disable}
filter-name | all — Name of the snoop filter. Specify all to enable
all snoop filters.
enable [stop-after num-pkts] — Enables the snoop filter.
The stop-after option disables the filter after the specified number of
packets match the filter. Without the stop-after option, the filter
operates until you disable it or until the MAP is restarted.
disable — Disables the snoop filter.
Defaults — Snoop filters are disabled by default.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The filter mode is not retained if you change the filter
configuration or disable and reenable the radio, or when the MAP or the
WX switch is restarted. You must reenable the filter to place it back into
effect.
Examples — The following command enables snoop filter snoop1, and
configures the filter to stop after 5000 packets match the filter:
WX1200 set snoop snoop1 mode enable stop-after 5000
success: filter 'snoop1' enabled
See Also
576 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
display snoop on page 576
display snoop info on page 577
display snoop map on page 577
display snoop stats on page 578
display snoop Displays the MAP radio mapping for all snoop filters.
Syntax — display snoop
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — To display the mappings for a specific MAP radio, use the
display snoop map command.
Examples — The following command shows the MAP radio mappings
for all snoop filters configured on a WX switch:
WX1200# display snoop
Dap: 3 Radio: 2
snoop1
snoop2
Dap: 2 Radio: 2
snoop2
See Also
clear snoop map on page 570
set snoop map on page 574
display snoop map on page 577
display snoop info 577
display snoop info Shows the configured snoop filters.
Syntax — display snoop filter-name
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Examples — The following command shows the snoop filters configured
in the examples above:
WX1200# display snoop info
snoop1:
observer 10.10.30.2 snap-length 100
all packets
snoop2:
observer 10.10.30.3 snap-length 100
frame-type eq data
mac-pair (aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, 11:22:33:44:55:66)
See Also
clear snoop on page 570
set snoop on page 571
display snoop map Shows the MAP radios that are mapped to a specific snoop filter.
Syntax — display snoop map filter-name
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
578 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
Usage — To display the mappings for all snoop filters, use the display
snoop command.
Examples — The following command shows the mapping for snoop
filter snoop1:
WX1200# display snoop map snoop1
filter 'snoop1' mapping
Dap: 3 Radio: 2
See Also
clear snoop map on page 570
set snoop map on page 574
display snoop on page 576
display snoop stats Displays statistics for enabled snoop filters.
Examples — display snoop stats [filter-name [dap-num [radio
{1 | 2}]]]
filter-name — Name of the snoop filter.
dap-num — Number of a Distributed MAP to which the snoop filter is
mapped.
radio 1 — Radio 1 of the MAP.
radio 2 — Radio 2 of the MAP. (This option does not apply to
single-radio models.)
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 4.0.
Usage — The MAP retains statistics for a snoop filter until the filter is
changed or disabled. The MAP then clears the statistics.
display snoop stats 579
Examples — The following command shows statistics for snoop filter
snoop1:
WX1200# display snoop stats snoop1
Filter Dap Radio Rx Match Tx Match Dropped Stop-After
=========================================================================
snoop 3 1 96 4 0 stopped
Table 108 describes the fields in this display.
Table 108 display snoop stats Output
Field Description
Filter Name of the snoop filter.
Dap Distributed MAP containing the radio to which the filter is
mapped.
Radio Radio to which the filter is mapped.
Rx Match Number of packets received by the radio that match the
filter.
Tx Match Number of packets sent by the radio that match the filter.
Dropped Number of packets that matched the filter but that were not
copied to the observer due to memory or network problems.
Stop-After Filter state:
running—enabled
stopped—disabled
number-of-packets—If the filter is running and the
stop-after option was used to stop the filter, this field
displays the number of packets that still need to match
before the filter is stopped.
580 CHAPTER : SNOOP COMMANDS
21 SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
Use the system log commands to record information for monitoring and
troubleshooting. MSS system logs are based on RFC 3164, which defines
the log protocol.
Commands by
Usage
This chapter present system log commands alphabetically. Use Table 109
to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
clear log Clears the log messages stored in the log buffer, or removes the
configuration for a syslog server and stops sending log messages to that
server.
Syntax — clear log [buffer | server ip-addr]
buffer — Deletes the log messages stored in nonvolatile storage.
server ip-addr — Deletes the configuration for and stops sending
log messages to the syslog server at this IP address. Specify an address
in dotted decimal notation.
Defaults — None.
Table 109 System Log Commands by Usage
Type Command
System Logs set log on page 586
set log trace mbytes on page 589
display log config on page 584
display log buffer on page 582
display log trace on page 585
clear log on page 581
582 CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To stop sending system logging messages to a server at
192.168.253.11, type the following command:
WX4400# clear log server 192.168.253.11
success: change accepted.
Type the following command to clear all messages from the log buffer:
WX4400# clear log buffer
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear log trace on page 562
set log on page 586
display log buffer Displays system information stored in the nonvolatile log buffer or the
trace buffer.
Syntax — display log buffer [{+|-}number-of-messages]
[facility facility-name] [matching string]
[severity severity-level]
buffer — Displays the log messages in nonvolatile storage.
+|-number-of-messages — Displays the number of messages
specified as follows:
A positive number (for example, +100), displays that number of log
entries starting from the oldest in the log.
A negative number (for example, -100) displays that number of log
entries starting from newest in the log.
facility facility-name — Area of MSS that is sending the log
message. Type a space and a question mark (?) after display log
buffer facility for a list of valid facilities.
matching string — Displays messages that match a string—for
example, a username or IP address.
display log buffer 583
severity severity-level — Displays messages at a severity level
greater than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the
following:
emergency — The WX switch is unusable.
alert — Action must be taken immediately.
critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.
error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.
warning — A possible problem exists.
notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have
occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.
info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.
debug — Output from debugging.
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — The debug level produces a lot of messages, many of which
can appear to be somewhat cryptic. Debug messages are used primarily
by 3Com for troubleshooting and are not intended for administrator use.
Examples — Type the following command to see the facilities for which
you can view event messages archived in the buffer:
WX4400# display log buffer facility ?
<facility name> Select one of: KERNEL, AAA, SYSLOGD, ACL, APM, ARP,
ASO, BOOT, CLI, CLUSTER, COPP, CRYPTO, DOT1X, ENCAP, ETHERNET, GATEWAY, HTTPD,
IGMP, IP, MISC, NOSE, NP, RAND, RESOLV, RIB, ROAM, ROGUE, SM, SNMPD, SPAN, STORE,
SYS, TAGMGR, TBRIDGE, TCPSSL, TELNET, TFTP, TLS, TUNNEL, VLAN, X509, XML, MAP,
RAPDA, WEBVIEW, EAP, PORTCONFIG, FP.
The following command displays logged messages for the AAA facility:
WX4400# display log buffer facility AAA
AAA Jun. 25 09:11:32.579848 ERROR AAA_NOTIFY_ERR: AAA got SM
special event (98) on locality 3950 which is gone
584 CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
See Also
clear log on page 581
display log config on page 584
display log config Displays log configuration information.
Syntax — display log config
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display how logging is configured, type the following
command:
WX4400# display log config
Logging console: disabled
Logging console severity: DEBUG
Logging sessions: disabled
Logging sessions severity: INFO
Logging buffer: enabled
Logging buffer severity: WARNING
Logging trace: enabled
Logging trace severity: DEBUG
Logging buffer size: 10485760 bytes
Logging server: 10.1.1.10 severity DEBUG
Current session: disabled
Current session severity: INFO
See Also
set log on page 586
clear log on page 581
display log trace 585
display log trace Displays system information stored in the nonvolatile log buffer or the
trace buffer.
Syntax — display log trace [{+|-|/}number-of-messages]
[facility facility-name] [matching string]
[severity severity-level]
trace — Displays the log messages in the trace buffer.
+|-|/number-of-messages — Displays the number of messages
specified as follows:
A positive number (for example, +100), displays that number of log
entries starting from the oldest in the log.
A negative number (for example, -100) displays that number of log
entries starting from newest in the log.
A number preceded by a slash (for example, /100) displays that
number of the most recent log entries in the log, starting with the
least recent.
facility facility-name — Area of MSS that is sending the log
message. Type a space and a question mark (?) after display log
trace facility for a list of valid facilities.
matching string — Displays messages that match a string—for
example, a username or IP address.
severity severity-level — Displays messages at a severity level
greater than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the
following:
emergency — The WX switch is unusable.
alert — Action must be taken immediately.
critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.
error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.
warning — A possible problem exists.
notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have
occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.
info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.
debug — Output from debugging.
586 CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
Defaults — None.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — Type the following command to see the facilities for which
you can view event messages archived in the buffer:
WX4400# display log trace facility ?
<facility name> Select one of: KERNEL, AAA, SYSLOGD, ACL, APM, ARP,
ASO, BOOT, CLI, CLUSTER, COPP, CRYPTO, DOT1X, ENCAP, ETHERNET, GATEWAY, HTTPD,
IGMP, IP, MISC, NOSE, NP, RAND, RESOLV, RIB, ROAM, ROGUE, SM, SNMPD, SPAN, STORE,
SYS, TAGMGR, TBRIDGE, TCPSSL, TELNET, TFTP, TLS, TUNNEL, VLAN, X509, XML, MAP,
RAPDA, WEBVIEW, EAP, PORTCONFIG, FP.
See Also
clear log on page 581
display log config on page 584
set log Enables or disables logging of WX and MAP events to the WX log buffer
or other logging destination and sets the level of the events logged. For
logging to a syslog server only, you can also set the facility logged.
Syntax — set log { buffer | console | current | server ip-addr
| sessions | trace} [severity severity-level] enable | disable]
Syntax — set log server ip-addr [severity severity-level
[local-facility facility-level]] [enable | disable]
buffer — Sets log parameters for the log buffer in nonvolatile
storage.
console — Sets log parameters for console sessions.
current — Sets log parameters for the current Telnet or console
session. These settings are not stored in nonvolatile memory.
server ip-addr — Sets log parameters for a syslog server. Specify an
address in dotted decimal notation.
set log 587
sessions — Sets the default log values for Telnet sessions. You can
set defaults for the following log parameters:
Severity
Logging state (enabled or disabled)
To override the session defaults for an individual session, type the set
log command from within the session and use the current option.
trace — Sets log parameters for trace files.
severity severity-level — Logs events at a severity level greater
than or equal to the level specified. Specify one of the following:
emergency — The WX switch is unusable.
alert — Action must be taken immediately.
critical — You must resolve the critical conditions. If the
conditions are not resolved, the WX can reboot or shut down.
error — The WX is missing data or is unable to form a connection.
warning — A possible problem exists.
notice — Events that potentially can cause system problems have
occurred. These are logged for diagnostic purposes. No action is
required.
info — Informational messages only. No problem exists.
debug — Output from debugging.
local-facility facility-level — For messages sent to a syslog
server, maps all messages of the severity you specify to one of the
standard local log facilities defined in RFC 3164. You can specify one
of the following values:
0 — maps all messages to local0.
1 — maps all messages to local1.
2 — maps all messages to local2.
3 — maps all messages to local3.
4 — maps all messages to local4.
5 — maps all messages to local5.
6 — maps all messages to local6.
7 — maps all messages to local7.
588 CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
If you do not specify a local facility, MSS sends the messages with their
default MSS facilities. For example, AAA messages are sent with
facility 4 and boot messages are sent with facility 20 by default.
enable — Enables messages to the specified target.
disable — Disables messages to the specified target.
Defaults — The following are defaults for the set log commands.
Events at the error level and higher are logged to the WX console.
Events at the error level and higher are logged to the WX system
buffer.
Trace logging is enabled, and debug-level output is stored in the WX
trace buffer.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Using the command with only enable or disable turns logging
on or off for the target at all levels. For example, entering set log buffer
enable with no other keywords turns on logging to the system buffer of
all facilities at all levels. Entering set log buffer disable with no other
keywords turns off all logging to the buffer.
Examples — To log only emergency, alert, and critical system events to
the console, type the following command:
WX4400# set log console severity critical enable
success: change accepted.
See Also
clear log on page 581
display log config on page 584
set log trace mbytes 589
set log trace
mbytes
Changes the size of trace log files.
Syntax — set log trace mbytes count
count — Size of the trace buffer, in megabytes (MB). You can specify
from 1 through 50.
Defaults — The default trace buffer size is 1 MB.
Access — Enabled.
History — Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command increases the trace buffer size to
4MB:
WX4400# set log trace mbytes 4
success: change accepted.
See Also
display log config on page 584
590 CHAPTER 21: SYSTEM LOG COMMANDS
22 BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Boot prompt commands enable you to perform basic tasks, including
booting a system image file, from the boot prompt (boot>). A CLI session
enters the boot prompt if MSS does not boot successfully or you
intentionally interrupt the boot process. To interrupt the boot process,
press q followed by Enter (return).
CAUTION: Generally, boot prompt commands are used only for
troubleshooting. 3Com recommends that you use these commands only
when working with 3Com Technical Support to diagnose a system issue.
In particular, commands that change boot parameters can interfere with
a WX switch’s ability to boot successfully.
Boot Prompt
Commands by
Usage
This chapter presents boot prompt commands alphabetically. Use
Table 110 to locate commands in this chapter based on their use.
Table 110 Boot Prompt Commands by Usage
Type Command
Command Information ls on page 602
help on page 602
Booting boot on page 593
reset on page 604
autoboot on page 592
File Management dir on page 598
fver on page 601
version on page 606
Boot Profile Management display on page 599
create on page 596
592 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
autoboot Displays or changes the state of the autoboot option. The autoboot
option controls whether a WX switch automatically boots a system image
after initializing the hardware, following a system reset or power cycle.
Syntax — autoboot [ON | on | OFF | off]
ON — Enables the autoboot option.
on — Same effect as ON.
OFF — Disables the autoboot option.
off — Same effect as OFF.
Defaults — The autoboot option is enabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — The following command displays the current setting of the
autoboot option:
boot> autoboot
The autoboot flag is on.
See Also
boot on page 593
Boot Profile
Management, cont.
next on page 603
change on page 595
delete on page 597
Diagnostics diag on page 598
test on page 605
Table 110 Boot Prompt Commands by Usage (continued)
Type Command
boot 593
boot Loads and executes a system image file.
Syntax — boot [BT=type] [DEV=device] [FN=filename]
[HA=ip-addr] [FL=num] [OPT=option] [OPT+=option]
BT=type — Boot type:
c — Compact flash. Boots using nonvolatile storage or a flash card.
n — Network. Boots using a TFTP server.
DEV=device — Location of the system image file:
c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0
d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1
e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot
f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot
boot0 — boot partition 0
boot1 — boot partition 1
FN=filename — System image filename.
HA=ip-addr — Host address (IP address) of a TFTP server. This
parameter applies only when the boot type is n (network).
FL=num — Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass
to the booted system image. Use this parameter only if advised to do
so by 3Com.
OPT=option — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the
booted system image instead of the boot option(s) in the currently
active boot profile. The options temporarily replace the options in the
boot profile. Use this parameter only if advised to do so by 3Com.
OPT+=option — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the
booted system image in addition to the boot option(s) in the currently
active boot profile. The options are appended to the options already in
the boot profile. Use this parameter only if advised to do so by 3Com.
Defaults — The boot settings in the currently active boot profile are used
by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
594 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Usage — If you use an optional parameter, the parameter setting
overrides the setting of the same parameter in the currently active boot
profile. However, the boot profile itself is not changed. To display the
currently active boot profile, use the display command. To change the
currently active boot profile, use the change command.
Examples — The following command loads system image file
WXA30001.Rel from boot partition 1:
boot> boot FN=WXA03001.Rel DEV=boot1
Compact Flash load from boot0:WXA03001.Rel.
unzip: Inflating ramdisk_3.0.1_092304_WX4400 OK
unzip file len 36196930 OK
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004
The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1989, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Detecting hardware...done.
readclock: 2004-9-29 21:45:7.31 UTC
system initialized (3.0.1), starting MSS
Executing update_3
Starting supervisor 3.0.1_092304_WX4400 ...
SNMPD Sep 29 21:45:34.262293 NOTICE SNMPD: SNMP Agent Resident Module Version
16.1.0.0
SNMPD Sep 29 21:45:34.263146 NOTICE SNMPD: Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation.
All rights reserved.
SYS Sep 29 21:45:36.849457 NOTICE Port 1 up 1000 Full Duplex
SYSLOGD Sep 29 21:45:38.857125 ALERT SYSTEM_READY: The system has finished
booting. (cause was "Warm Reboot")
Copyright (c) 2004 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved.
Username:
See Also
change on page 595
display on page 599
change 595
change Changes parameters in the currently active boot profile. (For information
about boot profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — change
Defaults — The default boot type is c (compact flash). The default
filename is default. The default flags setting is 0x00000000 (all flags
disabled) and the default options list is run=nos;boot=0. The default
device setting is the boot partition specified by the most recent set boot
partition command typed at the Enabled level of the CLI, or boot 0 if the
command has never been typed.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After you type the change command, the system interactively
displays the current setting of each parameter and prompts you for the
new setting. When prompted, type the new setting, press Enter to accept
the current setting, or type . (period) to change the setting to its default
value. To back up to the previous parameter, type - (hyphen).
For information about each of the boot parameters you can set, see
display on page 599.
Examples — The following command enters the configuration mode for
the currently active boot profile, changes the device to boot1, and leaves
the other parameters with their current settings:
boot> change
Changing the default configuration is not recommended.
Are you sure that you want to proceed? (y/n)
BOOT TYPE: [c]
DEVICE: [boot0:]boot1
FILENAME: [default]
FLAGS: [0x00000000]
OPTIONS: [run=nos;boot=0]
See Also
boot on page 593
create on page 596
596 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
delete on page 597
display on page 599
next on page 603
create Creates a new boot profile. (For information about boot profiles, see
display on page 599.)
Syntax — create
Defaults — The new boot profile has the same settings as the currently
active boot profile by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX switch can have up to four boot profiles. The boot
profiles are stored in slots, numbered 0 through 3. When you create a
new profile, the system uses the next available slot for the profile. If all
four slots already contain profiles and you try to create a fifth profile, the
switch displays a message advising you to change one of the existing
profiles instead.
To make a new boot profile the currently active boot profile, use the next
command. To change boot parameter settings, use the change
command.
Examples — The following command creates a new boot profile in slot 1
on a WX switch that currently has only one boot profile, in slot 0:
boot> create
BOOT Index: 1
BOOT TYPE: c
DEVICE: boot1:
FILENAME: default
FLAGS: 00000000
OPTIONS: run=nos;boot=0
See Also
change on page 595
delete on page 597
delete 597
display on page 599
next on page 603
delete Removes the currently active boot profile. (For information about boot
profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — delete
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — When you type the delete command, the next-lower
numbered boot profile becomes the active profile. For example, if the
currently active profile is number 3, profile number 2 becomes active after
you type delete to delete profile 3. You cannot delete boot profile 0.
Examples — To remove the currently active boot profile, type the
following command:
boot> delete
BOOT Index: 1
BOOT TYPE: c
DEVICE: boot1:
FILENAME: default
FLAGS: 00000000
OPTIONS: run=nos;boot=0
See Also
change on page 595
create on page 596
display on page 599
next on page 603
598 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
diag Accesses the diagnostic mode.
Syntax — diag
Defaults — The diagnostic mode is disabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — Access to the diagnostic mode requires a password, which is
not user configurable. Use this mode only if advised to do so by 3Com.
dir Displays the boot code and system image files on a WX switch.
Syntax — dir [c: | d: | e: | f: | boot0 | boot1]
c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0 (primary).
d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1 (secondary).
e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.
f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.
boot0 — Boot partition 0.
boot1 — Boot partition 1.
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the system image software versions, use the fver
command. This command does not list the boot code versions. To display
the boot code versions, use the version command.
Examples — The following command displays all the boot code and
system image files on a WX switch:
boot> dir
Internal Compact Flash Directory (Primary):
WXA30001.Rel 8863722 bytes
display 599
Internal Compact Flash Directory (Secondary):
WXA30001.Rel 8862885 bytes
See Also
fver on page 601
version on page 606
display Displays the currently active boot profile. A boot profile is a set of
parameters that a WX switch uses to control the boot process. Each boot
profile contains the following parameters:
Boot type — Either compact flash (local device on the WX switch) or
network (TFTP)
Boot device — Location of the system image file
Filename — System image file
Flags — Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass to
the booted system image.
Options — String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the
booted system image
A WX switch can have up to four boot profiles, numbered 0 through 3.
Only one boot profile can be active at a time. You can create, change,
and delete boot profiles. You also can activate another boot profile in
place of the currently active one.
Syntax — display
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Examples — To display the currently active boot profile, type the
following command at the boot prompt:
boot> display
BOOT Index: 0
BOOT TYPE: c
600 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
DEVICE: boot1:
FILENAME: default
FLAGS: 00000000
OPTIONS: run=nos;boot=0
Table 111 describes the fields in the display.
See Also
change on page 595
create on page 596
delete on page 597
next on page 603
Table 111 Output of display command
Field Description
BOOT Index Boot profile slot, which can be a number from 0 to 3.
BOOT TYPE Boot type:
c — Compact flash. Boots using nonvolatile storage or a
flash card.
n — Network. Boots using a TFTP server.
DEVICE Location of the system image file:
c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0
d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1
e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card
slot
f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash
card slot
boot0 — boot partition 0
boot1 — boot partition 1
FILENAME System image file name.
FLAGS Number representing the bit settings of boot flags to pass to
the booted system image.
OPTIONS String up to 128 bytes of boot options to pass to the booted
system image.
fver 601
fver Displays the version of a system image file installed in a specific location
on a WX switch.
Syntax — fver {c: | d: | e: | f: | boot0: | boot1:}
[filename]
c: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 0 (primary).
d: — Nonvolatile storage area containing boot partition 1 (secondary).
e: — Primary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.
f: — Secondary partition of the flash card in the flash card slot.
boot0: — Boot partition 0.
boot1: — Boot partition 1.
filename — System image filename.
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — To display the image filenames, use the dir command. This
command does not list the boot code versions. To display the boot code
versions, use the version command.
Examples — The following command displays the system image version
installed in boot partition 1:
boot> fver boot1
File boot1:default version is 3.0.1.
See Also
dir on page 598
version on page 606
602 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
help Displays a list of all the boot prompt commands or detailed information
for an individual command.
Syntax — help [command-name]
command-name — Boot prompt command.
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — If you specify a command name, detailed information is
displayed for that command. If you do not specify a command name, all
the boot prompt commands are listed.
Examples — The following command displays detailed information for
the fver command:
boot> help fver
fver Display the version of the specified device:filename.
USAGE: fver [c:file|d:file|e:file|f:file|boot0:file|boot1:file|
boot2:file|boot3:file]
Command to display the version of the compressed image file
associated with the given device:filename.
See Also
ls on page 602
ls Displays a list of the boot prompt commands.
Syntax — ls
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
next 603
Usage — To display help for an individual command, type help followed
by the command name (for example, help boot).
Examples — To display a list of the commands available at the boot
prompt, type the following command:
boot> ls
ls Display a list of all commands and descriptions.
help Display help information for each command.
autoboot Display the state of, enable, or disable the autoboot option.
boot Load and execute an image using the current boot configuration
profile.
change Change the current boot configuration profile.
create Create a new boot configuration profile.
delete Delete the current boot configuration profile.
next Select the next boot configuration profile.
display Display the current boot configuration profile.
dir Display the contents of the specified boot partition.
fver Display the version of the loadable image specified by device:filename.
version Display HW and Bootstrap/Bootloader version information.
reset Reset the system.
test Display the state of, enable, or disable the tests option.
diag Access the diagnostic command CLI.
See Also
help on page 602
next Activates and displays the boot profile in the next boot profile slot. (For
information about boot profiles, see display on page 599.)
Syntax — next
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — A WX switch contains 4 boot profile slots, numbered
0 through 3. This command activates the boot profile in the next slot, in
ascending numerical order. If the currently active slot is 3, the command
activates the boot profile in slot 0.
604 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Examples — To activate the boot profile in the next slot and display the
profile, type the following command:
boot> next
BOOT Index: 0
BOOT TYPE: c
DEVICE: boot1:
FILENAME: testcfg
FLAGS: 00000000
OPTIONS: run=nos;boot=0
See Also
change on page 595
create on page 596
delete on page 597
display on page 599
reset Resets a WX switch’s hardware.
Syntax — reset
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — After resetting the hardware, the reset command attempts to
load a system image file only if other boot settings are configured to do
so.
Examples — To immediately reset the system, type the following
command at the boot prompt:
boot> reset
WX Bootstrap 3.1 Release
Testing Low Memory 1 ............
Testing Low Memory 2 ............
CISTPL_VERS_1: 4.1 <SanDisk> <SDP> <5/3 0.6>
Reset Cause (0x0100) is WARM
test 605
3Com WX-4400 Bootstrap/Bootloader
Version 3.0.2 Release
Compiled on Wed Sep 22 09:18:47 PDT 2004 by
Bootstrap 0 version: 3.1 Active
Bootloader 0 version: 3.0.2 Active
Bootstrap 1 version: 3.1
Bootloader 1 version: 3.0.1
WX-4400 Board Revision: 2.
WX-4400 Controller Revision: 5.
WXA30001.Rel 8863722 bytes
BOOT Index: 0
BOOT TYPE: c
DEVICE: boot0:
FILENAME: default
FLAGS: 00000000
OPTIONS: run=nos;root=md0a
See Also
boot on page 593
test Displays or changes the state of the poweron test flag. The poweron test
flag controls whether a WX performs a set of self tests prior to the boot
process.
Syntax — test [ON | on | OFF | off]
ON — Enables the poweron test flag.
on — Same effect as ON.
OFF — Disables the poweron test flag.
off — Same effect as OFF.
Defaults — The poweron test flag is disabled by default.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
606 CHAPTER 22: BOOT PROMPT COMMANDS
Examples — The following command displays the current setting of the
poweron test flag:
boot> test
The diagnostic execution flag is not set.
See Also
boot on page 593
version Displays version information for a WX switch’s hardware and boot code.
Syntax — version
Defaults — None.
Access — Boot prompt.
History —Introduced in MSS Version 3.0.
Usage — This command does not list the system image file versions
installed in the boot partitions. To display system image file versions, use
the dir or fver command.
Examples — To display hardware and boot code version information,
type the following command at the boot prompt:
boot> version
3Com WX-4400 Bootstrap/Bootloader
Version 3.0.2 Release
Compiled on Wed Sep 22 09:18:47 PDT 2004 by
Bootstrap 0 version: 3.1 Active
Bootloader 0 version: 3.0.2 Active
Bootstrap 1 version: 3.1
Bootloader 1 version: 3.0.1
WX-4400 Board Revision: 2.
WX-4400 Controller Revision: 5.
See Also
dir on page 598
fver on page 601
AOBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR
PRODUCT
Register Your
Product
Warranty and other service benefits start from the date of purchase, so it
is important to register your product quickly to ensure you get full use of
the warranty and other service benefits available to you.
Warranty and other service benefits are enabled through product
registration. Register your product at http://eSupport.3com.com/.
3Com eSupport services are based on accounts that you create or have
authorization to access. First time users must apply for a user name and
password that provides access to a number of eSupport features
including Product Registration, Repair Services, and Service Request. If
you have trouble registering your product, please contact 3Com Global
Services for assistance.
Purchase
Value-Added
Services
To enhance response times or extend warranty benefits, contact 3Com or
your authorized 3Com reseller. Value-added services like 3Com ExpressSM
and GuardianSM can include 24x7 telephone Technical Support, software
upgrades, onsite assistance or advance hardware replacement.
Experienced engineers are available to manage your installation with
minimal disruption to your network. Expert assessment and
implementation services are offered to fill resource gaps and ensure the
success of your networking projects. More information on 3Com
maintenance and Professional Services is available at
http://www.3com.com/
Contact your authorized 3Com reseller or 3Com for a complete list of the
value-added services available in your area.
608 APPENDIX A: OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT
Troubleshoot
Online
You will find support tools posted on the 3Com web site at
http://www.3com.com/
3Com Knowledgebase helps you troubleshoot 3Com products. This
query-based interactive tool is located at
http://knowledgebase.3com.com and contains thousands of technical
solutions written by 3Com support engineers.
Access Software
Downloads
Software Updates are the bug fix / maintenance releases for the version
of software initially purchased with the product. In order to access these
Software Updates you must first register your product on the 3Com web
site at http://eSupport.3com.com/
First time users will need to apply for a user name and password. A link to
software downloads can be found at http://eSupport.3com.com/, or
under the Product Support heading at http://www.3com.com/
Software Upgrades are the software releases that follow the software
version included with your original product. In order to access upgrades
and related documentation you must first purchase a service contract
from 3Com or your reseller.
Telephone
Technical Support
and Repair
To enable telephone support and other service benefits, you must first
register your product at http://eSupport.3com.com/
Warranty and other service benefits start from the date of purchase, so it
is important to register your product quickly to ensure you get full use of
the warranty and other service benefits available to you.
When you contact 3Com for assistance, please have the following
information ready:
Product model name, part number, and serial number
Proof of purchase, if you have not pre-registered your product
A list of system hardware and software, including revision level
Diagnostic error messages
Details about recent configuration changes, if applicable
Contact Us 609
To send a product directly to 3Com for repair, you must first obtain a
return authorization number (RMA). Products sent to 3Com, without
authorization numbers clearly marked on the outside of the package, will
be returned to the sender unopened, at the sender’s expense. If your
product is registered and under warranty, you can obtain an RMA
number online at http://eSupport.3com.com/. First time users will
need to apply for a user name and password.
Contact Us 3Com offers telephone, e-mail and internet access to Technical Support
and repair services. To access these services for your region, use the
appropriate telephone number, URL or e-mail address from the list
below.
Telephone numbers are correct at the time of publication. Find a current
directory of contact information posted on the 3Com web site at
http://csoweb4.3com.com/contactus/
Country Telephone Number Country Telephone Number
Asia, Pacific Rim Telephone Technical Support and Repair
Australia
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
New Zealand
Pakistan
1 800 678 515
800 933 486
+61 2 9424 5179 or
000800 650 1111
001 803 61009
00531 616 439 or
03 3507 5984
1800 801 777
0800 446 398
+61 2 9937 5083
Philippines
P. R . o f C h i n a
Singapore
S. Korea
Taiwan
Thailand
1235 61 266 2602 or
1800 1 888 9469
800 810 3033
800 6161 463
080 333 3308
00801 611 261
001 800 611 2000
You can also obtain support in this region using the following e-mail: apr_technical_support@3com.com
Or request a repair authorization number (RMA) by fax using this number: + 65 543 6348
Europe, Middle East, and Africa Telephone Technical Support and Repair
From anywhere in these
regions, call: +44 (0)1442 435529
From the following countries, you may use the numbers shown:
610 APPENDIX A: OBTAINING SUPPORT FOR YOUR PRODUCT
Austria
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
Italy
01 7956 7124
070 700 770
7010 7289
01080 2783
0825 809 622
01805 404 747
06800 12813
1407 3387
1800 945 3794
199 161346
Luxembourg
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K.
342 0808128
0900 777 7737
815 33 047
00800 441 1357
707 200 123
0800 995 014
9 021 60455
07711 14453
08488 50112
0870 909 3266
You can also obtain support in this region using the following URL:
http://emea.3com.com/support/email.html
Latin America Telephone Technical Support and Repair
Antigua
Argentina
Aruba
Bahamas
Barbados
Belize
Bermuda
Bonaire
Brazil
Cayman
Chile
Colombia
Costa Rica
Curacao
Ecuador
Dominican Republic
1 800 988 2112
0 810 444 3COM
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
52 5 201 0010
1 800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
0800 13 3COM
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
Guatemala
Haiti
Honduras
Jamaica
Martinique
Mexico
Nicaragua
Panama
Paraguay
Peru
Puerto Rico
Salvador
Trinidad and Tobago
Uruguay
Venezuela
Virgin Islands
AT&T +800 998 2112
57 1 657 0888
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
571 657 0888
01 800 849CARE
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
54 11 4894 1888
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
1 800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
AT&T +800 998 2112
57 1 657 0888
You can also obtain support in this region using the following:
Spanish speakers, enter the URL:
http://lat.3com.com/lat/support/form.html
Portuguese speakers, enter the URL:
http://lat.3com.com/br/support/form.html
English speakers in Latin America should send e-mail to:
lat_support_anc@3com.com
US and Canada Telephone Technical Support and Repair
1 800 876 3266
Country Telephone Number Country Telephone Number
INDEX
A
autoboot 592
B
boot 593
C
change 595
clear {ap | dap} radio 272
clear accounting 201
clear authentication admin 202
clear authentication console 203
clear authentication dot1x 204
clear authentication last-resort 205
clear authentication mac 205
clear authentication proxy 206
clear authentication web 207
clear banner motd 38
clear boot config 541
clear dap 62
clear dot1x max-req 479
clear dot1x port-control 479
clear dot1x quiet-period 480
clear dot1x reauth-max 481
clear dot1x reauth-period 481
clear dot1x timeout auth-server 482
clear dot1x timeout supplicant 482
clear dot1x tx-period 483
clear fdb 96
clear history 38
clear igmp statistics 400
clear interface 115
clear ip alias 116
clear ip dns domain 117
clear ip dns server 117
clear ip route 118
clear ip telnet 119
clear location policy 208
clear log 581
clear log buffer 581
clear log server 581
clear log trace 562
clear mac-user 209
clear mac-user attr 209
clear mac-user group 210
clear mac-usergroup 211
clear mac-usergroup attr 212
clear mobility-domain 262
clear mobility-domain member 262
clear mobility-profile 213
clear ntp server 119
clear ntp update-interval 120
clear port counters 63
clear port name 64
clear port type 65
clear port-group 63
clear radio-profile 274
clear radius 464
clear radius client system-ip 465
clear radius proxy client 466
clear radius proxy port 466
clear radius server 467
clear rfdetect attack-list 512
clear rfdetect black-list 513
clear rfdetect countermeasures mac 513
clear rfdetect ignore 513
clear rfdetect ssid-list 514
clear rfdetect vendor-list 515
clear security acl 424
clear security acl map 425
clear server group 467
clear server group load-balance 467
clear service-profile 275, 276
clear sessions 497
clear sessions network 498
clear snmp notify target 121
clear snmp profile 122
clear snmp trap receiver 121
clear snmp usm 122
clear snoop 570
clear snoop map 570
clear spantree portcost 372
clear spantree portpri 373
clear spantree portvlancost 373
clear spantree portvlanpri 374
612 INDEX
clear spantree statistics 375
clear summertime 123
clear system 39
clear system countrycode 39
clear system ip-address 39, 124
clear system location 40
clear system name 39
clear timezone 124
clear trace 562
clear user 213
clear user attr 214
clear user group 215
clear usergroup 215
clear usergroup attr 216
clear vlan 97
commit security acl 427
copy 542
create 596
crypto certificate 449
crypto certificate admin 449
crypto certificate eap 449
crypto generate key 451
crypto generate request 452
crypto generate request admin 452
crypto generate request eap 452
crypto generate self-signed 454
crypto generate self-signed admin 454
crypto generate self-signed eap 454
crypto otp 456
crypto otp admin 456
crypto otp eap 456
crypto pkcs12 457
crypto pkcs12 admin 457
crypto pkcs12 eap 457
D
delete 544, 597
diag 598
dir 545, 598
disable 33
display 599
display {ap | dap} config 277
display {ap | dap} counters 280
display {ap | dap} etherstats 284
display {ap | dap} group 285
display {ap | dap} qos-stats 282
display {ap | dap} status 287
display aaa 217
display accounting statistics 220
display arp 125
display auto-tune attributes 290
display auto-tune neighbors 292
display banner motd 40
display base-information 41
display boot 547
display config 548
display crypto ca-certificate 459
display crypto certificate 460
display crypto key ssh 461
display dap connection 294
display dap global 295
display dap unconfigured 297
display dhcp-client 182
display dhcp-server 183
display dot1x 483
display fdb 98
display fdb agingtime 101
display fdb count 101
display igmp 400
display igmp mrouter 404
display igmp querier 405
display igmp receiver-table 407
display igmp statistics 409
display interface 126
display ip alias 127
display ip dns 128
display ip https 129
display ip route 131
display ip telnet 133
display license 42
display location policy 222
display log buffer 582
display log config 584
display log trace 585
display mobility-domain config 263
display mobility-domain status 263
display mobility-profile 222
display ntp 134
display ntp on page 163 121
display port counters 66
display port poe 68
display port status 70
display port-group 67
display radio-profile 298
display rfdetect attack-list 534
display rfdetect black-list 535
display rfdetect clients 535
display rfdetect countermeasures 517
display rfdetect counters 515
display rfdetect data 518
display rfdetect ignore 520
display rfdetect mobility-domain 521
display rfdetect ssid-list 525
display rfdetect vendor-list 525
display rfdetect visible 526
INDEX 613
display roaming station 102
display roaming vlan 104
display security acl 429
display security acl dscp 428
display security acl editbuffer 429
display security acl hits 430
display security acl info 431
display security acl map 432
display security acl resource-usage 433
display service-profile 302
display sessions 500
display sessions network 503
display snmp community 186
display snmp configuration 136
display snmp counters 187
display snmp notify profile 188
display snmp notify target 189
display snmp status 191
display snmp usm 193
display snoop 576
display snoop info 577
display snoop map 577
display snoop stats 578
display spantree 376
display spantree backbonefast 378
display spantree blockedports 379
display spantree portfast 380
display spantree portvlancost 381
display spantree statistics 381
display spantree uplinkfast 387
display summertime 138
display system 42
display timedate 138
display timezone 139
display trace 563
display tunnel 105
display version 549
display vlan config 106
F
fver 601
H
help 45, 602
history 46
hit-sample-rate 437
L
load config 551
ls 602
M
mkdir 553
monitor port counters 72
N
next 603
P
ping 140
Q
quit 34
R
reset 604
reset {ap | dap} 305
reset port 77
reset system 554
rmdir 556
rollback security acl 438
S
save config 557
save trace 564
set {ap | dap} bias 310
set {ap | dap} blink 311, 313
set {ap | dap} name 315
set {ap | dap} radio antennatype 315
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune max-power 317
set {ap | dap} radio auto-tune
max-retransmissions 318
set {ap | dap} radio channel 320
set {ap | dap} radio min-client-rate 321
set {ap | dap} radio mode 323
set {ap | dap} radio radio-profile 324
set {ap | dap} radio tx-power 325
set {ap | dap} upgrade-firmware 328
set accounting {admin | console} 223
set accounting {dot1x | mac | web} 224
set arp 141
set arp agingtime 142
set authentication admin 226
set authentication console 228
set authentication dot1x 230
set authentication last-resort 234
set authentication mac 236
set authentication proxy 238
614 INDEX
set authentication web 239
set auto-config 46
set banner motd 49
set boot configuration-file 558, 559
set confirm 50
set dap 77
set dap auto 306
set dap auto mode 308
set dap auto radiotype 309
set dap fingerprint 312
set dap security 326
set dot1x authcontrol 486
set dot1x key-tx 488
set dot1x max-req 489
set dot1x port-control 490
set dot1x quiet-period 491
set dot1x reauth 491
set dot1x reauth-max 492
set dot1x reauth-period 493
set dot1x timeout auth-server 493
set dot1x timeout supplicant 494
set dot1x tx-period 494
set dot1x wep-rekey 495
set dot1x wep-rekey-period 496
set enablepass 35
set fdb 107
set fdb agingtime 108
set igmp mrsol 414
set igmp mrsol mrsi 414
set igmp qri 418
set igmp querier 419
set igmp receiver 419
set igmp rv 420
set interface 143
set interface dhcp-client 144
set interface dhcp-server 145
set interface status 146
set ip alias 147
set ip dns 147
set ip dns domain 148
set ip dns server 149
set ip https server 150
set ip route 150
set ip snmp server 152
set ip ssh 153
set ip ssh absolute-timeout 154
set ip ssh idle-timeout 155
set ip ssh server 155
set ip telnet 156
set ip telnet server 157
set length 51
set license 52
set location policy 241
set log 586
set log buffer 586
set log console 586
set log current 586
set log server 586
set log sessions 586
set log trace 586
set log trace mbytes 589
set mac-user 245
set mac-user attr 246
set mac-usergroup attr 252
set mobility profile 253
set mobility-domain member 265
set mobility-domain mode member seed-ip 266
set mobility-domain mode seed domain-name 267
set mobility-profile mode 255
set ntp 158
set ntp server 158
set ntp update-interval 159
set port 80
set port name 82
set port negotiation 83
set port poe 84
set port preference 85
set port speed 85
set port trap 86
set port type ap 87
set port type wired-auth 91
set port-group 81
set prompt 53
set radio-profile active-scan 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-config 330
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-holddown 331
set radio-profile auto-tune channel-interval 332
set radio-profile auto-tune power-backoff-timer 333
set radio-profile auto-tune power-config 334
set radio-profile auto-tune power-interval 335
set radio-profile beacon-interval 329, 336
set radio-profile countermeasures 337
set radio-profile dtim-interval 338
set radio-profile frag-threshold 339
set radio-profile long-retry 339
set radio-profile max-rx-lifetime 340
set radio-profile max-tx-lifetime 341
set radio-profile mode 342
set radio-profile preamble-length 345
set radio-profile rts-threshold 346
set radio-profile service-profile 346
set radio-profile short-retry 350
set radio-profile wmm 350
set radius 468
set radius client system-ip 469
set radius deadtime 468
INDEX 615
set radius key 468
set radius proxy client 470
set radius proxy port 471
set radius retransmit 468
set radius server 472
set radius timeout 468
set rfdetect active-scan 528
set rfdetect attack-list 528
set rfdetect black-list 529
set rfdetect countermeasures 530
set rfdetect countermeasures mac 530
set rfdetect ignore 530
set rfdetect log 531
set rfdetect signature 532
set rfdetect ssid-list 532
set rfdetect vendor-list 533
set security acl 439
set security acl ip icmp 439
set security acl ip ip 439
set security acl ip tcp 439
set security acl ip udp 439
set security acl map 444
set server group 474
set server group load-balance 475
set service-profile auth-dot1x 351
set service-profile auth-fallthru 352
set service-profile auth-psk 354
set service-profile beacon 355
set service-profile cipher-ccmp 356
set service-profile cipher-tkip 357
set service-profile cipher-wep104 358
set service-profile cipher-wep40 359
set service-profile psk-phrase 360
set service-profile psk-raw 361
set service-profile rsn-ie 362
set service-profile shared-key-auth 363
set service-profile ssid-name 363
set service-profile ssid-type 364
set service-profile tkip-mc-time 365
set service-profile web-aaa-form url 366
set service-profile wep active-multicast-index 367
set service-profile wep active-unicast-index 368
set service-profile wep key-index 369
set service-profile wpa-ie 370
set snmp community 160
set snmp notify target 162
set snmp profile 167
set snmp protocol 172
set snmp security 173
set snmp trap 167
set snmp trap receiver 162
set snmp usm 174
set snoop 571
set snoop map 574
set snoop mode 575
set spantree 388
set spantree backbonefast 389
set spantree fwddelay 390
set spantree hello 390
set spantree maxage 391
set spantree portcost 392
set spantree portfast 393
set spantree portpri 394
set spantree portvlancost 395
set spantree portvlanpri 396
set spantree priority 397
set spantree uplinkfast 397
set summertime 177
set system contact 54
set system countrycode 54
set system ip-address 57, 179
set system location 58
set system name 58
set timedate 180
set timezone 181
set trace authentication 564
set trace authentication mac-addr 564
set trace authentication port 564
set trace authentication user 564
set trace authorization 565
set trace authorization mac-addr 565
set trace authorization port 565
set trace authorization user 565
set trace dot1x 566
set trace dot1x mac-addr 566
set trace dot1x port 566
set trace dot1x user 566
set trace sm 567
set trace sm mac-addr 567
set trace sm port 567
set trace sm user 567
set user 256
set user attr 257
set user group 258
set user password 256
set usergroup 259
set usergroup attr 259
set vlan name 109
set vlan port 110
set vlan tunnel-affinity 111
set web-aaa 260
T
telnet 195
test 605
616 INDEX
traceroute 196
V
version 606

Navigation menu